•FROM -THE- LIBRARY- OF- A, W, Ryder Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/firstlatinbookdeOOcomsrich FIRST LATIN BOOK DESIGNED AS A MANUAL OF PROGRESSIVE EXERCISES AND SYSTEMATIC DRILL IN THE ELEMENTS OF LATIN AND INTRODUCTORY TO CESAR'S COMMENTARIES ON THE GALLIC WAR ■ C. BY D. Y. COMSTOCK, M.A. PRINCIPAL OP ST. JOHNSBURY ACADEMY, VERMONT. ALLYN AND BACON JlBoston anJJ Cljtcago at Copyright, 1883, By John Allyn. ■University Press: John Wilson and Son, Cambridge. PREFACE. The design of this book is to afford a thorough preparation for the reading of Caesar's Commentaries on the Gallic War. It is a very common experience on the part of teachers to find, after several months or a year have been spent in the study of the elements of Latin, that, on beginning to read some Latin author, certain difficulties present themselves at the very outset and increase with every onward step. Some of the sources of these difficulties are : — 1. In nine cases out of ten, the pupil begins the study of Latin with no definite knowledge of his own language, even in the simplest points of sentence structure. As has been said, " he does not appreciate the relations of things." 2. The beginner has been taught to translate isolated sen- tences, which are never combined into connected narrative. Fragments of sentences, phrases, oblique cases of nouns and pronouns, all absolutely meaningless in themselves, have consti- tuted a large portion of his fundamental work. 3. His elementary book has lacked logical method. Many peculiarities of the Latin language, which, in their proper place, would be shorn of all difficulty, and would appear as reasonable constructions, are presented to the beginner too early in his Latin study. These not only demand a needless amount of time and labor, but also tend to discouraci^e the vouns: student. IV PREFACE. A teacher of experience has said : " By a strange inversion we supply an advanced student with all the light he can have, but give a beginner, at best, a meagre abridgment of the same information." In this manual an attempt has been made to present solutions of some of the difficulties which beset the young student of Latin, and to prepare him for an intelligent study of Caesar. The general plan of the book is as follows : — 1. It opens with a short and simply wordqd review of Eng- lish Etymology and Analysis. This may be taken at the outset as a preparation for the Latin Lessons, or left for consul- tation and comparison as constructions are presented in Latin which have parallels in English. At the end of this review are placed such English idioms and peculiarities in the use of Cases as have similar or analogous uses in Latin. 2. Elementary principles and definitions of Latin Ety- mology form the next chapter. These cover all essential points from the Alphabet to the First Declension of Nouns. They are briefly and clearly stated, with an explanation of every topic (such as Quantity) which might present a difficulty to the be- ginner. All statements are excluded which do not have a direct bearing upon the end in view, — the mastery of the essentials. 3. The Latin Lessons, beginning with the First Declension, follow. These contain references to Grammars, notes (explained below), test-questions, and a double exercise, — first, of transla- tion from Latin into English ; and secondly, from English into Latin. There is no vocabulary printed on the same page as the Lesson, thus removing from the pupil the temptation to make in the recitation-room the preparation that should have been made beforehand. To avoid, however, any possible difficulty or confusion arising from the necessity of consulting a general vocabulary at the outset, a special vocabulary for each of the first twenty-nine Lessons is placed at the end of the book. PREFACE. V The Simple Sentence is introduced as early as possible, the Present Indicative of a few simple verbs being employed. A special attempt has been made to present the various uses of the Cases, Verb, etc., in the order in which their force and peculiarities will be best appreciated by the young student. The uses of the Subjunctive have been presented in a simple and natural order of development. Particular attention has been bestowed on the constructions of Indirect Discourse, and carefully graded material has been given for translation and drill. The final Lessons contain a variety of selections for transla- tion into Latin, including a large number of sentences of differ- ent degrees of difficulty, English translations from Caesar, etc. 4. Several pages of Iiatin Narrative for translation, taken from the Commentaries on the Gallic War, are then given. These are accompanied by notes and explanations. 5. The Notes follow. These have been prepared with great care, and give a compact and complete outline of all essential principles of Latin Etymology and Syntax, with explanation of difficult constructions, useful hints on translation, and illus- trative examples when necessary. Eeferences are made to these Notes in every Lesson ; and as they are arranged in the usual grammatical order, they will form a convenient outline for fre- quent review. 6. An Appendix, containing all the essential forms of Inflection, is added, that the book may serve as a complete manual for the beginner ; if, however, the instructor prefer that these forms should be learned from a Grammar, the references to the Latin Grammars of Allen and Greenough, Bennett, and Harkness, given in connection with the Lessons, will furnish the same information. 7. At the end of the book are given Special Vocabularies and Examples for the first twenty -nine Lessons (already re- VI PREFACE. ferred to) and a complete General Vocabulary, Latin-English and English-Latin. In the preparation of this manual, the author has been greatly aided by the advice and suggestions of many friends, whose experience in the same and kindred departments of instruction has made them welcome counsellors ; to all such he desires to return sincere thanks. DAVID Y. COMSTOCK. Phillips Academy, Andover, Mass., June 30, 1883. TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE Eeview of English Grammar 1 Introduction to the Latin Lessons 17 LATIN LESSONS. LESSON I. Nouns : First Declension 27 II. Verbs ; The Simple Sentence ; Subject" Nominativh 28 III. Nouns : Second Declension 29 Direct Object. IV. Nouns : Second Declension (continued) ; Adjectives : First and Second Declensions 30 Agreement of Adjectives. V. Apposition; Genitive Case 31 Genitive denoting Possession. VI. Predicate Noun and Adjective 32 Sum : Present Indicative. VII. Verbs : Definitions ; First Conjugation [continued) . 33 VIII. Verbs : Principal Parts and Stems 35 Declension of dea and filia. IX. Verbs {continued) ; Dative Case 36 Dative of Indirect Object. X. Verbs : First Conjugation ; Subjunctive Mode . . 37 XL First Conjugation : Imperative Mode ; Vocative Case 38 Second Declension : filius and Proper Names in ius. XII. First Conjugation : Infinitives, Participles, Gerund, Supine 39 XIII. Declension of Deus ; Irregular Adjectives : Geni- tive in ius, Dative in i . 41 XIV. Nouns: Third Declension; Elementary Practice . 42 vm TABLE OF CONTENTS. LESSON PAGB XV. Nouns : Third Declension ; General Principles ; Gender 43 XVI. Nouns : Third Declension ; Consonant-Stems . . 44 XVII. Nouns : Third Declension ; Vowel-Stems ... 46 XVIII. The Verb Sum : General Practice 47 XIX. The Verb Possum ; Use of the Infinitive ... 48 Infinitive as Complement. XX. The Infinitive with a Subject Accusative . . 49 XXI. Use of the Subjunctive Mode 50 XXII. First Conjugation : Passive Voice ; Ablative Case 52 Ablative of Means and Agent. XXIII. First Conjugation: Passive Voice;. Ablative Case 53 Ablative of Separation. XXIV. First Conjugation: Subjunctive Passive ... 55 XXV. First Conjugation : Passive Voice : Imperative, Infinitives, Participles 56 XXVI. Adjectives : Third Declension 57 XXVII. Adjectives: Third Declension (continued) . . 58 Subjunctive expressing a Command. XXVIII. Adjectives : Regular Comparison 60 Declension of Comparatives. XXIX. Adjectives : Irregular Comparison ; Adverbs . . 61 XXX. Verbs : Second Conjugation 62 XXXI. General Review 64 XXXII. Deponent Verbs : First and Second Conjugations 65 XXXIII. Two Accusatives 66 XXXIV. Adjectives : Irregular Comparison 67 Dative with Adjectives. XXXV. Nouns : Fourth Declension 69 Declension of domus. XXXVI. Nouns : Fifth Declension 70 Compound Nouns. XXXVII. Verbs : Third Conjugation : Active Voice ... 71 XXXVIII. Verbs : Third Conjugation : Passive Voice . . 72 XXXIX. Prepositions; Place 74 XL. Deponent Verbs : Third Conjugation 75 Ablative of Cause ; Subjunctive of Purpose. XLI. Verbs: Fourth Conjugation 77 Adjectives used as Nouns. XLII. Deponent Verbs : Fourth Conjugation .... 78 Ablative with Deponent Verbs. TABLE OF CONTENTS. IX LESSON XLIII. XLIV. XLV. XLVI. XL VII. XLVIII. XLIX. L. LI. LII. LIII. LIV. LV. LVI. LVIL LYIII. LIX. LX. LXI. LXII. LXIII. LXIV. LXV. LXVI. LXVII. LXVIII. PAGE Third Conjugation: Verbs in io. . . . . . . . 79 Tenses of the Infinitive. Participles 81 Numeral Adjectives 82 Accusative of Time ; Ablative of Time. Accusative of Extent ; Partitive Genitive ... 84 Accusative : Adverbial Uses 85 Subjunctive Mode : Purpose, Command, Exhorta- tion 87 Correlatives. Ablative of Manner, Accompaniment, Specifica- tion 88 Pronouns : Personal, Reflexive, Possessive ... 90 Pronouns : Demonstrative 91 Pronouns : Relative 92 Pronouns : Interrogative ; Interrogative Sentences 94 Single Questions. Pronouns : Indefinite 95 Double Questions. Place : Exceptions 97 Irregular Veebs : Fero 98 Genitive after sum ; Infinitive as Subject. Dative with Compound Verbs 100 Irregular Verbs : E6 101 Conditional Sentences. Ablative Absolute 103 Periphrastic Conjugations 104 Dative of Agent. Irregular Verbs : Fio 106 Subjunctive expressing a "Wish. Irregular Verbs : Volo and its Compounds . . . 107 Defective Verbs 109 Objective Genitive. Impersonal Verbs 110 Subjunctive of Result; Substantive Clauses . . Ill Dative with Intransitive Verbs ; Intransitive Verbs used in the Passive . 113 Historical Present ; Sequence of Tenses. Dative of Possession; Two Datives 114 Semi-Deponent Verbs. Ablative with Comparatives ; Ablative denoting Measure of Difference 110 X TABLE OF CONTENTS. LESSON ^AGB LXIX. Causal Clauses 117 Kelative Pronoun used for a Demonstrative. LXX. Uses of the Ablative Case 119 (1) Denoting Quality ; (2) with Adjectives ; (3) denoting Price. LXXI. Concessive Clauses 120 Historical Infinitive. LXXII. Temporal Clauses 121 LXXIII. Gerund and Gerundive 123 LXXIV. Supine 125 LXXV. Indirect Discourse: Questions 126 LXXVI. Indirect Discourse : Commands 128 General Laws of Modes and Tenses. LXXVII. Indirect Discourse : General Practice . . . 129 LXXVIII. Indirect Discourse ; General Practice .... 130 Miscellaneous Sentences for Translation into Latin . . 132 Caesar's History of the Gallic War: Book I. — Chapters 1-13 136 References and Explanations on the History of the Gallic War 143 NOTES. — THE ESSENTIALS OF LATIN GRAMMAR: — Etymology 149 Syntax 188 Order of "Words in a Latin Sentence . . 229 General Facts and Useful Hints .... 230 Hints on Translation 232 APPENDIX, — Forms of Declension, Conjugation, etc. . . 236 SPECIAL VOCABULARIES AND EXAMPLES 259 GENERAL VOCABULARY:— Latin-English 269 English-Latin 295 INDEX . 302 REVIEW OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE NUMBEES IN PAEENTHESES EEEER TO SECTIONS OF THIS EEVIEW. ETYMOLOGY. 1. Etymology treats of the Parts of Speech and their changes of form and meaning. 2. There are eight Parts of Speech : Noun (or Substantive), Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, ConjunC' tion, Interjection, 3. A Noun (Latin nomen, name), or Substantive, is the^ame of a person or object. a. A Common Noun is the name of any person or object of a general class ; as, cify, man. h. A Proper Noun is the name of a particular person or object ; as, Rome, Caesar. c. A Verbal Noun has the general use of a noun, but a verbal form and force ; as. Seeing is believing ; To be is better than to seem ; He gained his promotion by doing his duty faithfully. d. A Collective Noun, though singular in form, denotes a group of persons or objects ; as, crowd, army, society, legion. 4. To nouns belong Gender, Person, Number, Case. 5. Gender distinguishes sex. Names of males are Masculine ; of females. Feminine ; of objects neither male nor female. Neuter. Some nouns may denote either sex ; as, pupil, child. These are said to be of the Common Gender. 6. Nouns have three Persons, The First Person denotes the speaker ; as, /, your general, command you. The Second Person denotes the person or thing addressed; as. Boys, be attentive. The Third Person denotes the person or thing spoken of; as, Haste makes waste. 7. Number shows how many are meant. The Singular Number denotes but one ; the Plural, more than one. 1 2 ' REVIEW OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. ' •* '' 8.*' Cdise shows tte relation of a Noun or Pronoun to other words. A change of relation requires a change of case. There are four cases, — the Nominative, the Possessive, the Objective, and the Independent. a. The Nominative Case denotes the relation of a Subject to its Verb, and answers the question Who ? or What ? h. The JPossessive Case denotes the relation of possession, and answers the question Whose ? c. The Objective Case^ denotes the relation of a Direct Object (39, a) to the Transitive Verb which governs it, and answers the question Whom ? or What ? It is also used with a Preposition to form a Phrase (43) ; as, Men gain wealth by industry. d. The Independent Case, or, as it is sometimes called, the Case Absolute, has no dependence on any other word. Its most common uses are : (1) as the Case of Address ; f as. Soldiers, we have conquered ; (2) with Participles, forming a contracted clause ; as. The guard having been killed, the prisoner escaped (that is, since, or when he had been killed). 9. An Adjective limits or describes a Noun or the equivalent of a Noun ; as, Honest men prosper ; To err (error) is human, to forgive (forgiveness) is divine ; That he should come was strange. a. Adjectives are sometimes used as Nouns, the words with which they agree being understood. When thus used, they are called Pronominal Adjectives, that is, used for a Noun (11) ; as. The wise grow in wisdom ; The first is my friend, but the second I never saw before. b. Adjectives denoting number are called Numeral Adjectives. They are either Cardinal, telling how many (as, one, twenty), or Ordinal, telling which one in order (as, sixth, third). 10. Comparison of Adjectives is a change in form by which they express different degrees of quality. There are three degrees of comparison : the Positive, denoting a quality in its simple state; as, wise, good; the Comparative, denoting a higher or lower degree than the Positive ; as, wiser, better, less ; the Superlative, denoting the highest or lowest degree of the quahty ; as, wisest, best, least. Adjectives are compared in three ways : (1) Regularly, by adding r or er to the Positive for the Comparative, and st or est for the ♦ The peculiar uses of the Objective Case are given in section 54, \ In Latin, the Vocative Case (from t^oco, I call) REVIEW OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 3 Superlative, as, tall^ taller^ tallest ; (2) Irregularly, as, good^ better, best ; (3) By using the Adverbs more and mos*, or less and leasts with the Positive. 11. A Pronoun (Latin pro, for, and nomen, name) is a word used for a noun, and, like a noun, has Gender, Person, Number, Case* Pronouns are either Personal, Relative, or Interrogative. a. A Personal Pronoun indicates, by its form, the person speaking, the person addressed, and the person spoken of. The Personal Pronouns are I, you (sometimes thou), he, she, it, and their plural forms, we, you (sometimes ye), they, b. A Relative Pronoun refers to a preceding substantive (or its equivalent), called the Antecedent, and connects clauses. The Antecedent may be a Noun, or any word, or collection of words, used as a Noun ; as. The man who (Pronoun and con- nective) came to see me was my friend ; We climbed the moun^ tain, which was a dangerous feat. In the last example, We climbed the mountain is the antecedent of which, the Relative Pronoun. The Helative Pronouns are who, which, tvJiat, that. After suck and same, as is often used as a Relative Pronoun. c. An Interrogative Pronoun asks a question ; as. What did you say ? The list is who, which, what, 12. A Verh expresses being, action, or state; as, am, run, sleep. A Verb is either Transitive, acting on a Direct Object (39, a) ; as, Brutus killed his friend ; or Intransitive, not acting on a Direct Object. The word transitive means passing over ; that is, the action passes over from the actor to the object receiving the action. 13. To verbs belong Voice, Mode, Tense, Number, Person, 14. There are two Voices, Active and Passive. The Active repre- sents some person or thing as existing or acting ; as. He is praising. The Passive represents some person or thing as acted upon ; as. We are praised ; They are loved ; He is conquered. 15. Mode (Lathi modus, manner) shows how a person regards an action, etc., and therefore how he states it. '' The Mode of a verb shows the mood of the speaker." a. The Indicative Mode states a fact, or asks a question ; as. He comes ; Has he come ? h. The Potential Mode expresses liberty, ability, or necessity. It employs, as Auxiliary verbs (25), may, can, must, might, could, would, should ; as, I may go ; We must obey. 4 EEYIEW OF ENGLISH GEAMMAR. c. The Subjunctive Mode states sometliing as possible (or uneer- tain) or impossible; as, If I were general; If he should come. More will be said of this mode when the subject of Tense is reached (19). d. The Imperative Mode commands, exhorts, or entreats; as. Soldiers, advance ; Friend, renounce your evil habits ; Help me. e. The Infinitive Mode is not limited, as the other modes are, in respect to person or number; hence its name (infinite, un- limited). The other modes are called finite (i. e. limited in person and number). The Infinitive Mode does not state any- thing. It is often used as a Verbal Noun ; as, To be is better than to seem. 16. Tense is a distinction of time. Time is present, past, oy future. An act may be thought of, in an^ time, as I. Indefinite ; as, I wrote (whenever I wished). II. Imperfect ; as, I was writing (action not completed) . III. Completed; as, I have written (the writing is now finished). 17. The Indicative Mode is the only one in which the tenses denote proper distinctions of time. In the other modes, the same names are applied to the tenses, but, in most instances, these names give no idea of the real time thought of. That this fact may be more clearly under- stood, the tenses of each mode will be described separately. a. The following table shows for the Indicative Mode, (1) The ^ divisions of time ; (2) How the action may be stated in connec- tion with each ; (3) Examples ; (4) Names whicb we usually give to the tenses : — Time. Action stated as Examples. - Common Names. Present. ■ Past. Futwe. / Indefinite, I give (whenever I please). ) ) Imperfect, I am giving (action 7iot completed). J (^ Completed, I have given (action now completed). i ■^''^*^^**^ /Indefinite, I gave (whenever I pleased). ) ) Imperfect, I was giving (action not completed,). j I Completed, I had given (action completed in past ) Past ^ time). ) Perfect, /Indefinite, I shall give (at any time). X-ku -t J Imperfect, I sliall be giving (action not completed). ) j Completed, I shall have given (action completed in the ) future ^ future). 3 Perfect, EEVIEW OF ENGLISH GKAMMAR. 5 h. The Imperfect forms (present, past, and future) are often called progressive, because they denote the act or state as going on. The Indefinite forms (present and past) are often expressed in statement SyWiih. do and did, and these are called emphatiCf because they state more positively than do the ordinary forms. In questions, these words do not give this force ; as, Did you not visit the sick man ? Yes, I did visit him. Note. We often use forms which might be misleading if not studied in connection with another thought. In the sentence, ''When he comes, I shall welcome him," comes represents future time. Also, in the sentence, "If I do not find my trunk before Tuesday, I shall go without it," do find is equivalent to shall have found. The knowledge of this fact is of great value in expressing many English sentences in Latin, since in that language the distinctions of tense are more carefully observed. 18. The tenses of the JPotential Mode are four, — the Present, Past, Present Perfect, Past Perfect. These names, however, are of little value in indicating distinction of time, which, in very many cases, can be decided only by the sense. Some of these peculiar uses arise from the lack of a Future and Future Perfect. The Past Perfect is more accurate in its use than any of the others. These tenses employ the following Auxiliary Verbs (25) : — a. May, can, must, to form the Present. b. Might, could, would, should, to form the Past. c. May {can, must) hai^e, to form the Present Perfect. d. Might (could, would, should) have, to form the Past Per- fect. The following examples show what has already been stated, — that the sense, and not the name of the tense, must often decide the time denoted by the tenses of the Potential Mode : — He ma^/ he here {now, or to-morrow) ; I must go (next year) ; We can do that (to-day, or next week) ; The general said that the town must be taken (at that time) ; He may have been here yesterday ; The soldiers may have taken the town before we can reach it. Remark. The above examples show that the Potential Mode has, in sense if not in form, six tenses; the Present being used when a Future is required, and the Present Perfect when a Future Perfect is needed. 6 REVIEW OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 19. The Subjunctive Mode * has only one form, in common use, that is unlike the tense-forms of the Indicative and Potential. That form is were, in the First and Third Persons Singular, where the Indicative has was; as, If I were you; If he were industrious. It borrows its other tense-forms from the Indicative and Potential. In the Subjunctive, as in the Potential, the sense, and not the name of the tense, must often decide the time (18). According to the definition given in section 15, ^, the Subjunctive states something as possible (or douhtfuT) or impossible. Eour Subjunctive tense-forms will be described, a thorough knowl- edge of which will be of very great value to the student when he shall translate Latin sentences containing the same thoughts. These forms denote action as : (1) Puture ; (2) Future Perfect ; (3) Present ; (4) Past. These are chosen, not because tliey are the onl^ tenses of the Subjunctive, but because they best illustrate the mode, or wa^, of ex- pressing a thought in the Subjunctive Mode. The following will make this, clear : — a. Future Fossibility (or Doubt). 1. If he should come to-morrow, I would be glad. 2. If he should {have) come before next Thurs- day, he could and would save the prisoner's life. 'Present. 1. If I tcere richer, I should be contented. 2. If you loved your country, you would be fighting for it. 3. If he saw the snake, he would be afraid. Past. If he had been general, he would have managed aifairs more wisely. b. Impossibility, Remark. The student will notice that (under h) a tense past in form is used to state something as impossible in present time. In the following sentences, tell, — (1) What time is thought of; (2) What * To Teachers. No attempt has here been made to follow the system ordinarily adopted in school grammars. An excellent authority remarks, "The Subjunctive is evidently passing out of use " (i. e. as a for^n of the language), and it is important that a student should be so trained in the use of language that he may be able to recognize in the Subjunctive a medium of thought; and this is the only purpose that the author has in presenting this view of the mode. The teacher may prefer to omit this section until the Latin Sub- junctive is studied. It will aid the student greatly to study the illustrative sentences given here; and the teacher should emphasize the fact that correct speech in English requires certain forms to express certain thoughts. REVIEW OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 7 each sentence means (that is, whether something is stated as possible or impos- sible). Some of these sentences may require to be changed in form before the thought can be clearly seen : — 1. Were he to confess his fault, he would be forgiven. 2. Were he here, he would be among friends. 3. If thy brother trespass against thee, rebuke him ; and if he repent, forgive him. 4. If we should not find the house, I 'd be in despair. 5. If the doctor had come yesterday, the sick man would be better to-day. 6. If thou hadst been here, my brother had not died. 7. Were he more diligent, he would be more successful. 20. The Imperative Mode has but one tense-form (the Present), and one person (the Second). This tense denotes the time of giving a command; the time of obeying is future; as, Soldiers, when you attack (shall attack) the enemy to-morrow, advance fearlessly. A direct com- mand can be expressed in the Second Person only. Such forms ab "Let me go," "Let him beware," express an entreaty^ exhortation, warning, etc. Really, let is in the Imperative, and go in the Infinitive (56, Remark); but, by constant use, let has become a mere sign of an exhortation, warning, etc. 21. The Infinitive Mode has two tenses, the Present and the Fer- feet ; as, to see, to have seen, to he struck, to have been struck. Notice that the time of these tenses depends on the time of the prin- cipal verb. The Present represents an event as taking place at the time of the principal verb ; as, I wish (shall wish, had wished) to go. The Perfect represents an event as completed at, or before, the time of tlie principal verb ; as. He is said (was said, will have been said) to have heard. 22. The Number and Person of a Verb are the same as those of its Subject. 23. A Participle is a Verbal Adjective ; that is, it has the general meaning of a Verb, but, like an Adjective, it modifies a Noun or a Pro- noun. Participles are used in both voices, and in three tenses. Active Participles : — a. The Present Participle ends in ing ; as. The boy, seeing the danger, flees ; He, hearing the sound, arose. b. The Past Participle differs from tlie others in that it has no strictly adjective use, but is only used in forming compound tenses in the Active ; as, I have seen ; He had heard. e. The Perfect Participle ; as. Having seen his friends, he returned ; Having learned the lesson, he will recite. 8 REVIEW OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. Passive Participles : — . d. The Present Participle, ending in d or edf unless tlie verb is irregular (24). Sometimes, however, it is preceded by being; as. The soldier falls (or fell), {being) severely wounded. e. The Past Participle, used in the Passive as the same participle is employed in the Active, but with more adjective force ; as. He has been injured. /. The Perfect Participle ; as. Having been wounded, he must be (will be, was) carried home. Remark. Notice that, as in the Infinitive Mode, the time of a participle depends on the time of some other verb. This will be seen from the preceding examples. The Present Participle, therefore, represents an action as going on (Active) or received (Passive) at the time expressed by the principal verb.* Also, notice that the Perfect Participle represents an action as completed at the time of the principal verb. 24. Yerbs are called regular, when they form their past tense and past participle by the addition of d, or ed to the simple form ; as, help, helped. Yerbs are called irregular, when they do not follow this law ; as, am J was, been. 25. An Auxiliary Verb (Latin auocilium, aid) is one used to aid in the conjugation of other verbs ; as, He does not think that you will tell me what he has done and can do, if the opportunity is offered. 26. Some Yerbs are found only in the Third Person Singular. They never have a personal subject (J, you, lie), and hence are called Im- personal Verbs, They are also called Unipersonal (one person), because used only in the Third Person. This subject (it) is very indefinite in its meaning, and if, when we say, " It rains," " It snows," some one were to ask, " JFhat rains (or snows) ? " the question would not be easy to answer. It stands for the thought, or general idea, of the verb ; or, as we should say in Latin, for the stem of the verb. "It rains," "It snows," mean " Rain is falling," " Sno?/? is falling," etc. 27. A Defective Verb lacks some of its modes or tenses ; as, ma^, can, ought, quoth, shall. * Therefore some grammarians call this tense of the Participle, in both voices, the Imperfect Participle, because its action is represented as not com- pleted. The Present Infinitive is often called the Imperfect Infinitive, for a like reason. REVIEW OF ENGLISH GKAMMAR. 9 28. An Adverb is used to modify a Verb, Adjective, or another Adverb. An adverb may express : — Time; as, lately ; Place; as, here; Cause; as, whi/ ; Degree; as, very, wholly ; Matiner ; as, wellj earnestly ; Affirmation ; as, yeSf certainly ; Negation ; as, no, not. 29. A Preposition (meaning placed before) connects a Noun or Pronoun with some other word ; as, He lived in Rome. This Noun or Pronoun must be in the Objective Case (8, c). Remark. When the Noun or Pronoun is omitted, the Preposition becomes an Adverb ; * as, He ran doion the hill (Preposition) ; He ran down (Adverb). 30. A Conjunction (Latin con, together, and jungo, join') is a word used to connect words, phrases (43), and clauses (41). Conjunctions are : — a. Co-ordinate, when they connect elements of equal importance ; as, and, hut. h. Subordinate, when they connect elements of unequal importance ; as, if, because. Adverbs used as Subordinate Conjunctions are called Conjunctive Adverbs ; as, when, while, before. 31. An Interjection (meaning thrown in, or between) is a word thrown into a sentence, not dependent on any other word, and not affecting the construction of the sentence. It expresses some strong or sudden emotion ; as, alas ! ah ! Many other parts of speech are some- times used as Interjections ; as. What ! don't you remember me ? Nonsense ! SYNTAX. 32. Syntax treats of the construction of sentences, and the relation of their different parts to each other. 33. A Sentence is a collection of words expressing a complete thought ; as. The brave soldier received a reward from his general. 34. Analysis is the separation of a sentence into the elements, or parts, that compose it, in order to discover their relation to each other. * Really, Prepositions are Adverbs used as connectives. 10 REVIEW OF ENGLISH GEAMMAE. 35. Every complete sentence must contain : — • a, A Suhjectf telling the person or thing that m, or ads, or is acted upon. It answers the question Who ? or What ? b. A Predicate, telling what is said of the Subject. In the sen- tence, "Brave soldiers fight with no thought of fear," soldiers is the Subject, midijight with no thought of fear is the Predicate. 36. The Subject must be a Noun, or the equivalent of a Noun. In place of a Noun, as Subject, may be used : — a. A Pronoun ; as. The man said that he would come. b. An Adjective ; as. The good are happy. c. An Infinitive (3, c) ; as. To err is human. d. A Clause (41) ; as. That he is m^ friend is true ; Wh^ he killed his friend will always be a problem. e. Any word or collection of words, not a Noun, but of which something can be stated ; as, ^ is a letter ; 1(9 is a preposition ; -|- is the sign of addition. Remark. Of course the gender of such subjects as those mentioned in c, d, e, must be neuter. 37. The Predicate must contain a Verh, since this is the only part of speech that can make a statement. The Imperative Mode may form a complete sentence, the Subject being understood. Yerbs in other modes may form complete Predicates ; as. Dogs bark ; Birds fli/ ; It rains. a. The verb to he, however, cannot (in its ordinary use) form a complete Predicate, as it does not state anything. Snow is, C(Bsar was, The boy will be, are not sentences, since each re- quires some word to complete its meaning. Such a word is called a Complement. A Complement of the first example would be the word white; of the ^econdL, general ox victorious ; of the third, studious. The forms is, was, will be, simply connect the subjects and the words which describe them. To he is therefore called a Copula (meaning link, coupler). b. Other verbs, besides to he, are used as Copulative Yerbs. To become, to appear, to seem, are the most common of these ; as, He became a hero ; The boy appeared {seemed) honest. € The Passive Yoice of the verbs to make, to choose, to call, to think, and others of like meaning, has the same use (as Copulative Yerbs) ; as, I have been made {chosen, called, con- sidered) leader. REVIEW OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 11 Remark. An Adjective used after one of the verbs mentioned in a^ b, c, modifies the Subject ; and as the Copulative Verb has no more effect on the case after it than the sign =, a Noun following such a verb, defining or de- scribing the subject, will be in the Nominative. As both the Adjective and Noun help to form the Predicate, they are called the Predicate Adjective and Predicate Noun (or Nominative). d. The principles stated above will apply to any Noun or Adjective standing after an Intransitive Verb, but describing the Subject; as. He returned a friend , who came a foe (Jriend and foe being in the Nominative Case). 38. The principal elements (the Subject and Predicate) may be modified : — a. By an Adjective element; that is, a word, phrase (43), or clause (41), which performs the office of an Adjective; as, A wise man (man of wisdom^ man who is wise) will care for his health. Under this head should be included any word, or collection of words, which may modify a Substantive ; for example : — A Possessive Case; as. The bofs book has been found. An Appositive (46) ; as. We, the people of these United States, are free ; The saying, " Honesty is the best policy, ^^ is an old proverb. A Predicate Noun or Adjective (37, Remaek). b. By an Objective element ; that is, a word, phrase, or clause, used as an Object ; as, He wishes food (or to eat) ; He says that he must go ; They asked what I had said. c. By an Adverbial element ; that is, a word, phrase, or clause, that performs the duty of an Adverb ; as, He runs swiftly (or at full speed) ; He will come when he can (or to-morrow). 39. An Object may be : — a. Direct ; that is, receiving the full effect of the action expressed by a Transitive Verb ; as. He struck me. b. Indirect ; that is, showing the person or thing to {ox for) whom (or which) anything is done, or happens ; as. They told him (to him. Indirect Object) the story (Direct Object) ; Give me (to me) the book. 40. Sentences are divided, with respect to iheiT form, into three classes -. Simple, Compound, and Complex, 12 KEVIEW OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. a. A Simple Sentence expresses a single complete thought ; that is, it contains but one Subject and one Predicate ; as, Caesar wrote a history of his campaigns in Gaul. b. A Compound Sentence contains two or more Simple Sen- tences, each expressing an independent thought ; as. Put not your trust in money, but put your money in trust; He ex- ercises, therefore he is well. c. A Complex Sentence contains one Simple Sentence and one or more thoughts that are dependent upon it; as, Milton, who wrote " Paradise Lost," said that he did not educate his daugh- ters in the languages, because one tongue was enough for a woman. * 41. In Compound and Complex Sentences, each separate thought is called a Clause, A Compound Sentence, therefore, consists of two Independent y or Principal, Clauses ; and a Complex Sentence contains one Principal, and one or more Dependent (or Subordinate) Clauses. 42. Dependent Clauses are either Substantive, Adjective, or Adverbial, a. A Substantive Clause is one that takes the place of a Substan- tive ; that is, of a Noun or Pronoun. The use of such a clause, as Direct Object, is seen in the example (40, c), where that he did not educate his daughters in the languages, etc., is the Direct Object of said. b. An Adjective Clause performs the office of an Adjective. In 40, c, who wrote ''Paradise Lost,^^ describes Milton, and is an AdjectiviB Clause. c. An Adverbial Clause takes the place of an Adverb. The clause, because one tongue, etc. (40, <?), is an Adverbial Clause expressing cause, and answering the question Whi/ ? 43. A TTnrase is a collection of words, without Subject or Predicate, which may be used as an Adjective or Adverb ; as. She had a voice of wonderful power, and sang with great expression. Phrases are of several forms ; that most common is called a Prepositional Phrase, and consists of a Noun or Pronoun and a Preposition, which connects it with the word which is modified by the phrase ; as, in the example under this section, in which of power is an Adjective Phrase (= powerful) modify- ing voice, and with expression (= expressively) is an Adverbial Phrase, modifying sang. REVIEW OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 13 44. A Sentence, according to its meaning, may be : — a. Declaratory, when it makes a statement ; as. It rains. h. Interrogative, when it asks a question; as, Does it rain? c. Ijnperative, when it expresses a, command ; as, Let it rain ; Go. d. Exclawiatory, when it has the form of an exclamation; as. How it rains ! SOME ELEMENTARY RULES OF SYNTAX. Nominative as Subject. 45. A Noun or Pronoun, used as the Subject of a Finite Verb, must be in the Nominative Case. Apposition. 46. A Noun or Pronoun, used to explain another Noun or Pronoun, and meaning the same person or thing, is put in the same case. This is called Apposition (meaning near position) ; as, Caesar, the general, addressed his soldiers, men tried in many conflicts. Predicate Nominative and Adjective. a. A Noun or Pronoun, used as the Complement of to he or any other Copulative Verb (37, a, b, c), describes the subject and must be in the Nominative Case. This principle is the same as Apposition, except that the descriptive Noun or Pronoun requires a Copulative Verb to connect it with the word which it modifies. b. An Adjective, used as the Complement of to be or any other Copulative Verb, modifies the Subject. Remark. In general, it may be stated that — c. An Intransitive Verb or a Passive form takes the same case after as before it. Adjectives and Participles. 47. An Adjective or Participle (Verbal Adjective) must describe or limit some Noun or Pronoun. Possession. 48. Possession must be expressed by the Possessive Case or by the Preposition of with a Substantive. 14 REVIEW OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. Direct Object. 49. The Direct Object of a Transitive Yerb must be in the Objective Case ; as, He obeyed the law. This rule applies to Participles and Verbal Nouns (from Transitive Verbs), as well as to all ordinary forms of the veji'b ; as, The man, seeing his friend, ran after him, shouting his name ; Obeying the law is a citi- zen's duty ; To preach honesty i^ne thing ; to practise it is another. Relative Pronouus^ 50. A Relative Pronoun agrees with its Antecedent in Gender, Number, and Person ; but its Case depends upon the form of its own clause; as. You have injured me, who am your friend. Verb. 51. A Einite Verb agrees with its subject in Person and Number. a. If there are several subjects, of different persons, the verb will be in the Pirst Person, rather than the Second or Third, and the Second, rather than the Third ; as, John, you, and I (that is, we^ have finished our lessons ; This gentleman and yourself (that is, you) have cast your votes. b. A Collective Noun may take a verb in the Singular, when the body (or group) as a whole is spoken of; but when the separate individuals (or objects) are thought of, the verb must be Plural ; as, A regiment of nine hundred men was ordered to charge; The council (that is, the members of it) were in doubt. c. When a verb has two or more subjects in the Singular number, it will be : — (1) Plural, if it agrees with them taken together ; as. The master and his servant have come. (2) Singular, if it agrees with them separately ; as, Neither (either) the man nor (or) his servant has come. Tbe Independent Case. 52. The Independent Case has no grammatical dependence upon any word in the sentence ; as. Citizens^ behold your king ; The time having arrived, we started. KEVIEW OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 15 Tlie Infinitive as a Verbal Noun. 53. The Infinitive is often used as a Verbal Noun in the Nominative or Objective Case ; as, To die for one's country is noble ; He wishes to see you. Some Peculiar Uses of tlie Objective Case.* 54. The Objective Case is used to express -. — 1. The object directly affected by an action (39, a). 2. The object indirectly affected by an action (39, 1)). 3. The space over which the action, etc., extends ; as, He drove the horse twenty miles ; The house \^ fifty feet high. 4. The time during which the action or state continues ; as. He lived fifty years ; She was nineteen years old. 5. The time when (or at which) an event takes place ; as. He arrived (on) the next day. 6. The amount (or degree) to which the action or state is exerted; as. He was injured a great deal. 7. The amount (or degree) of difference between two objects or actions ; as. He \% five years older than I (that is, older by that difference) ; He is <a5 head taller than John ; He ran a great deal faster than his brother ; He is not one cent richer. 8. The 'place toward which motion is directed ; as, I went home ; They desire to go West. 9. Price ; as. The book cost two dollars. Remark. The Objective Case, in Examples 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, has the force of an Adverb of Degree or Time, answering the question How ? How much 1 When t How long 1 it is, therefore, often called, in such uses, the Adverbial Objective, "It" and "There" as Introductory Subjects. 55. It and There are often used as introductory subjects (the real subjects following the verb) to give variety to the form of the sentence; as. It is a law of war that might makes right (= that might makes right is a law of war). The sentence, " There are five men there," means " Five men are there," and the first there has no particular value as a part of tiie sen- * The remaining sections of this English Review may be omitted for the present, and employed for comparison of idioms when the Syntax of Latin cases is studied. They will be of service to the beginner in his study of the Accusative with the Infinitive, Accusative of Extent, etc. 16 REVIEW OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. teuce. As tliey help to fill out the sentence, they are called Exple- tives (from a Latin word meaning to Jill out). As they stand in the place of Substantives, they might be called Expletive Pronouns. The Objective Case as Subject of tbe InfinitiTe. 56. The Infinitive Mode is often used to denote an act, and the Objective Case to denote the actor; as. He ordered me to go. There- fore the laws regulating the relations of Subject and Verb are these : — a. The Subject of a Tinite Yerb (15, e) must be in the Nominative Case. b. The Subject of an Infinitive must be in the Objective Case ; as, I knew him to be a thief. Let him (Jo) come. Whom (p%"edicate Pronoun) do you suppose him to be? I wish him to go. I heard the bell {to) ring. Remark. After hid, dare, feel, see, let, make, meed. Hear, the sign to is generally omitted with the Inhnitive ; as in the examples above. INTRODUCTION LATIN LESSONS. 1. " The Latin Language was the language of Latium (a district in ttaly), of which Rome was the chief city. The conquests of the Romans caused it to spread over the rest of Italy, and over the greater part of Trance and Spain. The Latin Language is no longer spoken ; but the French, Italian, Spanish, and Portuguese languages are mainly derived from it." Alphabet. 2. The Latin Alphabet is the same as the English, except that it has no "w. K occurs only in a very few words. Q, as in English, is always followed by u. 3. The letters are divided into Yowels (a, e, i, o, u, y) and Conso- nants. J and V are consonant forms of i and u. 4. There are several classes of Consonants, of which these are the most important : — a. Liquids (1, m, n, r). They are called Liquids because they unite easily in sound with a preceding consonant, or Jfow smoothly after it. This is especially true of 1 and r, and these letters are therefore frequently called semi-vowels. The English words able, betray, snow, small, are examples of Liquids pronounced with other consonants. ^. H is not a consonant, but an Aspirate (that is, a rough breathing of the vowel following it). c. Double Consonants (x, z) . X = cs, gs ; z = ds. d. Mutes; so called because they are uttered without opening the vocal passage, therefore they are voiceless. 2 18 INTRODUCTION TO THE LATIN LESSONS. Remaek.* Mutes may be divided, (1) according to tlie organ by which their pronunciation is effected; (2) according to the degree of breathing employed ; that is, they may have a light (or sharp) sound, an intermediate sound, or a rough sound. According to the first division, they are called Labials (or lip-letters)^ Palatals (or palate-letters), and Linguals (or tongue-letters). Accord- ing to the second division, they are called Smooth, Middle, and Rough. The table here given shows these two divisions : — Labials. Palatals. Linguals. Smooth Mutes, p. c (k, qu), t. Middle Mutes, b, ^, d. Rough Mutes, ph, ch, th. 5. A IHphthong (meaning "double sound") is the union of two vowel sounds in one syllable; as, cau-sae (Eng. causes). The most common Diphthongs in Latin are ae, oe, au ; the least common are eu, ei, ui. 6. There are as many Syllables in a Latin word as there are single vowels or diphthongs. The English words separate, accurate, miles, crates, more, persuade, would be pronounced, as Latin words, se-pa- ra'-te, ac-cu-ra'-te, mi'-les, cra'-tes, mo'-re, per-sua'-de. Pronunciati on. 7. The Pronunciation of Latin differs in different countries. The two methods which are most commonly employed in American schools are the Roman and the English. These are presented in the next two sections. Koman Metliod. 8. By the Roman Method, the letters have the following sounds : — Long. Short. ^ a as m father. ^ as in idea, e as ey in they. S as in net. Vowels. ^ i as in machine, i as in verily, 6 as in old. 6 as in obey. u as 00 in moon. ti as mfull. Y has a sound between that of i and u. * The Teacher may omit this for the present, employing the statements here made concerning the Mutes for reference in the future. The Table will be very INTRODUCTION TO THE LATIN LESSONS. 19 Remark. In a syllable long hy 'position (11, I, F) a short vowel is pronounced short ; but, before nf, ns, gn, and j, the vowel becomes long, and must be pronounced as a long vowel (11, I, h. Note). Diphthongs : ae like English ay {yes). ei as in eight. oe like oi in coin. eu as ew \\\few. au like ow in how. ui like English we. Consonants : c, g, always hard, as in car, gun. j like y in yet ; s sharp, as in sale. t as in tent ; v like w in went ; qu as in quart* bs, bt, like ps, pt ; ch as k ; ph as/ Englisli Method. 9. The letters have their ordinary English sounds. Notice, how- ever, these Special Rules : — 1. Final a, in words of more than one syllable, sounds like final a in America; but in monosyllables (as a, da, quS) the long sound is usually given. 2. In tibi and sibi, the i in both syllables sounds like i and y in fitly. 3. Es final sounds like ease. 4. Os final (in the plural) sounds like ose in dose. Remark. In post and its compounds, OS sounds like ose; but in derivatives, is sounded short; as, pos'-te-rus. 5 . Ae and oe have the same sound as e ; au is like aw in saw ; in huic and cui, ui = 1 (as though these words were spelled hike, ki). 6. In such words as Caius, Pompeius, Aquileia, i sounds like y; as, Pom-pe'-yus, A-qui-le' -ya. 7. C has the sound of s, and g the sound of j, before e, i, y, ae, oe, eu. 8. Ch is always hard (like k) ; as, mach'-i-na. 9. T and c (before i) often have, as in English, the sound of sh ; as, ra'-ti-o (= ra-sht-o). The hard sound is retained after s, t, andx; as, jus-ti-or, Met'-ti-us. useful to the student in his study of the Verb, as showing that most of the consonant changes made result from interchange between mutes of the same family ; as, scriptus (from scribo), rectus (from rego), etc. 20 INTRODUCTION TO THE LATIN LESSONS. Quantity. 10. In prououuciug the English word quantity^ the second and third syllables are more hastily pronounced than the first ; in other words, it takes more time to pronounce the first. This difference in the length or quantity of time required to pronounce different syllables was far more carefully observed by the Romans than it is by us. In Latin, syllables are long (-) or short (^). A long syllable re- quires twice as much time for pronunciation as a short one. Kules of Quantity. 11. The quantity of most Latin syllables is decided by the following Rules : — I. Long Syllables. A syllable is said to be (a) Long by nature, if it contains a long vowel or a diphthong ; as in mater, res, Roma, Caesar, aurum, poena. Note. Vowels, in Latin, are long or short, not according to fixed rules, but by nature (that is, because the Romans made them so), and therefore their quantity can be learned only by observation and practice. Remark. The vowel of a syllable formed by contraction is long; as in nil (for nihil), currus (for curruia (J)) Long by position, if its vowel (short by nature) is followed by two consonants (but see II, ^), or a double consonant (x, z) ; as in quantus (Eng. quantity), index, sunt. This is owing to the distinct pronunciation of both conso- nants. A careless speaker might pronounce the English word given above quanHty, and thus shorten the time of the first syllable by not sounding both consonants. Remark. If, however, the second consonant is h, the syllable is not made long (II, a, Remark). For example, the quantity of the negative particle in (Eng. un) remains short before h in the compound inhonestus (Eng. dis> {h)onorable). Note. Before nf, ns, gn, and j, a short vowel itself becomes long (8, Re- mark); as in infero, consul, regnum, hujus. II. Short Syllables. A syllable is said to be short (a) If its vowel is followed by another vowel or by a diphthong ; as in via, dies. This is because, in Latin as in English, the first vowel naturally " runs into " the second, and loses its value as a separate letter ; as in impius (Eng. impious), victoria (Eng. victorious). Remark. This same law applies to a vowel before h, which is only a breathing (4, 6); as in prohibeo (so also, Eng. pro{h)ibition), veho (Eng. veQi)icle\ nihil (Eng. ni(h)ilist). INTRODUCTION TO THE LATIN LESSONS. 21 b.^ If its vowel (naturally short) is followed by a mute (4, d) with 1 or r (that is, the mute must stand before 1 or r) ; as in agri (from ager), patris (from pater); but acris (from acer), matris (from mater). This is because 1 and r blend so easily with the preceding mute that the short vowel is really followed by one consonant and a half, i. e. a semi-vowel (4, ^), and not by two full consonants. Remark. If, however, 1 or r is preceded by another 1 or r, the syllable is long; as in carrus. Note. Syllables whose quantity is decided by the foregoing rules will not be marked in this book. Ail other syllables are to be considered short, unless they are marked long. 12. Decide, by the rules given in section 11, and also by the Note at the end of that section, the quantity of every syllable in the following list of words : — tempestas via Caesar patria index- auro nihil mansisset pervius traho dux prohibeas Accent. 13. Accent is the special emphasis which a particular syllable of a word receives in pronunciation ; as in the English hap'py, secure' , qual'ity. English accent is largely a matter of memory ; for example, the following words of two syllables are derived from the same Latin Verb (fero, I bear), yet some are accented on the first syllable, and some on the second : suffer, infer', differ, defer'. In Latin, Accent is determined by these simple laws : f — a. In words of two syllables, always accent the frst ; as, Stella, de'us. b. In words of more than two syllables, always accent the last hut one, if it is long ; if short, accent the last but two ; as, ami'cus, proprae'tor, dilexlt, tur'ribus, Ju'piter, inge'nium. * To Teachers. The author is convinced that the term Common, as usually applied to the quantity of a vowel thus placed, conveys little if any. meaning to the mind of a beginner ; it should not be used in connection with his study of prose, but left for his consideration when he shall take up Latin poetry. The same remark will apply to final 0, which will be marked long, except in the few instances where it is short. t The accent as affected by an Enclitic is explained later; also that of Vocatives like Mercuri. 22 INTRODUCTION TO THE LATIN LEMONS. Remarks. 1. The last syllable of a word is called the ultima (Eng. uUi- 7nate -zz final). 2. The last syllable but one is called the penult (meaning *^ almost the last." Compare 'Etng. peninsula^ ^^ almost an island"). 3. The syllable before the penult is called the antepenult (i. e. before the penult). Parts of Speech. 14. The Parts of Speech are the same iu Latin as in English (2, page 1). Inflection. 15. Inflection is a change made in the form of a word to show its different relations to other words. a. In English, Nouns and Pronouns are inflected to show relations of possession, etc. This is called Declension, English Verbs are inflected to show different relations of voice, mode, person, etc. This is called Conjugation. English Nouns and Pronouns have very few changes of form. The Possessive Case is the only one that always has a special form. Eor instance, the words fish, sheep, may be Nominative or Objective, Singular or Plural. In the sentence "The king the slave in silence viewed," we cannot tell whether the king viewed the slave, or the slave viewed the king. b. In Latin, there are six cases. Each has its own uses and mean- ings; so that, while the case of an English Noun or Pronoun can very often be decided only by the sense of the sentence, the case of these same parts of speech in Latin is almost always shown by its enditig. Adjectives are inflected (that is, declined) in Latin, as well as Nouns and Pronouns. Latin Verbs are conjugated ; their endings indicate voice, person, number, etc. Stem. 16. The Stem of a word is that part from which its different cases, modes, tenses, persons, etc., are formed by inflection. It is the trunk, and the various forms are the branches. Properties of Nouns. 17. In Latin, as in English, Nouns have Gender, Person, Number, and Case ; but the laws of Gender and the number of Cases are some- what different. INTRODUCTION TO THE LATIN LESSONS. 23 Gender. 18. The Gender of English nouns is decided by their meaning. So it is in Latin nouns, in the case of human beings and animals ; that is, names of males are Masculine, and names of females, Feminine. In many respects, however, the rules for the gender of Latin nouns denoting things without life are very different from the English rule. The Gender of Latin nouns is decided in two ways, — by their mean- ing and by their endings. The Rules that decide Gender by meaning are general, and apply to nouns of all Declensions. The Rules that decide Gender by endings are special, and will be given wdth each Declension separately. Rules for Gender according to Meaning.* 19. These Rules appli/ to Nouns of all Declensions. a. Names of males, rivers, winds, and mountains, are Masculine ; as, agricola {a farmer), Septentrio {the north wind), Arar {name of a river). Jura {name of a mountain-chain). ^ h. Names oi females, countries, towns, islands, and trees are Eeminine; as, mulier {a woman), Gallia {Gaul), Roma {Rome), Delos {an island), Corinthus {a city in Greece), pirus {a pear- tree), Cyprus {an island). Remark. Tliere are exceptions to the above laws, -which must be decided by the Special Rules for Endings. They can be learned only by observation and practice. c. These are Neuter : — 1. Indeclinable Nouns (as, nihil, fSs). 2. Infinitives, Phrases, Clauses, and other parts of speech used as Nouns. These are, of course, indeclinable, and would be regarded as Neuter in English, when used as Nouns (36, Rem., page 10) ; as. To err is human (that is, a human thing). In the Latin for this sentence, * This section may be omitted until the beginner shall have acquired a familiarity with the forms of Nouns and the use of the Cases. In the earlier lessons of this book, only those nouns are used whose gender is decided by the English sense (as nauta, agricola) and by the Special Rules (for gender hy endings) given in connection with each Declension. Later, the General Rules will be required, and reference will be made to this section as well as to Note 3. 24 INTRODUCTION TO THE LATIN LESSONS. Errare est huraanum, the Adjective humanum is in the neuter gender, agreeing with the Subject errare. Cases. 20. Latin nouns have six Cases : Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, Vocative, Ablative. The following table tells : (1) The relation of each to other words in a sentence ; (2) Its English equiva- lent ; (3) What question it answers. Notice that what we express in English by a Preposition is very often indicated in Latin merely by a change in the ending of a word (Inflection). Latin Case. Relation to othex Words. Like what English Case. Answers what (Question. Nominative. Subject. Nominative. Who ? or What ? Genitive. Possession, or Of. Possessive, or Of with Objective. Whose? ^ . ( Whom ? ^J \ What? Dative. Indirect Object. Objective with To or For. To { Whom ? For \ What ? Accusative. Direct Object. Objective. Whom ? or What ? Vocative. Case of Address. Independent. Used in addressing a person or thing. Ablative. Adverbial Phrases. Objective with By, From, In, With. With From By In 'whom? What ? Remark. Besides these there was a Locative Case, answering the question Where ? Its form and use will be described hereafter. N. B. It •will be found very helpful to the class if the teacher will apply the above principles to the following sentences, showing what Latin case should he used to represent each Noun and Pronoun. The use of the Cases will be more clearly understood by such a practical application. Exercise, 1. The troops of the enemy were overcome in one battle. 2. John's companion will not tell him the name of the farmer. 3. My friend, will INTRODUCTION TO THE LATIN LESSONS. 25 you give a tired man some supper and a room in which he can rest with comfort ? 4. " Boys," said the teacher, " you have recited the morn- ing's lesson well." 5. The man died from the effects of sunstroke. 6. This district is bounded by the river Garonne, the Atlantic, and the country of the Belgae. 7. I will keep these facts in mind. 8. He was treated with great kindness. Declension of Nouns. 21. Latin Nouns have five Declensions. They are distinguished : — 1. By the final letter (or characteristic) of the Stem (16). 2. By the ending of the Genitive Singular. The Declensions will be presented separately, beginning with the First TO TEACHERS. In the following Lessons the author has not attempted to pre- scribe the exact amount to be assigned for each day's recitation. Classes differ so much in maturity and general, preparation, that the individual teacher must use his own judgment as to the length of the daily lesson. If any Lesson seems too long for a single exercise, it may, of course, be assigned in two or more portions, or some of the sen- tences may be omitted. Various uses may be made of the " English into Latin " exercises : — I. They may be assigned, one each day, as a regular part of the next recitation. II. A few sentences only from each may be required. III. The English exercises of two successive Lessons may form the material for the third day's recitation. IV. The writing of these sentences may be made work at sight, to be performed in the class-room, allowing the pupil to consult the English-Latin Vocabulary for needed Latin theme-forms. LATIN LESSONS. EXPLANATION OF REFERENCES. In this book, References are made : — 1. To sections of the Latin Grammars of Allen and Greenough, Bennett, and Harkness, and to the Appendix (at the end of this book) : for example, A. 25 ; B. 20 ; H. 37 ; App. 5. 2. To the Notes (beginning on page 149 of this book). These, in the head- ings of the Lessons, are indicated thus : N. 35. In the Exercises, N. is omitted. 3. To other portions of the book (Lessons, etc.). These will explain them- selves. LESSON I. FIRST DECLENSION OF NOUNS. Learn N. 9, a, 5, c, d (page 153) ; also N. 8 (1), (2), (5), (6), (8). Learn the Declension (with English meanings) of stella, A. 35 ; or porta, B. 20 ; or mensa, H. 48 ; or silva, App. 1. Remember that all syllables for whose Quantity rules have not been given (11, page 20), ayid not marked long, are short. Study each Latin word in the following Exercise so as to be able to give : — 1. Its Pronunciation. 2. The Quantity of syllables for which rules have been given. 3. Its Accent. 4. Its Stem and Gender. 5. Its Case and Number. 6. Its Meaning. If any form, as viae, can be found in more than one Case or Number, tell what these are, and give its meaning for each. 7. All the Case Endings of Stella (6). 28 LATIN LESSONS. EXERCISE. Special Vocabularies for the first 29 Lessons are given on pages 259-265. The Special Vocabula^^ies must be so thoroughly learned by the student that, when questioned by the teacher, the English meaning can be given at once, when the Latin equivalent is stated, or the Latin word, when the English meaning is given. 1. Gloriarum. 2. Causa.* 3. Lingua. 4. Nautls. 5. Viae. 6. Silvas. 7. Mensam. 8. Pecuniae. 9. Agricolis. 10. Stellae. 11. Via. 12. Victoriarum. In each of the following English sentences, give the exact Latin equivalent for the words printed in italics; for example, farmer s = agricolae, Genitive Singular. 1. The farmer'' s garden contained a bed of roses. 2. That sailor has a good memory. 3. Sailors, you have won many vic- tories. 4. We intrust many facts to the memory. 5. The sailors will win a victory. 6. ll\iQ farmei's' tables were bought with money. 7. He brought the money from Rome. 8. Rome's glory was great. 9. The sailors' language seems strange to the farmers. LESSON IL VERBS; THE SIMPLE SENTENCE; SUBJECT NOMINATIVE. First Conjugation of Verbs: Present Indicative Active. Learn : (1) N. 54 (entire), 56, 57, a. (2) The Conjugation of am5, in the Present Indicative Active, and the English meanings. A. 128; B. 101; H. 205; App. 28. The Simple Sentence. Learn N. 100, 102, 105. Subject Nominative. Learn N. 118. Agreement of the Verb with its Subject. Learn N. 117 {the simple Rule only). * There is no Article {a, an, the) in Latin. Causa may mean cause, a cause, or the cause. LATIN LESSONS. 29 EXERCISE. Translate these sentences, and apply all the principles given in the Notes on this Lesson. 1. Vocamus. 2. Puellae vocaiit. 3. Amat. 4. Pugrias. 5. Nauta pugnat. 6. Laudatis. 7. Voco. 8. Agricola vocat. 9. Lauda- miis. 10. Vocas. Give the Latin for — 1. They are calling. 2. You {plural) fight. 3. The girl loves. 4. We praise. 5. You {singular) love. 6. The sailors fight. 7. He praises. 8. The girls call. 9. You {singular) praise. 10. The farmers are praising. 11. He does call. 12. The girl's memory. General Questions. What is the Stem of mensa ? via ? What is the Present Stem of amS \ vocd ? laudo ? pugnO ? What are the Personal Endings of the Present Tense ? What Person does each represent ? Is vocamus a complete sentence ? Why ? Name the Present Stem and Personal Ending of each Latin Verb-form used in this Exercise (54, 3). In how many ways can you translate amant? What is a Simple Sentence ? What must every Sentence contain ? Decline via. LESSON III. SECOND DECLENSION OF NOUNS; DIRECT OBJECT. Second Declension of Nouns (Masculine). Learn N. 10, a, h, c. Learn the Declension (with English meanings) of servus, puer, ager, vir. A. 38 ; B. 23 ; H. 51 & 4 ; APP. 2. Direct Object. Learn N. 139. EXERCISE. Translate. Apply all the principles given in the Notes on this Lesson and on Lesson LL, 1. Magister pueros laudat.* 2. Servl pugnant. 3. Puerl equos * In Latin, the Subject regularly stands first, and the Verb last (see 192). 30 LATIN LESSONS. araant. 4. Dant agros. 5. Pueros vocatis. 6. Servum liberas. 7. Puer puellas vocat. 8. Amlci amicos amaiit. 9. Agris. 10. Equorum. 11. Serve. 12. Libro. 13. Virl. 14. Puer. Give the Latin for — 1. The man frees the slaves. 2. The Eomaiis iight. 3. friend ! 4. Of books. 5. I praise the boys' friends (120). 6. To the man, 7. The man's slave calls the boys. 8. Of a book. 9. With money. 10. For the slaves, 11. To the Eo- mans' horses. 12. We praise the boy. General Questions. What is the Stem of vir ? servus ? ager % puer ? Is this a true statement : " The Nominative and Vocative are always alike " (10, c) ? What are the Case Endings of equus ? liber ? What Verbs can take a Direct Object in the Accu- sative? What are the Personal Endings of liberol Decline, side by side, equus, Stella ; also, ager, causa. What Nouns of the Second Declension are Masculine ? Name the Present Stem and Personal Ending of each Verb-form used in this Exercise. LESSON IV. SECOND DECLENSION OF NOUNS; FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS OF ADJECTIVES. Second Declension of Nouns (Neuter). Learn N. 10, a, b ; 8 (3). Learn the Declension of bellum, A. 38 ; B. 23 ; or tem- plum, H. 51; or donum, App. 2. Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions. Learn N. 24 & a. Learn the Declension of bonus, miser, niger, A. 81, 82; or bonus, tener, sacer, B. 63, 64, 65; or bonus, liber, aeger, H. 148, 149, 150; or magnus, liber, niger, App. 10 & a. Agreement of Adjectives. Learn N. 108. EXERCISE. Translate. Decline the Nouns and Adjectives. Give the Rule for the agreement of each Adjective. Some of the Adjectives are not LATIN LESSONS. 31 in the proper form and must be corrected^ with reasons for the cor- rections, 1. Puerl bom.* 2. Equus nigrl. 3. Praemia parvura. 4. Viiis liberls. 5. Servorum miserorum. 6. Doiio magna. 7. Sil- vae magnae. 8. Puellas magnos. 9. Templa magna Romanorum. 10. Nautae aegrae. 11. Templi magnL 12. Gloriam magnara amas. Give the Latin for — 1. With small rewards. 2. Of good friends. 3. Of a great forest. 4. Large temples {Accusative). 5. Good friend {Voca- tive). 6. Sick farmers {Nominative). 7. By a great war. 8. The wretched slaves fight. 9. We call the black horses. 10. For the small boys. General Questions. What are the Stems of miser T parvus ? Is final a ever long f Where ? What Cases are always alike in Neuter Nouns ? Decline, side by side, equus, Stella, bellum ; also, ager, causa, donum ; also, vir bonus ; also, agricola bonus ; also, bellum magnum. Give the Latin for : Vou praise; We fight; He gives. LESSON V. APPOSITION; GENITIVE CASE. Apposition. Learn N. 106. Genitive Case. Learn N. 119 and CAUTION. Genitive de- noting Possession, Learn N. 120. EXERCISE. Translate.^ Decline the Nouns and Adjectives, and give the Rules for their Case and Gender, Conjugate the Verbs ; give the Stem and Personal Endings of each ; give the Rule for their agreement, * The Adjective regularly follows its Noun (193, 1). t Read carefully N. 200. 32 LATIN LESSONS. 1. Genevara, oppidum magnum, occupant. 2. German! agros Gallomm * vastant. 3. Sabinuslegatus Gallos superat. 4. Oppida magna occupas. 5. Titum, amicum Sablni, laudatis. 6. Agrum agricolae vastamus. 7. Puer gladium Titi legati portat. 8. Titus et Sabinus oppidum Genevam occupant (117, a). 9. Libros magistii portas. 10. Yiri equos agricolarum laudant. 11. Galli et German! oppida et agros Eomanorum occupant. 12. Legati praemia magna dant. 13. Servus vir! puerum amat. 14. Sab!nus, amicus Tit!, servos miseros liberat. 15. Copiae Titi et Sabini legatorum oppida Germanorum occupant. Give the Latin for — 1. Eome's glory. 2. With the sword of Titus, the lieutenant. 3. A great abundance of good books. 4. We seize Geneva ; the lieutenant's forces fight. 5. wretched slave. 6. The man's friends love good books. 7. The farmers' slaves praise the lieu- tenants, Titus and Sabinus. General Questions. What is the diflference between an Appositive and a Genitive ? What is the regular position of an Adjective ? Give the Rules for the Gender of Nouns of the First and Second Declensions. -oo^Koo- LESSON VI. PREDICATE NOUN AND ADJECTIVE. Predicate Noun and Adjective. Learn section 37 & «, page 10 ; also section 46 & a, b, c, page 13. Learn N. 107 ; 108 & 1, 3, 4. Sum : Fresent Indicative, Learn N. 55. * The regular position for a Genitive (unless it is emphatic) is after the Noun on which it depends (193, 2). LATIN LESSONS. 33 EXERCISE. Translate. Analyze (194, a). Give the Rule for the form' and agreement of each word, 1. Stellae clarae sunt. 2. Viri multl agricolae sunt. 3. Kosa alba est. 4. Beat! estis. 5. Attcntus es. 6. Gladius legatl acutus est. 7. Exemplum viri boni bonum est. 8. Numerus puerorum et puellarum magnus est. 9. Portae oppidi Genevae multae et magnae sunt. 10. Liber sum; liberl sumus. 11. Regna Germanorum parva sunt. 12. Amicus Sablnl es. 13. Servos timidos vocat. 14. Perlculum magnum est. 15. Victoriae Titi multae sunt. 16. Insula longa et lata est. 17. Geneva est oppidum magnum ; oppidum Genevan! occupatis. 18. Via longa est ; nautae timidi sunt. Give the Latin for — 1. The sailor's danger is great. 2. We {feminine) are wretched. 3. Titus's friend is sick: 4. The wars of the Gauls are long. 5. The man's horses are black. 6. You {singular) are small and timid. 7. The boy's book is large. 8. The man is a teacher; the men are teachers. 9. The lieutenant is the sailor's friend. 10. The temples of the Romans are long and high. General Questions. What is the difference between an Appositive and a Predicate Noun ? Pro- nounce these words, and give the reason for the accent of each : agricolae, mensam, servdrum, magister, praemia, stellarum, amicos, victoriis. LESSON VII. VERBS: DEFINITIONS; FIRST CONJUGATION (continued). Transitive and Intransitive ; Voice ; Number ; Person / Mode, — Indicative ; Tense, — Present, Imperfect, Future ; Personal Endings ; Conjugation and Present Stem; For- mation of Tenses. Learn N. 56 ; 51 h a ; 60, 61, 1, 2 ; 63, a; 64 & « {Active Endings) ; 65 ; 68, a, h, c ; 117 & a. 3 34 LATIN LESSONS. Learn the Conjugation (and English meanings) of the JPresent, Imperfect, and Future Indicative, Active, of amo. A. 128 ; B. 101 ; H. 205 ; App. 28. EXERCISE. Translate. Analyze * each Verb-form. Conjugate the Tense in which each is found. 1. Servum vocas ; servos vocatis. 2. Puerum laudabas ; pueros laudabatis. 3. Pugnabis ; pugnabitis. 4. Vir vocat; virT voca- bant. 5. Oppidum occupabinius. 6. Amabit ; amamus ; amabat. 7. Amatis; amabis; amabamus. 8. Portabo; portabitis; portabam. 9. Titus agros Germanorum vastabat. 10. Occupabitis oppida. 11. Bonus est, et viros bonos amabit. 12. Titus et Sablnus legatl pugnabunt. 13. Copias Galklrum superabas. 14. Amicos virl vocabit. Give the Latin for — 1. He calls; he will call; we call; they used to call. 2. You {plural) were carrying; they will carry; we carry; he is carrying. 3. You {singular) fight ; you {plural) will fight ; you (singular) do fight ; we shall fight. 4. The dangers are many and great. 5. The temple is small. 6. We are free. 7. You (singular) are a lieutenant. 8. You (plural) are slaves. ^ General Questions. What is Mode, and what does it show? (15 & a, page 3.) What is Tense, and what are the three divisions of time ? (16, page 4.) * In the First and Second Conjugations, any form in the Present Indicative = Present Stem + Personal Ending (54, 3). Imperfect Indicative = Present Stem + Tense Sign (ba) + Personal Ending. Future Indicative = Present Stem + Tense Sign (bi) + Personal End- ing (68 c). LATIN LESSONS. 35 LESSON VIII. VERBS : PRINCIPAL PARTS AND STEMS. NOUNS ; DECLEN- SION OF FILIA AND DEA. Principal Tarts and Stefns. Learn N. 65, 66, 67, so far as they apply to the Flrsi Conjugation, Declension of filia and dea. Learn N. 9, e. General Questions and Practice. How many Principal Parts has a Regular Verb ? Why are they so called ? What name is given to each ? How many Stems has a Regular Verb ? What are they called ? How is the Present Stem found ? The Perfect Stem ? The Supine Stem ? From which Stem is the Imperfect Indicative formed ? The Future Indicative ? Give the Principal Parts of the Verbs contained in the Special Vocabulary for this Lesson. Give the Stems of the same Verbs. Con- jugate the Present, Imperfect, and Future Tenses of each. Decline filia ; dea. How do they differ from other Nouns of the First Declension ? Analyze these forms, and jt?row the Tense, Person, and Number: amabitis ; narras ; vastabant ; vocatis ; dabimus ; liberabas ; ser- vabunt ; monstrabamus ; pugnabo ; das ; portabis. Give the Latin for — 1. goddesses; of goddesses. 2. To a daughter; to the daughters. 3. The daughter's book is large. 4. The girls love the lieutenant's daughters. 5. For the goddesses; the temples of the goddess. 6. The man's daughter calls the boys. 7. The goddesses' gifts are many. 8. You {plural) will call the goddess. 9. The forces of the Eomans will lay waste many fields. 10. The wall is high ; the walls are long. General Review. V^hat Nouns of the first Declension are Masculine ? Of what gender are the others ? What Nouns of the second Declension are Masculine ? Neuter ? Give the stem of donum ; via; puer ; magister ; vir. Decline together: puer, silva, donum ; also, vir magnus ; also, equus niger. What is the regular position of an Adjective ? of a Subject ? of a Genitive ? of a Verb ? Why is sum called a Copula 1 Can sum take an Accusative as Object ? What is the Noun or Adjective after sum called ? Why ? Review the Vocabularies of Lessons I., IL, III., IV., V., VL 36 LATIN LESSONS. LESSON IX. VERBS {continued); DATIVE CASE. Learn N. 61, entire ; 64, b; 67 ; 68, d, e, f. (N. 62 may be learned or omitted, as the teacher may desire.) Learn the Conjugation of the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Indicative, Active, of-amo. A. 128; B. 101; H. 205; App. 28. Dative of Indirect Object. Learn N. 129. EXERCISE. Translate. Analyze each Sentence. Analyze^ each Verh-form ; conjugate its Tense. Give a Synopsis (78) of each Verb, in the Indicative Mode. Give the Principal Parts and Stems of each Verb. Notice that do is unlike other Verbs of this Conjugation, as it has ^ (not a) when it takes an additional syllable ; as, dSmus, dSbis (but amamus, amabis). 1. Servum vocavistis. 2. Oppidum servaverat. 3. Oppida occupaverimus. 4. Copiae Titi Gallos superavere. 5. Viam monstravit. 6. Pabulam narraveras. 7. Puerd librum dedisti. 8. Virls frumentum dederit. 9. Servo gladium dedit. 10. Puer nautis fabnlam narrabit. 11. Puerls attentis fabulas narraverunt. 12. Amicus praemium magnum non dederat. 13. Puellis viam monstravimus. 14. Copils peciiniam non dabatis. 15. Injtiriae Gallorum multae sunt. Give the Latin for — 1. The teacher will give the attentive boy a book. 2. He has told his (^omit) fiiend a good story. 3. Many Germans overcome * In the Indicative Mode, of all Conjugations, the Perfect Tense = Perfect Stem + the Personal Endings (of the Perfect Indic- ative; 64, h). Phf.perfect Tense = Perfect Stem + the Tense Sign (era) + the Personal Endings. Future Perfect Tense — Perfect Stem + the Tense Sign (eri) + the Personal Endings (68,/.) LATIN LESSONS. 37 large forces of the Gauls. 4. The lieutenants, Titus and the friend of Sabinus, will have seized the town of Geneva. 5. He had carried; we were carrying; you (^flural) have carried. 6. He has given ; he gave ; you {singular) had given ; we shall have given. 7. We called the boy; the boys called the man; tbe girls were* calling. LESSON X. VERBS : FIRST CONJUGATION ; SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. Learn N. 63, b ; 69, a (1), 5, c, d. Learn the Conjugation of the Subjunctive Mode, Active Voice, of amo. A. 128; B. 101; H. 205; App. 28. Remark. In this Lesson the meanings of the Subjunctive Mode are not required ; but numerous Latin forms are given for practice in analysis of the verb. The use of the Subjunctive is presented later (Lesson XXI.). EXERCISE. Tell the Mode, Tense, Number, and Person of each word. Prove your answers by analyzing * each Latin form. 1. Des ; dederis ; dedissetis ; darent. 2. Amaverit; anietis ; amavisses ; amaremus. 3. Portas ; portes ; portailJs ; portabis. 4. Pugnemus; pugnabas; pugnavissemus ; pngnaverimus. 5. Nar- ret; narraret; narrabat; narraverit. 6. Laudaremus; laudabimus; laudavissent ; laudavistis. 7. Servaveras ; servavere ; serves; servaretis. 8. Vocavit ; vocavisset ; vocabunt ; vocaverint. * In the Subjunctive Mode of the First Conjugation, the Tenses contain these elements : — Present Subjunctive = Present Stem (a changed to e) -f- Personal Endings. Imperfect Subjunctive = Present Stem + Tense Sign (re) + Personal Endings. Perfect Subjunctive = Perfect Stem + Tense Sign (eri) + Personal Endings. Pluperfect Subjunctive — Perfect Stem + Tense Sign (isse) + Personal Endings. 38 LATIN LESSONS. General Questions. What questions does the Direct Object answer ? the Indirect Object ? What Tenses does the Subjunctive lack ? Name the Tenses of the Indicative. How does the Imperfect Indicative differ in meaning from the Perfect ? Translate vocabas ; vocavisti. What two meanings may vocavisti have ? What names are given to the Perfect Tense ? How many Tenses are there in the Indicative differing in form 1 How many differing in meaning 1 How do the forms of tlie Perfect Subjunctive differ from those of the Future Perfect Indicative ? Give a Synopsis of the Indicative and Subjunctive, Active, of narro ; do. LESSON XL FIRST CONJUGATION : IMPERATIVE MODE ; VOCATIVE CASE. SECOND DECLENSION: FlLIUS AND PROPER NAMES IN lUS. Learn N. 57, c; 63, c ; 64, c (Active Endings); 70; 100. Learn the Conjugation of the inoperative Active of amo. A. 128; B. 101; H. 205; App. 28. Vocative Case. Learn N. 145. Learn the Declension of filius, and also of Proper Names in ius; as, Cassius, Manlius. N. 10, d, e. ^ EXERCISE. Translate. Analyze each Sentence. Analyze each Verb-form (64, c). Give Rule for the use and form of each word, 1. Viros bonos amate. 2. Tite, oppidura occnpa. 3. Mi * fill, agricolam voca. 4. Filius mens servum vocat. 5. Concilium, Cal, magnum est. 6. Proeliura, Sabine, nuutia. 7. Pugnato ; pugnanto ; pugnatote. 8. Proelia, mi amice, multa et magna sunt. 9. Auxilium dearum non parvum est. 10. Copiae Cassi (10, e) magnae sunt. 11. Copia frumenti parva est. 12. Date, virl, * Meus has ml (not mee) in the Voc. Sing. Masc. In the other forms it is like bonus. LATIN LESSONS. 39 frumentum equis. 13. Meam patriam, Jull, serva. 14. Equi Juli albi sunt. 15. Concilio, puerl, fabulam narrate. 16. Amato; laudanto; vocatote. Give the Latin for — 1. Figlit, my men. 2. My men fight. 3. Pompey, save the towns. 4. My son, give the money to the daughters of Cassius. 5. TMarcus and Caius are good men. 6. Call the slaves, Marcus. 7. The lieutenants, Caius and Cassius, have seized the town of the Germans. 8. Sabinus, my friend, the rewards of the battle are great. General Questions. What Stem does the Imperative contain ? What can you say of the use of the Future Imperative ? How does Cassius differ in declension from servus ? How does meus differ from bonus ? Give the Vocative of Marcus TuUius ; Lucius Cotta. LESSON XII. FIKST CONJUGATION: INFINITIVES, PARTICIPLES, GERUND, AND SUPINE. Learn N. 57, d; 58, a & IIemark; 59, a, h ; 63, d; 71; 72. Learn the Active Infinitives, Participles, also the Gerund and Supine, of am 6. A. 128; B. 101; H. 205; App. 28. General Questions and Practice. Give the Stem and Ending of the Present Infinitive, also of the Perfect Infinitive. Do Infinitives have Personal Endings ? Give the reason for your answer (15, e, page 4). Of what forms is the Future Infinitive composed ? What Stem does it contain ? Give the Stem and Ending of the Present Parti- ciple of amd ; libero ; vocd. The same Participle in English ends in what let- ters? What Active Participle is found in English, but not in Latin? {Ans. The Perfect; as, having loved.) What Stem does the Future Participle con- tain ? Give its ending. What is a Participle (189) ? To what Declension of Adjectives does the Future Participle belong? Does the Present Participle belong to that Declension ? Why not ? Describe the Gerund ; the Supine.* * The meaning and use of the Supine are taken up later. 40 LATIN LESSONS. In the following sentences, give the exact Latin equivalents for words printed in italics : — He i^^ fighting bravely. He wishes to seize the town. We are said to ham praised the slave. He is thought to he about to fight. You (plural) are desirous (cupidus) of fighting. Titus will over- come by fighting. He pays (do) attention (opera) to fighting. Give a complete Synopsis (78) of vasto; voco; do; libero, in the Active Voice. The following Verbs belong to the First, Second, Third, and Fourth Conjugations. The Koman Numeral at the left of each indicates its Conjugation. Their Principal Parts are given, and, in answering the questions below, precisely the same Rules for Stems, Formation of Tenses, etc., are to be applied, as for amo. (See N. 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72.) Present Present Perfect Indicative. Infinitive. Indicative. Supine. I. servo. servare. servavT, servatum. II. moneo, monere. monui, monitum. III. rego. regere, rexi. rectum. IV. audio, audire, audivi, auditum. Questions and Application of Principles. Give all the Stems of these Verbs (66, 67). Conjugate the Imperfect Sub- junctive of each; the Perfect Indicative; the Perfect Subjunctive; the Pluper- fect Subjunctive; the Pluperfect Indicative; the Future Perfect Indicative. Give all the Infinitives of each. Conjugate the Present Indicative of moned; the Imperfect Indicative ; the Imperative; the Future Indicative. What is the Present Imperative, Second Person Singular, of regd 1 audio ? What is the Present Participle of servd ? moneo 1 regd ? Give the Gerund of servd; moned; regd. Give the Supine forms of the four Verbs. How may the Imperfect Subjunctive Active of all Conjugations be found ? C69,6.) LATIN LESSONS. 41 LESSON XIIL DECLENSION OF DEUS ; IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES; GENI- TIVE IN lUS, DATIVE IN I. Learn the Declension of deus, N. 10,/. Learn the list of Adjectives having Tus in the Genitive, and i in the Dative, N. 43, a, b. Decline them. A. 83, «, ^; B. 66; H. 151 ; App. 11. General Questions. What is the Vocative Singular of servus ? deus 1 What is the Nominative Singular Neuter of malus ? alius ? Decline together the Masculine of bonus and alius ; the Feminine; the Neuter. How does alter differ from the others in declension? {Ans. The i is short in the Genitive; as, alte'rius, but utrius, alius.) How does alter differ in meaning from alius? {Ans. Alius means another J of several; alter, the other, of two.) Decline together the Latin for no god ; any hoy ; another gift ; the other sailor ; one daughter (in the singu- lar); the other son; no way ; the whole tovm (in the singular). What is a Diphthong ? Pronounce deae ; neuter ; coelum. EXERCISE. Translate. Decline the Nouns and Adjectives, Conjugate the Verbs, 1. Alii viri templa aedificant. 2. Injuriae .alterius viri multae sunt. 3. Victoriae iinius legatl non multae sunt. 4. Nulli agri . Germanorum vacant. 5. Natiira amico meo vitam longam non dedit. 6. Equi neutrius servi nigri sunt. 7. Occupate, viri, totum oppidum. 8. NullI pogtae* Caium laudabunt. 9. Aliud templum altum est. 10. Lauda, Cassi, servos solos. 11. Nuntia, Marce, proelium Caio soli. 12. Amici mei, po^tae fabulam nar- rabimus. ♦ The mark ("') is called a Diaeresis^ and shows that the vowel over which it is placed does not form a Diphthong with the preceding vowel. Poeta is pronounced po-6'-ta. 42 LATIN LESSONS. Give the Latin for — 1. Of other gods ; to one god. 2. Por the goddesses alone. 3. Of any aid ; for no aid. 4. The life of the other horse is long. 5. The Romans alone give aid to the Gauls. 6. Julius, the Germans' will seize the whole town of Geneva. 7. The glory alone of the war is great. 8. The stars alone are bright. 9. Other forces will fight. 10. We show (point out) the dangers of one battle. LESSON XIV. NOUNS: THIRD DECLENSION; ELEMENTARY PRACTICE. Remark. Nouns of the Third Declension have a great variety of forms in the Nominative Singular ; but their Case-endings follow the same law (N. 6). These nouns are Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter; but as their gender de- pends largely upon their Nominative endings^ and as there are over twenty diflferent endings in the Nominative, the Gender of nouns in the Third Declen- sion is not so easily distinguished as in the other Declensions. The Stems of nouns in the Third Declension have various endings ; and this fact is apt to present some- difficulty to the beginner. In this Lesson, eight nouns are given for practice : three Masculine, two Feminine, three Neuter. Their Gender can be easily remembered by their mean- ing. The Stem of each can be found by cutting off the ending is from the Genitive Singular; as, milit-, nfimin-, reg- (stems of miles, nomen, rex). English words derived from the Latin are given to show that the Latin Stem is often found in the English word, and so to aid the pupil's memory. Learn the Eemakk at the head of this Lesson. Learn N. 6 (for the Third Declension) ; 8 (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (6). Learn the Declension of consul, miles, rex, virgo, soror, caput, nomen, corpus. A. 46, 49; B. 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36; H. 58, 59, 60, 61; A pp. 3, 4. EXERCISE. Translate, Decline the Nouns and give their Stems. Conjugate the Verbs. 1. Legatus milites consnlis landavit. 2. Soror regis virginem LATIN LESSONS. 43 laudabit. 3. Caput equi magnum est. 4. Corpora virorum magna sunt. 5. Miles regi proelium nuntiaverat. 6. Filii regum mall sunt. 7. Eiliae Titi legatT virginera timidam vocavere. 8. Amate, pueii, sorores.* 9. Consules oppidis nomina dederint. Give the Latin for — 1. To the kings; the king's; the kings' horses. 2. For the consul's sisters. 3. With the bodies of the soldiers. 4. The maiden's sister's name. 5. sister; the consuls' soldiers. 6. For the body of the horse. 7. The boy's head is small. 8. My friend's sisters are praising the consul's daughters. General Questions. What is the Stem of miles'? caput? virgo ? rexl soror? consul- corpus? nomen? What are the Case-endings of a Masculine or Feminine nomi ? of a Neuter noun ? In what Cases will the endings vary with different nouns ? {A71S. Nominative and Vocative Singular.) What Cases are always alike in Neuter nouns of all Declensions ? LESSON XV. NOUNS: THIRD DECLENSION; GENERAL PRINCIPLES; GENDER. General Principles. Learn N. 1 & (2), (3), (4), a; 2 (1), (2), (3), (4) ; 11 (entire) ; 12 (entire) ; 13 (entire) ; 14. Mules of Gender. Learn the Nominative Gender Endings of Nouns of the Third Declension. N. 4 (3). Questions and Practice. The answers to these questions are given in the Notes on this Lesson, and i7i the Examples under them. Into what two classes are nouns of the Third Declension divided (11)? What is the Genitive Plural of the nouns whose stems are milit-, navi-, * The possessive words, my, your, their, etc., are not expressed in Latin when they can be readily supplied from the general meaning of the sentence. 44 LATIN LESSONS. jtldic-, rgg-, aetat-, custdd-, lapid-, turri-, virgin-, capit-, ndmin-, corpor-? Give the Nominative Singular of each. What changes of conso- nants or vowels appear in them? Why is not the Genitive Singular of corpus, corposis? What is meant by ''increasing in the Genitive " (16) ? What is an abstract noun ? a collective noun ? * In the following list of nouns, tlie Nominative and Genitive Singular of each are given ; tell the Gender of each noun, and give the reason : — Aesias (aestatis), opus (operis), lux (lucis), oratio (orationis, a speech or speaking), honor (honoris), animal (animalis), turris (turris), leo (leonis), calcar (calcaris), mos (moris), virtus (virtu- tis), tempus (teraporis), agger (aggeris), ntibes (nubis), obses (obsidis), mare (maris), legio (legionis, a legion), pater (patris), palus (paludis), trames (tramitis), pax (pacis), rex (regis), onus (oneris), civitas (civitatis), altitiido (altitudinis, height), caput (capitis), urbs (urbis), nomen (nominis), riipes (rupis),flos (floris), genus (generis), consul (consulis), custos (custodis), soror (soro- ris), nox (noctis), hostis (hostis, an enemy), vectigal (vectigalis) . Decline the nouns whose stems are : aetat-, Itic-, custod-, virtut-, lapid-. LESSON XVI. NOUNS: THIRD DECLENSION; CONSONANT -STEMS. Eeview all the Notes at the head of Lesson XV. ' Learn Section 4, a, d (omitting the Eemark), page 17. Learn, also, N. 15 & a, b, Eemark. Learn the Declension of all the Nouns given in A. 46, 49 ; or B. 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36; or H. 57, 58, 59, 60, 61; or A pp. 3, 4. * An abstract noun is the name of a quality {eis, height, bravery, greatness, goodness, etc. ), or of an action (as, siege, running), A collective noun is defined in section 3, d, page 1. LATIN LESSONS. 45 To THE Student. Remember that, to inflect a noun of the Third Declen- sion, two things must be known: 1, its Genitive Singular (which will show the Stem) ; 2. its Gender. Remember, also, that the Stems of Latin words are very often found in English words derived from them ; this fact is of great value as a means of aiding the memory, as has already been said. Many such may be found in the Latin words used in this Lesson and Lesson XIV. ; as, FLOR-AL (flor-; stem of flos); capit-al (capit-, stem of caput); princip-al (princip-, stem of princeps). General Questions and Practice. Decline each of the following nouns side hy side with the proper form of the adjective. First decide the gender of the noun, and make the adjective agree with it in gender. The Genitive forms of the nouns are given in Lesson XV. and in the Vocabulary for this Lesson. Aestas longus. Opus magna. Lux clarum. Honor magnus. Leo parva. Mos bonum. Longitudo magna. Virtus magnus. Tempus longa. Legio nullus. Pater bona. Eex misera. Civitas uUa. Caput alius. Nomen solus. Elos alba. Consul aegrum. Gustos tinus {in singular). Soror beatus. What Consonants are called Liquids t Why? What Mutes suffer some change before si Do nouns having consonant-stems increase in the Genitive ? How do pater, mater, frater differ from the other nouns of this class ? EXERCISE. * Translate. Decline the Nouns and Adjectives. Conjugate the Verbs. Give the Stem of each Noun. Tell how the Nominative Singular is formed from, the Stem. 1. Flores albi sunt. 2. Altitudo muri magna est. 3. Patrl puerl librum dedit. 4. Consules opus militum laudaverant. 5. Morem malum non laudabimus. 6. Soror regis filiabus consalum flores dat. 7. Virtus regum non parva est. 8. Nomina florum multa sunt. 9. Principes * beat! sunt. Give the Latin for — 1. To the guards of the gates. 2. In width of fields. 3. Of • * The Gender is often decided by the sense^ without regard to the Nomi- native ending. 46 LATIN LESSONS. the king's soldiers. 4. By tlie great height of the wall. 5. To my brothers' bravery. 6. The honors of a good man are great. 7. The light of the stars is bright. 8. The king praised my father; he will not praise my mother. 9. The leaders of the Gauls will have laid waste the whole town. LESSON XVIL NOUNS: THIRD DECLENSION; VOWEL-STEMS. Learn N. 16, entire ; 17, entire. Learn the Declension of the Nouns given under one of these Eeferences : A. 52 ; B. 38, 39 ; H. 62, 63 ; App. 5. Mixed Stems {consonant-stems in the Singular, vowel-stems in the Plural). Learn N. 18. Learn the Declension of urbs and nox, A. 54 ; or of arx, B. 40 : or of urbs and arx, H. 64 ; or of urbs, mous, nox, App. 6. Questions. Do nouns having i'Stems increase in the Genitive ? Do those having conso^ nant-stems ? How do nouns {vowel-stems) usually form the Nominative Singu- lar from the Stem ? What nouns do not ? What vowel change is very common ? Give the Nominative Singular endings of nouns of this class. What nouns have i as the regular ending in the Ablative Singular ? What nouns have e or i ? What nouns seein to increase in the Genitive ? Explain this ? What is the Genitive Plural of pars, nox, mons, urbs ? Why ? What name may be given to the stems of these nouns ? What three classes of stems may nouns of the Third Declension have ? \^Ans, I. Consonant (Mute or Liquid); as, milit-, r6g-, virgin-, corpor-: II. Vowel (i); as, navi-, nubi-, animali-i Hi. Mixed; as, urb-, mont- (Singular); urbi-, monti- (Plural)]. What nouns, in common use, are Masculine, contrary to the Kules of Gender (19, a) ? EXERCISE. Translate. Decline the Nouns and Adjectives. Analyze the complete Sentences. 1. Custodes leonum timidi sunt. 2. Principes et duces Gallon- rum pugnaverunt. 3. Montes et^coUes Galliae alti sunt. 4 LATIN LESSONS. 47 Nautae mare et naves amant. 5. Numerus hostium magnus est. 6. Dux hostium fines regis vastaverat. 7. Calcaria duels acuta sunt. 8. Partem urbis occupant. 9. Multa animalia pulclira sunt. 10. Gustos turris amicus mens est. 11. Monstra, Tite, montem. 12. Altittidine montium. 13. Animalium magnorum. 14. Pars navium; naves multae. 15. Montes altos; maris alti. 16. Vectigali magno ; noctium longarum. Give the Latin for — 1. Of taxes; by towers; of the hills; to the leaders of the enemy. 2. Soldiers, lay waste the Germans' territoiy. 3. By fire ; of fires ; for a part of the city. 4. By the sea ; of many seas ; O beautiful city ; lofty mountains. 5. By a great cloud ; O my father; by a bad custom. 6. The bodies of many .animals. 7. Save the city, Caius. Decline, side by side, the Latin words meaning — The deep sea ; a great tax ; a lofty mountain ; a great citadel ; a good custom ; a small body. LESSON XVIIL THE VERB SUM: GENEBAL PRACTICE. Learn N. 55, 83, 84 & a, b, c. Learn the entire Conjugation of sum. A. 119; B. 100; H. 204 \ App. 40. Questions and Practice. How many stems has sum ? What are they ? What forms are lacking in its conjugation ? Give a complete Synopsis of sum. Why is not the Imper- fect Indicative esam, and not eram ? What is Mode ? Tense ? How many meanings has fui ? By what two names is this tense-form called ? Why is sum called a Copula ? What is the Noun or Adjective after it called ? Why ? Tell where these forms are found : este ; fueratis ; sitis ; estis ; fuissemus ; fuerit ; fuisti ; esses ; futtirus ; eratis ; sis j es ; fuere ; suntd. 48 LATIN LESSONS. Give the Latin for — 1. The cities were great. 2. Caius and Marcus will be good leaders. 3. The forces of Pompey, the leader of the enemy, are great. 4. You are a good man, Marcus. 5. My brother had been a teacher. 6. Father, show the boy (129) the beautiful gifts. 7. Boys, be attentive. 8. The flowers are white and beautiful. 9. The example of the consul was bad. 10. The mountain is high. 11. The legions of the enemy will have seized the city of Rome. 12. The number of states will be great. 13. We have been good lieutenants of good soldiers. 14. Men, give corn to the horses. 15. You {plural) will have been timid. 16. The leaders have praised and will praise the legion. 17. My son, be good. LESSON XIX. THE VERB POSSUM; USE OF THE INTINITIVE. Learn N.l (4) b; 85, 1. Learn the Conjugation of possum. A. 120; B. 126; H. 290, 11. ; App. 41. Infinitive as Complement. Learn N. 165, b; 173, Caution. To THE Student. Can and could must always be expressed by possum. EXERCISE. Translate. Apply Rale for the use of each word. Examples on Page 262. 1. Urbes Gallorum expugnare non poterimus. 2. Caesar castra servare non potuit. 3. Militibus arma dare potueris. 4. Judex injustus esse potest. 5. Milites ducis boni ignavi esse non pos- suiit. 6. Servus viro friimentum dare poterat. 7. Noctes longae esse non possunt. 8. Arcem expugnare potueratis. 9. Castra Caesaris loriga et lata sunt. 10. Partem hostium superare potuisti. 11. Date, duces, arma virls. LATIN LESSONS. 49 Give the Latin f 07' — 1. We can fight; you (singular) could fight. 2. You {plural) could have overcome Titus, the leader. 3. He will not be able to seize the mountain. 4. The keepers could not free the animals. 5. The width of the camp cannot be great. 6. We consuls (106) had not been able to overcome Caesar's forces. 7. No soldiers of the king can be cowardly. 8. The leaders' arms were many and great. Questions and Practice. How are these forms obtained : possum *? possim ? possem ? potui 1 pos- sunt 1 What forms of Conjugation does possum lack ? How is potens used ? Translate rex potens est; consules potentes sumus. Give a complete Syn- opsis of possum. Tell how these Nominatives are formed from their stems : judex ; virtus ; custos ; civitas. Decline, side by side, the Latin for : a large spur ; a long night ; a good work; a cowardly legion; no battle ; a had name. Why is the Complementary Infinitive so called ? LESSON XX. THE INFINITIVE WITH A SUBJECT ACCUSATIVE. Learn N. 143, 166, 189 {the heading only) ; also 56, page 16. Caution. Remember that a Participle is always a Participle, even in a com- pound tense, as the Future Infinitive Active, and must agree with its Noun in Gender, Number, and Case. EXERCISE. Translate. Give Rules for the form and use of all words. Ex- amples on Page 262. The Accusative with the Infinitive should he translated precisely like a clause ; that is, as though the Accusative were Nominative^ and the Infinitive in the Third Person, Singular or Plural. 1. "Urbes magnae sunt." 2. Dicit urbes magnas esse. 3. Nuntiabit Romanos copias Gallorum superavisse. 4. Negat (199, 5) 50 LATIN LESSONS. Caesarem oppidum expugnaturum esse. 5. "Dux castra seiTabit." 6. Legatus dicit ducem castra servaturum esse. 7. Putat legiones pugnare non posse. 8. Puto copias Sabini ignavas esse. 9. Spe- ramus milites consulis Genevarn occupaturos esse. 10. Putabitis consules injustos fuisse. 11. Dicit iter longum futurum esse. 12. Dicit nullos agros vacare. 13. Putas nautam Caesari proelium nuntiare potuisse. 14. Dicit maria lata et alta esse. 15. Putatis rSgem urbi Eomae (106) nomen dedisse. 16. Custodes nuntiant hostes arcem occupavisse. 17. Speras bella loiiga futura esse. 18. Nuntia, Pompei, consuli milites castra servaturos esse. Give the Latin for — 1. He says that the teacher praised the boy. 2. The men think that the mountains are high. 3. You {plural) hope that the sol- diers can protect the city and the citizens. 4. They will deny that the bodies of animals are small. 5. He hopes that the marches will not be long. 6. " The rewards of bravery will be great." 7. The king says that the rewards of bravery will be great. Questions. What is a Direct Quotation t an Indirect Quotation 1 What verbs are fol- lowed by the Infinitive with a Subject Accusative ? Why can puto and sperd be followed by the same construction as died, nego, and nuntio (166, II.)? What Conjunction is omitted in Latin after verbs of saying^ etc. ? LESSON XXL USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.* Learn N. 57, b ; 170; 174 k a, h ; 175 h a, b, c, Eemaek 1. Read carefully section 19, page 6. * To Teachers. Although the Subjunctive presents some difficulties to a beginner, yet it seems best to give him an insight into that mode at an early ^ period of his study, that he may not be compelled to memorize the Subjunctive forms of all the Conjugations, and yet not make a practical application of them. If the principles stated in this Lesson are emphasized when it is LATIN LESSONS. 51 Eeview the Conjugation of the Subjunctive, Active, of amo, sum, possum. 8tudy these References in connection with the Examples for this Lesson (page 263), and also ihefollotoing — Hints for the Student. The Subjunctive Mode has a great variety of uses; this Lesson deals with one which is very common, and which illustrates the whole mode better than any other use. The Indicative states something as 2, fact ; the Subjunctive states something, not as a fact, but as possible or im- possible. The sentences of this Lesson contain the Conjunction si {if), and are called Conditional Sentences. They are Complex (section 40, c, page 12). Of course, the Conjunction si introduces the Subordinate Clause. The state- ment, or more important thought, will always be found in the Principal Clause. In these sentences, both the Indicative and Subjunctive are used. Remember, it is not si that requires the Subjunctive, but the thought to be expressed. Remember ^ that the Subjunctive has no Future or Future Perfect Tense; in such sentences as these, the Present must be used as a Future, and the Perfect as a Future Perfect. Notice that, as in English, ivere (as, if I were rich) indicates that something is not true at the present time ; such a meaning must not be decided by the if clause altogether, but by the Principal clause. Study the Examples. EXERCISE. Translate. Tell what time each Verb denotes, and what kind of a statement it makes. Study the Examples, page 263. 1. Si puellas laudaretis, beatae essent. 2. Si judex Justus fuisset, servum liberavisset. 3. Si Caesar pugnavit, hostes superavit. 4. Si pugnare potuisset, copias Gallorum siiperavisset. 5. Si legati oppida expugnaverint, servi liberi sint. 6. Si Caesar milit^s laudavisset, pugnavissent. 7. Si Titus ignavus sit, urbem iion occupet. 8. Si hostes urbem expugnarent, periculum civium magnum esset. 9. Si servus pugnare posset, pugnaret. 10. Sl hostes superaverimus, oppidum occupemus. 11. Si pugnant, su- perant. 12. Si milites timidi fuissent, German! agros vastavissent. 13. Si timidi fuerunt, non pugnaverunt. 14. Si Titus periculum nuntiet, urbem servare possimus. assigned, the difficulties referred to can be very greatly lessened. Section 19, page 6, if it can be read in the class-room and the Examples under it briefly explained, will make the expression of a possible (or impossible) statement comparatively easy. 52 LATIN LESSONS. Give the Latin for — 1. If Caesar should be judge, lie would be just. 2. If the fathers were good, the sons would be good. 3. If the mothers are bad, the daughters are bad. 4. If they were judges, they were just. 5. If he should storm (should have stormed) the cities, he would free the slaves. 6. If he fights (shall have fought), he will overcome the enemy. 7. If we are slaves, we are not citizens. 8. If he praises (shall praise) the sailors, they will fight. LESSON XXII. FIRST CONJUGATION : PASSIVE VOICE ; ABLATIVE OF MEANS AND AGENT. Learn the Personal Endings of the Passive Voice. N. 64, a. Learn, also, N. 73, a, h, c. Learn the Conjugation of the rresent. Imperfect, and Future Indicative, Passive, of amo. A. 129 ; B. 102 ; H. 206 ; App. 29. Ablative of Means or Instrument. Learn N. 146; 151; 193, 5. Ablative of Agent, Learn N. 151, Caution ; also, N. 95, a, and section 4, b, page 17. EXERCISE. Translate. Apply Rules for Case, Number, etc. Analyze each Verb-form, giving its Stem, Tense Sign {if it have one), and Personal Ending. 1. Urbs expugnatur; oppida expugnantur. 2. Copiae Caesaris superabuntur. 3. Servus liberabitur ; servi iTberabimur. 4. Ama- beris; amamini; amaris; amabaminl. 5. Tite, vulneraberis. 6. Laudamur; laudabitur ; laudatis; laudabunt; laudabimur. 7. Dicit ducem signum tuba datiirum esse. 8. Signum a Caesare LATIN LESSONS. 53 tuba datur. 9. Miles gladio vulnerabitur. 10. Equi ab hostibus vulnerantur. 11. Lapidibus vulnerabimirii. 12. Monies altl a Tito legato occupantur. 13. Proelium Caesari a mllite decimae legioiiis nuiitiabitur. 14. Urbes hostium doiiis magnis servaiitur. 15. Si periculum duel a servo nuiitiabitur, urbs servabitur. 16. Equus puero ab agricola dabitur. Give the Latin for — 1. The tenth legion is praised by Caesar. 2. You {plural) will be wounded by the large stone. 3. The signals are given with a trumpet. 4. You (singula!*) will be freed by the consul. 5. They will not be able to lay w^aste the fields of the enemy. 6. He thinks that the tenth legion w^as able to storm the great city. 7. If they had been able to fight, they would have given the signal. 8. Tight, soldiers; overcome the enemy's forces. 9. He hopes that the leaders will give arms to the tenth legion. 10. If they are (168, a) wounded by the weapons, they will not be able to fight. Questions. What kind of ideas does the Ablative usually express 'i What is the proper position of an adverb or word (or phrase) used adverbially ? What is the dif- ference between a means and an agent ? When should a be used, and when ab ? What tenses does the Subjunctive lack ? How may this lack be sup- plied ? How does the Subjunctive differ (in thought) from the Indicative ? LESSON XXIIL FIRST CONJUGATION : PASSIVE VOICE ; ABLATIVE OF SEPARATION. Learn N. 73, d. Learn the Conjugation of the JPerfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Indicative^ Passive, of amo. A. 129; B. 102; H. 206 ; App. 29. Ablative of Separation. Lenrn N. 147. 54 LATIN LESSONS. EXERCISE. Translate, Analyze, Apply Rule for the form and use of each word. Read the Caution, Lesson XX. 1. Amati sunt; amatus ero; amabimini ; amati estis ; ama- verunt. 2. Milites laudati erant ; puellae laudatae erunt. 3. Dux a mllite vocatus est. 4. Virl tells lapidibusque * vulnerabuntur. 5. Pater amatus est a filils filiabusque.* 6. Gives servitute libembit. 7. Urbs custodibus nudata est. 8. Eex peiiculo magno liberatur. 9. Consules suspicione timoris llberabuntur. 10. Colles multi viris nudati erunt. 11. Castra defensoribus nti- dantur. 12. Muruni custodibus defensoribusque * nudaverunt. 13. Nautae timore servitutis liberati sunt. 14. Oppidura a militi- bus servatum est. 15. Dicit regem filios flliasque* TitI servitute llberaturum esse. Give the Latin for — 1. You (singular^) have been wounded ; we were wounded. 2. He was called ; he used to be called. 3. I shall have been freed; you {plural) had been freed. 4. They will have been called by the boys. 5. The judges cannot free the slaves from fear. 6. He hopes that the forces of the king will overcome the enemy. 7. If he has been wounded, he is wretched. 8. If he should seize the town, he would free the tenth legion from great fear. Questions. What part of the verb is amatus *? What decides its form in a sentence ? What stems are found in the Passive Voice ? What is -que called ? Why ? How does it differ in use from et ? Pronounce lapidibusque ; filiabusque ; defensoribusque ; filiasque. Decline, side by side, the Latin for no small animal; another great danger. * Learn 96, a, 1, 2 ; 195, 3, 4, LATIN LESSONS. 55 LESSON XXIV. FIRST CONJUGATION: SUBJUNCTIVE PASSIVE. Learn N. 74, a, h. Learn the Conjugation of the Subjunctive Passive of am6. A. 129; B. 102; H. 206; App. 29. EXERCISE. Translate. Analyze^ each sentence according to 194, c. Tell the time and thought expressed by each verb. Study the Special Examples, 1. Si vita longa regibus daretur, beat! essent. 2. Si castra ab hostibus occupata sint, defensoribus nudentur. 3. Si laudatus es, beatus fnisti. 4. Si servus liberetur, pugnet. 5. Si pueri boni fuissent, laudati essent. 6. Si urbes expugnatae sint, perlculum civium magnum sit. 7. Si pugnetis, laudemini. 8. Si pugna- bunt, laudabuntur. 9. Si virtiis militum magna esset, laudarentur. 10. Si exemplum amici mei malum est, non amatur. 11. Si arx expugnata sit, sorores filiaeque regis timidae sint. 12. Si signum tuba datum esset, pugnavissemus. 13. Si peciinia servis a rege bono data sit, liberentur. 14. Pilia agricolae silvas multas mag- nasque esse dicit. Questions. What is mode ? How does tlie Subjunctive differ from the Indicative in making a statement ? Does si 'Hake the Subjunctive " ? Give a synopsis of the Indicative and Subjunctive, Active and Passive, of amd ; laudd ; vocO. Which tenses of these modes are compound ? Which are simple ? What is the tense-sign of the Imperfect Indicative ? Imperfect Subjunctive ? Future ♦ In general, special directions concerning the analysis of sentences are not given with the Exercises. The teacher can use his own judgment as to the extent to which he desires this to be practised. The directions for analysis (194) and the "Hints on Translation" (200) will be found useful by the beginner. 56 LATIN LESSONS. Indicative ? Pluperfect Subjunctive Active ? Pluperfect Indicative Active ? Give the stems of laudd ; do ; vulnero. Conjugate the Imperative Active of ocGupO ; liberd. Tell where these forms are found : ameris ; amatis ; amati ess§tis ; amatus eras ; amareris ; amabimini ; ames ; amatae sint ; am&visses ; amentur ; laudati estis ; laudemini ; laudabere. o>©<o LESSON XXV. FIRST CONJUGATION : PASSIVE VOICE : IMPERATIVE, INFINITIVE, PARTICIPLES. Learn N. 75, 76, 77. Learn the imperative, Infinitive^ and Participles, Passive^ of amo. A. 129; B. 102; H. 206; A pp. 29. To THE Student. In future Lessons, no special directions will he given with eoxh Exercise. It is expected that the student will prepare himszlf thoroughly on each. The proper preparation of an Exercise includes Trans- lation ; Conjugation of Verbs ; Declension of Nouns and A djectives ; Rules for Gender, Number, and Case of Nouns and Adjectives ; Rules for Agree- ment of Verbs ; Reason for use of Modes. EXERCISE. 1. Liberator; liberare; liberamini; liberantor. 2. Voca; vo- canto ; vocato ; vocate ; vocatote. 3. Putat pueros attentos esse. 4. Dicit milites a duce laudatos (108) esse. 5. Mons a Tito legato occupari (165, b) potest. 6. Dicit urbem a decima legione expugnari posse. 7. Consul opus servl laudavisse putatur. 8. Negat animalia liberata esse. 9. Dicit puellas attentas a magistro laudaii. 10. Putat regem suspicione timoris liberatum esse. 11. Milites , Sabini urbes hostium occupatas esse nuntiaverunt. 12. Negat agros vastaii. 13. Nuntia, Cassi, hostes superatos esse. 14. Putamus jtidiees justos fuisse. 15. Si urbs expugnari possit, expugnetur. LATIN LESSONS. 57 Give the Latin for — 1. We think that the gifts were great. 2. He will deny that the towers of the citadel are high. 3. The mountains can be seized by the lieutenant. 4. The leader says that the Gauls have been overcome by the soldiers. 5. You (^plural) think that many cities have been stormed by Cassius. General Questions and Drill. What names are given to the Active Participles ? to the Passive ? Give a complete synopsis, Active and Passive, of voc6. Decline alius; tinus. Decline, sidelDy side, the Latin for no night ; a high mountain; a free state; a large head. Decline, side by side, pater, navis, mare. \ LESSON XXVI. ADJECTIVES: THIRD DECLENSION. Learn N. 24, b ; 25 & a, h ; 26, «, b. Learn the Declension of the Adjectives mentioned under one of these References: acer, levis, A. 84; acer, fortis, B. 68, 69; 5cer, tristis, H. 153, 154 ; acer, fortis, App. 12, 13. EXERCISE. 1. Aestates breves sunt. 2. Onera servorum miserorum ^ravia fuerunt. 3. Dicit homines omnes mortales esse. 4. Milites alacres fortesque erunt. 5. Putat deos immortales esse. 6. Dicit socios celeres futHros esse. 7. Itinere longo difficilique veiiit {he came). 8. Putat onus grave portari posse. 9. Si socii omnes fortes sint, hostes urbis superemus. 10. Si Caesar vulneratus esset, tristes fuissemus. 11. Onus leve a puero parvo portaii potest. 12. Omnia bell a non iitilia sunt. 13. Templa diis (131) immortalibus ab hominibus mortalibus aedificata sunt. 14. Ars longa est; tempus breve est. 15. Dicit aestates breves futiiras 58 LATIN LESSONS. esse. 16. Si dux fortis esset, milites fortes alacresque essent. 17. Po^tae filias dearum immortales esse putaiit. Give the Latin for — 1. The leaders' sons are brave. 2. The gods are friends and allies of the Romans. 3. The gift is large and heavy. 4. You {plural) are sad; he is sad. 5. He says that the journey will be easy. 6. Useful gifts were given to the brave allies. 7. allies, be brave. 8. My friend, you can be a good and useful man. 9. All men (mankind) are mortal. 10. He says that light burdens can be carried by small boys. 11. All animals are not swift. Questions. How do pater, navis, mare, when declined side by side, differ from acer ? Tell the Stem, Genitive Singular Neuter, Ablative Singular Feminine, Dative Singular Masculine, Genitive Plural Neuter, of these Adjectives : acer ; brevis ; solus ; celer ; omnis ; alius ; alacer. What is meant by three terminations (or endings) ? by two endings ? How does homo differ in mean- ing from vir ? (See General Vocabulary, vir.) LESSON XXVII. ADJECTIVES: THIRD DECLENSION; SUBJUNCTIVE EX- PRESSING A COMMAND. Learn N. 25, c; 26, e & Caution. Learn the Declension of atrox, egens, par, vetus, dives, A. 85, a, b ; or that of Adjectives given in B. 70; or in H. 156, 157, 158; or in App. 14 & « (omitting praeceps, iens). Subjunctive expressing Command, Eochortation, etc. Learn N. 164, c & Eemark. Learn, also, section 20, page 7. EXERCISE. 1. Corpora Germanorum ingentia fuerunt. 2. Dicit Caesarem divitem potenteraque esse. 3. Putat urbes florentes futuras esse. LATIN LESSONS. 59 4. Oppida Vetera sunt. 5. Dicit socios infelices fuisse. 6. Si duces uon fortes essent, infelices essemus. 7. Milites Roman! audaces erunt. 8. Periculum ducis et railitum par fuit. 9. Vie- to riae recentes regis fuerunt multae. 10. Dicit iter breve facileque futurum esse. 11. Amlci liominum sapientium felices sunt. 12. Viii fortes a regibus nobilibus laudabuntur. 13. Si iwfelix sis, miser sim. 14. Gloria urbium veteruin magna fuit. 15. Miles fortis a servo ignavo superari non potest. 16. Fortes simus; audaces este; boni sint. 17. Dux socios laudet; ducem laude- mus. 18. Lauda, consul, milites. 19. Gives regem bonum ament. 20. Servos liberemus; felices sint. 21. Nautae naves aedificent. 22. Naves a nautis aedificentur. Give the Latin for — 1. By the recent victories of the Roman forces. 2. Of the equal dangers. 3. To the noble kings and consuls. 4. un- happy legions, be brave. 5. Of huge bodies. 6. By a wide sea. 7. He will have announced the recent dangers. 8. He says that the city, is flourishing. 9. The lion and horse are large. 10. Wise men are happy. 11. Let us storm the cities and towns. 12. Friends, be wise. 13. Let the king be just. 14. Boys and girls, love your (omit) father and mother. 15. Let us love (our) country. Questions. What is an adjective of one ending t What adjectives of the Third Declen- sion have three endings ? Which have two t Which have one ? How many endings have brevis *? ingens ? celer ? vetus 1 What Persons has the Present Imperative ? How is the lack supplied ? Show how an Imperative thought may be expressed in all the Persons of sum and amO. Which of these forms expresses a direct command ? Decline, side by side, the Latin for a noble name. 60 LATIN LESSONS. LESSON XXVIII. ADJECTIVES : REGULAR COMPARISON ; DECLENSION OF COMPARATIVES. Learn N. 29 ; 30 (entire) ; 40, b. Declension of Comparatives, Learn N. 26, d, & CaUTION. Learn the Declension of melior, A. 86 ; or fortior, B. 69 ; or tristior, H. 154 ; or fortior, App. 15. Questions and General Drill. Compare acutus, audax, altus, ingens, attentus, felix, clarus, latus, potens, longus, sapiens, amicus, amans. Decline the Comparative of altus, nobilis, potens. In how many ways are adjectives compared, both in English and Latin ? Decline, side by side, the Latin for a higher teviple ; a more wretched daughter ; the dearest son ; a deeper sea. To what Declen- sion of Adjectives does the Superlative always belong ? EXERCISE. 1. Dicit hostes fortissimos esse. 2. Putat fratres amantiores futtiros esse. 3. Aedui amicissimi erunt. 4. Si equites fortiores fuissent, Ariovistum superavissemus. 5. Dicit leges titilissimas esse. 6. Si Ariovistus, rex Germanorum, amicus esset, felices essemus. 7. Pedites audacissimi ab equitibus siiperari non pos- sunt. 8. Dicit legem breveiii esse titiliorem. 9. Putat urbes Eo- manas amicissimas fuisse. 10. Corpora leonum ingentia erant. 11. Nuntiat equites audaciores esse. 12. Opus fratris mei utilius est. 13. Si aestas longior fuisset, Ariovistus a Caesare superatus esset. 14. Dicit onus levius esse. 15. Templa altiora aedificata erunt. 16. Si leges bonae essent, civitas florentior esset. 17. Gives periculis recentibus liberati sunt. 18. Dicit insulas longis- simas latissimasque esse. 19. Si bellum brevius sit, urbs expug- naiinon possit. 20. Pueri, amantiores este. 21. Judex justior sit. 22. Nuntiabit dona Aeduis ab Ariovisto, rege potentissirao, data esse. 23. Dicit murum defensoribus ab bostibus nudatum esse. LATIN LESSONS. 61 Give the Latin for — 1. Let the forces be very brave. 2. He says that the rich cities are very flourishing. 3. Let the battle be brief. 4. Life is dear to cowardly soldiers. 5. Priends, let us free the city from slavery. LESSON XXIX. ADJECTIVES: IRREGULAR COMPARISON;* ADVERBS. Adjectives Jutving Irregular Superlatives, Learn N. 31, a, b (learn the list). Adjectives having Irregular Comparatives and Superla- tives. Learn N. 33. Learn the Comparison (and meanings) of bonus, malus, magnus, parvus, multus, multa, multum. A. 90; B. 72; H. 165; App. 17, a. Adverbs. Learn N. 38 (entire); 94: k aj 193, 5. Leani, also, section 28, page 9. Questions and Practice. Compare miser, bonus, facilis, utilis, acer, malus, celer, audax, mag- nus, similis, parvus, fortis, multus, multa, multum, sapiens. Which of these have no peculiarities of comparison ? Which have but one, and what is that ? What is the rule for the use of an adverb ? Give the Latin adverbs meaning attentively, bravely. State the rule for forming each. How may the Comparative and Superlative of an adverb be found? Form and compare adverbs derived from carus, audax, diligens (38, b, last part), liber, malus, longus, felix, facilis (39), sapiens, celer, fortis, nobilis, latus. What adjectives are compared like acer ? like facilis ? Where does an adverb regu- larly stand in a sentence ? What ideas may adverbs express ? EXERCISE. 1. Dicit legatum oppidum raajus expugnare. 2. Naves mini- mae (40, b) sunt. 3. Putat milites plurimos pugnaturSs esse. 4. Dicit iter difficillimum fuisse. 5. Corpora equorum majora * The comparison of citerior, superior, etc., is presented later. 62 LATIN LESSONS. quam leonum sunt. 6. Putat fratres Titi dissimillimos esse. 7. Si periculum minus esset, audacius pugnaremus. 8. Veteres urbes majores fuerunt. 9. Copiae Sabiiii ducis acerrirae pugnabunt. 10. Dicit oppidum Genevam celeriter expugnari posse. 11. Mili- tes, audacter pugneinus. 12. Turres facile servare poterimus. 13. Dicit castra diligentissime servata esse. 14. Virtus Cassi major est quam Titi. 15. Putat Germanos omnes inimicissimos esse. 16. Urbem diligentius servemus. 17. Si fortius acriusque pugnemus, ab Gallis non superemur. 18. Pltirima templa minora sunt. 19. Gloria praemium melius est. Give the Latin for these sentences and phrases (Englisb words in parentheses not to be translated into Latin) — 1. Many (men) think that the war was very great. 2. They had fought very boldly. 3. If the battle had been announced more quickly, the city would have been saved. 4. Of very bad kings ; to worse poets. 5. Of a greater camp ; to a smaller body. 6. He easily freed the very wretched slaves. 7. The number of small animals is very great. 8. Of better sons; to very many daughters. 9. Let us be friendly and useful. 10. The ships of the Gauls are longer and wider than (thope) of the Eomans. 11. Let us be better citizens. 12. He says that the infantry and cav- alry were praised by Caesar. »oj«{o« LESSON XXX. VERBS: SECOND CONJUGATION. In the Second Conjugation there are the same rules for the for- mation of tenses from stems as in the Pirst Conjugation. There is only one exception: the rresent Subjunctive [N. 69, a (2)]. Learn N. 69, a (2); 79, 1. Eeview N. 65, 66, 67, 68; 69, b, Cy d; and from 70 to 77. Learn the entire Conjugation, Active and Passive, of moneo. A. 130; B. 103, 104; H. 207, 208; App. 30, 31. LATIN LESSONS. 63 General Questions. No Special Vocabularies will he given for the remaining Lessons. Hereafter the meanings of all Latin words must be obtained from the General Vocabu- lary. What are the Principal Parts of moneo and habed 1 What are the stems of each ? If the Perfect and Supine were formed like those of amO, what would they be? {Ans. monevi, monetum ; habevi, habetum.) How are monui, monitum ; habui, habitum, formed from these ? What is v (see 3, page 17) ? Are there any verbs in the Second Conjugation having 6vi, 6tum, in the Perfect and Supine (79, 1) ? Give the Principal Parts (in both Voices) and stems of compleo.* Give the Present Subjunctive, Active and Passive, of am6, moned. Give a complete synopsis of moneO, in both Voices (78). EXERCISE. Notice carefully the Tense-signs. 1. Monueratis ; monetis ; monebis ; monuerit. 2. Monuistis ; mones ; monebatis ; monebunt. 3. Moneberis ; monitus es ; mo- nebatur ; monebimim. 4. Moneris ; moniti eramus ; monemiui ; moniti erunt. 5. Mone pueros; monete ducem. 6. Si puerum moneas, felix sit. 7. bi equos liaberemus, fortiter pugnaremus. 8. Si Tit urn monuerit, oppidum expugnet. 9. Si naves multas habuissent, felloes fuissent. 10. Dicit consulem ducem monere. 11. Dicit ducem a consule moneri. 12. Putat Gallos naves pliiri- mas habuisse. 13. NuntL.t naves militibus a Caesare completas esse. 14. Dicit consules sapientes duces fortes monituros esse. 15. Putat le^tum a rege monitum esse. 16. Naves compleri non potuerunt. 17. Si moneretar, melior esset. 18. Si moneamini, feliciores sitis. 19. Si viri iitiliores cives sint, laudentur. 20. Milites a ducibus moniti erunt. 21. Galli templa altiora latio- raque habuerunt. 22. Filiam Marci moneamus. 23. Civem bo- num sapientemque laudemus. Give the Latin for — 1. The ditches (fossa) were filled. 2. The ships were being filled. 3. We (feminine) shall have been advised. 4. Let us * Compled, / fill, fill up, is the verb from which we get the word Comple- ment (that ^shich fills out the Predicate); also, Complementary (that use of the Infinitive which completes the meaning of another verb). 64 LATIN LESSONS. advise the king's sous. 5. Let us have peace. 6. He will advise the man very well (adverb of good). 1. You (plural) hsid filled the ships with men and boys. 8. He says that the ditches have been filled. 9. He thinks that the sailors can build a larger ship. 10. If he had had very many soldiers, he would have laid waste the enemy's fields. LESSON XXXI. General Review. (1) Decline the Latin for another danger; a wider sea; a greater animal ; a xiery small state ; a loorse son ; a better daughter ; a wise citizen ; an easy journey ; a heavy body. (2) Give the Gender Endings of the Third Declension ; of the Second; of the First. What nouns of the Third Declension (in common use) are Masculine, contrary to the Rule (19, a) ? What classes of stems has the Third Declension ? Name the stems of caput, mare, corpus, rex, leo, virgo, animal, magnitude, flos, miles, iter, ignis, mens, mos, nubes. Give the Ablative Singular and the Genitive Plural of these same words. Give the Vocative Singular of deus, Caius Julius Caesar, filius ; the Dative Plural of dea, filia. (3) What adjectives have ius in the Genitive Singular? Do any have ius? What adjectives have rimus in the Superlative ? What ones have limus 1 Into what classes are adjectives of the Third Declension divided? How are they distinguished ? What is the Ablative Singular of brevis ? acer ? pru- dens*? major? (4) Compare the adjectives meaning: easy^ attentive, high, wise, ba^d, goody wretched, much, many, like, happy, small, bold, difficult, eager. Compare the adverbs meaning : easily, badly, fiercely, wisely j happily, dearly, boldly, carefidly, timidly. (5) Translate these sentences and tell : — I. What TIME each denotes. II. What thought each expresses. 1. Si puerum monere possem, felix essem. 2, Si pugnavit, superavit. 3. Si dux milites moneat, sapiens sit. 4. SI naves aedificatae essent, minimae fuissent. 5. Si sapientes sunt, felices sunt. 6. Si urbem servare potuerira, elves serventur. (6) Give the tense-signs of the following : — Imperfect Subjunctive; Future Indicative; Future Perfect Indicative {Ac- tive); Perfect Subjunctive {Active)', Imperfect Indicative; Pluperfect Sub- junctive {Active)', Pluperfect Indicative {Active). How is the Present Sub- LATIN LESSONS. 65 junctive {Active and Passive) formed in the First Conjugation ? in the Second ? Illustrate by super 6 and habed. What Participles has the Active Voice ? the Passive? Give all the Participles of libero, moneo, do, babeo, spero, com- plex (7) Translate these sentences, and give the Rule for the case and gender of each noun and adjective : — Reges Gallonim sapientiores quam German or um fuerunt. EquI animalia celerrima sunt. Titus legatus Caesaris oppidum Genevam expugnabit. Equi- tes fortissimi sunt. Dux decimae legion! friinientura dedit. LESSON XXXIL DEPONENT VERBS: FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS. Learn N. 80, entire. Learn the Conjugation of hortor and vereor (see General Vocabulary). The Conjugation of these or similar verbs is given in A. 135 ; B. 113 ; H. 232, and Note ; App. 37. Notice that these verbs are conjugated exactly like the Passive of am6 and moned, with these exceptions : (1) The Future Infinitive is Active in form ; (2) After the Infinitive Mode, Deponent Verbs have all the forms of hath Voices. Questions. What does Deponent mean ? Why are these verbs so called ? Give a com- plete synopsis of cdnor, doceo, polliceor. What stems does a Deponent Verb have? Give the stems of doceo and terreo. Give the Latin for less toidely, more widely, very widely. EXERCISE. 1. Conatus est; conans ; conare; conabuntur. 2. Yeretur; veriti sumus; veriti eritis; verebamini; vereberis. 3. Opus magnum conati sumus. 4. Puerum parvum docere conabitur. 5. Puellas doceamus. 6. Laudem magnam mereamur. 7. Si pueros puellasque docuissent, laetati essemus. 8. Hostes agros sociorum fortium- populabuntur. 9. Insulam minorem popular! conantur. 10. Hostes itinere prohibere coiiabimur. 11. Dicit 66 LATIN LESSONS. viros fortes praemia maxima meritos esse. 12. Putat militem laudem merittiriim esse. 13. Honorem merebimur. 14. Laete- mur; milites hortemur. 15. Dicit duces copias hortari et horta- ttiros esse. 16. Dicit leonem magnum servos timidos terruisse. 17. Copiae hostium latius vagabantur. 18. Minus late vagabimini. 19. Putat equites minus audacter pugnattiros esse. 20. Milites, minus late vagaminL 21. Duci pectiniam polliciti sunt. 22. Ee- gibus dona magna polliceamur. 23. Verebimur magnitudinem sil varum. 24. Dicit homines pessimos praemia non mereri. Give the Latin for — 1. He thinks that the tenth legion can keep the enemy from the city. 2. We can try to teach the boys. 3. He says that Caius and Marcus have been taught by Julius. 4. The leaders, who (qui) have not feared danger, deserve praise. 5. If he should be terrified by the danger of death, he would not be a Eoman. 6. Consuls could not be terrified by bad men. LESSON XXXIIL TWO ACCUSATIVES. Two Accusatives: (1) Both denoting the same Person or Thing. Learn N. 141, a. Learn, also, 37, c, page 10, arid N. 103, a, (2) One denoting the Person, the other denoting the Thing, Learn N. 141, b, & Eemark 1. Questions. What verbs take two Accusatives denoting the saTue person or thing ? What verbs take one Accusative of the person^ aiid another of the thing ? What happens when these verbs are changed to the Passive? Are these strictly Latin idioms ? What two meanings may the plural of littera have ? EXERCISE. 1. Pueros docebimus litteras. 2. Consulem amicum appel- laverunt. 3. Titus amicus appellatus est. 4. Pompeium, virum LATIN LESSONS. 67 fortissimum, imperatorem creabant. 5. Gives, maturate Caesarem consulem creare. 6. Ducem sententiam consulis rogavimus. 7. Consul sententiam rogatur. 8. Puellae litteras a sorore mea doctae erant. 9. Provinciam florentem occupare mattirabimus. 10. Jtilium regem creemus. 11. Romanos frumentum flagitavistl. 12. Gallos copiam frtimenti flagitemus. 13. Pueri magistrum sermonem celabunt. 14. Dicit fltimina altissima latissimaque esse. 15. Viros artes multas docuerit. 16. Titus et Sabinus milites fortissimi appellati sunt. 17. Imperatorem sermonem sociorum celare non potuiraus. 18. Militem nomen imperatoris rogemus. 19. Urbem, quam {which) vides, Eomam appellant. 20. Urbs Eoma appellabitur. 21. Sperat puellas servos miseros littems docere conaturas esse. 22. Litteras scrlbit {writes), quas {which) puero dat. 23. Litterae Caesaris longae sunt. Give the Latin for — 1. If I liad called the man (my) friend, lie would have rejoiced. 2. You {plural) can ask the teacher (his) opinion. 3. He says that the soldiers wdl demand corn of the general. 4. Let us call the town Geneva. 5. The large island was called a province. 6. He denies that other islands are larger. 7. If the enemy should wander about less widely, we should not be frightened. 8. We shall see the men whom (quos) you tried to terrify. 9. The rich men will promise money, but will not give (it). 10. We think that the best and wisest citizens will elect Ariovistus king. LESSON XXXIV. ADJECTIVES: IRREGULAR COMPARISON; DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES. Learn N. 34, 35 ; also the Comparison (and English meanings) of the Adjectives described in those Notes. A. 91 & a; B. 73 ; H. 163, 3 ; 166 ; App. 17, 5, c. 68 LATIN LESSONS. Cotnparison by Adverbs (magis and maximS). Learn N. 37. Dative tvith Adjectives: (1) To denote Advantage or Disadvantage. Learn N. 131 k b, (2) With Adjectives meaning like (or unlike), equal (or unequal), and near. Learn N. 132. Notice how similar this is to the Eng- lish construction. EXERCISE. Examples for this Lesson are given on page 265. 1. Negat nrbes Galliae citerioris majores quam Galliae ulterioris esse. 2. Maria ultima altissima sunt. 3. Putat urbem finibus Belgarum proximam fuisse. 4. Aestates priores longae erant. 5. Superiorem partem collis castris compleverant. 6. Belgae proximi sunt Germanis. 7. Dicit summum (110, h) montem a Tito teneii. 8. Duel servi fideles erunt. 9. Viri pueris irati (angry) fuerunt. 10. Dona Caesaris civibus grata sunt. 11. Dicit Aeduos Eomanis amicos fuisse. 12. Urbs Geneva Helvetiis caris- sima fuit. 13. Gallis inimici simus. 14. Nuntiat locum castris idoneum esse. 15. Urbi utiles simus. 16. Titus Caesari similis est. 17. Locus magis idoneus castris quam urbi fuit. 18. Patri meo siraillimus es. 19. Imperator militibus fortibus earns est. 20. Putat filios patribus dissimiles esse. 21. Si Caesar Pompeio inimicus sit, laudem non mereatur. 22. Pueri, quos (whom) lit- tcms docere conatus es, fideles erunt. 23. Animalia, quae (which) vidisti, leonibus simillima fuerunt. 24. Hostibus pares esse po- terimus. 25. Oppidum propius Rbeno quam Ehodano est. Give the Latin for — 1. The lower part of tlie river Rhine. 2. We are a matcli for (equal to) the Belgae. 3. You (plural) are very dear to all Ro- mans. 4. He says that the general cannot be friendly to the con- suls. 5. The towns of hither Gaul are very small. 6. The girls are very like (their) mothers. 7. You (singular) can be more useful to the city thaa to the camp. 8. The friends of Marcus are very unfriendly to Sabinus. 9. The width of the upper part of the temple was very great. LATIN LESSONS. 69 LESSON XXXV. NOUNS: FOURTH DECLENSION. Learn N. 20 (entire) ; 21 k a; also the Case-Endings of the Fourth Declension, N. 6. Learn the Declension of the Nouns given in A. 68; or B. 48; or H. 116; or App. 8. Domus. Learn N. 21, b ; also its Declension. A. 70, /; B. 49, 4 ; H. 119, 1 ; App. 8, a. Questions. What is the stem of magistratus 1 cornu? manus? State the laws of gender for the Fourth Declension, and give two exceptions. Give a synopsis, Active and Passive, of moved. Decline sinister. Decline locus. EXERCISE. Studi/ the Examples for this Lesson, page 265. 1. Adventum Ariovisti German or unique verentur. 2. A dextro cornu proelium commisit (began). 3. Curms Germanorum maximi fuerunt. 4. Filiae imperatoris inf elicissimae sunt. 5. Pollicebiniur donum majus magistratui. 6. Equitatus oppida omnia delevit. 7. Consul domi erit. 8. Exercittis populi Eomani maximi fortis- simique fuerunt. 9. Dicit exercitus impetus omnes Germanorum fortissime sustenturos esse. 10. Mens manum movet. 11. Castra movebunt. 12. Oppidum quam (40, c) fortissime oppugnemus. 13. Putat impetum hostium a dextro cornu sustineii posse. 14. Dicit Belgas Galliae fmitimos esse. 15. Domum consulis delea- mus. 16. Si adventu Caesaris hostes terreantur, ab exercitti Eo- mano superentur. 17. Manus meae magnae sunt. 18. Impetus Belgarum sustineamus. 19. Castra mota erunt. 20. Superiora loca occupavistis. 21. Equitatus summum collem occupet. 22. Templa pulcherrima ab exercitti deleta sunt. 23. Quam plurimos currus pollicemur. Give the Latin for — 1. B}^ the hands of the enemy; to the braver cavalry. 2. Of a better army ; by very many attacks. 3. As many hands as possi- 70 LATIN LESSONS. ble. 4. For smaller houses ; of wise magistrates. 5. We wept; you {plural) had wept; let him weep. 6. Let's break up camp. 7. You (^plural) were at home. LESSON XXXVI. NOUNS: FIFTH DECLENSION; COMPOUND NOUNS. Learn N. 22 (entire) ; also the Case-Endings of the Pifth De- clension. N. 6. Learn the Declension of the Nouns given in A. 72; or B. 51; or H. 120 ; or App. 9. Compound Nouns. Learn the Declension of respublica and jusjurandum. N. 23, a, h. Questions. What is the stem of dies ? planities ? spes % acies ? What nouns of this Declension are complete? State the laws of gender, and give exceptions. Pronounce the Genitive of aciSs ; fides. State the law respecting the quantity of e in the Genitive and Dative Singular. EXERCISE. 1. Acies longissima est. 2. Dicit aciem impetnm Gallornin snstinere posse. 3. Spes magnas habuit. 4. Eem Eomanis nuntiant. 5. Nuntiate, amici, res omnes consul!. 6. Caesar jura populo dedit. 7. Jtira sociorum servabit. 8. Jusjurandum civi- bus dederat. 9. JurejmMndo non tenebantur. 10. Dicit elves rempublicam servaturos esse. 11. Respublica virttite militum ser- vata est. 12. Pnma acies impetus oranes fortissime sustinebit. 13. Maximam spem habebo. 14. Spes victoriae magna fuit. 15. Suspicatur senatum Eomanum fidem Gallis dedisse. 16. Pidem servemus. 17. Servus fidem servabit. 1 8. Fides hostibus a senatti data est. 19. Negat ducem fidem violavisse (break). 20. Eoma LATIN LESSONS. 71 caput Italiae est. 21. Latittido planitiei major quam castrorum fuit. 22. Si suspicati essent bellum longum fore (84, d), Caesarem imperatorem creavissent. 23. Consules seriatui inimici sunt. Give the Latin for — 1. By the hope of victory. 2. For the senate of the Eoman people. 3. We are held by (our) oath. 4. The commonwealth is dear to all good men. 5. Let us have as great hope as possible. 6. Let the army fight as boldly as possible. 7. We suspect that the line of battle has not been able to sustain the attack. 8. The attacks could not be sustained bv the cavalrv. LESSON XXXVIL VERBS: THIRD CONJUGATION: ACTIVE VOICE. Eeview such portions of N. 65 to 72 as have already been re- ferred to in connection with the Pirst and Second Conjugations. Learn the Conjugation of the Active Voice of rego or tegO. A. 131, page 82 ; B. 105; H. 209; App. 32. Caution. The peculiarities of the Active Voice are found in the Present Indicative; Future Indicative; Present Subjunctive; Imperative. Therefore study with special care N. 68, a, c ; 69, a (3); 70. Questions and Applications. Give the principal parts of rego; dico; duco; mittd. Give the stems of these verbs. Explain the form of the Perfect Indicative for each (79, 2, a). Conjugate the Present Indicative, the Future Indicative, the Present Subjunc- tive, and the Imperative, of amo; moned; mittd. What are the personal endings of the Active Voice ? of the Passive ? Give a synopsis, in the Active Voice, of mitts. EXERCISE. 1. Imperator auxilia omnia dimisit (99, 2). 2. Eempublicam sapienter regent. 3. Dicitis legatum pvoeliam non commissurum 72 LATIN LESSONS. esse. 4. Si Caesar copias duceret, fortiores essent. 5. Si proelium a dextro cornti commlsissent, exercitus non superatus esset. 6. Gallis obsides poUiceamur. 7. Proelium quam audacissime cominittamus. 8. Si summum montem ab hostibus teneri dicat, castra moveamus. 9. Dicunt Titum primam legionem duxisse. 10. Dixistis Belgas obsides non missuros esse. 11. Senatus dona majora non mittet. 12. Suspicaris locum castris non idoneum fore. 13. Obsides Germanis a magistratibus dati erant. 14. Ex- tremum oppidum AUobrogum proximumque Helvetiorum finibus Geneva est. Give the Latin for — 1. We stall send hostages. 2. Let him join battle on the right wing. 3. Let the magistrates rule the Commonwealth. 4. He says that the leaders will dismiss the council. 5. They will have led the troops. 6. They are very near the AUobroges. LESSON XXXVIIL VERBS : THIRD CONJUGATION : PASSIVE VOICE. Eeview such portions of N. 73 to 77 as have been referred to in connection with the First and Second Conjugations. Learn the Conjugation of rego or tego in the Passive Voice. A. 131, p. 82 ; B. 106; H. 210; Apr 33. Caution. The peculiarities of the Passive Voice are found in the Present Indicative; Future Indicative; Present Subjunctive; Imperative; Present Infinitive. Study carefully N. 73, a, c; 75; 76, a; also Notes in Lesson XXXVII. Questions and Practice. What are the principal parts of these verbs in the Passive : regd 1 mittfl 1 mone0 1 superG 1 Conjugate these verbs in the following tenses, Active and Passive: Present Indicative; Future Indicative; Present Subjunctive. Con- jugate their Imperative, Active and Passive. Give their Infinitives and Par- ticiples, Active and Passive. LATIN LESSONS. 73 EXERCISE. Study N. 79, 2. The principal parts of the verbs employed in the - last Lesson were simple and very similar ; as stated in N. 79, 2, however, verbs of the Third Conjugation have a great variety of forms in the Perfect and Supine {as in this Lesson). Learn these principal parts thoroughly. 1. Omnes portae iirbis a militibus clausae sunt. 2. Consul portas oppidi claudi jubet. 3. Dicit imperatorem castra posuisse. 4. Litterae ab amico meo scriptae erant. 5. Victores oppidum deleii jusserint. 6. Jubebimus littems scrlbi. 7. Nuntiant mili- tes decimae legionis victores esse. 8. Equos currtisque reliquerat. 9. Dicitur hostes vicisse. 10. Si Helvetios vincamus, obsides dent. 11. Dicit legiones Marci Titique ab exercitu maximo victas esse. 12. Eeipublicae titilissimus esse potes. 13. Equitatus impetum Belgarum non veretur. 14. Vincite, socii; proelium breve erit. 15. Si a Caesare ducti essemus, urbem fortius oppug- navissemus. 16. Dicit auxilia castra relictura esse. 17. Putat exercitum vinci non posse. 18. Provincia Gallis propior est quam Belgis. 19. Castra ponere jussi erant. 20. Vince; vincamus; vincat. Give the Latin for — 1. Let 's write a letter, 2. We victors will destroy the town. 3. They cannot conquer the auxiliaries. 4. He says that the legion is not held by the oath. 5. If we should be as friendly as possible to the senate, we would be called good citizens. 6. The general is said to have been frightened by a slave. 7. We shall be dis- missed by the judge. 8. We are at home. 74 LATIN LESSONS. LESSON XXXIX. PREPOSITIONS; PLACE.* Learn N. 95 (entire) ; commit to memory the list of Preposi- tions which always require the Ablative, Flare, Learn N. 158. Questions and Practice. What prepositions, in common use, are always used with the Ablative? When do in and sub require the Accusative ? the Ablative ? What prepo- sitions have double forms ? How are they used ? How does a (ab) differ in meaning from e (ex) ? What does sub monte mean ? When is to a sign of the Dative? When must it be translated by ad? (129, a.) What meaning have these syllables in a compound word (see 99, 1, 2): con'? di? prae (as in praemitto)? de (as in deduc6)? Decline dies longior; senatus Justus; oornu dextrum. EXERCISE. Tell which sentences answer the question Where ? the question Whither? the question Whence? Notice carefully the meaning of the prepositions used in this Lesson (see General Vocabulary). 1. Copias trans Ehenum duxit. 2. Inter Ehemira et Khodanum sunt. 3. Ad oppidum contenderunt. 4. XJrbi nomen dat. 5. Bellum circum Romara gerit. 6. Sine spe victoriae pugnant. 7. Milites sub jugum missi sunt. 8. Sub monte castra posuit. 9. Ab urbe ad castra contendit. 10. Ex oppido venit {comes). 11. Pro castns stetit. 12. Viros in templum convocatis. 13. Agricolae in agris sunt. 14. Contra populum Romanum conjti- ravisti. 15. In fiiiibus Belgarum vagati sumus. 16. In fines Germanorum exercitum dticit. 17. Equitatum in hiberna dedticet. 18. De montibus ad mare contendunt. 19. Equites ad fltiraen praemisit. 20. Erat (193, 6) planities magna. 21. In Gallia vivit; in castris est. 22. Servi sine praemiis magnis non pugna- * The regular construction is presented first. The Locative Case is taken up later. LATIN LESSONS. 75 bunt. 23. Legionem novam in Gallia citeriore conscripsit. 24. Legio, quae {which) in Gallia ulteriore conscripta erat, in Galliara citeriorem contendit. 25. Dicit cives pltirimos contra rempublicam conjiirare. 26. Post castra sunt loca superiora. 27. Trans flumen auxilia e castris et a coUe duximus. Give the Latin for — 1. Let us call together tlie boys into one place. 2. There can be no victory without arms. 3. Let us send ahead the troops. 4. We shall easily lead the brave army across the wide river. 5. If we should be conquered, the city would be in great danger. 6. The lieutenant's troops have been conquered by the brave slaves. 7. We will hasten to the camp as quickly as possible. 8. He comes (venit) into the city ; out of the town ; away from the camp. 9. There is a temple at the foot of the hill. 10. Between hope and fear. 11. The army will be sent under the yoke. LESSON XL. DEPONENT VERBS : THIRD CONJUGATION ; ABLATIVE OF CAUSE; SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE. Eeview N. 80 & a, h. Learn the Conjugation of the Deponent Verb sequor. A. 135 ; B. 113 ; H. 232 & Note ; App. 37. Ablative denoting Cause. Learn N. 149 (entire). Subjunctive denoting Purpose.* Learn N. 179 [Simple Rule), Sequence of Tenses. Learn N. 171, 172 (omitting the Ee- MAiiKs). Study the special Examples (and the explanations) for this Lesson, on page 265. Notice that the Ablative of Cause and the Subjunctive of Pur- pose both answer the question Why ? * The more technical constructions of Purpose are taken up later. 76 LATIN LESSONS. Questions and Practice. Give a complete synopsis of sequor. What Active forms have Deponent verbs ? What does sequence mean ? What tenses are Primary t Secondary l State the law for the " Sequence of Tenses." Give the Latin for to see in this sentence : He is sent to see Marcus. What conjunction introduces a positive purpose ? a negative purpose ? EXERCISE. 1. Ducem amicitiae causa sequimtur. 2. AdventU amici iiiei laetabar. 3. Victoriis multis gloriati erant. 4. Legates servitute liberabit. 5. Dicit proelium ab equitatti commissum esse. 6. Propter virttitem laudor. 7. Nuntiant castra defensoribus ntidata esse. 8. Viri gloriae causa pugnant. 9. Pugnamus ut rempub- licam servemus. 10. Hostes audacissirae sequamur. 11. Caius servusque ab urbe profecti sunt. 12. Portas claudamus, iie urbs deleatur. 13. Pueros servum sequi jussit. 14. Copias in Galliam citeriorem mittunt ut Gallos terreant. 15. AuxiHa ut oppidum expugnent mittentur. 16. In Gallia morabimur ut urbes hostium videamus. 17. In urbe Eoma natus es. 18. Legationes ad Marcum ut pacem peterent misimus. 19. Circum Genevam mora- buntur. 20. Si ad castra profectus esset, laetati essemus. 21. Hostes sequeris, ne in finibus Helvetiorum morentur. 22. Custo- des cives malos sequi non potuerunt. 23. Dicit consulem libere loqui. 24. Legationes pltiriraae a civitatibus multis ad Caesarem missae sunt. 25. Sequimini, socii, ducem fortem. 26. Profectus eram, ut ad fltimen contenderem. 27. Si in oppido Geneva non natus esses, civis Romauus appellareris. 28. Copias trans Elienum ducemus, ut summum montem occupemus. 2^. Litteras sciibebat, ne novum majusque periculum amicum terreret. 30. Tiraore Gallos non sectitus es. Give the Latin for these sentences, bearing in mind the fact thai the Infinitive cannot be used to denote a Purpose; that is, to answer the question Why ? 1. The ambassadors will be sent to see the city. 2. We had followed the enemy from the river to the town. 3. He had left soldiers to protect the town. 4. Let us fight lest we be slaves. LATIN LESSONS. 77 5. Let us set out for the river. 6. He says that a large animal followed the boys in the forest. 7. You {plural) say that the ambassadors were not born in Gaul. 8. We will fight for the sake of glory. LESSON XLI. VERBS: FOURTH CONJUGATION; ADJECTIVES USED AS NOUNS. Learn N. 67 ; 68, a, c; 69, a (4). Learn the Conjugation of audio, Active and Passive. A. 132, page 86; B. 107, 103; H. 211, 212; App. 35, 36. Adjectives used as Nouns. Learn N. 109 & c. Questions and Practice. What are the stems of audio ? scio ? Give a complete synopsis of audio. In what two ways can " all things " be expressed ? (Ans. res omnes ; omnia.) What does felloes esse videbantur mean ? EXERCISE. Notice that, with videor {meaning/ seem), esse mai/ be expressed or omitted, as in English. Study the Examples for this Lesson, on page 266. 1. Audivisti castra niunita esse. 2. Scimus Caium urbem munituruin esse. 3. Dicit imperium populi Eomani Eheno finiii. 4. Gives sciunt consulem niilitern ignavum ptinivisse. 5. Profectio fugae (132) simillima videtur. 6. Bona mea ad urbem mittam. 7. Nuntiabunt fltimen agros sociorum finire. 8. Omnes audient duces fuga (149) legionem ptinituros esse. 9. Munite, socii, oppida Eom'inorum. 10. Yita omnibus carissima est. 11. Dicit profectio nem fugae similem fuisse. 12. Omnes fortes nobilesque fuerunt. 13. Sciant imperium populi Romarii maximum esse. 14. Castra mtiniamus. 15. Einitimi omnes servum piinitum esse scient. 16. Copiae fortissimae esse videntur. 17. Exercitus 78 LATIN LESSONS. hostium minor quam Cail videtur. 18. Iter facillimum videbitur. 19. Pueri patri quam matri similiores sunt. 20. Homines ignavi inimici virorum bonorum sunt. 21. Mali ptinientur; boni lauda- buntur. 22. Multas res audiveramus. 23. Aliud audiemus. 24. Legatus multa Caesari nuntiat. 25. Dicit judicem multa dixisse. 26. Magnam urbem magnis (viris) aedificabit. 27. Urbem mtiniamus ne cives timidi sint. 28. Pueris dona dedit, ut amicus putaretur. 29. Multi hostes veriti sunt. 30. Rex plurimis amicus est. 31. Non omnibus omnia facilia sunt. 32. Consul multa dixit. Give the Latin for — 1. We will fortify the camp. 2. Let us hear many things {ex- press in two ways), 3. The citizens say that the judge will punish the slave. 4. The towns have not been fortified by Caesar. 5. Let us punish the soldier. 6. The empire of the Gauls is limited by the river Rhine. 7. We will set out from the camp. 8. We have seemed very wise. 9. He says that the town has been fortified. oJ«<o LESSON XLIL DEPONENT VERBS: FOURTH CONJUGATION; ABLATIVE WITH DEPONENTS. Review N. 80 & a, b. Learn the Conjugation of potior. A. 135 ; B. 113 (largior) ; H. 232 & Note ; APP. 37. Ablative of Means tvith Five Deponent Verbs, and also with vivo. Learn N. 151, a. Remark. Vescor means / feed on ; vivd, / live on. Of the Deponent Verbs given in the Note, utor and potior are most frequently used. Questions and Practice. What Deponent Verbs take the Ablative ? Why ? Give a synopsis of potior ; tltor. Give the stems of venio ; conscribo ; praemittd ; vlvO. Decline together the Latin for a shorter time ; a longer sword. LATIN LESSONS. 79 EXERCISE. 1. Trans Ehenum incolebant ; citra fltlmen incolunt. 2. Impe- dimentis castrisque potiemur. 3. Navibiis uti non possiimus. 4. Multa aiiimalia fmmento vivuiit. 5. Armis bene (39) titimini. 6. Gladiis utamur. 7. Dicit Germanos equis non tisos esse. 8. Hostes navibus omnibus potiti sunt. 9. Gives legibus titebantur. 10. Putat Eomanos totius Galliae imperio potituros esse. 11. Oppido facile potirl potuimus. 12. Venimus ut regem videamus. 13. Ne impedimentis potiremini, pugnabant. 14. Equites curribus Hsi erunt. 15. Dux copias ab oppido profectas esse nuntiat. 16. Gladio, mi fill, nti non potes. 17. Toto imperio potiamur. 18. Helvetii trans Ehodanum incoluerant. 19. Si ad castra veniret, felicissimus essem. 20. Dicit Caesarem venisse, vidisse, vicisse. 21. Hostes sequemur, ne in finibus Belgarum morentur. 22. Domus urbi proxima fuit. Give the Latin for — 1. They had obtained possession of Gaul. 2. Let him use the arms. 3. They will not be able to get possession of Caesar's camp. 4. We hope that the general will get possession of the enemy's winter-quarters. 5. You (^plural) had come into the winter-quarters as quickly as possible. 6. The good were praised; the bad were punished. 7. The neighbors were unfriendly to my brothers. 8. The winter-quarters of Sabinus were smaller than Caesar's. LESSON XLIII. THIRD CONJUGATION: VERBS IN 10; TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE. Learn N. 79, 3. Learn the Conjugation, Active and Passive, of capio. A. 131 ; B. 110, 111 ; H. 218, 219 ; Apr 34. Tenses of the Infinitive. Learn N. 173. This Note gives Examples, showing the time expressed by the Infinitive tenses; they should be carefully studied, 80 LATIN LESSONS. Questions and Practice. When does a " Verb in id " keep the i 1 Give a complete synopsis, Active and Passive, of capid. What tenses has the Infinitive ? To what may the Present be equivalent ? the Perfect ? What is a Direct Quotation ? an Indi- rect Quotation ? What is a Copula I a Comjplement t the Complementari/ Infinitive 1 EXERCISE. 1. Dicit Helvetios agriciilttira prohiberi. 2. Dixerunt hostes itinere prohibitos esse. 3. Putat oppida a Jtib'o capta esse. 4. Dixit legionem fugere. 5. Speraveram Eomanos Genevam occupattiros esse. 6. Speratis magistrattis elves venire passtiros esse. 7. Consul hostes pacem facturos esse nuiitiavit. 8. Urbes a legato forti legioneque captae erunt. 9. Scimus agricolas agros colere. 10. Tela multa in milites conjicient. 11. Dixisti lapides magnos jactos esse. 12. Navis, quam {which) videtis, a filio meo facta est. 13. Helvetios per fines Gallorum venire non pass! sunt. 14. Capite, milites fortes, loca superiora. 15. Si omnes tela conjiciant, urbs capiatur. 16. Eugiamus; castra oppugiie- luus; proficiscamur. 17. Si gladiis nsi essent, castiis potiti essent. 18. Colite, agricolae, agros, qui (which) longi latique sunt. 19. Patimini, jtidices, civem divitem dicere. 20. Hostes fugient; non morabimur; viiicemus. Give the Latin for — 1. We cannot allow the man to come. 2. They will not till the fields. 3. He said that the slaves would not fight bravely. 4. They thought that the town could be taken. 5. The weapons cannot be hurled. 6. Let us throw stones and weapons. 7. Let them follow the cavalry. 8. We know that the line of battle can sustain the attacks. 9. They seem to be powerful and rich. 10. We were dwelling across the river Ehine. LATIN LESSONS. 81 LESSON XLIV. PARTICIPLES. Learn N. 189 k a, c (first sentence), d. Learn the Declension of the Present and Future Active, and the Perfect Passive, Participles of audio. Stud^ these Notes in connection with the Uxamples for this Lesson, on page 266. Notice that only Deponent Verbs have Perfect Participles with an Active. meaning. To express having seen, having conquered, etc., a special construc- tion is used, which will be explained in a future Lesson . Notice, also, the voivel changes m compound words ; as, rejicid, interfiicid, accipid (from jacio, facio, capio). See N. 2 (5). Questions and Practice. Decline the Present Participle of sequor. How many Participles have Deponent Verbs ? What is the difference in meaning between voco and Convoc0 1 venio and convenio ? How may Participles be often best trans- lated ? What is a Participle ? What, therefore, is the rule for its use ? To what Declensions do the Participles, Active and Passive, belong ? What time does the Present Participle denote ? the Perfect ? EXERCISE. Compare these sentences carefully with the Examples. 1. Equites a Caesare praemissi revertuutur. 2. Obsides reductos in numero hostium habuit. 3. Tela in intirum conjecta rejicient. 4. Ad Caium litteras a duce scriptas mittit. 5. Legatum de ad- ventn legionis certiorem fecL 6. Imperator de proelio certior factus est. 7. Consules certiores facit exercitum venisse. 8. Titus hostes fugientes secutus magnum numerum peditum inter- fecit. 9. Milites a flumine progress! ab hostibus capti sunt. 10. Caesar suspicatus peiiculum maximum fore (84, d) decimam legi- onem sequi jussit. 11. Fortissime pugnans interficitur. 12. Servi fortiter pugnantes interfecti sunt. 13. Adventum Ariovisti veriti, copias in castra deduceiit. 14. Obsides multls a civitatibus missos 6 82 LATIN LESSONS. accepSrunt. 15, Dona pulcherrima a fratre meo missa accipiam. 16. Iter per provinciam feciinus, ut Gengvam oppugnaremus. 17. Iter per fines Gallorum faciens interfectus erat. 18. Eegem certiorem fecistis legiones a Gallia reductas esse. 19. Belgae superati in oppidum rejecti sunt. 20. Civis, qui (who) ad urbem venit, ducem fortem audacter pugnantem interfectum esse dixit. 21. Caesar ab Gallia discedens Gallis obsides reddidit. 22. Dixe- rat elves magno de periculo certiores factos esse. 23. Iter in Galliara quam celerrime faciamus. 24. Nuntiabant auxilia supe- rata in castra rejici. 25. Multi viros ab Italia proficiscentes lau- daverant. 26. Servos in Galliam transductos interfecerunt. 27. V5cem consulis milites laudantis auditis. 28. Senatum in templum convocavit. 29. Dicit senatum a Caesare vocatum convenisse. 30. Consul ab hibernis in Italiam discedens servum interfici jussit. Give the Latin for these sentences (those numbered 2, 3, 4, are to he written as Simple sentences) — 1. Having promised many gifts to tbe brave soldiers, tlie king returns to the city. 2. The troops, that had been sent forward by the leader, could not storm the town. 3. After they had at- tempted to obtain possession of the camp, they were ordered to return. 4. He will follow the enemy as they depart from the town. 5. The guards killed the slaves attempting to seize the temple. 6. Having followed the army of the Gauls to the Ehone, he was unable to lead across (his) infantry. 7. Having been con- quered by the allies, the legion was driven back into the city. LESSON XLV. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES ; ACCUSATIVE OF TIME ; ABLATIVE OF TIME. Learn section 9, h, page 2 ; also, N. 41 ; 42 (entire) ; 43, a, c, d. Learn the Cardinals (to 30), the Ordinals (to 12th), and the answers to Questions given below. A. 94; B. 79; H. 174; A pp. 19. LATIN LESSONS. 83 Learn the Declension of unus, duo, trgs. A. 83, a ; 94, 5, c ; B. 66, 80; H.175; App. 11, a; 20, b. Accusative of Ti^ne. Learn N. 142 k a ; also 54, 4, page 15. Ablative of Time, Learn N. 160; also 54, 5, page 15. Questions. The Numerals are given m the Grammars and Appendix; they are not given in the Vocabulary. What is the Latin for 25, 18, 100, 1000, 5, 300, 278, 130, 19, 15th, 3d, 9th, 7th, 2d, 8th ? What question is answered by the Accusative of Time ? by the Ablative of Time ? What Cardinals are declined ? EXERCISE. 1. Septem lioras pugnaverunt. 2. Die quinto ad castra reverti- tur. 3. Media nocte oppidum oppugnabimus. 4. Solis occasu exercitum trans flumen duxit. 5. Quattuor dies in finibus hos- tium moratus est. 6. Prtimento multos annos vixerat. 7. Tertio die in fines Sequanorum perveniemus. 8. Duos menses trans Ehenum incolm. 9. Septendeeim annos bellum gerebant. 10. Mille viri ab Ariovisto missi erant, ut castra oppugnarent. 11. Quarta hora e castris proficiscemur. 12. Totam noctem copiae Romanae iter fecerunt. 13. Solis occasu castris impedi' mentisque potitus es. 14. Domi quinque menses fueras. 15. Novendecira dies commeatus causa morabimini. 16. Quam celer- rime iter faciaraus ne Sequani navibus potiantur. 17. Uno anno oppida triginta capta sunt. 18. Aestate ad urbera Eomam veni- etis. 19. Decima legio hostes sex dies sectita partem maximam impedimentorum cepit. 20. Tertio die Titum equites peditesque Germanorum vicisse audivimus. 21. In Italia centum urbes mag- nae fuerunt. 22. Castra quarta hora ponet. English into r.atin. 1. We shall use the horses all (totus) day. 2. Let him come at sunset. 3. We shall break up camp at midnight. 4. Let us delay two days for the sake of supplies. 5. Let the king praise 84 LATIN LESSONS. the soldiers (as they are) setting out for (in) battle. 6. Por two hours the cavalry fought very bravely. 7. He seems to deserve great praise. LESSON XLVI. ACCLFSATIVE : DENOTING EXTENT OF SPACE ; PARTITIVE GENITIVE. Accusative denoting Extent of Space, Learn N. 142 h b ; also 54, 3, page 15. I>ee1ension of Mille. Learn N. 43, e; APP. 20, c. Partitive Genitive. Learn N. 122, k a; 123, c. Caution. Cardinal numbers require a peculiar construction. N. 123, a. Notice that the Accusative of Extent (either of time or sjpace) has an Ad- verbial force of Degree (telling How far or How much), as in English : the tree is very high ; the tree is sixty feet high. Questions. When should mille, the noun, be used? (Ans. When more than one thou- sand are spoken of.) What is the Latin for three miles i Jive thousand Tnent a thousand horses f What is the difference in meaning between perterreO, permoved, and terred, moved? (99, 1.) Give the Latin for a part of the soldiers ; five of the hoys. What part of speech does the Accusative of time and extent most resemble ? EXERCISE. 1. Domum pedes triginta septem latam aedificavit. 2. Quinque milUa passuum iter fecerunt. 3. Castra millia passuum octo in latittidinem patebant. 4. Equum mille quingentos passns sequitiir. 5. Collis duceiitSs pedes altus fuit. 6. Mare mille pedes altum est. 7. Dicit mtirum decern millia pedum longum esse. 8. Unus ex militibus iter difficillimum fore dixit. 9. Millia hominum quattuor ut urbem oppiignarent missa sunt. 10. Turris vigintl quinque pedes alta est. 11. Servos fugientes millia passuum novem sectitus, ad oppidum revertitur. 12. Agri Helvetiorum in longi- LATIN LESSONS. 85 tudinem millia passuinn ducenta et quadraginta, in latitudinem centum et octoginta patebant. 13. Magnam partem auxiliorum dimisit. 14. Centum ex civibus contra regem conjtiraverunt. 15. Domus mea altior latiorque quam Marcl est. Englisli into liatin. 1. The horse is sixteen hands high. 2. Let us follow the enemy for three hours. 3. We will pitch the camp on the higher ground (places). 4. They say that the legion marched fifteen miles. 5. The forests extend eight miles in width. 6. The temple is two hundred feet long and eighty feet wide. 7. Pom- pey's camp is larger than Caesar's. LESSON XLVII. ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE; CERTAIN PHRASES OF TIME, PLACE, ETC. Adverbial Accusative, denoting Degree. Learn N. 94, d^ 1 ; 142 & c. Compare the English : He was hurt a very little ; They were injured a great deal (54, 6, page 15). Sow to express sucJi Phrases as: the red of the Gauls; half-way up the hill ; at day-break, etc. Learn N. 110, h ; 123, e. Plus: Learn its Use. N. 27, 122, b. Learn its Declension. A. 86; B. 70; H. 165, N. 1 ; App. 15, «. Study carefully the Examples mider the Notes for this Lesson j also Special Examples, p. 266. The Accusative in many of the sen- tences of this Lesson denotes Extent of Space, Questions. What is the difference in meaning between exercitus, aoies, and agmen'? Express in Latin : at day-h^eak ; at midnight ; for the most part ; m the last part of winter ; the rest of the Belgae ; at noon. What part of speech is plUs in the Singular '{ in the Plural ? Give the Latin for more wisdom (sapientia). 86 LATIN LESSONS. EXERCISE. 1. Meridig veniet. 2. Castra tantum spatii patebant. 3. Nul- 1am partem noctis iter fecimus. 4. Exercitum prima Itice eduxit. 5. Prima nocte servos emiserunt. 6. Multo die portas claudi jussl. 7. Priimento (151, a) maximam partem vivebant. 8. Ariovistus in Gallia plurimum potuerat. 9. Impetus Lostium paulum tar- dantur. 10. Eeliqui Belgae fortissimi sunt. 11. Extrema hieme ad urbem venerunt. 12. Medio in colle templum fuit. 13. Dicit summum montem a tertia legione occupari. 14. Spero ducem in Italia bellum gesttirum esse. 15. In Gallia hiemes longissimae sunt. 16. Princeps plus auctoritatis habuit. 17. De secunda vigilia castra defensoribus ntidabuntur. 18. Circum Eomam totam hiemem manserunt. 19. Dicit reliquos Suevos eductos esse. 20. Nihil impetus legionis Eomanos terrere potuit. 21. Arma reliquorum militum amissa erant. 22. Eeliqui (109) ad castra sine vulnere revertentur. 23. Bello servili (110, c) plus imperil liabui. 24. Eempublicam metu maximo liberabis. 25. Suevi, reliquos millia passuum multa sectiti, in fines Helvetiorum sub vesperum pervenerunt. 26. Magnam partem diei iter faci- emus. 27. Nihil periculo mortis territus sum. 28. Dicit urbem magnam esse, et decem millia passuum in latittidinem patere. 29. Putaverat agmen longius futtirum esse. £nglisli into Latin. 1. Let us pass the winter in the territory of the Suevi. 2. They will set out in the fourth watch. 3. They say that the chief is very powerful at home. 4. More (men) will be led out by the general. 5. The rest of the ships are very small. 6. Let us march all (totus) night. 7. If he should lose (his) arms, he would be killed. 8. He says (199, 5) that the gate is not twenty feet wide. 9. They can set out at day-break. LATIN LESSONS. 87 LESSON XLVIII. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE : PURPOSE, COMMAND, AND EXHORTATION (continued). Purpose. Learn N. 179 & Caution 1, d. Command and Exhortation. Learn N. 178 & Caution 1. Correlatives. N. 195, 8. Learn the meaning of these Cor- relatives : alius . . . alius ; alter . . . alter ; alii . . . alii ; alter! . . . alter! ; et . . . et ; neque . . . neque ; n6n s51um . , . sed etiam. Study the Special Examples for tJiis Lesson, page 267. Notice that hortor, nitor, rogS, do not state anything, and cannot tak© the Accusative and Infinitive, like died. / ask, strive, or exhort for a Purpose. Remember, th« Infinitive Mode cannot express a Purpose. Questions. What are Correlatives f What conjunction is required for a positive Pur- pose? foT a. negative Purpose? Where must nSn never be used? (Ans. In Imperative sentences.) If this Latin is not correct, make it so : Hortfttur puerOs bonds esse. EXERCISE. - 1. Ne vereamur. 2. Yenit ut vinceret. 3. Nitimur ut sapientes simus. 4. Milites liortabimur ut fortiter pugnent. 5. Alii pug- nabant, alii fugiebant. 6. Alter consilium Justus fuit, alter in- justus. 7. Caesarem rogaverant ut militibus arma daret. 8. Ne castra de tertia vigilia oppugnent. 9. Legatus imperatorem rogat ne per Galliam iter faciat. 10. Et pueii et puellae nituntur ut a magistro laudentiir. 11. Neque consul neque judex oppida deleta esse dixit. 12. Alteii laudati sunt, alteri punientur. 13. Dicit legiones a Pornpeio conscriptas per provinciam iter facere, ut oppi- dum ab Ariovisto munltum occupent. 14. Ne servis mails dona polliceamur. 15. Audivi imperatorem decimam legionem ne hostes sequeretur hortatum esse. 16. Hortamini custodes ut quam dili- 88 LATIN LESSONS. gentissirai sint. 17. Veni ut virum fortem et videas et laudes. 18. Jtidices nitantur ne injusti appellentur. 19. Non solum milites sed etiam agricolae reipublicae utilissimi fuerunt. 20. Co- pias hortati eraiit ne ex urbe proficiscerentur. 21. Caium horta- bantur ut contra rempublicam conjtiraret. iEnglJsh into liatin. 1. Let us not set out at day-break. 2. Let them not pass the winter in the forest. 3. The Suevi are very near the Helvetii. 4. He exhorted the soldiers to march ten miles. 5. I will ask the consul not to punish the slave. 6. Some are good, others bad. 7. Of the two men, one was a judge, the other a lieutenant. 8. We wall not only lead out the legion in the fourth hour, but also seize the mountain-top before noon. o>Ko LESSON XLIX. ABLATIVE OF MANNER, ACCOMPANIMENT, AND SPECI- FICATION. Ablative expressing Manner, Learn N. 150. Ablative denoting Accompaniment, Learn N. 150, a. Ablative denoting In what Respect (Specification). Learn N. 153 ; 36, b. Learn the Declension of vis. A. 61; B. 41; H. 66; App. 7. Questions and Practice. When must cum be used ? What question does the Ablative of Manner answer? the Ablative of Specification? Decline mille (the noun). Decline together the Latin for great strength. Give a complete synopsis of vereor; jnbed. What prepositions always take the Ablative? What prepositions take the Ablative or the Accusative? What adjectives have limus in the Suyerlative ? Give the Latin tor lie is older ; We are younger (36, h). LATIN LESSONS. 89 EXERCISE. 1. Consul clara voce dixit. 2. Miles ducem cum tribus legio- nibus a Gallia venisse audiverat. 3. Omnes sciuiit regem civitatem sapienter et bene rexisse. 4. Et socii et auxilia magna vi con- tendebant. 5. Auxilium a Caesare magno fletti petunt. 6. Postero die castra movit et per fines Suevorum iter fecit. 7. Dixit Titum cum equitibus atque (96, a, 3) auxiliis ut loca superiora occuparet missum esse. 8. Galli reliquos virttite praecedunt. 9. Legionem proxime conscriptam et magnam partem equitatus misit ne castra ab hostibus occuparentur. 10. Magistrattis modo servili obsides ptiniebant. 11. Imperator nomine fuit. 12. Pratres majores natU sunt. 13. Locus omnibus rebus castris idoneus est. 14. Bello Gallico navibus atque oppidis hostium potiti sumus. 15. Medi5 in colle aciem triplicem quattuor legionum instruxit. 16. Dicit Germanos bellum cum Gallis raultos annos gessisse. 17. Ditior (36, a) agns et equis fuit. 18. Pueri patri omnibus rebus similes sunt. 19. Miles magna vi (149) et animi et corporis laudabatur. 20. Dicit laborem omnia victtirum esse. 21. Agmen quinque millibus peditum claudebant. 22. Hortemur servos ut fideles sint. iEnellsh into liatin. 1. Let us surpass all in strength of body. 2. He will pitch (his) camp at the foot of a very high mountain. 3. They broke up camp on the following day. 4. Let us not march with Cassius. 5. The line of battle was drawn up at the fifth hour. 6. The goddesses' temples are larger than (those) of the gods. 7. With a flood of tears (great weeping) he promised that the leader should send back the hostages. 8. The allies bring up the rear (close the line of march) with two thousand horsemen. 90 LATIN LESSONS. LESSON L. PRONOUNS: PERSONAL, REFLEXIVE, POSSESSIVE. Learn N. 45, 46, 47 & Caution ; 48 & Caution ; 108 & Kemaek ; 111, 112, 113 & a. Learn the Declension of ego, tu, sui, meus, tuus, suus, noster, vester. A. 98, a, c; 99, a; B. 84, 85, 86; H. 184, 185. App. 21, 22, 23. Questions and Practcce. Why are Reflexive Pronouns so called ? Give the Latin for these sen- tences, expressing a subject in each : let us teach ourselves; the man teaches himself; you teach yourself ; I taught myself ; the leaders praise them- selves ; the girl taught herself; the auxiliaries will save themselves; sol- diers, save yourselves. Name the Personal Pronouns. Why cannot sui be used as a Personal Pronoun of the Third Person ? How is the lack of the Third Personal Pronoun supplied ? In the sentence, '^The general called his lieutenant and praised him for his bravery," can his, him, and his be expressed by sui and suus 1 Give the reason for your answer. Give the rule for the use of a Possessive Pronoun (108 & Remark). How can you tell whether (after a transitive verb, as give) praemium suum means his, her, its, or their reward t Express in Latin (in the shortest form): our men are hrave ; he en- couraged his soldiers. EXERCISE. 1. Nos laudati sumus ; tti punitus es. 2. Vos nobis inimici fuistis. 3. Imperator dixit se * Aeduls auxilium pollicitum esse. 4. Milites se * neque a vobTs neque ab imperatore laudari dicunt. 5. Vobis dona majora poUicemur. 6. Servi tui se venttiros esse ut castra nostra munirent dixerunt. 7. Urbs vestra finibus Aedu- orum proxima est. 8. Nostn castra muro altissimo munient. 9. Tu mihi amicus atque utilis fuisti. 10. Majores copiae a ducibus nostris missae esse dicebantur. 11. Ne tui hostes vereantur. 12. German! nulla arma sibi ab Ariovisto, duce suo, data esse dixerunt. 13. Se suaque omnia regi dediderunt {from dedo). 14. Dedite, ♦ Translate se like a Personal Pronoun (that is, he, they). LATIN LESSONS. 91 cives, vos vestraque omnia constili. 15. Nos (123, d) omnes tibi carissimi sumus. 16. Alter consulum Caius, alter amicus meus fuit. 17. Duodecim ex civibus (123, a) commeattis causa ad urbem missi erant. 18. Et tu et Marcus Caesari amicissimi eritis (117, d). 19. Te amicum, me hostem appellant. 20. Diximus proelium vobis omnibus periculosum fore. 21. Sibi sapientissi- mus esse videtur. £nglisli into liatln. 1. All of us are Romans. 2. He says that your friends are very brave soldiers. 3. All things (express in two ways) have been said by us. 4. Surrender yourself and all your goods (things) to the brave leader. 5. We think the bad have been punished by the consuls. 6. The best (men) fight best. 7. He says that you {singular) deserve well of (de) the state. 8. Some are happy, others most wretched. 9. The men have lost their swords. 10. Soldiers, you have conquered your enemies. LESSON LI. PRONOUNS : DEMONSTRATIVE. Learn N. 49 (entire) ; 114, 1, 2, a ; 48, Caution. Learn the Declension of hie, ille, is, idem, ipse, iste. A. 101 & «; B. 87, 88; H. 186; App. 24. Questions and Practice. Why are Demonstrative PronouTis so called ? In what two ways may they be used ? Which is very commonly employed as the Third Personal Pro- noun 'i Why not use sui instead? . Decline is in the Masculine (Jie)\ in the Feminine {she)-, in the Neuter {it). What are hie, ille, iste often called, and why ? Decline the Latin meaning : this temple ; that hoy (yonder) ; that door (by you) ; the citizen himself ; the same fact (res). When must his and their be expressed by ejus and eorum ^ When by suus ? 92 LATIN LESSONS. EXERCISE. Tell which Demonstratives are used as Adjectives, and which as Substantives (that is, as Personal Pronouns). 1. Hic vir deos immortales esse negat. 2. Ilia oppida a Caesare deleta sunt. 3. Nos ipsi eum pugnare vidimus. 4. Haec (109) a consule dicta sunt. 5. Dicit has legiones laudem maximam meritas esse. 6. Hi tibi inimici erunt ; illi nobis amici sunt. 7. Eadem dona ad Ariovistum inissa erunt. 8. Is servum suum vocavit, et opus ejus laudavit. 9. Virtus eorum magna fuit. 10. Pollicetur se iis arma dattirum esse. 11. Hos fortiter pug- nantes vidit. 12. Dixit eos hostes millia passuum quinque secutos impedimentis potitos esse. 13. Si illi vos non sequantur, urbem non expugnetis. 14. Centum milites eo tempore habuit. 15. Hic puer idem dicet. 16. Dixistis aciem ipsam impetum sustinere non potuisse. 17. Tii ipse, ut regem videres, in ilia urbe quattuor dies raansisti. 18. Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae. 19. Ipsi in eorum finibus bellum gerunt. 20. Suis finibus eos pro- hibent. 21. Dicunt eundem virum bella multa in Italia gessisse et patriam suam servitiite liberavisse. £nglisli into liatin* 1. These books are heavy; those burdens are light. 2. They sent those soldiers under the yoke. 3. At day-break, these things {express in two ways) will be announced. 4. That house is one hundred feet long. 5. The same camp was taken by them. 6. These (men) marched from the deep river to the lofty mountain. 7. The temple is very beautiful; we ourselves have seen it. LESSON LIT. PRONOUNS: RELATIVE. Learn N. 50, 115 & a, c. Learn the Declension of Qui. A. 103 ; B. 89 ; H. 187 ; App. 25. LATIN LESSONS. 93 Qui (= ut ego, tu, is, etc.) in Clauses of Purpose. Learn N. 179, a ; 193, 4. Notice that the Relative Pronoun, both in English and Latin, is equivalent to a Personal Pronoun + a connective. EXERCISE. Directions for the analysis of Complex Sentences, 194, e, 1. Urbs, quam vides, Eoraa est. 2. Ego, qui te laudavi, rex Bum. 3. Milites, a quibus oppidum captum erat, fortes fuerunt. 4. Copias, quae areem expugnarent, praemlsit. 5. Inipemtor, de quo scrips!, servos omnes secum (53, a) transduxerat. 6. Milites, quorum virtus magna fuit, ut summum montem occuparent a Caesare missi sunt. 7. In Galliam decimam legionem mittamus, quae oppida omnia bostium deleat. 8. Gallia est omnis divisa (189, b) in partes tres, quarum iinam incolunt Belgae, aliam Aqui- tani, tertiam (ii incolunt), qui ipsorum lingua Celtae, nostra Galli appellantur. 9. Proximi sunt Germanis, qui trans Ehenum inco- lunt, quibuscum bellum gerunt. 10. Eorum una pars initium capit a flumine Ebodano. 11. Aquitani ab boc fltimine ad Pyrenaeos montes et eam partem Oceani, quae est ad Hispaniam, pertinent. 12. Pro multitudine bominum angustos se fines babere arbitra- bantur, qui in longitudinem millia passuum ducenta et quadraginta, in latitudinem centum et octoginta patSbant. 13. Eum bortatus est ut regnum in civitate sua (112, a) occuparet, quod pater ante babuerat. 14. Dux legiones, quarum virtute urbs servata erat, laudavit. 15. Puellae, quas te vidisse dixisti, filiae meae sunt. 16. De secunda vigilia equites eodem itinere, quo hostes fugerant, profecti sunt. £nglisli into liatin. 1. That bouse (115, c) you see is mine. 2. Tbe man who came to see you was ray friend. 3. They had come to ask me my opin- ion about peace. 4. I informed him concerning the enemy's attack. 5. Let us not say these things. 6. We will send Caius to get possession of the heavy baggage. 7. He has brought (duc6) with him tbe hostages which he has received from the Aquitani. 94 LATIN LESSONS. LESSON LIIL PRONOUNS: INTERROGATIVE; INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. Learn N. 51 (entire). Learn the Declension of the Interroga- tives Quis (^Substantive) and Qui (^Adjective). A. 104 & a; B. 90; H. 188 ; App. 26. Single Questions. Learn N. 100, 101 & «, Hemakk. Study the Examples given under the Notes /or this Lesson, Questions. What is the Latin for : who praises Tne ? what man praises me ? What is the difference in meaning between quis (qui) and uter ? (43, b; 51, Caution.) How many words are spelled ne? how is each used ? (197, 4.) What words are always Enclitics? (195, 3.) When is cum an Enclitic? (53, a.) What effect has an Enclitic upon accent ? Pronounce imperatdribusque ; consu- lesne. How are yes and no usually expressed ? Is this correct ; quisue venit 1 Give the Rule for the use of the Relative Pronoun. EXERCISE. Tell which of these sentences are Declaratory ; Interrogative ; Imperative* Analyze each. An Interrogative or Imperative sen^ tence should he analyzed as though it were Declaratory ; as, "What did that man say ? " = " That man said what ? " 1. Quo {adverb) mllites dticentur? 2. Quis hostes fugientes veretur? 3. TJnde venistis? 4. Quod teinplum vides? 5. Quam urbem ceperatis? 6. Utram in partem flurnen fluit? 7. Nonne so- lein orientem videtis? 8. Quid ille, quern vidistis, dixit? 9. Quod periculum vitabis? 10. Militesne ut fortes essent hortati sunt? 11. Ubi hae copiae victae erant ? 12. Uter consulum amicus vester est ? 13. Num servus felix esse potest ? 14. Cur haec dixisti? 15. Quamobrem {or quam ob rem) urbem non oppugna- vit ? 16. Cur hoc difficile est? 17. Quae civitates ut pacem peterent ad te veniebant? 18. Dicit hostes perterritos fugisse. LATIN LESSONS. 95 19. Sperat equites exercitum fugientem secutos numeruin magnum liostium interfecturos esse. 20. Nonne hostes castrls nostris potiti nos inierficient ? 21. Servus, cui arma data erant, se non pugnattirum esse dixit. 22. Estiie sapiens ? Non est. 23. Hostesne vicistis ? Vicimus. 24. Nonne imperator vos nomina vestra rogavit ? 25. Ne fugiamus ; et multi et fortes sumus. 26. Duxne legionem ne fugeret liortatus erat? 27. Sequimini, socil, agmen fagiens, quod neque magnum neque forte est. 28. Quemadmodum (or quem ad modura) castris Ariovisti potiri pos- sum us ? 29. Quem ad modum me tibi amicum facere potes ? 30. German! Eomanos sibi obsides poUicitos fidem non servare dicunt. £nglisli into liatln. 1. Who is that man ? 2. What boy is this ? 3. Is he at home ? 4. Isn't Caesar brave? 5. This town cannot be stormed, can it? 6. Why have the men not come? 7. Which of the (two) boys is more like his father? 8. Which (of several) is most unlike her mother? 9. Those boys have taught themselves (their) letters. 10. Let 's ask the farmer the hoise's name. -o^i*io«— LESSON LIV. PRONOUNS: INDEFINITE; DOUBLE QUESTIONS. Learn N. 52 (entire). Learn the Declension of aliquis, si quia, ne quis (both as Substantives and Adjectives), A. 105, d ; B. 91 ; IL 190, 1, 2 ; App. 27. Learn, also, the Declension of quisque, quidam, N. 52, d ; 53, c. Double Questions. Learn N. 101, h. Notice that the simple forms of the Indefinite Pronouns (quis, qui) are not used in this Lesson. (See N. 52.) 96 LATIN LESSONS. Questions and Practice. How does the declension of aliquis and aliqui differ from that of quis and qui ? What other Indefinite Pronouns have the same peculiarity ? Which may be written as separate words, and why ? Give the exact meaning of aliquis. What does quisque ditissimus mean ? (53, b.) Decline the Latin meaning : each soldier ; a certain animal. Why is utrum a suitable particle to introduce a Double Question ? Give the Latin for : are we hrave, or not 1 Also for these sentences (expressing the subject in each): each loves himself ; he teaches him; she praises herself ; they conquer them ; they (feminine) teach themselves; you praise yourself ; they themselves praise you. EXERCISE. 1. Inter se (53, (t) cohortati sunt. 2. Aliquis Caium laudabit. 3. Si quern pugnantem videat, eum laudet. 4. Hortatus est milites ne quod telum rejicerent. 5. Ad puerum, ctijus pater ii^terfectus erat, aliquod donura misit. 6. Si qui fugiant, eos interficite. 7. Quidam dixit nattiram hominibus vitam breviorem quam permultis animalibus dedisse. 8. (^^uisque nobilissimus patriam suam servabit. 9. Si quod templum aedificatum esset, deletum esset. 10. Cujus virtus magna fuit? 11. Si quibus inimlcus sit, consul non creetur. 12. Aliqua castra a nostiis capta sunt. 13. Eos cohortatur, ne quis vereatur. 14. Si quis perlculo perterritus domi mansisset, eum punlvissemus. 15. Quendam delegit, quern ad exercitum mitteret (179, «). 16. Navem metti relinquebant. 17. LegatI a senatu Eomano missi interficiuntur. 18. Omnes virttitem civium, a quibus patria servata est, et laudant et mirantur. 19. Utrum domI an in Gallia est? 20. Utrum Eomanus es, annon? 21. Num mihi inimicl erunt ? 22. Utrum rex dona accepit, an earemisit? 23. Dixit se neque fide neque jiirejurando teneii posse. 24. Plus imperil quam virttitis habere dicitur. 25. Summa vi proelium a dextro cornti commissum est ab equitibus, qui a locis superiori- bus venerant. 26. PutavistI queraque ditissimum mlliti pecuniam daturum esse. 27. Nuntiat milites permultos a manu parva supemtos esse. 28. Legatio ab civitate venit, quae eum ne bei- lum gereret bortaretur. ^9. Qui sunt viri, quos secum babuit ^ LATIN LESSONS. 97 English into liatin. 1. Whom did you send to the camp ? 2. Some one has given a sword to each sohlier. 3. If he had said anything, he would have been punished. 4. He has stormed a town, fortified both by nature and by art (hand). 5. Didn't they say those things, which were not true (verus) ? 6. Every man said that he would come at sunset. 7. Let us not choose any commander. 8. Having fol- lowed the line of march for three miles, they are not able to get possession of the baggage which they have lost. LESSON LV. PLACE: EXCEPTIONS. Learn N. 159 & a, 5, c, Eemark 1. Eemember that, to express Place tvhere, whence, and whither, Prepositions are required, as in Lesson XXXIX. The exceptions are those classes of nouns mentioned in the Notes on this Lesson. Study the Eule (159, c), in connection with the Examples under it, so as to be able to apply it without hesitation. Questions and Practice. Many of the proper nouns used are not in the Vocabulary/, but under 159. Notice that many names of towns have no Singular. What is meant by the Locative case? In what Declensions is it found? What cases does it resemble in form ? What nouns omit the preposition to express place ? Do they illustrate the regular, or the exceptional, use ? When must prepositions be used with Rdma, Capua, etc. ? Give the Latin for : he is at home ; we are in Gaul ; they set out from the camp ; he came from Rome ; there is a temple in the city ; he is in Capua ; they marched from the river to Lyons ; he will be at Veii ; they have come to Carthage ; we will march from Veii to the camp ; he passed the winter in the neighborhood of Rome ; we have eome from the vicinity of A thens ; let us march into the country. 7 98 LATIN LESSONS. EXERCISE. 1. In ulteriore Gallia duas legiones, quae in provincia citeriore proxime conscriptae erant, reliquit. 2. Dixit se cum tribus co- liortibus Yeios profecttirum (199, 2) de secunda vigilia. 3. Dicit exercitum Londinium urbem Britanniae maximam prima Itice iter facttirum. 4. Ex Cisalpina Gallia ad Caesarem, qui eo tempore Vesontione fuit, legati missi sunt. 5. Venite, amici, Bibracte. 6. Noviodtino, oppido Aeduorum, Lugdtinum venit. 7. Utrum Sardibus an Eomae mortui sunt? 8. Capuaene natus es ? 9. Nonne flumina Galliae Transalpinae longiora quam Britanniae sunt? 10. Quot cohortes in legione sunt? 11. Utrum Caesar ad Noviodtinum hiemabit, annon? 12. Utrum domum an rus proficiscemur ? 13. Quis mecum Athenas ibit (will go) ? 14. Num Bibracte una legione expugnare potes ? 15. Kartliagine extrema (110, h) hieme Eomam venit. 16. Loci natura Helvetii continentur; una ex parte fltimine Eheno, latissimo atque altis- simo, qui agrum Helvetiura a Germanis dividit ; altera ex parte, monte Jura (3, & Eemark 1) altissimo, qui est inter Sequanos efc Helvetios; tertia, lacti Lemanno et fltimine Eliodano, qui pro- vinciam nostram ab Helvetiis dividit. LESSON LVL IRREGULAR VERBS: FERO; GENITIVE AFTER SUM. Learn N. 83, 86. Learn the Conjugation of Fero, Active and Passive. A. 139; B. 129; H. 292; App. 42. Genitive after Sum. Learn N. 126, entire. Infinitive as Subject. Learn 36, c, Eemark, page 10; also N. 109, b ; 165, a, Eead carefully 53, 55, page 15. Study the Examples under the Notes /<;/• this Lesson. LATIN LESSONS. 99 Questions and Practice. To T^hat Conjugation (in general) does fero belong ? How would the Present Indicative (Active and Passive) be conjugated, if fero were like rego 1 What is the chief irregularity of ferO ? (86, a. ) What would these forms be, if regu- lar : ferre % fer % ferreni ? fertor ? ferier ? ferri ? What is the Latin for : this horse is Caesar's ? What relation does Caesar's express ? Analyze this English sentence : to die for one's country is noble. Wliat would be the gender of noble in Latin ? Why ? EXERCISE. 1. Onus grave a servo timido fertur. 2. Dicit injtirias latas esse. 3. Nos omnes scimus arma a servis ferri. 4. Socii se castris auxiliura iion lattiros esse dixerunt. 5. Equi armaque conferentur. 6. Hostes tinum impetum iiostrorum ferre non po- terant. 7. Dona atque praemia ad imperatorem lata sunt. 8. Fer, puer, has littcras ad Caesarem. 9. Ferre injtirias est viri fortis. 10. Haec domus Caesaris fuit. 11. Putat eos impedimenta in unum locum contulisse. 12. Omnia sunt victoris. 13. Impera- toris est jubere. 14. Militis Eomani est aut vincere aut mori. 15. Onera feramus. 16. Si suis auxilium tulissent, laudati essent. 17. Haec legio Marci est. 18. Iter longum facere non facile est. 19. Utrum regem malum feremus, annon? 20. Dicit judicium de bello ducis esse. 21. Hie dixit hos agros agricolarum fuisse. 22. De his duobus generibus alterum est servorum, alterum civium. 23. Fortiter pugnare ducis boni est. 24. Consulem pejorem tuleratis. 25. Conferte, cives, arma in hunc locum. 26. Esse melius quam videri est. Englisli into liatin. 1. It is the duty of a good king to rule wisely. 2. We have borne the gift to the city. 3. He bears the injury that he may be thought brave. 4. Let us carry weapons. 5. He says that the general has ordered the baggage to be collected. 6. To call together the men was difficult. 7. To free the camp from danger was very easy. 8. These arms are mine. 9. That house is yours. 100 LATIN LESSONS. 10. To fight as bravely as possible is the legion's duty. 11. These arms cannot be carried by a small man. 12. To send corn to the army was more useful than to promise auxiliaries. LESSON LVII. DATIVE WITH COMPOUND VERBS. Learn N. 133. Notice that the Dative thus used is the Indirect Object, Learn the Principal Parts of these Compounds of fero, which are the ones most commonly used : affero ; confer 6 ; differo ; inf ero ; ref ero ; also of tollo. Notice that the Perfect and Supine of tollo are taken from suffer©, but used with a different meaning. Learn N. 1 (6), and apply it to the compounds of fero. General Questions. What cases do prepositions (used alone) take ? What prepositions are used in compound verbs taking the Dative ? What is the meaning of assimilation t How does it appear in afferd ? conferd ? infera ? possum I How did the Romans express you and I ? Caius and I ? (193, 8.) Give a synopsis, Active and Passive, of ferC. EXERCISE. 1. Et ego et tti Galliae bellum intulimus (117, d). 2. Caesar exercitui praefuit. 3. Omnibus virtute praestant. 4. Si quid mihi accidat, Roma expugnetur. 5. Legioni, quam conscripserat, Caium praefecit. 6. Hi omnes lingua legibusque inter se differunt. 7. Bellum patriae nostrae a cTvibus pessimis infertur. 8. Galliae bellum infer. 9. Dicunt se bellum noblscum gesttiros esse. 10. Navibus eum praeficiemus. 11. Litterae mihi allatae sunt. 12. Ego et Caius regi haec nuntiabimus. 13. Utrum oppido an castris legatus praeest? 14. Si tu et amicus mens vulnemti essetis, ego et frater tuns iiifelicissimi fuissemus. 15. Spes fugae sublata LATIN LESSONS. J.Ol erat. 16. Dicit spem victoriae ab imperatore sublatam esse. 17. Equi omnium ut spes fugae toUeretur remoti sunt. 18. Dona regis ab urbe referent. 19. Geneva profecti estis ut per provinciam nostram iter faceretis, atque bellum sociis nostris inferre possetis. 20. Ne spem fugae tollamus. Englisli into liatin. 1. This (tiling) seems to be easier. 2. Let us make war upon the enemies of the state. 3. These messages were brought to Caesar. 4. We will send the tenth legion home, lest anything should happen to the city. 5. Are you in command of this camp, or not? 6. We differ from each other in many respects (res). 7. We used to be in command of the ships. 8. The leader and I have sent the cohort to Eome. LESSON LVIIL IRREGULAR VERBS: EO; CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. Learn N. 87. Learn the Conjugation of E6. A. 141 ; B. 132; H. 295 ; App. 43. Compounds of E5. Learn N. 87, Eemakk. Conditional Sentences. The general principles have been given in Lesson XXL, and should now be reviewed. Learn N. 174, 175 (entire). Questions. E6 : When does i become e ? What would the Future be, if not Ibo ? Decline the Present Participle. Tell the quantity of i in: ibunt; itarus itH ; ibam ; irem. Give the principal parts of adeO ; ineo ; transeO ; subeo What tenses does the Subjunctive lack ? How is this lack supplied in Con- ditional Sentences ? Is the Conclusion a principal, or subordinate, clause ' Tell what time and kind of statement is expressed in each of the following sen tences; also what mode and tense would be required in Latin to express each 102 LATIN LESSONS. verb: if he were now here, he would he happy ; he would have been successful, if he had been diligent j if he calledj, he found him ; if the hell should ring {Jbefore you start), you would he late ; if he saw the danger {now), we should he glad ; if he had worked, he would now he rich. EXERCISE. 1. Jure (149) belli stipendiam cap it, quod victores victis impo- nere consuerunt (79, 4).* 2. Dicit se mecum iturum esse. 3. Yoblscum ibimus ; quibuscum ibat ? 4. Eomamne iemnt (= ive- runt)? 5. Profectus est ut domum iret. 6. Eamus; ite; ibitis ; aunt; iit. 7. Utrum ibatis an veniebatis? 8. Si Karthaginem ivissent, interfecti essent. 9. Si pericula omnia subeant, laudem mereantur. 10. Si Galliam vicit, Gallis victis stipendium jure belli imposuit. 11. Titum urbi praeficiamus. 12. Consilia de sura mis rebus saepissime ineunt. 13. Si insulam adeat, barbari eum interficiant. 14. Eltimen transire difficillimum fuit. 15. Dixit eos cum millibus hominum quinque Ehenum transittiros. 16. Dicit Helvetios obsides accipere, non dare, consuesse (79, 4). 17. Si nuntius Caesari non allatus sit, cum decima legione sola ad castra eat. 18. Si flumen cum omnibus copiis transirent, raaximo in periculo essemus. 19. Omnes impetus barbarorum diutissime sustinuerunt. 20. Si injTirias dititius tulissetis, nunc servi essetis. Englisli into L.atin. 1. Let him go ; boy, go; boys, go. 2. If he had come, he would have seen and conquered. 3. Let us undergo all perils. 4. We will cross the river Ehone with the infantry. 5. If he should come to Eome as often as possible, he would be a wiser man. 6. The conquered do not impose tribute on the conquerors. 7. War has been made on Gaul, and carried on with the Gauls. 8. If any one should go to see the consul, he would receive a gift. 9. This soldier is veiy like that (one). 10. Peace is very unlike war in all respects (res). * See also 91, Remark ; 98, d* LATIN LESSONS. 103 LESSON LIX. ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. Learn N. 157, entire. Study carefully tlie Examples. Questions and Practice. What does absolute mean ? What three uses has the English Independent Case (8, d, page 2), with Participles ? In what three ways may the Ablative Absolute be expressed ? Give the Latin for: the camp having been fortified, he came to Rome; the soldiers being brave, the enemy were conquered; Caesar being the judge, you loill be punished. How do these sentences (when ex- pressed in Latin) differ from the English? Why? When must the Ablative Absolute be usedt \^Ans. (Remark 1.) To express the Perfect Active Parti- ciple of any verb, not Deponent ; as, having seen, having heard."] To what is the Ablative Absolute usually equivalent? (Remark 2.) Translate, in at least three ways : hostibus victis, castris potiti sumus. EXERCISE. Translate these sentences in as many ways as you can. Remember that the Ablative Absolute can generally be best translated by a clause. 1. Cneio Pompeio et Marco Crasso consulibus, mortuus est. 2. Obsidibus traditis, Caesar in fines Aeduorum contendit. 3. Nullo hoste prohibente, legionem in provinciam perduxit. 4. Cae- sar, loco castris idoneo capto, Crassum ad fiumen Ehenum praemlsit. 5. Hostes apud oppidum morati, agrosque Eemorum populati, omnibus vicis aedificiisque incensis, ad castra Caesaris contende- runt. 6. His verbis auditis, legati se pacem cum populo Eomano non confirmattiros dixerunt. 7. Praesidio relicto castris, de tertia vigilia mecum profectus est. 8. Nuntiis acceptis, consules cuique praemium majus poUicentur. 9. Prima legione superata, impedi- mentisque ab hostibus captis, aliae legiones fugerunt. 10. Aeduis petentibus, victores se victis agros dattiros dixerunt. 11. Oppido capto, castra sub monte ponit. 12. Imperator, exercitu traducto, 104 LATIN LESSONS. ad Genevam quinque dies morabitur. 13. AudTverat barbaros, millia passuura tria nostros sectitos, ab equitibus pulsos esse. 14. Militibus in unum locum convocatis, orationem longam habuistl. 15. Hoc concilio dimisso, iidem principes, qui ad Caesarem ante (95) venerant, se baec ad suos relaturos dixerunt. 16. Tempore brevissimo, non mansimus. Englisli into Ijatln. 1. Having seen the city, he went to the camp. 2. Having heard the voice of the general, he fled as quickly as possible. 3. Having promised corn to the legion, he did not give it. 4. Having fortified that place, they sent legates to seek peace. 5. Hav- ing set-fire-to the city, the barbarians crossed the Ehone. Trayidate these sentences into, Latin, as Simple seiitences : — 6. When this speech had been heard, aU praised the consul. 7. After the city had been freed from the fear of slavery, we all said that Pompey deserved a great reward. 8. When the cities have been destroyed, we shall go home. 9. After the king had been killed, the citizens elected Caius consul. . LESSON LX. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATIONS ; DATIYE OF AGENT. Learn N". 82 (omitting Eemark). Learn the synopsis of the Periphrastic Conjugations (Active and Passive) of amo. A. 129 ; B. 115 ; H. 233, 234 ; App. 39, a, h. Xiative of Agent. Learn N. 136. Questions and Practice. What does Periphrasl^ic mean ? Give the synopsis of the Periphrastic Con- jugations, Active and Passive, of fero ; facio. How is the real agent ex- pressed \ What does the Dative of Agent express, that the Ablative does not ? LATIN LESSONS. 105 Express, in Latin : we must carry these burdens. What name is given to Per- fect tenses formed like dedi, steti, pepuli ? (79, 6.) Translate: vereor ne interficiatur ; veretur ut veniat (179, e). Explain the meaning of n6 and ut in these sentences. How do impedimenta and sarcinae differ in meaning ? EXERCISE. (^Special Examples, page 267.) 1. Hie liber milii legendus est. 2. Litteras ad fratrem missu- rus eram. 3. Quam celerrime iter vobTs faciendum erit. 4. Dicit flumen sibi transeundum esse. 5. De secunda vigilia Gene- van! profecttiri sumus. 6. Equites, qui in fines Aeduorum commeattis causa iverurit, exspectandi sunt. 7-. His rebus cog- nitis, Caesarem |ibi certiorem faciendum esse de adventu hostium dixit. 8. Nonne castra oppugnaturl fuistis? 9. Utrum hi servi imperatori interficiendi an liberandi sunt? 10. Num Ehenum transittiri estis ? 11. Quid faciendum fuit? 12. Milites duci cohortandi erant (80, Eemark 2). 13. Existiniat, agris Kemo- rum vastatis, Titum, qui oppidum expugnet, cum tertia legione mittendum esse. 14. Helvetii populo Eomano bellum illattiri sunt. 15. Veriti estis ne hostes nostros vincerent. 16. Quis veretur ne urbs nostra a civibus deleatur? 17. Delenda est Kar- thago. 18. Dixitne se vereri ut Crassus consul crearetur ? 19. Domum itiirus es ; domus aedificanda fuit. • Englisli into Liatin. 1. I am going to follow the fleeing enemy. 2. They intended to find out these things. 3. We were about to carry on war with you. 4. He says that he must make war on the state. 5. We must carry on many wars in Gaul. 6. They will have to march through Italy. 7. Crassus must inform Caesar about these mat- ters (rgs). 8. The tenth legion must be sent to get possession of the light-baggage. 9. Were they not going to set fire to all the buildings ? 10. Having read the book through (perlego), the boy wrote a letter to his friend about it. 106 LATIN LESSONS. LESSON LXI. IRREGULAR VERBS: FIO; SUBJUNCTIVE EXPRESSING A WISH. Learn N. 88 (entire). Learn the Conjugation of Fio. A. 142 ; B. 131; H. 294; App. 44. Subjunctive eocpressing a Wish, Learn N. 176 (entire). Notice : (1) That compounds of facio are formed and conjugated in two different ways (Remark under N. 88); (2) That a clause containing a wish expresses something impossible (past or present) or possible (future). The general principles of Indirect Cotnmand have^ already been given. Review N. 164, c & Remark; also learn N. 178 k Caution 1. Questions and Practice. What are the principal parts of facid, Active and Passive; also of these compounds (in both Voices): con + facio ; bene + faciC ; inter + facid ? Conjugate the Imperative, Active and Passive, of fero. Wliat verbs form the Second Person Singular, of the Present Imperative Active, like ferd ? (79, 5.) Give the Second Person Singular of the Present Imperative and the Future Indicative (both Voices) of facio and the compounds mentioned in the first question. When must ne the adverb be used? {Ans. In negative com- mands and wishes.) When must ne the conjunction be used ? {Ans. In nega- tive purposes.) When must n6 the enclitic be used ? What two meanings may fid have ? • EXERCISE. 1, Haec nullo modo fieri possunt. 2. Hi viri eonsules fient. 3. Copias, Cai, edtic et cum hostibus pugna. 4. Imperator fis; naves flebant. 5. Eogavit ut ilia quam piiinum fierent. 6. Ne impetus in hostes fiat. 7. Utinam consul factus esset ! 8. Ne moriamur; utinam Caesar viveret ! 9. Ferte, servi, haec arma ad regem vestrum. 10. Die, puer, haec patii tuo. 11. Si Galli Romanos vicissent, nunc in servittite teneremur. 12. Ne Belgis bellum inferant, ne vincantur. 13. Belgas plurimos manti minima victtiri sumus. 14. Nonne Marcus veretur ne barbari urbe poti- LATIN LESSONS. 107 antur? 15. Utinam vos ipsi amici Caesaris essetis ! 16. Nuntius, quern duces praemiserant, nos certiores fecit Belgas, omnibus portis oppidi clausis, inter s6 cohortan ne arma trSderent. Englisli into liatin. 1. Let nothing (nS quis) be done without the aid of Caesar. 2. In the consulship of Cicero and Antonius, these men made war upon the state. 3. Bring (affero) me the books, Antonius, that I may read. 4. Let the messages be carried from Geneva to the camp. 5. Would that they were better citizens ! 6. Let us not order the camp to be broken up. 7. He says that this happens very often. 8. Let (there) be (193, 6) light; (there) was light. 9. Go, slave; tell these things to your king. 10. Having over- come the forces of the Gauls, he received the hostages that they had promised. LESSON LXIL IRREGULAR VERBS : VOLO AND ITS COMPOUNDS. Learn N. 89; 90. Learn the Conjugation of Vol6; N616; Maio. A. 138; B. 130; H. 293; App. 45. Questions and Practice. Tell what these forms would be, if vol6 and its compounds were conjugated like rego : vis ; vult ; nolle ; velim ; vellet ; malle ; volumus ; velle ; vultis. Of what are maid and nolo compoimded ? Conjugate the Imperative of faciO (Active and Passive); fero (Active and Passive); oonfioid (Active and Passive) ; sum ; e6 ; n6l6. EXERCISE. 1. Mens, queni Caesar a Crasso teneri voluerat, ab hostibus tenebatur. 2. Ad oppidum redibo ; vos omnes fltimen transire vultis. 3. Is regnum, quod pater multos annos obtinuerat, occu- 108 LATIN LESSONS. pare voliiit. 4. Visne ut me videas venire? 5. Dixit se velle eum legem illius civitatis facere. 6. Tres milites ferentes legatum suura, qui vulneratus erat, vicli. 7. Nonne ex oppido egredi vul- tis? 8. Tti me, qui laudari nolebam, laudasti (79, 4). 9. Hel- vetii agros finitimorum vastare nolunt. 10. Caesar se ab ulteriore provincia discedere nolle dixit. 11. Regem bonum ferre noluistis; nunc pejorem ferte. 12. Barbari nos, qui pugnare nolumus, oppugnabunt. 13. Germani sperabant se Caesarem ipsum victtirob esse. 14. Utrum pugnare an fugere mavis? 15. Si signa sequi nolint, ptiniantur. 16. Nolite (178, 2 k b) longius (40, a) proce- dere, ne a barbaris capiamini. 17. Si Eomae manere malit, igna- vus appelletur. 18. Helvetii, equitatti nostro rejecto, pedites flumen transire audacissime conantes repulerunt. 19. Nonne domi esse quam in urbe hostium maletis ? 20. Barbari omnibus in collibus instructi exercitum ejus itinere proliibere conati sunt. 21. Num bellum populo (133) Eomano suo nomine indixit? 22. Egredere, Cai, ex urbe; libera rem publicam metti; profi- ciscere. £nslisli into liatin. 1. Are you not unwilling to advance too far? 2. Let us go back to our friends, whose buildings are in great danger. 3. Were they unwilling to surrender (trado) their arms to you, Caesar ? 4. Caesar ascertained that the higher places were held by his men, and that the Gauls had moved their camp. 5. Do you {plural) wish to hear the words which I, the consul, speak? 6. The soldiers, returning from that battle, found a certain slave, who had been left near the heavy baggage. 7. Having been made consul, he led his forces across the sea and conquered the general whom all had feared. 8. He drew up two cohorts behind the camp; he sent forward five others, with all the auxiliaries, to storm the town. LATIN LESSONS. 109 LESSON LXIII. DEFECTIVE VERBS; OBJECTIVE GENITIVE. Learn N. 91 & 1, 2. Learn the Conjugation of Coepi ; 6di; MeminT. A. 143 (entire) ; B. 133 ; H. 297 ; Apr 46, & Remark 1. Genitive as Object : a. With Nouns and Adjectives. Learn N. 124. b. With Verbs of Remembering and Forgetting, Learn N. 125. Study very carefully the Examples under N. 124, 125. EXERCISE. Tell which Genitives denote the Subject, and which the Object, of an Action or Feeling. 1. Hos elves esse fortes credere incipiunt. 2. Castra Eomano- rum summa vi oppugnare coepit. 3. Oppidum aedificari coeptum est. 4. Omnes legiones e castiis egredi coeperant. 5. Caesarem et Eomanos odit, quod adventu eorum spes victoriae sublata est. 6. Nos omnes oderimus illos homines, qui patriam suam delere conantur. 7. Meministine? non meminl. 8. Dixit se omnesque elves meminisse. 9. Habetis ducem inemorem vestii (123, ^), oblitum sui. 10. Helvetii, quod bellandi (190) cupidissimi sunt, in fines Gallorum iter facient. 11. Dicit Eemos rerum novarum cupidiores quam pacis futures esse. 12. Ariovistus se non im- peritum rerum esse dixit. 13. Htijusne rei ignan fuerunt ? 14. Scimus Helvetiorum injiirias Gallorum maximas fuisse. 15. Ob- Ilviscimini, socii, veterum injtiriarum. 16. Ejus timor mortis magnus fuit. 17. Is, Marco Messala et Marco Pisone consulibus, regni cupiditate inductus conjurationem nobilitatis fecit. 18. Dixerunt militum amorem belli magnum esse. 19. Num illius conjtirationis, quam mali fecerunt, unquam obliviscemur ? 20. Dicit homines suae patriae oblitos consul! puniendos (esse). 21. Semper mortis Caesaris meminero. 22. Nunquam illius noctis 110 LATIN LESSONS. obliviscar. 23. Eeminiscatur veteris incommodi populi EomanL 24. Hanc esse patriam meam atque me consulem horum oblivisci non possum. LESSON LXIV. - IMPERSONAL VERBS. Learn N. 92 (entire), 93 kl,a,c, 2. Learn the synopsis of licet and pugnatur. A. 145 ; B. 138 ; H. 298, 299, 301, 1 ; App. 47. Slud^ the Examples under N. 92, 93, 198. Eemember that emry verb has a subject, whicb answers the question Wlio ? or What ? Study the special Examples, page 267 ; the subjects are printed in italics. The subject may be an Infinitive Clause (N. 188, b, 1). Questions and Practice. What value has it in the sentence: it is wrong to steal? (55, page 15.) What is the actual subject of is? Translate: pugnatur; pugnatum est; pugnaudum est ; nobis maturandum est ; optimum visum est mllites mittere. What is the gender of visum and optimum? Why? (109, b.) What case must be used with licet? oportet? (197, 2.) How do you express may and can ? (197, 3.) In what two ways can must be expressed ? {Ans. By the Passive Periphrastic Conjugation and by oportet. ) EXERCISE. These sentences should be analyzed. If the Infinitive^ or a Clause^ is used as Subject, then it must have a Case, Tell which verbs are Impersonal, and which are used impersonally. 1. Licet nobis bellum cum iis gerere. 2. Licuit iis nobiscum bella multa gerere. 3. Oportet me omnia fortiter ferre. 4. Eum ad mortem diici oportuit. 5. Is ad mortem dticendus fuit. 6. Dicit se frumento uti oportere. 7. Pugnabatur diu et acriter ad impedimenta. 8. Pugnabitur a septima hora ad occasum solis. 9. Optimum videtur Marcum ad eum mittere. 10. Dixisti iter per Galliam facere tibi licere. 11. Oportet vos Ehenum transire; LATIN LESSONS. Ill Rhenus vobis transeundus est. 12. Nobis non exspectandum (esse) existimatis. 13. Legibus bonis utendum est. 14. Mihi conten- dendum est ; Caesaii eundum est. 15. Liceat raibi ex urbe egredL 16. Audivit milites fltimen transire non dubita(vi)sse. 17. Moenia a nobis defensa sunt et vobis defendenda erunt. 18. Consulis sapientis est bonos circum se semper habere. 19. Viros ut fortes atque veteris incommodi sui memores sint hortatur. 20. Me cer- tiorem faciunt apud Helvetios longe nobilissimum et ditissimum Orgetorigem fuisse. 21. (Eum) damnatum poenam sequi oportebat. Englisli into liatin. 1. It is very difficult to undergo perils. 2. We must fight as boldly as possible. 3. We must not forget the death of our leader. 4. They had begun to set out from Home. 5. They ought to have been sent with the cavalry. 6. We may teach the boys (their) letters. 7. He could have marched twenty miles. 8. We must inform the citizens about the revolution. LESSON LXV. SUBJUNCTIVE OF RESULT; SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. Subjunctive of Hesult, Learn N. 181 (entire). Substantive Clauses. Learn N. 188 & a, b, 1, 2 (5). Remember that any word, clause, or group of words answering the question What ? may be the subject or object of a verb. Notice, in the sentences of the Exercise, that a clause may express a result, and be, at the same time, the subject of a verb. Study carefully the Examples under the Notes for this Lesson. Questions and Practice. What is the gender of an Infinitive or a Clause ? Why ? {Ans. Because it is indeclinable. ) What is regularly used instead of the Future Infinitive Passive ? (181, a, Remark. ) Give the principal parts and synopsis (as Impersonal Verbs) of accidit, sequitur, fit. Analyze this English sentence : that he is my friend is true. 112 LATIN LESSONS. EXERCISE. Special Examples for this Lesson are given on page 267. 1. Ita acriter impetus factus est, ut nostri fugerent. 2. Tantus timor omnes occupavit, ut se flumen non transittiros (esse) dicerent. 3. Yir ejusmodi (121) est, ut eum terrere non possimus. 4. Nemo tarn multa scripsit, ut plura scribere nolit. 5. Cicero sic ab omni- bus amatus est, ut consul fieret. 6. Accidit, ut Itina plena esset. 7. Sequitur, ut ignavus sis. 8. Eestat, ut de illo proelio dicam. 9. His rebus fiebat, ut et minus late vagarentur et minus facile finitimis bellum inferre possent. 10. Pecerunt ut profectio simil- lima fugae videretur. 11. Dixit fore ut omnes Helve tii Ehenum transirent. 12. Sperat fore ut Lostes vincantur {not hostes victum ill). 13. Quis tam ignavus est, qui se suaque omnia Ariovisto dedere velit? 14. Ego non is sum, qui mortis periculo terreri possira. 15. Imperator milites sic hortatus est, ut a decima legione ad occasum solis pugnaretur. 16. Nostri retineri non potuerunt, quin tela in hostes venientes conjicerent. 17. Non est dubium, quin to tins Galliae (122, <5) pltirimum (142, c) pos^int. 18. Non dubito quin hie fortissimus sit. 19. Castra Eemorum quam pri- mum oppugnare non dubitabimus. 20. Ne faciamus ut haec urbs ab Helvetiis deleatur. 21. Quis vestrum oblitus nostii (123, h) esse potest? 22. Nostri virtute maxima, quod (115, h) in spe victoriae saepe accidit, pugnare coeperunt. 23. Oppida sua omnia numero (153) ad duodecim, vicos ad quadringentos, reliqua aedifi- cia incendunt. 24. Hac oraiione adducti inter se fidem et jusjti- randum dant et, regno occupato, per tres potentissimos populos imperio totius Galliae sese potiri posse sperant. Snglisli into Liatin. 1. It very often happens that slaves fight more bravely than soldiers. 2. He was so just that he was unwilling to punish you. 3. He says that the towns will not be taken. 4. The enemy are so many in number that we cannot conquer them. 5. His speech was of-such-a-sort that we were all influenced by it. 6. Let us LATIN LESSONS. 113 always be mindful of praise and glory. 7. They cannot be re- strained from following the enemy. 8. He said that there was no doubt that the Bel^fae were the bravest. oJ<Ko LESSON LXVI. DATIVE WITH INTRANSITIVE VERBS; INTRANSITIVE VERBS USED IN THE PASSIVE. Dative with Intransitive Verbs (Advantage or Disad- vantage). Learn N. 131 & a. For the Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage with Adjectives, see Lesson XXXIV. Intransitive Verbs used in the Passive, Learn N. 131, a, Caution ; 134. Study the Examples under N. 198. Historical Present, Learn N. 168, b ; 172, Remark 2, Sequence of Tenses, Learn N. 171, 172 (entire). This subject has been partially presented in Lesson XL. Questions. What verbs are followed by the Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage? What case follows imperd ? jubeo ? (197, 1.) What mode follows imperd ? jubeOl (179, d.) Name the Primary tenses of the Indicative; the Secondary tenses. Why is the Historical Present so called ? Is it a Primary or Secondary tense? What Deponent verbs require the Ablative? (161, a.) Verbs com- pounded with what Prepositions require the Dative ? (133.) EXERCISE. 77ie classes of Substantive Clauses em]ployed in this Exercise are described in 188, b, 1, 2. 1. Haec araicis nostris nocebunt. 2. Omnia non omnibus pla- cent. 3. Hi imperatori non parituri erant. 4. Verebamur ne cives Ariovisto regi Germanorum servirent. 5. Mihi credite, socii ; hostes vobis non resistent. 6. Legati Caesarem Eemis ignovisse et eos non ptinivisse dixerunt. 7. Per eos, ne causam diceret, se 114 LATIN LESSONS. eripuit. 8. Copiis, qiias secum liabuit, ut in fines Sequanorum iter facerent, imperavit. 9. Dicit se obsides Aeduis a Eemis dan jussisse. 10. Sciunt fore ut de tertia vigilia castra moveantur. 11. Crediderunt Caium ipsum imperatorem creari oportuisse. 12. Si haec ita essent, tecum ire nollem. 13. Helvetii legates ad eum mittunt, qui pacem peterent. 14. Dum haec geruntur, imperator copias suas fltimen (141, c) transdticebat. 15. Civitati persuasit, ut de finibus suis cum omnibus copiis exirent (117, c). 16. Non est dubium quin urbem expugnatuii sint. 17. Navibus noceri non poterat. 18. Vobis legibus parendum esse intelligitis. 19. Nobis hostibus resistendum est. 20. Mihi persuadetur; dicit sibi persuasum esse. 21. Legionibus a Caesare imperatum est. English into Ijatin. 1. The slaves were ordered (jubeo) to go. 2. The soldiers are ordered (impero) to march. 3. The states are persuaded to go. 4. The consul is not believed. 5. The cavalry will be resisted. 6. They say that they have obeyed the general. 7. These men ought to be resisted. 8. We shall persuade the troops to go (179, d) home. 9. The city cannot be harmed. LESSON LXVII. DATIVE OF POSSESSOR; TWO DATIVES; SEMI-DEPONENT VERBS. native denoting the JPossessor, Learn N. 135. This use is sometimes seen in English ; as, " To him that overcometh, a crown of life shall be.'* Two Datives. Learn N. 137. Semi-Deponent Verbs, Learn N. 81. Notice that both the Dative of Possessor and the Dative of the Person (two Datives) are Datives of Advantage (or Disadvantage). LATIN LESSONS. 115 Questions and Practice. Give the principal parts of auded, fidd, gaudeC, soleO. Give the synopsis of audeo. What is the meaning of Deponent 1 Semi- Deponent I When must the Ablative Absolute be used ? Can Intransitive verbs be used in the Passive? Translate: Caesari persuaderl nOn potest; duel ab omnibus paretur. EXERCISE. 1. Viro quinque equi sunt. 2. Duci maximus militum numerus fuit. 3. Dicit sibi in animo esse per provinciam iter facere. 4. Utrum his civibus virtus est, annon ? 5 . Mihi spes magna fuit. 6. Illis oppida nuraero (153) circiter {or ad) viginti sunt. 7. Certiores fact! sunt permultos servos Germanis esse. 8. Milites legionum duarum, quae in novissimo agraine praesidio impedimen- tis fuerant,* proelio nuntiato, cursti incitato, in summo colle ab hostibus conspiciebantur. 9. Decimam legionem subsidio nostns {or urbi, nobis, castiis) miserat. 10. Caesar ab secunda legione ad dextrum cornu profectus, suos urgeri signisque in unum locum coUatisf duodecimae legionis confertos milites sibi esse impedi- mento vidit. 11. His difficultatibus duae res erant subsidio. 12. Partem suarum copiarum transducere conati sunt, eo consilio, ut cas- tellum, cui praeerat Quintus Titurius legatus, expugnarent. 13. Veriti sum us ne agros Eemorum popularentur, qui magno nobis tisui erant, commeattique nostros prohiberent. 14. Illi, ut (197, 5) erat impemtum, eductis quattuor cohortibus, quae praesidio castris relictae erant, et longiore itinere (159, Remark 3) circumductis, ne ex hostium castris conspici possent, omnium oculis mentibusque ad pugnam intentis,t celeriter ad eas, quas diximus, munltiones pervenerunt. 15. Caesar haec sibi curae esse dixit. 16. Audi- verat bos fltimen latissimum transire ausos esse. 17. Yeretur ut exercitus dicto audiens futurus sit (82, Remark). 18. Num in hunc locum venire audes? 19. Aestate rus ire solet. 20. Nonne Ariovistus Galliae bellum inferre audebit ? * Esse, with two Datives, is usually best translated to serve (as), t 157, Rem. 2. 116 liATIN LESSONS. LESSON LXVIII. ABLATIVE WITH COMPARATIVES; ABLATIVE DENOTING MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE. Ablative with Comparatives (Quam omitted).* Learn N. 154. Ablative denoting the Measure (or Degree) of Difference, Learn N. 155 (entire). This may express : — a. Difference in Length, Height, Width, etc, h, Difference in Time. c. Difference in Distance. d. Various ideas of Difference in Amount or Degree, All these forms have equivalents in the use of the English Ob- jective Case ; as, a. He is a head taller ; b. He has lived here two years longer than I; c. We are three miles distant from home; d. He is a great deal richer. Remark. Longe, hy far (really an old Ablative), expresses Degree of Difference. EXERCISE. 1. Omnia consilia tua nobis clariora luce sunt. 2. Nemo Eomae Crasso fuit ditior. 3. Quis nobilior Caesare esse potest? 4. Dixit Ehenum altiorem Ehodano esse. 5. Castra amplius millibus passuum octo in latitudinem patebant. 6. Hiems longior aestate erit. 7. Patria mihi multo carior vita mea est. 8. Hie puer biennio major est quam ilia puella. 9. Castra a Eoma millibus passuum quinque aberant. 10. Aliud aedificium supra pontem spatio aequo est. 11. Flumen triginta millibus passuum infra eum locum fuit. 12. Annum longiorem duobus mensibus fecerunt. 13. In senatum paulo ante venistL 14. Miles, de quo paulo ante diximus, vir longe fortissimus fuit in exercitU. 15. Eo opere per- * Of course, if quam is expressed, the noun or pronoun after it will be in the same case as that preceding; as, Caesar fortior est quam Fompeius (est). LATIN LESSONS, 117 fecto, castella communit, quo (179, b) facilius eos, se invito, transire conantes proliibere possit. 16. Legem brevem esse oportet, quo facilius intelligatur. 17. Dixit exercitum dicto audientem non fore. 18. Portis (159, Eemark 3) omnibus eruptionem faciunt. 19. Eelinquebatur una per Sequanos via, qua, Sequanis invitis, propter angustias ire non poterant. 20. Quanto (155, b) gravior oppugnatio fuit, tanto crebriores nuntii ad Caesarem mittebantur. 21. Post ejus mortem nihilo minus Helvetii id, quod constituerant, facere conantur, ut e finibus suis exeant (181, e). 22. Erant omnino itinera duo, quibus itineribus domo exire possent (181, c) : tinum per Sequanos, angustum et difficile, inter montem Juram et flumen Ehodanum, vix qua (94, 2) singuli (41, a) cani dticerentur ; mons autem altissimus impendebat, ut facile perpauci (eos) pro- hibere possent : alterum per provinciam nostram, multo facilius atque expeditius, propterea quod inter fines Helvetiorum et Allo- brogum Ebodanus fluit, isque nonnullis (195, 1) locis vado -transitur. Englisli into liatin. 1. The tower is ten feet higher than the wall. 2. The boy is a whole head taller than his father. 3. Did the messenger come a little while ago? 4. This temple is much wider than that. 5. They are twenty miles from the camp. 6. Priends, be brave, that you may the more easily encounter dangers. 7. He commands (impero) me to go to Bibracte. 8. The consul is much wiser tlian the judge. LESSON LXIX. CAUSAL CLAUSES. Clauses expressing a Cause, Learn N. 182, «, ^, c. The Relative JPronoun used for a Demonstrative, Learn N. 115, d. 118 LATIN LESSONS. EXERCISE. 1. Dumnorix gratia apud Sequanos plurimum poterat, et Hel- vetiis erat amicus, quod ex ea civitate Orgetorigis filiam in matri- monium duxerat ; et cupiditate regni adductus novis rebus (131, a) studebat, et quam plurimas civitates suo sibi beneficio habere obstrictas volebat. 2. Quae quum ita sint, domum contendemus. 3. Quo facto, quum alius alii (195, 9) subsidium ferrent, neque timerent ne ab hostibus circumvenirentur, audacius resistere ac fortius pugnare coeperunt. 4. Quibus rebus cognitis, Caesar tres cohortes, quae Eoma veiierant, subsidio legioiii praemisit. 5. In priraam aciem processit centurioiiibusque nominatim appellatis, reliquos cohortatus milites, signa iuferre et manipulos laxare jussit, quo facilius gladiis titi possent. Ciijus adventti spe illata militibus, quum quisque in conspectti imperatoris etiam in extremis suis rebus* quam fortissime pugnare cuperet, paulum hostium impetus tarda- tus est. 6. Quum te fortiorem Tito esse dicas, copias tuas edtic et impetum in hostes fac. 7. Condemnatus est, qui amicum suum interfecerit. 8. Magnam Caesar injuriam facit, quum libertatem nostram eripiat. 9. Equitatui (133), quem auxilio (137) Caesari Aedui miserant, Dumnorix praeerat. 10. Diutius quum nostro- rum impetus sustinere non possent, alteri (195, 8) se, ut (197, 5) coeperant, in montem receperunt, alteri ad impedimenta et carros suos se contulerunt. Ad multam noctem pugnatum est, prop- terea quod pro vallo can'os objecerant, et e loco superiore in nostros venientes tela conjiciebant. 11. Ex eo proelio circiter millia hominum centum et trigiiita superfuerunt, eaque tota nocte continenter ierunt ; nullam partem noctis itinere (157) intermisso in fines Lingonum die quarto pervenerunt, quum propter vulnera militum nostri triduum morati eos sequi non potuissent. * Equivalent to in extremd suO periculd. LATIN LESSONS. 119 LESSON LXX. USES OF THE ABLATIVE CASE. Ablative denoting Quality. Learn N. 152. When should the Genitive of Quality be used? (N. 152, a.) Ablative with Adjectives: a. With Fretus, Contentus (denoting Means). Learn N. 151, b. b. With Dignus, Indignus. Learn N. 156. Ablative denoting Price. Learn N. 151, c. EXERCISE. 1. Germanos corporum ingenti magnitudine esse dixerunt. 2. Audiverat turres magna altitudine esse. 3. Quod civitas erat magna inter Belgas auctoritate atque hominum multitudine prae- stabat, sexcentos obsides poposcit. 4. Iter quinque dierum fecit, et ad fltimen pervenit. Ejus fltirainis altitudo quindecim pedum erat. 5. Dicit fratrem suum magna vi et animi et corporis fuisse. 6. Preti diis immortalibus audacissime resistebant. 7. Puer donis, quae dedisti, contentus erit. 8. Pugnatum est diu atque acriter, quum hostes superioribus victoriis freti in sua virtute totius Aqui- taniae salutem positam putarent (182, b). 9. Hic praemio, quod te dattirum (esse) dixisti, dignus fuit. 10. Consul tanto lionore indignus est. 11. Num ii, qui urbefn servare noluerunt, araicitia nostra digni sunt? 12. Putat se librum viginti sestertiis vendi- tnrum esse. 13. Nonne mihi domum tuam parvo pretio vendere VIS? 14. Hi omnes intelb'gunt Germanos a Sequanis mercede arcessitos esse. 15. Ke fmmentaria quam celerrime potuit com- parata, magnis itineribus ad Ariovistum contendit. 16. His rebus cognitis, Caesar Gallorum animos verbis confirmavit, pollicitusque est sibi (137) earn rem ctirae futuram (esse). Dixit magnam se habere spem (= sperare) et beneficio suo et auctoritate adductum Ariovistum finem injuriis facturum (esse). 120 LATIN LESSONS. Bngllsli into liatin. 1. Let us sell these houses at a very large price. 2. He will sell that book for fifty cents (ten sestertii). 3. Was he unwilling to fight for pay ? 4. If they had been worthy of praise, we should have praised them. 5. A mountain of great height occupies (contineo) that place. 6. He will not go to the city, since he prefers to remain at home. 7. Ariovistus did not dare to come into Gaul, because Caesar was in the province with his army. 8. Men of unfriendly disposition (animus) cannot march through our territory. LESSON LXXI. CONCESSIVE CLAUSES; HLSTORICAL INFINITIVE. Clauses denoting Concession. Learn N. 183 & «, Cau- tion, b. Historical Infinitive. Learn N. 167. Notice that tamen {yet) is very often used as a Correlative (N. 195, 8) to a Conjunction meaning although. Questions. What does the word concession mean ? When must the Subjunctive be used with etsi and tametsi ? What f(5ur uses may qui have with the Subjunctive ? (N. 197, 6.) Why is the Historical Infinitive so called? What is peculiar about its use? What are the chief uses of the Infinitive? {Ans. 1.) As a Verbal Noun. (2.) As a Complement. (3.) With a Subject Accusative. (4.) With a Subject Nominative {Historical). How may quum be spelled ? EXERCISE. 1. Quum Crassus imperator creatus esset, tamen milites eum sequi nolebant. 2. Quum ad multam noctem pugnetur, nostri non fugient. 3. Etsi mihi inimlcus esset (175, a, 2), eum non odis- sem. 4. Quae (115, d) tametsi Caesar intelligebat, tamen proe- LATIN LESSONS. 121 Hum sibi (136) cominittendam non existimavit. 5. Quum ea ita sint, tamen, si obsides ab iis mihi dabuntur, et si Aedius (131, a) de injtiriis, quas ipsis (= Aeduis) sociisque eorum intulerunt, item si Allobrogibus satisfacient, cum iis pacem faciam. 6. Legatum, qui nihil morte (156) dignum fecisset (183, b), interfecerunt. 7. Quum mlirus defensoribus ntidatus sit, hostes nobis se dedere nolurit. 8. Servum graviter acctisat, qui (182, c) litteras non miserit. 9. Septem cohortes, quae nobis (137) subsidio essent (180), misit. 10. Nemo est (ejus modi), qui pro patria (129, h) sua mori nolit. 11. Caesar Aeduos frtimentum flagitare. Diem ex die Aedui (eum) ducere ; frtimentum confern, comportari, adesse dicere. 12. Persuadent finitimis, uti, eodem tisi consiliS (151, a), oppidis vicisque exustis, una (94, 2) secum proficis- cantur. Englisli into liatin. 1. Althougli we are citizens, we are not free. 2. Although (etsi) the soldiers were' ordered (jubeo) to advance, yet they did not obey. 3. Although we should iiave given-satisfaction-to (sat- isfied) the Eemi, yet they would not make peace with us. 4. Let us accuse them severely, since they have said that they are not Romans. 5. We will burn our towns, about fifteen in number, lest the Gauls capture them. LESSON LXXII. TEMPORAL CLAUSES. Clauses denoting Time. Learn N. 184 (entire). Questions. When does quum (cum), ivhen, take tlie Subjunctive ? Which of these are correct : quum fui ; quum eram ; quum fuero ; quum amabam ; quum monueram? What may dum mean? (N. 184, h ; 183, d,) When do ante- quam and priusquam require the Subjunctive ? What meanings may quum have ? What mode is used with most of the particles of time ? Express in two ways, a thousand nien (43, e). 122 LATIN LESSONS. EXERCISE. 1. Quum esset Caesar in citeriore Gallia in hibernis, ita uti supra diximus (197, 5 ; 111, a), crebrl ad eum nun til afferebantur Jitterisque Labieni certior fiebat, omnes Belgas (199, 3) contra populum Romanum conjtirare obsidesque inter se (112, b) dare : conjtirandi (190) causas multas esse. 2. Ubi neutri traiiseundi (190) initium faciunt (168, b), Caesar suos in castra reduxit. 3. Qui (115, d) quum se suaque omnia in oppidum contulissent atque ab eo oppido Caesar cum exercitti millibus passuum quinque abesset, omnes majores natti (36, b; 153) ex oppido egressi sese in ejus fidem venire dixerunt. 4. Eodem tempore equites nostri peditesque, qiu cum iis fuerant, quos primo hostium impetti pulsos (esse) dixeram, quum se in castra reciperent adversis liostibus (133) occurrebant ac rursus aliam in partem fugam petebant ; et servi, qui ab summo jugo collis nostros victores fliimen transisse conspexerant, praedandl (190) causa profecti, quum respexissent et hostes in nostris castrls versarl vidissent, ftigerunt. 5. Dum reliquae naves convenlrent, exspectavit. 6. Dum paucos dies ad Yesontionem rei frtimentariae commeattisque causa moratur (184, b, Eemark), ildem principes civitatum reverterunt petieruntque uti sibi (134, Remark) de sua omniumque salute cum eo agere liceret. 7. Dum haec faciant (183, d), urbem non expugnabimus. 8. Ne ejus supplicio DivitiacI animum ofFenderet, verebatur. Ita- que priusquam quidquam conaretur, Divitiacum ad se vocarl jubet. 9. Quod (115, d) postquam barbari fieri animadverterunt, ad flumen contenderunt. 10. Priusquam perlculum faceret, idoneum esse arbitratus Caium cum navl longa praemittit. 11. Quibus rebus adductus non sibi (136) exspectandum (199, 2) existimavit, dum in Santonos Helvetil pervenlrent. Englisli into liatin. 1. When the work had been finished (perficio), he ordered two legions to follow him. 2. They waited until the troops should arrive. 3. When he comes (168, a), we will inform him concern- LATIN LESSONS. 123 ing these facts. 4. When this battle had been announced across the Ehine, the Eemi sent legates to ask (180) aid. 5. As soon as (= after) Caesar arrived at the camp, he ordered a much higher rampart to be made. 6. When the camp had been fortified, the enemy began to return home. 7. When Caesar was setting-out into Italy, he sent Crassus with the twelfth legion and a part of the cavalry into-the-country-of (into) the Veragri and Sedtini, who extend from the territory of the Allobroges and Lake Geneva (Lemannus) and the river Ehone to the Alps. LESSON LXXIII. 'gerund and gerundive. Gerund. Learn N. 190. Gerundive. Learn N. 189,/; 190, a. Remark. The Gerund has already been employed in these Lessons; so, also, has the Infinitive (as a verbal noun in the Nominative Case). The use of both is very easily understood, being like that of anywew^er noim. The use of the Gerundive (for the Gerund) must be studied with special care (N. 190, a). Study the Examples under the Note. Notice that ad, with the Accusative of the Gerund or Gerundive, implies a purpose. Questions and Practice. What is used as the Nominative of the Gerund ? What two common uses has the Gerundive ? When should it be used instead of the Gerund ? Give the rule for determining the form of the Noun and of the Gerundive. Give the Latin for : the hope of seeing tlie soldiers ; the opportunity (facultas) for {of) leaving this place is not given. EXERCISE. 1. Nos oranes magistrum docenclo se docere scimns. 2. His rebus adducti et auctoritate Orgetorigis permoti, constituerunt ea, quae ad proficiscendum pertinerent (181, c), comparare atque cum proximis civitatibus pacem et amicitiam confirmare. 3. Proximo 124 LATIN LESSONS. die Caesar e castiis utrisque copias suas eduxit, paulumque a majoribus castris progressus aciem instruxit hostibusque pugnandi potestatem fecit. 4. Ita nostri acriter in liostes signo (157) dato impetum fecerunt, itaque (195, 5) hostes celeriter procurrerimt, ut spatium pila in hostes conjiciendl non daretur. 5. Quum fiiiem oppugnandi nox fecisset, Iccius Kemus (106), summa nobilitate (152) et gratia inter suos, qui oppido praefuerat, tiiius ex liis (123, a) qui legati (106) de pace ad Caesarem venerant, nuntiuin ad eum mittit. 6. Causa mittendi fuit, quod iter per Alpes, quo (159, Eemaek 3) magno cum periculo mercatores ire consuerant (91, 2, Eemark), patefieri volebat. 7. Dixit perfacile (109, b) esse, quum virttite omnibus (133) praestarent, totius Galliae imperio (151, a) potiri. Id hoc (149) facilius eis persuasit, quod undique loci nattira Helvetii continentur. 8. Frtimentum omne, praeter- quam quod secum portaturi erant, combtirunt, ut, domum reditionis spe (157) sublata, paratiores ad omnia pericula subeunda essent. 9. Ubi nostros non esse virtute inferiores intellexit, loco (157 (2)) pro castris ad aciem instruendam natura (149) idoneo, duabus legionibus in castris relictis, ut subsidio (137, Eemark) dtici possent, proelii committendi signum dedit. 10. Ariovistus dicit non sese Gallis .(Ji^^), sed Gallos sibi bellum intulisse ; omnes Galliae civitates ad se oppugnandum venisse. 11. Utrum sui muniendi, an Galliae occupandae causa multittidinem Germanorum in Galliam transduxit? 12. Alii aliam in partem (195, 9) perter- riti ferebantur. Snglish into L.atin. 1. They gave the enemy no opportunity for (of) leaving the towns. 2. We have come for the purpose (causa) of storming your cities. 3. He thinks that time (spatium) ought not to be given to the enemy for (ad) adopting (capio) plans. 4. While he delays in these places for the sake of securing (paro) ships, legates came to him from a large part of the Sequani, to say (180) that they wished to make peace with him. 5. We will not give the Eemi an opportunity for (of) marching through our province. 6. Are the Helvetii desirous of carrving on wars with us ? LATIN LESSONS. 125 LESSON LXXIV. SUPINE. Supine, Learn N. 191 (entire). Hotv a Purpose may he expressed. Learn N. 180. Study N. 180 with great care, and apply it to the sentences of this Lesson. EXERCISE. 1. Helvetii agros Aeduorum populabantur. Aedui, quum s6 suaque ab iis defendere non possent, legates ad Caesarem mittunt rogatum auxilium. 2. Ob earn rem ex civitate profugit et Eomam ad senatum venit auxilium postulatum, quod solus neque jtireju- rando neque obsidibus tenebatur. 3. Bello Helvetiorum confecto, totlus fere Galliae legati, principes civitatum, ad Caesarem gratu- latum convenerunt. 4. Perfacile factti est haec conata perficere, propterea quod ipse suae civitatis imperium obtenturus est. 5. Dixit se pacem petitum venisse. 6. Si hoc optimum factti fuisset (175, b, 2), eum interfecissem. 7. Dumnorigi Aeduo, qui eo tempore principatum obtinebat ac maxime plebl (131, b) acceptus erat, ut idem conaretur (172, Eemark 2), persuadet, eique flliam suam in matrimonium dat. 8. Itaque rem suscipit, obsidesque uti inter sese dent (181, b) perficit : SequanI,* ne itinere Helve tios prohibeant ; Helvetii,* ut sine maleficio et injuria transeant. Englisli into r.atin. Express these sentences in as many ways as possible, according to N. 180. 1. He says that the troops of the Sequani have come to attack him. 2. We will send three legions to storm the winter-quarters of Ariovistus. 3. If he had come to see me, when I was at Kome, * Supply obsides dent. - 126 LATIN LESSONS. I should have sent him to you. 4. Let us go to the city to see the king. 5. To cross the Ehine will be (a thing) very difficult to do. 6. Is this the best thing to do, or not ? 7. If these things should be announced to our general, he would order (impero) us (131, a) to (179, d) march two miles to attack the smaller camp. 8. Who were those men that sent you to congratulate me ? LESSON LXXV. INDIRECT DISCOURSE: QUESTIONS. An Indirect Quotation (N. 186) may contain : — (1) An Indirect Statement (Declaratory) ; (2) An Indirect Questio7i (Inter- rogative); (3) kw Indirect Command (Imperative). The Indirect Statement is described in N. 166, and many examples of its use have been employed in the Exercises; as, dux sese fortem esse dicit. (" Fortis sum" would be the Direct Statement. ) Indirect Statements, Eeview N. 166. .Direct Questions. Eeview N. 101. Indirect Questions. Learn N. 177, b, c, d, ' An INDIRECT Question may follow : — (1) A Verb of asking ; as, rogabfi quis sit, / loill ash who he is. (2) Any word that hints a question; as, incertum est quid faoturus sit, it is uncertain (=. I wonder) what he is going to do. The Subjunctive mode (ivisset) would be required in the following : / asked {wondered, found out, was uncertain, saw, understood, judged) whither he had gone. EXERCISE. Notice the Sequence of Tenses (172). 1. Eogavit utrum pugnaturus esset, necne. Eogat num iturus sim. 2. Utrum me visum (191, a) venisti, annon? 3. Quam in partem hostes fugerunt? 4. Videbo quam in partem Ario- vistus iter fecerit. 5. Quid facttirl sunt ? 6. Nobis non consta- LATIN LESSONS. 127 bat (93, 1, c) quid dicttirus esset. 7. XJtram (195, 7) in partem Arar fluit ? 8. Arar (3) per fines Aeduorum et Sequanorura in Ehodanum influit incredibili lenitate, ita ut oculis, in utrara partem fluat, jtidicarl non possit. 9. His (131, a) imperavit, ut, quae diceret Ariovistus, cognoscerent et ad se referrent. 10. Quod jussi sunt, faciunt; ac omnibus portis (159, Eemark 3) eruptione facta (157), cognoscendi quid fieret hostibus facultatem non relin- quunt. 11. Piima luce, duplici acie instructa, auxiliis in mediam aciem conjectis, quid liostes consilii (122, a) captuii essent, ex- spectabat. 12. Dumnorigem ad se vocat ; quae in eo reprebendat, quae ipse intelligat, quae civitas queratur, ostendit ; monet, ut in (for) reliquum tempus omnes suspiciones vitet. Dumnorigi cus- todes ponit, ut, quae agat, quibuscum loquatur, scire possit. 13. Quum incertus essem, ubi esses, ire non audebam. 14. Incertum est, utrum dux an miles Caius esse malit. 15. Num Gallia est omnis divisa in partes quattuor? 16. Num Caesar Pompeio (154) fortior esset, rogavit. 17. Quum ab bis quaereret, quae civitates quantaeque in armis essent et quid (142, c) in bello possent, sic reperiebat : plerosque Belgas esse ortos ab Germanis. English into liatln. 1. What-sort-of (quails) a man is Marcus? I asked wbat- sort-of a bouse he had sold. 2. We will send-ahead the bravest soldiers to see in what direction the Eemi have marched. 3. It was uncertain whether he had killed the slave, or not. 4. He asks whether we are at home. 5. Can Caesar ascertain whose forces have been conquered ? 6. Tell me, my friend, whether this road (via) is very long, or not. 7. He says (199, 5) that they cannot judge how brave those men are. 128 LATIN LESSONS. LESSON LXXVL INDIRECT DISCOURSE (continued). Imperative Sentences. Learn N. 187, c. General Laws of Modes and Tenses. Learn N. 187 & «, [. c, d. Translate the Latin of the Example under N. 187, e (both Direct and Indirect) ^ as far as voluisset. Notice carefully ' the changes in Mode and Tense. The Indirect form of the same ex- tract is given in the Exercise below (sentence 4). Questions. What are tlie laws of modes and tenses in Indirect Discourse ? When will the verb of a Subordinate Clause be in the Subjunctive in Direct Discourse ? How is the tense of a verb in a Subordinate Clause decided ? What mode is used to express : a Direct Staternent l an Indirect Command 1 an Indirect Statement ? a Direct Question ? a Direct Cominand ? an Indirect Question 1 EXERCISE. Tell what form each verb would have, if it were in a Direct Quotation. 1. Dixit diem (= tempus) se ad deliberandum sumpturum (199, 2) ; SI quid vellent, reverterentur (187, c). 2. His legatis Caesar ita respondet : Quum ea ita sint (183, a ; 187), tamen, si obsides ab iis sibi dentur, uti ea, quae polliceantur, (eos) facttiros intelligat, et si Aeduis de injtiriis, quas ipsis {= Aediiis) sociisque eorum intulerint, item si Allobrogibus satisfaciant, sese cum iis pacem esse facttirum. Divico respondet : Ita Helve tios a majori- bus suis itistittitos esse, uti obsides accipere, non dare, consuerint (79, 4 ; 91, 2, E.EMARK) ; ejus rei populum Eomanum esse testem. Hoc response dat5 discessit. 3. Ad haec Ariovistus respondit : Jus esse belli, ut, qui vicissent, iis (197, 1), quos vicissent, quem- admodum vellent, imperarent : item populum Eomanum victis non ad alterius praescriptum, sed ad suum arbitrium imperare LATIN LESSONS. 129 consuesse. Si ipse populo Eomano non praescriberet, 'quemadmo- dum siio jure titeretur, non oportere sese a populo Romano in suo jure impedlrl. Aeduis se obsides reddittirum non esse, neque iis neque eorum sociis injuria bellum illaturum, si stipendiuin pende- rent. Quum Caesar vellet, congrederetur (187, c) ; (euiii) intel- lecttirum, quid (142, c) Germani virtute possent. 4. Is ita cum Caesare agit (168, b) : Si pacem populus Eomanus cum Helvetiis faceret, in eam partem ittiros (199, 2) atque ibi futures Helvetios, ubi e5s Caesar constituisset atque esse voluisset. LESSON LXXVIL INDIRECT DISCOURSE: GENERAL PRACTICE. Tell what form each verb would have, if it were in a Direct Quotation. Eo concilio dimisso, iidem principes civitatum reverterunt petieruntque, uti sibi (134, Eemark) de sua omniumque salute cum eo agere liceret. Ea re impetrata, sese omnes flentes Caesari (138) ad peeves projecerunt. Loctitus est pro liis Divitiacus Aeduus : Galliae totius factiones esse duas : harum alterius prin- 5 cipatum tenere Aeduos, alterius Arvernos. Hi quum de potentatti inter se multos annos contenderent, factum esse, uti ab Arvernis Sequanisque Germani mercede arcessereiitur (181, a), Horum primo circiter millia quindecim Ehenum trausisse : posteaquam agros et cultum et copias Gallorum homines feri ac barbari ada- 10 massent (79, 4), traductos (199, 2) pliires ; nunc esse in Gallia ad centum et viginti millium numerum. Cum his Aeduos eorumque clientes armis contendisse ; magnam calamitatem pulsos accepisse, omnem nobilitatem, omnem senatum, omnem equitatum amisisse. Quibus (115, d) proeliis calamitatibusque fractos, (eos) qui et sua 15 virtute et populi Eomani amicitia plurimum ante in Gallia potuis- sent, coactos esse Sequanis obsides dare nobilissimos civitatis et 9 130 LATIN LESSONS. jurejtiraado civitatem obstringere, sese neque obsides repetittiros (199, 2) neque auxilium a populo Komaiio implomttiros. Unum se esse ex omui civitate Aeduorum, qui addtici non potuerit, ut jtiraret aut liberos suos obsides daret. Ob earn rem se ex civitate profugisse 5 et Romam ad senatum venisse auxilium postulatum (191, a), quod solus neque jtirejurando neque obsidibus teneretur. Sed pejus (loli) victoribus Sequanis quam Aeduis victis accidisse, propterea quod Ariovistus, rex Germanorum, in eorum finibus consedisset tertiamque partem agri Sequani, qui esset optimus totius Galliae, .0 occupavisset et nunc de altera parte tertia Sequanos decedere jube- ret, propterea quod paucis mensibus (155, a) ante Hamdum millia hominum viginti quattuor ad eum venissent, quibus locus ac sedes pararentur. Futtirum esse (181, «, Eemark) paucis annis, uti omnes (Galli) ex Galliae finibus pellerentur atque omnes GermanI 15 Rhenum transirent. LESSON LXXVIIL INDIRECT DISCOURSE: GENERAL PRACTICE. XInglisli into liatin. 1. I asked him whether he wished to go with me, since I had invited him, or to remain in the place which he had chosen. 2. They said that they thought that the Veneti were accustomed to use all the seas which were in-the-vicinity-of Gaul. 3. The king replied that he had crossed the Rhine (because he had been) invited by the Gauls, and that Caesar, alarmed by the messages which he had received, had enlisted two new legions, and had come to attack (180) him. 4. It was said that we had conspired among ourselves, (saying) that we would make war on the states (133). 5. They said that a beginning of war had been made by those, concerning whom the general had been informed, because they were unwilling to give hostages. 6. I shall ask whether he has promised to give LATIN LESSONS. 131 back (that lie will give back) the hostages that we have sent. 7. Lucilius used-to-say that he wished those things which he wrote to be read neither by the very learned (doctus) nor by the very un- learned (indoctus). 8. We all know that the Helvetii informed Caesar that they intended to march through our province for this reason, because they had no other way. 9. He said that all these things must be done (ago) by Caesar, and that, if the Eomans wished to conquer the forces which had been sent against them, they must fight bravely. (Express the last verb impersonally.) 10. The legates announced that all the Belgae were in arms, and that the Germans, who were dwelling on-this-side-of the Ehine, had joined themselves with them. 11. Caesar understood how great the danger was (177, c), and sent Galba to find out what states had conspired. 12. Having heard the consul's speech, the citizens all said that they would send their sons to the war, which was being carried on in Gaul, if he wished. 13. He said that he did not dare to cross the river, because it was uncertain in what direction the enemy intended to march (177, c). 132 LATIN LESSONS. MISCELLANEOUS SENTENCES FOR TRANSLATION INTO LATIN. In these sentences many Latin words are used which are not given in the General Vocabularies. Such words follow the regidar laws of Oender, Declen- sion, Conjugation, etc. Sometimes a hint is given with regard to such words ; as Plato (-onis), (exclamo, 1) iridicate that the Genitive 0/ Plato is PlatoniSr and that exclamo is of the First Conjugation. 1. Believe me (131, a), citizens, this man does not intend-to-go. 2. If you Bhall not be able to use (151, a) the sails (velum), use the oars (rfimtis). 3. The Aedui having been conquered were compelled to give hostages to the Sequani. 4. If w-e must fight (express in two ways), let us fight as bravely as possible. 5. Having left ten cohorts near (ad) the sea, to serve as a guard (137) to the ships, he hastened toward the enemy. 6. If Caesar had been informed (175, b, 2) respecting the plans of the Gauls, he would have urged the Romans to send (179, d) an army into their country. 7. Demaratus, the father of king Tarquinius, fled from Corinth (Corinthus) to Tarquinii (-drum). 8. He says that our horsemen, having followed the enemy about three miles, captured very many of them. 9. The next (posterns) day he calls together the leaders of the forces, and tells (doceo) them that no city is more hostile (infestus) than the royal (regius) city (154). 10. Being praised by the king, the soldiers will fight more bravely. 11. If the Gauls had attacked (175, b, 2) the town that night, they would have taken it easily, since no one supposed (182, b) that they were-at-hand (adsum). 12. When Pompey had learned (reperid) what (plural) had been done (gerfl) at Corfinium, he set out with two legions from Liiceria, and five days (155, a) after arrived at Brundisium. 13. They say that this city must be stormed; that the citizens may (197, 3) go out; that the enemy can be conquered. 14. Let the general send forward the greater part of his soldiers to attack (180) the camp. 15. The Gauls kept-sending ambassadors to me, the consul, who were-to-confer (collo- quor) with me concerning peace. 16. He intends to march into Gaul that the auxiliaries may not be led out of those places. 17. He says that, if hostages should be given to him, he would make peace with them, and would not make war upon their territory (133). 18. Let us march into the enemy's lands (ager), that they may not winter in ours. 19. Do you not wish to remain at home? 20. Caius thinks that, if he should not send men as an aid (137) to our leader, the forces of Ariovistus would come to the camp, and would get- possession of all the weapons (151, a). 21. He said that, since he had been informed that the Germans had come (199, 3), he should set out as quickly as possible. 22. Although Titus had hoped (197, 7) that the courage of his (men) LATIN LESSONS. 133 wonld l<e very great, yet he did not think that they would conquer so great forces. 23. My father has a house of great height (152), which was sold to him by- a friend, Cassius by name, for a very small price (161, c). 24. This mountain is two miles (142, h) high, and is much higher than that hill which you see. 25. While (184, h, Remark) these things were being done (ago) at Veii (-orum), the citadel was in great danger. 26, The camp was pitched in a plain (campus), which was three miles (142, h) long and one-fifth of a mile (= how many paces ?) wide. 27. At the same time, men were sent by Crassus to Caesar to inform (180) him that all those states had been made provinces of the Roman people. 28. Who were those men whom you sent to see (180) me ? {Express in Jive ways. ) 29. Such (so great) a report (opinio) of this war will be spread-abroad (perfero), that legates will be sent to me by those nations (natio). 30. The king replies that he will not give-back the hostages, which he has received, but (and, ac) will make war on us (133). 31. We asked whether he had said that he would come to Rome. 32. The lieutenant an- nounced that the Germans, whom Ariovistus was leading, had conquered the Romans (in) very many battles. 33. On the top of the hill the consul formed (instruO) a triple (triplex) line-of-battle (composed) of the legions which he had enlisted in hither Gaul. 34. The barbarians, frightened by the arrival of our army, said that they would surrender themselves and all their (property) to you. 35. He encouraged the soldiers of the tenth legion to advance (179 c? ; progredior) fearlessly (bravely). 36. Having finished (conficio) the German (Germanicus) war (157), Caesar thought (statuo, 3) he ought to cross the Rhine ; but, since he wished to cross without danger, he determined to make a bridge. 37. I have always been of such (is) a mind (152) as to think (that I thought) nothing could be better than bravery (154). 38. The men said that they had hesitated to cross the river, because it was both very wide and very deep. 39. Caesar, having received (157, Remark 1) the arms and hostages, will set out into the territory of the Ubii. (Express in two ways the words in- italics.) 40. When the senate had heard (184, a) that the barbarians excelled (praesto) our men (133) in bravery, it determined to send Caesar himself, hoping that, if he should go (187),the enemy would surrender the towns to him without a battle. 41. He came to free (180) the slaves. (Express in Jive ways.) 42. When the-contest-had-been-carried-on (pugno) for more (amplus) than five days (154, h), Galba, having despaired-of (despero) victory, began to . go home by the same route as (115, /) he had come. 43. It was very difficult to conquer the tribes (gens, -tis) that had conspired together (= among them- selves), because they all preferred to be killed fighting than to be captured. 44. If I were-to-be-accused (175, c, 2) by my fellow-citizens (civis), I should prefer to go into exile (exsilium) than to be looked-at (conspicio) with the hostile (infestus) eyes of all. 45. He thinks that this fact (res) is very unlike that (132), does n't he ? 46. The Romans' bravery was so great that they con- quered the Boii and drove (ag6) them many miles. 47. The leader said that the citizens ought to be called together, and that the city, which had been fortified by him, ought to be defended by them. 48. Do they intend (101, b) to be 134 LATIN LESSONS. serviceable (tltilis) to us or to the enemy ? 49. The march of the third legion is said to have been hindered (impedio) by a thick (densus) forest and a broad river. 50. It happened that (181, a) in the consulship of Cicero and Antonius, many wretches (sceleratus) formed (facio) a conspiracy (conjtiratio) against the republic. 51. I have heard that Plato (-dnis) came to Tarentum in the consulship (157) of Camillus and Claudius, two very brave men. 52. He is said to have said that he thought it would be very easy to get possession of (161, a) the government (imperium) of all Gaul, since he surpassed (praesto) all (133) in wealth (divitiae, -arum). 53. The Nervii, concerning whom we have written before, when they were coming with all their troops as aid (137) to the Aedui, this battle having been announced, returned home. 54. When I was at Athens (Atlifinae), I used to see Marcus, whose house was very near mine (132). 55. If he is about-to-come to Rome without violence (vis), you may (197, 3) remain in the city, if you wish ; but-if (sin) he is going-to-storm the city, I fear that (179, e) we ourselves shall be killed. 56. Ought this man to be led to death by the consuls, whom he has protected at the risk (periculum) of his life ? 57. Your men were frightened, since one was running (curro) from one ship, another from another (195, 9). 58. When night had made (184, a) an end of the siege (of besieging), the leader, a man of great influence (152) among his (countrymen), came to seek (180) peace. 59. Let him, if he wishes, use arms (161, a) to (causa) defend (180) himself; let us not (178, 1) defend him. 60. He says that Nameius, who holds the chief place in (of) this embassy, has been sent to say that he intends-to-march through these places for this reason, because we are friendly to him. 61. The-inquiry-must-be-made (quaere) whether he is unwilling to go, or not (177, d), 62. If death were feared (175, a, 2 & Remark 4), Brutus would not have fallen in battle, and the Decii would not have exposed (objicio) themselves to the weapons of the enemy. 63. He said that he knew that Caesar had carried on very many wars both in Germany (Germania) and in Gaul. 64. Being surrounded (circum- venid) by greater forces of the barbarians, they sustained all the attacks which the enemy made. 65. Let the cohorts, which the general's brother has sent, be led-back into camp. QQ. The enemy's troops, which Labienus thinks the Romans have conquered, will storm our cities. 67. He says that the camp must be pitched six miles (155, a) from the Germans' camp. 68. Having sent (167, Remark 1) the boy across the river, he said (199, 5) he should not go back without him. 69. When I go (168, a) to Rome, I shall see the king, concerning whom you have spoken. 70. It is not difficult to conquer, when the soldiers are very brave. 71. My mother says that she has sent all the letters (epistola) which she has written. 72. He replied that soldiers, who had been praised by their commander, were much (155, c) braver than those who had been blamed (oulpo, 1). 73. The consul said that he had heard that all the larger cities had been fortified by the same leaders. 74. Lead out the two legions, Antonius, and follow the enemy. 75. The Germans, whom he was leading, said that they had not been conquered, and could not be conquered. 76. Slave, tell your king that Romans will surrender themselves LATIN LESSONS. 135 to Romans, not to barbarians. 77. When the camp had been pitched at the foot of the mountain, we sent forward the same scouts (expldrator) to see (180) in what place the enemy were (177, c). 78. If I were you (175, a, 2), I should be happy. 79. If he were to ask (176, c, 2) me to go (179, d), I should go. 80. If he had been unwilling (175, h, 2) to come, they would have come alone. 81. He says that the boy (115, c) you saw is fond (studiosus) of all the best pursuits (ars). 82. Caesar called together the leaders, of whom there was a great number in our camp. 83. You said that to conquer the Gauls was very difficult to do (191, 6), because they were going-to-have a much braver leader. 84. Let us send as brave men as possible, since the Rhone must be crossed. 85. Another and greater danger is said to have frightened the wretched citizens. 86. Having overcome (167, Remark 1) the second legion, and having captured our ships, seeing that they could not storm the camp, they had begun to return to the place from which they had set-out. 87. Word- was-brought- back (re- nuntio) that the ascent (ascensus, 4) was very easy. 88. Publius Considius, who was regarded (habeo) (as) very skilled in military science (124), and had been in Lucius Sulla's army, is sent-ahead with the scouts (explorator). 89. He said that you would find out who he was from the slave whom he had sent to you. 90. Nasica, when he had come to converse (colloquor) with the poet Ennius, and the maid (ancilla) had told him Ennius was not at home, thought that she had said (it) at her master's (dominus) order (jussu), and that he was within (intus). A few days (155, a) after, when Ennius had come to Nasica's (= to Nasica), Nasica cries out (exclamd, 1) that he is not at home. 91. When Ennius had said that he knew (oognosco) his voice, Nasica said (inquit, 91, 2, a; 193, 6, Caution), "You are a shameless (impudens) fellow (homo); I believed your maid, don't you believe my-own- self (ego ipse) ? " SHORT SENTENCES TOR GENERAL REVIEW. 92. I may do this. We must conquer the enemy {write in two ways). He came to see the city. Let us not say this. 93. Will Caesar be king, or not ? He asks whether Caesar is going to set out, or not. Don't say that (178, h), 94. Who is that man ? He thinks that he shall come. The soldiers that fight will be praised. He says this that he may be thought wise. 95. We are ordered to set out {use both jubeo and impero). The ships cannot be harmed. 96. When this battle was over (facio), he went to Rome {write the " when " clause in two ways). My son, go with me. Having followed them three miles, he returns to the city. 97. Having heard (of) this battle, they marched to Gaul as quickly as possible. Didn't you come home to see your brother ? {write in five ways). Is this easy to do ? No. The house is twenty feet wide. 98. If this should be done, he would be killed. The tower is of great height. The wall is very high. The tower is fifteen feet higher than the wall. 99. He sold the house for 5000 sestertii. He came to the city of Geneva. He marched from Gaul towards Rome. 100. We must inform him about the war. He feared that they would come. I fear that you will not be brave. He says that the town will not be taken. 136 LATIN LESSONS. CAESAR'S HISTORY OF THE GALLIC WAR. BOOK L — Chapteks 1-13. References {to the Notes) and Explanations are given on pages 143-148. Quantity is not indicated^ except that of the Penult in new words, I. Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres, quarum unam inco- lunt Belgae, aliam Aquitaiii, tertiam, qui ipsorum . lingua Celtae, nostra Galli appellantur. Hi omnes lingua, institutis, legibus inter se differunt. Gallos ab Aquitanis Garumna flumen, a Belgis 5 Matr5na et Sequana dividit. Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, propterea quod a cultu atque liumanitate provinciae lon- gissime absunt, minimeque ad eos mercatores saepe commeant, atque ea, quae ad efFeminandos animos pertinent, important > proximique sunt Germanis, qui trans Ebenum incolunt, quibus- 10 cum continenter bellum gerunt ; qua de causa Helvetii quoque reliquos Gallos virtute praecedunt, quod fere quotidianis proeliis cum Germanis contendunt, quum aut suis finibus eos probibent, aut ipsi in eorum finibus bellum gerunt. Eorum una pars, quara Gallos obtinere dictum est, initium capit a flumine Ehodano ; con- 15 tinetur Garumna flumine, Oceano, finibus Belgarum ; attingit etiam ab Sequanis et Helvetiis flumen Ehenum ; vergit ad septentriones. Belgae ab extremis Galliae finibus oriuntur ; pertinent ad inferiorem partem fluminis Eheni; spectant in sep- tentriones et orientem solem. Aquitania a Garumna flumine ad JO Pyrenaeos montes et eam partem Oceani, quae est ad Hispaniam, pertinet ; spectat inter occasum solis et septentriones. II. Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus et ditissimus fuit Orge- t5rix. Is, Marco Messala et Marco Pisone consul! bus, regni LATIN LESSONS. 137 cupiditate inductus conjuration em nobilitatis fecit et civitati persuasit, ut de finibus suis cum omnibus copiis exirent ; perfacile esse, quum virtute omnibus praestarent, totius Galliae imperio potiri. Id hoc facilius eis persuasit, quod undique loci natura Helvetii continentur : una ex parte flumine Elieno, latissimo atque 5 altissimo, qui agrum Helvetium a Germanis dividit; altera ex parte, monte Jura altissimo, qui est inter Sequanos et Helvetios ; tertia, lacu Lemanno et flumine Ehodano, qui provinciam nostram ab Helvetiis dividit. His rebus fiebat, ut et minus late vagarentur et minus facile finitimis bellum inferre possent ; qua de causa 10 homines bellandi cupidi magno dolore afficiebantur. Pro multi- tudine autem hominum et pro gloria belli atque fortitudinis, angustos se fines habere arbitrabantur, qui in longitudinem millia passuum ducenta et quadraginta, in latitudinem centum et octoginta patebant. 15 III. His rebus adducti et auctoritate Orgetortgis permoti, con- stituerunt ea, quae ad proficiscendum pertinerent, comparare; jumentorum et carrorum quam maximum numerum coemere; sementes quam maximas facere, ut in itinere copia frumenti suppeteret ; cum proximis civitatibus pacem et amicitiam confir- 20 mare. Ad eas res conficiendas biennium sibi satis esse duxerunt ; in tertium annum profectionem lege confirmant. Ad eas res con- ficiendas OrgetSrix deligitur. Is sibi legationem ad civitates sus- cepit. In eo itinere persuadet Castico Catamantaloedis filio, Sequano, cujus pater regnum in Sequanis raultos annos obtinuerat 25 et a senatu populi Eomani amicus appellatus erat, ut regnum in civitate sua occuparet, quod pater ante habuerat ; itemque Dumno- rigi Aeduo, fratri Divitiaci, qui eo tempore principatum in civitate obtinebat ac maxime plebi acceptus erat, ut idem conaretur, persua- det, eique filiam suam in matrimonium dat. Perfacile factu esse 30 illis probat conata perficere, propterea quod ipse suae civitatis imperium obtenturus esset ; non esse dubium, quin totius Galliae plurimum Helvetii possent ; se suis copiis suoque exercitu illis regna conciliaturum confirmat. Hac oratione adducti inter se fidem et jusjurandum dant, et, regno occupato, per tres potentis- 35 138 LATIN LESSONS. simos ac firmissimos populos totius Galliae sese potiri posse sperant. IV. Ea res est Helvetiis per indicium enuntiata. Moribus suis Orgetorigem ex vinciilis causam dicere coegerunt. Damnatum 5 poenam sequi oportebat, ut igni cremaretur. Die constituta causae dictionis Orgetorix ad judicium omnem suam familiam, ad homi- num millia decem, undique coegit, et omnes clieutes obaeratosque 8U0S, quorum maguum numerum habebat, eodem conduxit; per eos, ne causam diceret, se eripuit. Quum civitas ob eam rem 10 incitata armis jus suum exsequi conaretur, multitudinemque homi- num ex agris magistratus cogerent, Orgetorix mortuus est ; neque abest suspicio, ut Helvetii arbitrantur, quiu ipse sibi mortem con- sqiverit. V. Post ejus mortem nihilo minus Helvetii id, quod constitue- 15 rant, facere conantur, ut e finibus suis exeant. Ubi jam se ad eam rem paratos esse arbitrati sunt, oppida sua omnia numero ad'duo- decim, vicos ad quadringentos, reliqua privata aedificia incendunt ; frumentum omne, praeterquam quod secum portaturi erant, com- burunt, ut, domum reditionis spe &ublata, paratiores ad omnia 20 pericula subeunda essent ; trium mensium molita cibaria sibi quemque domo efferre jubent. Persuadent Rauracis et Tulingis et Latovicis, finitimis, uti, eodem usi consilio, oppidis suis vicisque exustis, una cum iis proficiscantur ; Boiosque, qui trans Elienum incoluerant et in agrum Noricum transierant Noreiamque oppugiia- 25 rant, receptos ad se socios sibi adsciscunt. VI. Erant omnino itinera duo, quibus itineribus domo exire possent : unum per Sequanos, angustum efc difficile, inter montem Juram et flumen Ehodanum, vix qua singuli carri ducerentur; mons autem altissimus impendebat, ut facile perpauci prohibere 30 possent : alterum per provinciam nostram, multo facilius atque expeditius, propterea quod inter fines Helvetiorum et Allobrogum, qui nuper pacati erant, Ehodanus fluit, isque nonnullis locis vado transitur. Extremum oppidum Allobrogum est proximumque Helvetiorum finibus Geneva. Ex eo oppido pons ad Helvetios 35 pertinet. Allobrogibus sese vel persuasuros, quod nondum bono LATIN LESSONS. 139 anirao in populum Eomanum viderentur, existimabant ; vel vi coacturos, iit per suos fines eos ire paterentur. Omnibus rebus ad profectionem comparatis, diem dicunt, qua die ad ripam Rho- dani omnes conveniant. Is dies erat ante diem quintum Kalendas Apriles, Lucio Pisone, Aulo Gabinio consulibus. 5 VII. Caesari quum id nuntiatum esset, eos per provinciam nostram iter facere conari, maturat ab urbe proficisci, et, quam maximis potest itineribus, in Galliam ulteriorem contendit et ad Genevam pervenit. Provinciae toti quam maximum potest militum numerum imperat (erat omnino in Gallia ulteriore legio una) ; 10 pontem, qui erat ad Genevam, jubet rescindi. Ubi de ejus ad- ventu Helvetii certiores facti sunt, legates ad eum mittunt, nobilis- simos eivitatis, cujus legationis Nameius et Verudoctius principem locum obtinebant, qui dicerent, sibi esse in animo sine ullo male- ficio iter per provinciam facere, propterea quod aliud iter haberent 15 nullum; rogare, ut ejus voluntate id sibi facere liceat, Caesar, quod memoria tenebat Lucium Cassium consulem occisum, exerci- tumque ejus ab Helvetiis pulsum et sub jugum missum, conceden- dum non putabat; neque homines inimico animo, data facultate per provinciam itineris faciendi, temperaturos ab injuria et maleficio 20 existimabat. Tamen, ut spatium intercedere posset, dum milites, quos imperaverat, convenirent, legatis respondit, diem se ad de- liberandum sumptui'um ; si quid vellent, ad Idus Apriles reverte- rentur. VIII. Interea ea legione, quam secum habebat, militibusque, 25 qui ex provincia convenerant, a lacu Lemanno, qui in flumen Rhodanum influit, ad montem Juram, qui fines Sequanorum ab Helvetiis dividit, millia passuum decem novem murum, in altitu- dinem pedum sedecim, fossamque perducit. Eo opere perfecto praesidia disponit, castella commtinit, quo facilius, si se invito 30 transire conarentur, proliibere possit. Ubi ea dies, quam consti- tuerat cum legatis, venit, et legati ad eum reverterunt, negat se more et exemplo populi Romani posse iter ulli per provinciam da^-e, et, si vim facere conentur, proliibiturum ostendit. Helvetii, ea spe ilejecti, navibus junctis ratibasque compluribus factis, alii vadis 35 140 LATIN LESSONS. Ehodani, qua minima altitudo fluminis erat, nonnunquam interdiu, saepius noctu, si perrumpere possent, conati, operis munitione et militum concursu et telis repulsi, hoc conatu destiterunt. IX. Eelinquebatur una per Sequanos via, qua, Sequanis invitis, 5 propter angustias ire non poterant. His quum sua sponte persua- dere non possent, legatos ad Dumnorigem Aeduum mittunt, ut eo deprecatore a Sequanis impetrarent. Dumnorix gratia et largi- tione apud Sequanos plurimum poterat, et Helvetiis erat amicus, quod ex ea civitate Orgetorigis filiam in matrimoniura duxerat ; 10 et cupiditate regni adductus novis rebus studebat, et quam pluri- mas civitates suo sibi beneficio habere obstrictas volebat. Itaque rem suscipit et a Sequanis impetrat, ut per fines suos Helvetios ire patiantur, obsidesque uti inter sese dent, perficit : Sequani, ne itinere Helvetios prohibeant ; Helvetii, ut sine maleficio et injuria 15 tran scant. X. Caesari renuntiatur Helvetiis esse in animo per agrum Sequanorura et Aeduorum iter in SantSnum fines facere, qui non longe a Tolosatium finibus absunt, quae civitas est in provincia. Id si fieret, intelligebat magno cum periculo provinciae futurum, 20 ut homines bellicosos, populi Eomani inimicos, locis patentibus maximeque frumentariis finitimos haberet. Ob eas causas ei mu- nition!, quam fecerat, Titum Labienum legatum praefecit ; ipse in Italiam magnis itineribus contendit duasque ibi legiones conscribit, et tres, quae circum Aquileiam hiemabant, ex hibernis educit ; et 25 qua proximum iter in ulteriorem Galliam per Alpes erat, cum his quinque legionibus ire contendit. Ibi Centrones et Graioceli et Caturiges, locis superior! bus occupatis, itinere exercitum prohibere conantur. Compluribus his proeliis pulsis, ab Oc^lo, quod est citerioris provinciae extremum, in fines Vocontiorum ulterioris 50 provinciae die septimo pervenit ; inde in AllobrSgum fines, ab Allobrogibus in Segusiavos exercitum ducit. Hi sunt extra pro- vinciam trans Ehodanum primi. XI. Helvetii jam per angustias et fines Sequanorum suas copias transduxerant, et in Aeduorum fines pervenerant eorumque agros 35 populabantur. Aedui, quum se suaque ab iis defendere non pos- LATIN LESSONS. 141 sent, legates ad Caesarem mittunt rogatum auxilium : Ita se omni tempore de populo Eomano meritos esse, ut paene in conspectu exercitus nostri agri vastari, liberi eorum in servitutem abduci, oppida expugnari non debuerint. Eodem tpmpore Aedui Ambarri, necessarii et consanguinei Aeduorum, Caesarem certiorem faciunt, \ sese depopulatis agris non facile ab oppidis vim hostium prohibere. Item Allobroges, qui trans Khodanum vicos possessionesque habe- bant, fuga se ad Caesarem recipiunt et demonstrant, sibi praeter agri solum nihil esse reliqui. Quibus rebus adductus Caesar non exspectandum sibi statuit, dum, omnibus fortunis sociorum con- IC sumptis, in SantSnos Helvetii pervenirent. XII. Plumen est Arar, quod per fines Aeduorum et Sequanorum in Ehodanum influit incredibili lenitate, ita ut oculis, in utram partem fluat, judicari non possit. Id Helvetii ratibus ac lintribus junctis transibant. Ubi per exploratores Caesar certior factus est, 15 tres jam copiarum partes Helvetios id flumen transduxisse, quartam vero partem citra flumen Ararim reliquam esse, de tertia vigilia cum legionibus tribus e castris profectus ad cam partem pervenit, quae nondum flumen transierat. Eos impeditos et inopinantes aggressus magnam eorum partem concidit; reliqui fugae sese 20 mandarunt atque in proximas silvas abdiderunt. Is pagus appel- labatur Tigurinus ; nam omnis civitas Helvetia in quattuor pagos divisa est. Hie pagus unus, quum domo exisset patrum nostro- rum memoria, Lucium Cassium consulem interfecerat et ejus exer- citum sub jugum miserat. Ita, sive casu sive consilio d eorum 25 immortalium, quae pars civitatis Helvetiae insignem calamitatem populo Eomano intulerat, ea princeps poenas persolvit. Qua in re Caesar non solum publicas, sed etiam privatas injurias ultus est, quod ejus soceri Lucii Pisonis avum, Lucium Pisonem legatum, Tiguiini eodem proelio, quo Cassium, interfecerant. 30 XIII. Hoc proelio facto, reliquas copias Helvetiorum ut conse- qui posset, pontem in Arare faciendum curat atque ita exercitum transducit. Helvetii repentino ejus adventu commoti, quum id, quod ipsi diebus viginti aegerrime confecerant, ut flumen transi- rent, ilium uno die fecisse intelligerent, legatos ad eum mittunt; 5 142 LATIN LESSONS. cujus legationis Divico princeps fuit, qui bello Cassiano dux Hel- vetiorum fuerat. Is ita cum Caesare agit : Si pacem populus Eomanus cum Helvetiis faceret, in earn partem ituros atque ibi futures Helvetios, ubi eos Caesar constituisset atque esse voluisset; 5 sin bello persequi perseveraret, reminisceretur et veteris incommodi populi Eomani et pristinae virtutis Helvetiorum. Quod improviso unum pagum adortus esset, quum ii, qui flumen transissent, suis auxilium ferre non possent, ne ob eam rem aut suae magnopere virtuti tribueret aut ipsos despiceret ; se ita a patnbus majori- 10 busque suis didicisse, ^ut magis virtute quam dolo contenderent aut insidiis niterentur. Quare ne committeret, ut is locus, ubi constitissent, ex calamitate populi Romani et internecione e^tercitus nomen caperet aut memoriam proderet. LATIN LESSONS. 143 CAESAR'S GALLIC WAR: Chapters 1-13. REFERENCES AND EXPLANATIONS. CHAPTER I. Divisa, 189, b, — Quarum, 122. — Tertiam, qui = tertiam partem ii in- colunt, qui. — Ipsorum, emphatic, their own. — Celtae, 107. — Lingua, in- stitutis, legibus, 153. — Inter se, 112, h. — Dividit, singular, as the rivers form but one boundary (117, h, Remark). — Horum, 122, a. — Atque, 96, a. — Minime saepe, very 5eZc?om. — Effeminandos, why not the Gerund? (190, a. ) — Germanis, 132. — Quibuscum, 53, a. — Reliquos Gallos, 123, e. — Virtute, 153. — Suis finibus, 147. — Eorum, of the enem^ (literally, their). To whom do suis, eos, ipsi, eorum refer ? — Eorum una pars, onejpart of their territory (literally, of them, the people being used for their country); or we may supply finium, making eorum a Possessive Genitive. — Dictum est, the subject is quam Gallos obtinere, 188, h, 1. — Ab Sequanis, on {from) the side of the Sequani. — Ad Hispaniam, near Spain. CHAPTER II. Ditissimus, 36, a. — Marco Messala, etc., 157 (3). — Nobilitatis, civitati, collective force, the nobles, the citizens. — Civitati, 131, a. — Cum copiis, 150, a. — Exirent, 117, c; 179, d. — Perfacile to potiri, Indirect Discourse; the verb of saying is implied in persuasit (186, a). The subject of esse is potiri, etc. (165, a). — Why is perfacile Neuter, and how does it differ from facile? (109, b ; 40, d.)— Give two reasons for the mode of praestarent (187, 182, b). — Omnibus, 133. — Imperio, 151, a. — Id, that step, or course. — Hoc, 149. — Loci natura, by the nature of their situation. — Una ex parte, on one side. — Latissimo, 40, b. — Nostram = Romanam. — Rebus, 149. — Fiebat, the subject is ut — possent (188, b, 2). — Vagarentur, possent, 181, a.— Finitimis, 133. — Homines, 106. — Bellandi, 190. —Pro, in proportion to, considering. — Qui (fines). — Millja, 142, b. CHAPTER III. Pertinerent, 181, c (ea = such thi^igs). — ComT^Bxare, coemere, facere, confirmare, 165, &. — Quam, 40, c. — Suppeteret, 179. — Ad conficiendas, 190, a; 137, a. — Satis, here equivalent to a Predicate Adjective. — Duxe> 144 LATIN LESSONS. runt, they reckoned. — In. tertium annum, /or the third year. — Sibi suscepit, 133. — Ad civitates, not the Dative, because legationem implies mo^to?i. — Persuadet, 168, h. — Castico, 131, a. - Filio, Sequano, 106. — Annos, 142, a. — Amicus, 107 ; this title, friend, conferred by the Roman Senate, was highly prized by foreign rulers. — Sua, 112, a. — Occuparet, conaretur, 172, Remark 2. — Plebi, 131, h. — Acceptus is here an Adjective. — Perfacile, etc.. Indirect Discourse. Perfacile agrees with the subject of esse (perficere conata). — Factu, 191, h. — Illis probat, he shows {to) ^^ew. — Obtenturus esset, 82, a; 172, Remark 2; 187. — Esse, the subject is quin — possent (188, h, 2), which is modified by dubium (109, &). — Galliae, 122, &. — Pluri- mum, 94, c?, 1. — Possent, what mode in Direct Discourse? (181, d.) — Copiis, wealth. — Conciliaturum, 199, 2. — Begno occupato, 167. — Galliae potiri, 151, a, Remark. CHAPTEE IV. Per indicium, hy {through) informers (literally, information). — Moribus, 149. — Ex — dicere, to plead his cause (= make his defence) in {from) chains. — Damnatum, agrees with eum (understood), the object of sequi. Translate, if he should he condemned (189, d). — Oportebat, the subject is (eum) damna- tum poenam sequi (188, h, 1). — TJt cremaretur, in apposition with poenam (181, e).— Die constituta, on the appointed day, 160. Dies is sometimes feminine, when it denotes 2, fixed time. — Ad (before hominum). Adverb of degree {about), modifying decem. — Millia, 106. — Eodem, Adverb. — Diceret, 179. — Exsequi, assert. — Conaretur, cogerent, 184, a. — Magistratus, Nomi- native. —Ut arbitrantur, 197, 5. — Consciverit, 181, d. CHAPTEE V. Nihilo, 155. — Ut — exeant, in apposition with id, 181, e. — Paratos, Ad- jective.— Numero, 153. -Ad (before duodecim), Adverb. — Domum, 159, h ; the motion is implied in reditionis. — Spe, 157. — Ad subeunda, 190, a ; 137, a. — Essent, 172, Remark 2. — Trium mensium, etc., three months' supplies (121). — Domo, 159, a. — Jubent, why is the Present Historical used? — Rauracis, 131, a. ~ TJti — ut. — Usi, having adopted. — Consilio, 151, a. — Oppidis, 157. — Una, 94, 2. — Cum iis, we should expect to find secum. — Oppugnarant, 79, 4. — Ad se limits receptos, received into their number. — Socios, 106. — Sibi, 133. CHAPTEE YI. Itineribus, 159, Remark 3 ; the antecedent is sometimes repeated for em- phasis. — Domo, 159, a. — Possent, 181, c ; that is, routes (of such a kind) that they could go out by them. — Unum, alterum, appositives to itinera. — LATIN LESSONS. 145 Qua, 94, 2. — Ducerentur, 181, c (so narrow that, etc.). — Singuli, 41, a. — Perpauci, 40, d. — Possent, 181. — Multo, 155. — Locis, 159, Remark 2. — Vado, 151. — Finibus, 132. — Allobrogibus, 131, a. — Persuasuros, coactu- ros, 199, 2 ; this is Indirect Discourse, the introductory verb being existima- bant (186, a). — Viderentur, 187. —Bono animo, kindly disposed (152). — Vi, how declined? — Paterentur, Subjunctive for two reasons: 187, 179, d. — Eos = the Helvetii. — Suos refers to the Allobroges. — Conveniant, 179, a. — Ante diem, etc., study carefully 161, b & Rule 1. What were tlie three reckoning points in the month, and what was the date of each ? What part of speech is Apriles 1 (161, a. ) — Lucio, etc., 157 (3). CHAPTER VII. Nuntiatum esset, 184, a. — Eos conari, in apposition with id, 186, a. — Urbe, the city (Rome). — Ulteriorem = Trans alpinam. —Ad Genevam, 159, Remark 1. — Imperat, Ze^;ie6. — Nobilissimos, 109; 106.— Dicer ent, 179, a. — Sibi esse . . . liceat, Indirect Discourse (Declaratory Sentence), 187, a. The principal verbs are esse and rogare ; the subordinate verbs are haberent and liceat. The subject of esse is facere iter; the subject of rogare is se (under- stood). —Sibi (before esse), 135. — Voluntate, 149. — Sibi (before facere), 197, 2. — Liceat, Subjunctive for two reasons: 187; 179, d. What is the subject of liceat 1 — Memoria tenebat = meminerat (151). — Occisum, pul- sum, missum, concedendum, 199, 2. —Sub jugum, why not sub jugo"? (95, c. ) What was the military jugum I (see Vocabulary. ) - Concedendum (esse), the subject is the request of the Helvetii. — Animo, 152. — Data facultate (157, Remark 2), if the opportimity should he given. — Faciendi, 190, a. — Temperatures, 199, 2. — Spatium = tempus. — Convenirent, 184, 6. —Diem, time. — Vellent, 187, c, d. — Keverterentur, a command in Indirect Discourse. In the Direct form the Latin would be : Si quid voletis, revertimini. —Ad Idus, on the \2,th of April (161, 3). CHAPTEE YIIT. Legione, militibus, 151. — Millia passuum, 123, c ; 142, h. — Decem novem, is this the usual position of a numeral"? (193, 1.) In what other ways can nineteen be expressed ?— Pedum, 121. — Disponit, 99, 2. — Quo, why not utl (179, &.) — Se invito, 157, Remark 2. — Conarentur, 185; 172, Re- mark 2. Notice that communit is followed by a Primary tense (possit) and also by a Secondary tense (conarentur). — Negat — dicit non (199, 5). — More, in accordance with the practice (149). — Iter, the privilege of going. — "Dili, 129. —Vim facere, to employ force. — Conentur, 187. — Prohibiturum, for se prohibiturum esse. — Spe (147), disappointed (downcast) in this hope. — Navibus junctis (151), by making bridges of boats. — Alii, some^ meaning 10 146 - LATIN LESSONS. that most of the Helvetii crossed by bridges of boats and rafts. — Nonnunquam, 195, 1. — Possent (177, Remark 1), having tried {to see) whether {if) they could. — Operis munitione (= muro fossaque), by the strength of the works. — Conatu, 147. CHAPTER IX. Una via, only the route. — Per Sequanos = per fines Sequanorum. — Qua, 159, Remark 3. — Seqnanis invitis, 157, Remark 2, —His, 131, a. — Sua sponte, of themselves ; that is, without assistance. — Possent, 182, b. — Eo deprecatore, through his intercession {he being an intercessor), 157. — Gratia, 149. — Plurimum, 94, d, 1; 142, c. — Helvetiis, 131, 6. — Novis rebus, for a revolution {new things), 131, a. — Quam, 40, c. — Sibi depends on obstric- tas. — Beneficio, 151. — Ut patiantur is the object of impetrat; uti dent, the object of perficit, 181, b. — Inter se dent, exchange, 53, d. — Sequani, Helvetii, each the subject of dent (repeated). — Ne prohibeant, ut transeant, 179. CHAPTER X. Eenuntiatur, word is brought back, 93, 2. — Helvetiis, etc., see note on sibi esse in animo. Chapter VII. What is the subject of esse ? — Id si fieret, etc., Indirect Discourse, 187, a. Futurum (esse) is the principal verb; its subject is ut . . , haberet, 188, b, 2; 181, a. — Id = facere iter; its position is emphatic. — Locis, 132. — Munitioni, 133. — Qua, 94, 2. — In Galliam, because iter implies motion. — Locis occupatis, 157. — Itinere, 147. — Com- pluribus, etc. ; tlie order is : his pulsis compluribus proeliis, 157. — Ab Ocelo, 159, Remark 1. — Citerioris (ulterioris) provinciae = Hither (Farther) Gaul. — Extremum (oppidum), last, most westerly. — Die, 160. —Trans, west of — Primi, emphatic position. CHAPTER XT. Angustias, see Chapter VI. (angustum et difficile). —Possent, 182, b. — Sua, 109. — Eogatum, 191, a. — Ita meritos esse de, {saying) that they had deserved so well of — Nostri, with exercitus. — Vastari non debuerint, ought not to have been laid waste, 173, Caution. — Eorum = sui. — Depopulatis, 80, Remark 3. — Non facile = vix. — Demonstrant = eum certiorem faci- unt. — Sibi praeter agri solum, etc., that they have nothing left {of a re- mainder) except the soil of their farms {of the field). — Sibi, 135. — Nihil, subject of esse. — Keliqui, 122, a. — Quibus rebus, 115, d. — Exspectandum, 198, 199, 2. — Sibi, 136. — Fortunis, 157. — Pervenirent, 184, b. LATIN LESSONS. 147 CHAPTER XII. Flumen est Arar, there is a river (called) the Arar (Sa6ne). —Quod, what is the antecedent ? — Lenitate, 150. — Utram, 195, 7. — Fluat, 177, c. — Pos- sit, 181. — Per exploratores, 151, Caution. -— Copiarum, 122, a. —Flumen, 141, c. — Ararim, see Vocabulary. — De tertia vigilia, in the third watch (de shows that it was after the beginning of the watch). When did the third watch begin? (see Vocabulary. ) — Eorum, 122, a. — Concidit, 79, 6, Remark. — Transierat, mandarunt, 79, 4. — In silvas, in the forests (or woods). The Accusative indicates that they retreated into, and hid themselves in. — Tiguri- nus, 107. — Divisa, 189, &. — Exisset, 79, 4; 184, a. — Memoria, 160.— Lucium Cassium, what is the Vocative ? — Casu, 149. — Quae pars, etc., — ea pars civitatis Helvetiae, quae. — Populo, 133. — Princeps, 110, a.— Persolvit, paid (in full, 99, 1). — Qua in re, 115, ^. — Publicas, that is, done to the state, — Privatas, personal {dionoi to his family). — Quod ejus soceri, etc., the order is : quod Tigurini, eodem proelio (160), quo (interfecerant) Cassium, interfecerant Lucium Pisonem legatum (Cassii), avum ejus {= Caesar's) soceri Lucii Pisonis. CHAPTER XIII. Hoc proelio facto = post hoc proelium. — Copias, 123, e. — Ut posset, purpose of faciendum curat (172, Remark 2). —In Arare, over the Arar. — Pontem faciendum, 189, h. — Intelligerent (184, a), when they saw.—Tii . . . transirent, in apposition with id (181, ^), namely, the crossing of the river. — Bello Cassiano, 160; 110, c. — Dux Helvetiorum, 124. — Is ita cum Caesare agit introduces a passage of Indirect Discourse (186, 187), extending through the remainder of the chapter. This is given under Note 187, e, together with the Latin of the Direct form, and the two should be carefully studied and com- pared. A general outline of each sentence is here given. Si to Helvetiorum. This sentence is Declaratory., as far as voluisset ; the remainder is Imperative. The Principal Verbs in the Declaratory part are ituros (esse), futures (esse) ; the Principal Verb in the Imperative part is reminisceretur, let him remember {he should remember) (187, c). — Constituisset, Voluisset, Future Perfect In- dicative {you shall have., etc.) in Direct Discourse (see 187, e). — Bello, 151. — Persequi (eos), in pursuing them. — Perseveraret, the subject is Caesar. — Reminisceretur, what form in Direct Discourse ? — Incommodi, the defeat and death of Cassius (125). — Quod to niterentur. This sentence is Impera- tive., to despiceret ; the remainder is Declaratory. The Principal Verbs in the Imperative part are (ne) tribueret, despiceret, let him not {— that he should not) attribute (the victory), ttc, or despise them ; the Principal Verb in the Declaratory part is didicisse. — Quod, 182, d. — Improvise, notice the deri- vation (liter^My = in an unforeseen manner). — Possent, what mode in 148 LATIN LESSONS. Direct Discourse ? (184, a.) — Magnopere, 39. — Majoribus, 36, 6. — Didlciiie zzinstitutos esse. — Insidiis niterentur, to rely {that they should rely) on ambuscades (151). — Contenderent, niterentur, what mode in Direct Dis- course? (181, Remark. ) — Qnare to proderet. This s&niQncQ is Imperative y the Principal Clause being ne (Caesar) committeret : let him not (= that he shmild not) cause the place where they should take (should have taken) their stand to receive (literally, cause that it should receive) a name, etc., or trans- mit the remembrance (of the defeat to future generations). — Gonstitissent, Future Perfect Indicative (we shall have taken our stand) in Direct Discourse. — Caperet, proderet, what mode in Direct Discourse ? (181, b,) NOTES. THE ESSENTIALS OF LATIN GEAMMAE. ETYMOLOGY. In Latin words, changes were often made which rendered them easier to pronounce. These are called Euphonic changes. Some of the most common changes are these : — 1. Consonant Changes. (1.) Qu was regarded as a single consonant, equivalent to C. Hence we find cujus as the genitive of qui ; seciitus (from sequor) for sequu- tus ; cum for quum. (2.) S between two vowels became R; as, eram and er5 (from stem es); flSris (from flos) ; corporis (from corpus). (3.) C and G united with S, forming X ; as pacs = pax; regs = rex; regsi = rexi. H did the same ; as, vehsi = vexi ; trahsi = traxi. (4.) D and T were a. Suppressed before S ; as, pes for peds ; custos for custods ; virtiis for virtuts ; pars for parts. b. Changed to S ; as, possum for potsum ; cessi for cedsi. This change is called Assimilation. See (6), below. (5.) M was changed to N before a lingual; as, septen(m)decim ; eun(m)dem (so English iden-tity, from idem). (6.) Assimilation (from two Latin words, ad, to, and siTdiliSy like, is a change made in a consonant by which it becomes like the following conso- nant. The form of the word assimilation itself is the result of this change, d being changed to s. It is very common in the case of Prepositions compounded with other words. A good example of it is seen in the verb affero, a compound of ad and fer5. Its Present Indicative is af-fero; Perfect Indicative, at-tuli; Supine, al-latum. 150 NOTES. 2. Vowel Chang^es. Vowel changes are frequent. Notes will be given on special changes when they shall occur. Some of those most common are given here : — (1. ) E changed to I ; as, militis (from miles) ; principis (from prin- ceps) ; verticis (from vertex) ; nominis (from nomen) ; retineo (from re + teneo). (2.) U changed to I ; as, capitis (from caput). (3.) O changed to I; as, virginis (from virg5). (4.) O changed to U ; as, corpus (gen. corporis) for corpos. (6. ) A changed to I ; as, conficio (from con + facio). (6.) A changed to E; as, confectum (from con + factum). (7.) OE changed to U; as, punio (from poena); munio (from tnoenia). (8.) AE changed to I; as, occido (from ob + caedo). (9.) AU changed to U ; as, includo (from in + claudo). NOUNS. Outline of Kuleg for Gender. 3. Gender decided by meaning* These Rules apply to all Declen- sions ; A small figure at the right of a word refers to Remarks at the end of these tables, Masculine.1 Feminine.2 ^ Neuter. Names of Males, Rivers, Winds, and Moun- tains, Names of Females, Coun- tries, Towns, Islands, and Trees. Indeclinahle Nouns; In- finitives, Phrases, Clau- ses, and other parts ot speech used as inder clinable nouns. 4. Gender decided by ending of Nominative Singular. (1.) First Declension. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. cf 9, c. I a. I (2.) Second Declension. us,8er, ir. | I ""^v * Some names of oivers, countries, towns, etc., follow the rules of gender by ending. NOTES. 151 Mascijlike. 6, or, OS, er, gs (in- creasing in the Geni- tive to idis or itis). US.* (3.) Third Declension. Feminine. as, es (not increasing in the Genitive), is, ys, X, s (preceded by a consonant), do, g5, io (abstract and collec- tive), us (Genitive, -udis or -utis). (4.) Fourth Declension, Neuter. a, e, i, y, c, 1, t, men (Genitive, -minis), ar, ur, us (Genitive, -6ris or -6ris). I (5.) Fifth Declension, Remarks. 1. Because vir (m,an), fluvius (river), ventus (wind), mons {mountain), are Masculine. 2. Because mulier {woman), terra {land, country), urbs {city), insula (island), arbor (tree), are Feminine. 3. Pelagus {sea), virus (poiso7i), vulgus (crowd), are Neuter. Vul- gus is rarely Masculine. 4. Manus {hand), domus (house), Idus (the 15th, or IZth, of the month), and several others, are Feminine. 5. Dies (day) is Masculine or Feminine in the Singular, and Masculine in the Plural. MeridiSs (noon) is Masculine. General Tie^v of all Declensions. 5. Stem Endings (or Characteristics). I. a II. 6 III. 1 or a Consonant IV. u V. 5. Stem Ending. 6. Case Endings. Small figures at the right refer to ^^ Different Forms'' below. Singular. I. II. III. IV. V. F. M. N. m. f. n. m. N. F. Nom. a Qs, 6r, !r um (various endings.) iSs U es Gen. ae i i Is is us US ei5 Dat. ae 6 5 i 1 ui u ei5 Ace. am um iim 6m (to) like Nom. um u 6m Voc. a 6,2 6r, ir um liks Nom. (( us u es Abl. a 6 6 6(1) 6(1) u u e 152 NOTES. Plural. IL M. N. i a orum oriim IS is OS a i g is is III. IV. V. M. F. N. M. N. P. es a(ia) US ua es Tl um (ium) iim (ium) uiim uiim eriim ibus Ibiis Ibiis* Ibiis ebiis es3 a(ia) us ua es es a(ia) us ua es Ibiis Ibiis Ibiis* Ibiis ebiis Different Forms. L F. NoM. ae Gen. ariim Dat. isi Ace. as Voc. ae Abl. is^ 1. Except deabus, filiabus. 2. Except deus, filius, Cassius, etc. 3. Vowel stems have also is. 4. Except words of two syllables, ending in cus (as lacus) ; also portus and a few others, which have iibus. 6. Ex- cept res, spes, fides, which have 6i. Formation of the Cases. 7. The following table will be helpful to the beginner, since it shows how the Cases were anciently formed from the Stems, in the Five Declen- sions, and what changes and contractions were afterwards made ; — I. Puella- NOMINATIVE. \P;S^ GEKXTXVE. p;,*^ j puella-i { puellae {puella-m \ puellam j puella- \ puella ( puella-d \ puella Dative. Accusative. Vocative. Ablative. II. Equo- III. Reg- Singular. IV. Curru- equo-s equus reg-s rex currus currus equo-i equi reg-is regis curru-is currus equo-i equo reg-i regi curru-i currui equo-^n equum reg-em regem curru-m currum equo- eque equo-d equo reg-s rex reg-ed rege curru-s currus curru-d curru Die- die-8 dies die-i diei die-i diei die-m diem dies dies die-d die NOTES. 153 Puella- NOMINATIVE. Genitive. Dative. Accusative. Vocative. Ablative. ) puellae j puella-rum j puellarum ipuella-is I puellis {puella-ms puellas ^puella-i ( puellae {puella-is \ puellis II. III. IV. V. Equo- Reg- Currii- Die- Flural. equo-i equi reg-es reges curru-es currus die-s dies equo-rum equorum equo-is equis reg-um regum reg-ibus regibus curru-um curruum cuj'im-bus curribus die-rum dierum die-bus diebus equo-ms equos reg-ems reges curru-ms currus die-ms dies tquo-i equi equo-is equis reg-es reges reg-ibus regibus curru-es currus currubus curribus dies dies die-bus diebus Notice, in the above table, that the Ablative Singular originally ended in d. Afterwards, d was dropped and the stem-vowel was lengthened (in puella, equo, curru). In rege, the final vowel was not a stem-vowel, but a connecting vowel, and was not aft'ected. Other changes, producing long vowels in final syllables, can be pointed out and explained by th«? teacher. General L.aws of Declension. 8. (1.) The Nominative and Vocative are always alike, in both numbers, except in nouns of the Second Declension ending in us. (2.) The Accusative Singular of Masculines and Feminines always ends in m, and the Accusative Plural in s. (3.) Neuter nouns have the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative alike in both numbers, and these cases, in the Plural, always end in a. (4.) In the Third, Fourth, and Fifth Declensions, the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural (in all genders) are alike. (5.) The Dative and Ablative Plural are always alike. (6.) The Genitive Plural always ends in um. (7.) The vowels i, o, u are long when final. (8.) The vowel a is short when final, except in the Ablative Singular. (9.) Final e is sho7't in the Third Declension, and long in the Fifth. Nouns : First Declension. 9. Latin nouns of the First Declension end in a in the Nominative Singular. a. The Stem ends in a (called the Stem- Vowel, or Characteristic). b. The Case Endings are given in 6. 154 NOTES. «. The Gender of nouns of the First Declension is Feminine, except of a few that are Masculine from their meaning ; as, nauta, a sailor ; agricola, a farmer ; poeta, a poet ; Belgae, Celtae (names of tribes). d. Observe that final a is long in the Ablative Singular. e. Filia, a daughter, and dea, a goddess, have filiabus and deabus in the Dative and Ablative Plural, instead of filiis and deis. Were it not for some such peculiarity, these words could not be dis- tinguished, in those cases, from filius, a son, and deus, a god, of the Second Declension. Nouns: Second Declension. 10. Nouns of the Second Declension end in us, er, ir (Masculine), um (Neater). a. The Stem ends in o. h. The Case Endings are given in 6. c. Nouns ending in us are exceptions to the law stated in Note 8 (1), as they have e in the Vocative Singular. d. Filius and genius drop e in the Vocative ; so do proper names ending in ius ; as, fill ; Cassi ; Juli (instead of filie ; Cassie ; Julie). This does not affect the accent; as, Mercii'ri (for Mercu'rie). e. The Genitive of nouns ending in ius or ium ends in ii or i (that is, ii contracted). This does not affect the accent ; as, ingg'ni (for ingg^nii). /. Deus, a god, is thus declined : Singular deus, dei, deo, deum, deus, de5. Plural N. and V. dei, dii (or, contracted, di), G. deorum (or, contracted, deum), D. and Abl. deis, diis (or, con- tracted, dis). Ace. de5s. g. Vulgus, the crowd, is Neuter, and has the Accusative like the Nominative. It has no Plural. Nouns : Third Declension. 11. Nouns of the Third Declension are divided into two classes : — a. Nouns whose stem ends in a Consonant. They have um in the Genitive Plural ; as, militum. h. Nouns whose stem ends in the Vowel i. They have ium in the Genitive Plural ; as, navium. 12. The Nominative Singular of most nouns is formed by adding s to the stem. NOTES. 155 a. If the stem ends in c or g, the Nominative will end in x (1 (3)) ; as, lux ( = luc -h s) ; rex ( = reg + s). b. If the stem ends in t or d, those letters will be dropped before the final s of the Nominative (1 (4) a) ; as, aetas (= aetat + s) ; custos (= custod 4- s) ; lapis (= lapid + s). 13. In forming the Nominative, the vowel before the final consonant of the stem is often changed. a. The most common change is from i to e ; as, miles, judex, nomen, nubes (from the stems milit-, judic-, nomin-, nubi-). b. Other vowel changes are from i to u (as, caput, from stem capit-) ; i to o (as, virgo, multitude, from stems virgin-, multitudin-) ; o to u (as, corpus, from stem corpor-) ; e to u (as, opus, from stem oper-). Remark. In the Genitives of corpus, opus, flos, and others of like form, r takes the place of s, according to the law stated in 1 (2) ; as, cor- poris, operis, floris, etc., instead of corposis, opesis, flosis, etc. 14. Nominatives ending in o. (as, le5, multitude, virgo) have lost the final n of the stem. The stems of these nouns are leon-, multitudin-, virgin-. It will be seen from these examples that nouns ending in do and go also change the vowel (i) before n to o. Consonant-Stems. 15. Nouns whose stem ends in a Consonant increase in the Genitive; that is, they have more syllables in that case than in the Nominative. Notice the Remark below. a. The final consonant of the stem may be a Mute or a Liquid (4, page 17) ; as, reg-, due-, capit-, custod-, consul-, leon-. b. The I^ominative Singular, except in the case of Neuters and nouns having Liquid stems, is formed by adding s to the stem. For Ex- amples, see 12, «, b. Remark. Pater, mater, frater (Genitives, patris, matris, fratris), seem not to increase in the Genitive. The reason is that the stems are really pater-, mater-, frater-, and that they are contracted to patr-, matr-, fratr- ; so that patris is for pateris, etc. Towel- Stems. 16. Nouns whose stem ends in the Vowel i do not increase in the Geni- tive, Notice the Remark below. 156 NOTES. a. The Nominative Singular, except of Neuters, is formed by adding s to the stem ; as, navis {= navi + s). h As in nouns having Consonant-stems, i in the stem is frequently- changed to e in the Nominative ; as, mare, nubSs (from stems mari-, nubi-). c. Nouns having vowel-stems end : — (1. ) In es and is (Feminine, with a few exceptions). (2.) In e, al, ar (Neuter) ; these have i in the Ablative Singular. Remark. Neuters (ending in al, ar), as animal, calcar (Genitives, animalis, calcaris), see7n to increase in the Genitive. These forms, how- ever, have lost a final e in the Nominative (as will be explained hereafter), and hence are to be regarded as nouns ending in ale, are (26, h). Ani- male, calcare (Genitives, animalis, calcaris), do not increase. Peculiarities of Vowel-Stems. 17. Nouns having i-stems differ from those having Consonant-stems in the following respects : — a. The Genitive Plural ends in ium ; Neuters have ia in the Nomina- tive, Accusative, and Vocative, Plural. This seems irregular ; but it is not at all so, as um and a are added to the stem (ending in i) just as to a stem ending in a consonant. h. The Ablative Singular of all Neuters (ending in e, al, ar) ends in i. The nouns ignis, navis, turris, and some others, have e or i in the Ablative. c. Some nouns have im in the Accusative Singular ; others (as turris) have em or im. These can be best learned by practice. d. The Accusative Plural (Masculine and Feminine) is often written is; as, turres (or is) ; nubes (or is). 18. Monosyllables (one-syllable nouns), whose stem (in the Singular) ends in two consonants, are declined as consonant-stems in the Singular, but as vowel-stems in the Plural. That is, they increase in the Genitive, yet have ium in the Genitive Plural, and es or is in the Accusative Plural ; as, urbs, nox (Genitive Plural, urbium, noctium). The same principle applies to many nouujj (not monosyllables) having stems (in the Singular) ending in two consonants ; as, cbhors, cliens (Genitive Plural, cohortium, clientium). 19. The Rules for Gender according to Nominative endings are given under N. 4. a. The following nouns, in common use, are exceptions to these rules, being Masculine: dens, a toothy fons, a fountain, mons, a moun- NOTES. 157 tairii pons, a bridge ; ignis, firc^ finis, a limits end, coUis, a hill. According to the rules, these nouns should be Feminvne. h. There are many nouns not provided for by the rules ; the gencjer of these must be learned by practice ; as, jus (Genitive, juris), righty laio (Neuter); iter (Genitive, iXinQxis), journey, march (Neuter). Nouns : Foukth Declension. 20. Nouns of the Fourth Declension end in us (Masculine),* u (Neuter). a. The Stem ends in u. The Case Endings are given under 6. h. The Nominative Singular of Masculines is formed by. adding s to the stem ; as, curru + s. c. From 7, it will be seen that the Fourth Declension resembles the Third. The Genitive Singular of currus, for instance, is con- tracted from curruis to currus, and hence the long u (11, e, p. 21). Other instances of contraction are shown in the Table under 7. d. Notice that, in the Dative and Ablative Plural, the u of the stem becomes i ; also, that Neuter nouns have all cases in the Singular (except the Genitive) t^ike. Eemark. Dissyllables (words of two syllables) ending in cus (as lacus), and a few others, have ubus in the Dative and Ablative Plural. 21. Most nouns of the Fourth Declension are formed from the Supine stem of verbs ; as, exercitus, motus, adventus (from exerceo, moveo, advenio). a. The Supines of verbs are therefore nouns of the Fourth Declension, but have only the Accusative and Ablative Singular. h. Domus {house or home) belongs both to the Fourth and Second Declensions. Its inflection will be found under the References giren in Lesson XXXV. Nouns : Fifth Declension. 22. Nouns of the Fifth Declension end in es. The Nominative = Stem + s. a. The Stem ends in e. The Case Endings are given under 6. h. The Gender is Feminine ; except dies (day), which is usually Mas- culine. Meridies {noon) is also Masculine. * Manus, domus, Idus (Plural), and a few others, are Feminine. 158 NOTES. c. Only two nouns, diSs and res, have all the cases in the Plural. A few others have the Nominative and Accusative, Plural. d. Contrary to the rule (11, ft, p. 20), e is long before i in the Genitive and Dative Singular in all nouns except res, spes, fides. Compound Nouns. 23. There are, in Latin, several Compound Nouns. Of these, the two most common are : — cc, Respublica (= the noun res + the Feminine adjective publica), meaning the puUic affair , that is, the state. Both parts of the word are declined, — res as the noun (Fifth Declension) and publica as the feminine of bonus. Genitive = reipublicae, or rei publicae. l. Jusjurandum (= the noun jus + the Neuter participle jurandum, from juro, to swear) ^ meaning an oath. Jus is the noun, Third Declension Neuter, and jurandum is declined like bonum. Geni- tive = jiirisjurandi. c. Pater, mater, and some other nouns, are often joined with familias (an old form of the Genitive, First Declension, = familiae). The first noun is declined regularly, but familias does not change its form ; as, patresfamilias {the heads of families) ; matresfamilias (matrons). ADJECTIVES.* 24. Latin Adjectives are declined like Nouns. As they must agree with a Noun or Pronoun in Gender, Number, and Case (io8), they are declined in three Genders, two Numbers, and six Cases. They are divided into two classes : — a. Adjectives whose Masculine and Neuter forms are like Masculine and Neuter nouns of the Second Declension, and whose Feminine form is like a Feminine noun of the First Declension ; as, bonus (Masculine), bona (Feminine), bonum (Neuter). That is, they are declined exactly as servus, Stella, bellum, would be, if de- clined side by side. These Adjectives are therefore called Adjec tives of the First and Second Declensions, h. Adjectives declined like Nouns of the Third Declension are called Adjectives of the Third Declension, * ^nus, alius, and others having the same peculiarities of declension, are described under Numeral Adjectives (43). NOTES. 159 All Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions have a separate form for each gender; but Adjectives of the Third Declension differ in this respect, according to the rules stated in the next Note. 25. Adjectives of the Third JDeclension may have, in the Nominative Singular, (1) a separate ending for each gender ; (2) one form for both Masculine and Feminine, and another for the Neuter; (3) the same form for all genders. For convenience, therefore, we say that an Adjective of the Third Declension has three endings, or two endingSy or one ending. They can be distinguished by the following rules : — a. Adjectives of three endings end in er; as, acer (Masculine), acris (Feminine), acre (Neuter). b. Adjectives of ttvo endings end in is, or are in the Comparative Degree; as, fortis (brave) ; fortior (braver). These have, in the Nominative Singular, fortis (Masculine and Feminine), forte (Neuter) ; fortior (Masculine and Feminine), fortius (Neuter). c. Adjectives of one endi7ig include those not ending in er or is, and not in the Comparative Degree; as, audax, ingens, vetus. 26. a. Adjectives of the Third Declension ending in er are i-stems. The fact to be specially noticed is that they have i in the Ablative Singu- lar, and es or is in the Accusative Plural (Masculine and Fenmiine). b. Adjectives ending in is are i-stems. They have i in the Ablative Singular, and es or is in the Accusative Phcral {Masculine and Feminine). Neuter nouns (Third Declension), ending in al and ar, are really Neuter forms of A.djectives ending in is (the e having dis- appeared) ; as, animalis, living, animale (animal), a living thing. c. Adjectives of one end in j an; i-stems. Notice, however, (1) that they increase in the Genitive; (2) that they have e or i in the Ablative Singular. In the Plural they are declined like fortis. (Vetus, old, and a few others have consonant-stems in both numbers.) Caution. As these adjectives have two endings in the Accusative Singular (because the Accusative, Neuter, must be like the Nominative), it will be less confusing to decline them in two columns, thus : — M. F. N. Nominative audax audax. d. Comparatives have two endings and Consonant (Liquid) stems ; but notice that they have e or i in the Ablative Singular. Also notice that the Accusative Plural (Masculine and Feminine) has 5s or is. Caution. Beginners are very apt to write the Nominative and Geni- tive Plural ia, ium. Notice that these forms have no i. 160 NOTES. 27. Plus, morCf is a Neuter Noun in the Singular, declined like jus ; hence, to express more wisdom; more pain, we must say plus sapientiae ; plus dol5ris (122, h). In the Plural it is an Adjective, declined like the Plural of any other Comparative, except that it has ium in the Genitive. 28. As already stated, Adjectives of one ending, and also Comparatives, have e or i in the Ablative Singular. The usual distinction is that the form ending in i is used adjectively, and the form ending in e, suh- COMPARISON. 29. Adjectives expressing quality are compared, in Latin as in English, in three ways : (1) regularly ; (2) irregularly ; (3) by the use of the Adverbs more and most, (1.) Kegular Comparison. 30. The Comparative (Masculine) is formed by adding ior, and the Superlative by adding issimus (Masculine) to the stem of the Positive, minus the stem vowel ; as, carus, dear ; carior, dearer ; carissimus, dearest. fortis, hrave; fortior, braver ; fortissimus, bravest. audax, bold; audacior, bolder ; audacissimus, boldest. Remark. The Comparative is always of the Third Declension, and the Superlative of the First and Second. a. Participles, if used as Adjectives, are regularly compared ; as, amans, amantior, amantissimus ; apertus, apertior, apertissimus. (2.) Irregular Comparison* 31. Two classes of Adjectives do not form their Superlative according to the law of Regular Comparison : — a. Adjectives ending in -er form the Superlative by adding rimus to the Positive ; as, acer, acrior, acerrimus; miser, miserior, miserrimus. h. Six Adjectives ending in -lis form the Superlative by adding llmus to the stem, minus the stem vowel i ; as, facilis, facilior, facilli- mus. The list is : — facilis, easy ; similis, like ; gracilis, slender. difficilis, difficult ; dissimilis, unlike ; humilis, lowly. NOTES. 161 32. Compound Adjectives ending in -dicus, -ficus, -v61us (derived from the verbs dico, facio, vol5), form the Comparative and Superlative as though thej- were participial forms ending in ns ; as, maledicus, abusive {ill-speaking), maledicentior, maledicentissimus. munificus, liberal, munificentior, munificentissimus. benevolus, benevolent (well-wishing), benevolentior, benevolentissimus. 33. The Adjectives bonus (good), malus (bad), magnus (great), parvus (S7nall), multus (much), multi (plural of multus, meaning many), and a few others, are very irregular in their forms of comparison. Like the English good, bad, and other adjectives, the three degrees are formed from different stems. References to their forms of comparison are given in Lesson XXIX. 34. Five Adjectives have no Positive. They are, in the Comparative, citerior (hither), interior (inner), prior (former), propior (nearer), ulterior (farther). They are derived from Prepositions. In English, also, we have Adjectives without a Positive, and derived from Prepositions ; as, (in), iimer, innermost (or inmost). 35. These four have peculiar Superlatives : — Exterus (outside), superus (high), inferus (low), posterus (follow- ing). These, also, are derived from Prepositions. References to their comparison are given in Lesson XXXIV. 36. The following are more or less peculiar in comparison : — a. Dives (rich), divitior or ditior, divitissimus or ditissimus. b. Juvenis (young), minor natu (less by birth; that is, younger), minimus natu (least by birth; that is, yov.ngest). Instead of minor natii, minor alone is often used (natii being understood), especially in the plural ; as, minores, descendants. Senex (old), major natu, maximus natu. Or, maj5res alone is used for the Comparative (natu being understood), in the sense of elders or ancestors. (3.) Comparison by MoKE and Most. 37. Adjectives which have a vowel before the ending us usually form the Comparative and Superlative by the use of the Adverbs magis (more), and maxime (most) ; as, dubius (doubtful), magis dubius, maxime dubius. Formation and Comparison of Adverbs. 38. Adverbs of Manner are formed from Adjectives. English Adverbs of Manner are formed by adding ly to Adjectives j as, dearly, bravely. 11 162 NOTES. In Latin Adverbs the ending of the Positive shows from what Declension of Adjectives the Adverb is derived. a. An Adverb is formed from the stem of an Adjective of the First and Second Peclensions by changing the stem-vowel to e; as, care, dearly (from stems caro-, cara-, dear). Other examples are : digne (worthily) ; pulchre (beautifully). b. An Adverb is formed from an Adjective of the Third Declension by- adding ter to the stem ; as, forti-ter (bravely), gravi-ter (heavily), audaci-ter* (boldly), acri-ter (eagerly). Adjectives ending in ns (Genitive, -ntis) drop ti from the stem before forming Adverbs; as, sapienter (wisely), for sapienti-ter ; prudenter (prudently). c. In Adverbs regularly compared, the Comparative is the same in form as the Neuter Accusative Singular of the Adjective (Compara- tive) ; as, carius (^nore dearly), gravius (more heavily), acrius (more eagerly), sapientius (more wisely), melius (better). d. The Superlative of the Adjective belongs to the First and Second Declensions. Therefore, according to the rule given above (a), the Superlative of the Adverb will end in e; as, carissime, acerrime, facillime, sapientissime, pessime. Comparison of Adverbs: Peculiar Forms. 39. Bene, well (from bonus), melius, optime. Magnopere, greatly; magis, more; maxime, ^iiost. There is no simple Adverb derived from the Positive of magnus. Magnopere = magn5 + opere, and is used as the Positive of the Adverb. Facile is regularly used instead of faciliter (see a, below). a. The Accusative and Ablative Singular of the Adjective (Neuter) are very often used as Adverbs ; as, multum, multo (much). Facile is regularly used, as stated above. b. These Adverbs are compared in like manner, though not formed from Adjectives : — diu, long (in time), diutius, diutissime. saepe, often, saepius, saepissime. Peculiar Meanings of Adjectives. 40. a. The Comparative may be variously translated; as, audacior, bolder, rather bold, too bold. * Audaciter is usually written audacter. NOTES. 163 h. The Superlative may often be rendered by very; as, vir optimus, a very excellent man, c. Quam (adverb of degree) with the Superlative has a peculiar force. Supplicium quam gravissimum means as severe punishment as possible. So quam plurimi, as many as possible, d. Per gives to a Positive almost the meaning of a Superlative ; as, permag^us, very great (that is, thoroughly great). NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 41. Numeral Adjectives are Cardinal and Ordinal, as in English (see 9, &, page 2); as, unus, one; primus, ^rs^. a. A third class of Numerals is composed of adjectives called Dis- tributives, They answer the questions. How many at a time ? How many in a set ? Examples are singuli, one by one ; bini, two by two, in pairs. The lists of these Numerals are given in the Grammars and in the Appendix. Declension of Numeral Adjectives. 42. a. Ordinal Adjectives are declined like bonus. b. Distributive Adjectives are declined like the plural of bonus. c. Cardinal Adjectives, from 4 to 100, inclusive, are not declined. From 200 to 900, inclusive, they are declined like the plural of bonus ; as, ducenti, ae, a (two hundred). The declension of the other Cardinal Adjectives is described in the next Note. 43. a. Unus is peculiar in its declension. In general it is like bonus, but it has unius in the Genitive Singular, all genders (instead of uni, unae, uni), and uni in the Dative Singular, all genders (instead of uno, unae, uno). In the Plural uni means alone or only ; as, uni Ubii, the Ubii alone. b. Like unus are declined these adjectives, which are not Numerals, but are placed here because their iiTegularities are the same as those of unus : — alius (neuter, aliud), other, ullus, any. nullus, no. alter (genitive, altertus), the other (of two) . s51us, alone. neuter (genitive, neutrius), neither, totus, whole. uter (genitive, utrius), which (of two). c. Duo has peculiar forms of declension, which are given in the Gram- mars and the Appendix. Remark. Ambo [both) is declined like duo. 164 NOTES. d. Tres (Neuter, tria) is declined like the plural of fortis. e. Mille may be a Noun or an Adjective. As a Noun : (1) it is Neuter and is declined like mare, but it has, in the Singular, only the Nominative and Accusative (mille) ; (2) it is always followed by the Genitive (123, c); as, mille hominum ; duo millia (or milia) passuum {two miles). As an Adjective, it is not declined, and may be used in agi-eement with a noun in any case ; as, mille viri ; cum mille viris. NUMERAL ADVERBS. 44. Numeral Adverbs answer the question. How often? The list is given in the Grammars and the Appendix. PRONOUlSrS. 45. Pronouns are of seven classes : — 1. Personal ; 2. Reflexive ; 3. Possessive ; 4. Demonstrative ; 5. Rela- tive ; 6. Interrogative ; 7. Indefinite. The Personal and Reflexive Pronouns are declined as Substantives ; their gender must be decided by the sense. All the other Pronouns are declined as Adjectives, having a separate form for each gender. 46. The Personal Pronouns are : First Person, ego, I (plural, nos) ; Second Person, tu, you (plural, vos). There is no Personal Pro- noun of the Third Person in Latin ; but a Demonstrative (usually is) is used instead. As in English, this pronoun requires a separate form for each gender, and is supplies these forms. The declension of is is given under Demonstrative Pronouns. Remark. Ego and is can, of course, have no Vocative. 47. Hefleocive Pronouns (that is, pronouns that turUf or refer ^ back) are so called because they refer back to the subject of their sentence or clause. Hence they have no Nominative or Vocative. The Reflexive Pronouns of the First and Second Persons have case-forms precisely like the Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and Ablative of the Personal Pronouns. The list is : First Person, mei, of myself (nostri, of ourselves); Second Person, tui, of yourself (vestTij of yourselves) ; Third Person, sui, of him- self herself itself (sui, of themselves) . The plural of sui is declined like the singular. Caution. Notice that sui cannot be used as a Third Personal Pro- noun, for two reasons : (1) it has no Nominative ; (2) it is always used reflexively. The following conjugation of laudo in the Present Indicative, NOTES. 165 with a subject and object expressed, will help to make clear the use of the Personal and Reflexive Pronouns : — Ego mS laudo, I praise myself. n5s nos laudamus. tu te laudas, you praise yourself. vos vos laudatis. is (ea) se laudat, he (she) praises himself (herself), ii (eae) se laudant. 48. Possessive JPronouns are formed from the Personal and Re- flexive Pronouns, and are declined as Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions. -They are : — meus (Vocative Singular, mi) my, or mine ; tuus, your, or yours ; suus, his, her (hers), its ; noster, oicr, or ours; vaster, your, or yours ; suus, their, or theirs. Caution. Suus (like sui) is used reflexively. When his, her, its, or their, is not reflexive, the Genitive of is should be used ; as, dominus servum suum vocavit, et opus ejus laudavit, the master called his (the master's) slave, and praised his (the slaves) work. Beginners often find the meaning of suus troublesome. It is an Adjective, and must agree with its noun in gender, number, and case. Being reflexive, its meaning must be decided, not from its ending, but from the meaning of the Subject. The following sentences will make this clear : — Rex servum suum vocat, the king calls his slave ; regina servum suum vocat, the queen calls her slave ; pueri matrem suam amant, the hoys love their mother ; puellae patrem suum amant, the girls love their father. 49. Demonstrative Prontyuns (that is. Pronouns that point out) agree with the Substantives which they limit in gender, number, and case. They are declined, for the most part, like Adjectives of the First and Sec- ond Declensions. They (particularly is) are often used as the Personal Pronoun of the Third Person (46). From their meaning, they all (except ipse) lack the Vocative. They are : — hie, this (near me); is, that (when used Adjectively). ille, that (near him, or yonder); ipse, self. iste, that (near you); idem,* the same, = is + dem (an emphatic syllable). Remarks. 1. From their meaning, hie, iste, ille, are often called Demonstratives of the First, Second, and Third Persons. 2. Is does not point out as definitely as hie, ille, iste. It is very commonly used as an Antecedent to the Relative Pronoun ; as, is qui, he who (one who, a man who). Sometimes it has no greater force than the * For change of m to n (as eiindem for eumdem) see 1 (5). 166 NOTES. Article the ; as, centum milites eo tempore habuit, Tie had one hundred soldiers at the time. 3. Ipse is used to add emphasis to some Noun or Pronoun ; as, vos ipsi, you yourselves ; vir ipse, the man himself (or the very man). 50. The Relative Pronoun is qui. It has a separate form for each gender (qui, quae, quod), since it must agree in gender with its Antecedent. It is to be rendered who, which, that, according to the sense. 51. The Interrogative Pronoun resembles the Relative in de- clension. It has two forms, which are regularly used as follows : — 1. quis, quae, quid, used as a Substantive ; as, quis me laudat } who praises me ? quid commisit ? what has he done ? 2. qui, quae, quod, used as an Adjective ; as, qui homo me laudat ? what man praises me ? quod facinus commisit ? what deed has he done .? Remark. Quis and qui are sometimes used for each other. Caution. When the question refers to one of two, we must use uter, utra, utrum (which of the two .?). 52. Indefinite Pronouns do not refer to definite objects. The simple Indefinite (= any) is quis (or qui). We very seldom find this form, however, except in compounds, which, with a very few exceptions, are declined exactly like the Relative and Interrogative Pronouns. The com- pounds (in common use) that have peculiar forms are aliquis, siquis, nequis. These, like the Interrogative Pronoun, have two forms, — quis (Substantive), and qui (Adjective). These compounds are declined, in general, like the Relative and Interrogative ; but notice that they regularly have final a, where the Relative and Interrogative have final ae (except in the Nominative Plural Feminine). a. Aliquis ( = alius -f- quis) means, literally, some one or other, b. Siquis and nequis are written as compounds, or as separate words. This is because si and ne are Conjunctions, and connect clauses as well as help in forming the compound pronouns. c. The meanings of aliquis, siquis, nequis, are given here : — Substantive, Adjective. aliquis, any one, some one ; aliqui, any, some. siquis, if any one ; siqui, if any. nequis, lest any one ; nequi, lest any. d. Other Indefinite Pronouns (the first part declined like the Relative and Interrogative) are: quicumque, whoever or whosoever; qui- dam, a certain man (or a certain) ; quivis (= qui + vis, fiom vol5), any-you-please ; quisque, each, every. NOTES. 167 53. The following General Remarks on the Pronouns will be found useful : — a. The Preposition cum [with) is joined as an Enclitic (195, 3) to the Ablative of the Personal, Reflexive, Relative, and Interrogative Pronouns; as, mecum, nobiscum, tecum, vSbiscum, secum, quibuscum; but cum lis (his, illis). t, Quisque [eacli] with a Superlative has a peculiar meaning; as, quisque sapientissimus, all the wisest. That is, if each is wisest, then all are. So also, quisque ditissimus, all the richest. c. The Enclitic -que, added to the simple Indefinite, gives it a uni- versal force; as, quis (any); quisque (each, every). This same force is given to an Adverb, by adding -que ; as, ubi (where), ubique (everywhere) ; unde (whence), undique (from every side, on every side). d. The Preposition inter, with a Reflexive Pronoun in the Plural, gives a peculiar force and meaning ; as, inter nos amamus ; inter vos amatis ; inter se amant : we (you, they) love each other. VERBS. Special Note for licsson II. 54. English Verbs are conjugated very much alike. In Latin, they are divided into four classes (called Conjugations), each Conjugation being somewhat unlike the others. They are called the First, Second, Third, and Fourth Conjugations. Just as we distinguish Declensions of Nouns by their Stems, so we distinguish one Latin Conjugation from the others by the Stem of its Present Tense, Indicative Mode, which we call the Present Stem. The following facts should be carefully studied : — 1. The Present Stem, in the First Conjugation, like the stem of nouns of the First Declension, ends in a. The Present Stems of amo, voco, and liber5, are ama, voca, libera. 2. English verbs have very few changes of form in conjugation. For instance, the Present Indicative of love, in its common use, has loves in the Third Person Singular, but love in all the other persons of both numbers. Hence, a Personal Pronoun, as Subject, is needed to show what the person of each form is. In Latin verbs, however, there is a special ending for each person, in both numbers ; and the Personal Pronoun can be omitted, because each ending shows what Personal Pro- noun is to be supplied in translating. These endings are called Per- sonal Endings* 168 ^ NOTES. In the Present Indicative of all regular verbs these Personal Endings are : — ( 1. -5 (/). ( 1. -mus (we). Singular. < 2. -s (you). Plural. < 2. -tis (you). ^ 3. -t (he, she, it). ^ 3. -nt (they). 3. Each form in the Present Tense is composed of the Present Stern, plus the proper Fersonal Ending, In the First Person Singular the stem-vowel a unites with the personal ending ; as, voco (for voca5), am5 (for amao). The following examples show how these forms are built up, and the exact meaning of each element in them : — ama -f nt (love they), voca + mus (call we), da + t [gives he). 4. Voc5 may be translated in three ways : I call ; lam calling; I do call (section 17, a, h, page 4). 5. It is evident, from what has been stated (2, 3, 4), that a single verb- form contains a Subject and Predicate, and hence may be a complete sentence in itself ; as, am at, he loves. Special Note for liesson VI. 55. The verb Sum (/ am) is Irregular and Intransitive. Like the English verb to be, it cannot make a statement, but requires some word (usually a Noun or Adjective) to complete its meaning ; that is, it acts as a Copula, and requires a Complement. This Complement, whether a Noun or Adjective, must be in the same case as the Subject. Study care- fully section 37, a, page 10. The Present Indicative of Sum is thus inflected : — ( 1. sum, lam. i 1. sumus, we are. Singular. < 2. es, you are. Plural. < 2. estis, you are. I 3. est, he is. I 3. sunt, they are. Notice that the Personal Endings, in several of the forms, are like those in the Present Tense of amo. Transitive and Intransitive Verbs; Voice; Number; Person. 56. Latin Verbs, like those in English, may be Transitive or Intransi- tive. Transitive Verbs have two Voices, Active and Passive. Intransitive Verbs have no Passive Voice in ordinary use. As in English, Verbs have two Numbers and three Persons. NOTES. 169 Modes. 57. Latin Verbs have four Modes, which are very similar to those in English having the same names. They are : — a. The Indicative, which states a positive fact, or asks a direct ques- tion; as, amat, he loves; quis vocat ? who calls ? b. The Subjunctive, which does not state facts, but expresses some- thing as uncertaiyi, possible, impossible, desired, &c. ; as, si R5mam videat, f elix sit, if he should see Rome, he would be happy ; servum laudemus, let us praise the slave. c. The Imperative^ which commands; as, amicos ama, love your friends. d. The Infinitive, which, in Latin as in English, does not state or command, and has no person or number. It expresses the idea of the verb indefinitely (see section 15, e, p. 4). As in English, it is very frequently used as a Verbal Noun ; as, scire est regere, knowledge is power (literally, to know is to rule)-. c5n5tur trans- ire, he tries to cross. Participles. 58. Latin Verbs have four Participles, or Verbal Adjectives : — a. Active : Present and Future Participles. b. Passive: Perfect Participle and Gerundive (or Future Participle, Passive). Remakk. These Participles agree with their Substantives in gender, number, and case, and (with the exception of the Present Participle, which is of the Third Declension, one ending) are declined like bonus. Gerund; Supine. 59. Latin Verbs have two Verbal Nouns : — a. The Gerund, which is like the English Verbal Noun ending in -ing. It is declined like a noun of the Second Declension, but has no Nominative or Vocative. The Infinitive takes the place of the Nominative ; as, ars canendi, the art of singing ; canere est jucundum, singing (to sing) is pleasant. b. The Supine, which is a Verbal Noun of the Fourth Declension. It has only the Accusative and Ablative. Its uses are i)eculiar, and will be described hereafter (191). 170 NOTES. Tenses. This Note should he studied in connection with sections 16, 17, page 4. 60. The Tenses named in this Note are those of the Indicative Mode. This Mode is the only one in which the Tenses properly distinguish time, 1. Present; as, amo, I love. 2. Imperfect ; as, amabam, I was loving. 3. Future; as, amabo, I shall love. 4. JPerfect ; as, amavi, / have loved, or / loved. 5. Pluperfect; as, amav ersirny I had loved. 6. Future Perfect ; as, amavero, I shall have loved. 61. A comparison of these Tenses and their meanings with the Table on page 4 will show that, — 1. The Present, Future, and Future Perfect have the same meaning as the English tenses called by the same names. 2. The Imperfect is like the Past Imperfect (or Progressive); that is, it denotes an action as going on (or customary) in past time ; as, laudabat, he was praising (he kept praising, he used to praise). It must be carefully distinguished from the Perfect. 3. The Perfect has two meanings, as different from each other as though they represented two distinct tense-forms, instead of one. These are : — a. The meaning of the English Present Perfect ; as, laudavi, / have praised. This is called the Perfect Definite (that is, I have just finished praising). h. The meaning of the English Past (Indefinite) ; as, laudavi, I praised. This is called the Perfect Indefinite * (that is, I praised at some indefinite time in the past). 4. The Pluperfect is like the English Past Perfect. Special NoTE.f 62. As the Perfect has two meanings, and is really equivalent to two tenses, it may be found less confusing to give a distinct name to each of these uses. We may, therefore, regar(! the Tenses as seven in number. The word Aorist means Indefinite, and therefore the tenses may be thus named : — 1. Present; 2. Imperfect; 3. Future; 4. Per/ec< (English, Present Per- * This is also called the Perfect Historical. t This Note is for the use of those who prefer the seven-tense system, and may be omitted by others. NOTES. 171 fed: I ham loved); 5. Aorist (English, Past: I loved); 6. Pluperfect; 7. Future Perfect. The Perfect is the same as the Perfect Definite, and the Aorist is the same as the Perfect Indefinite. Tenses of the different Modes. 6a a. The Indicative has all the tenses. As in English, it is the only Mode in which the tenses actually distinguish time. b. The Subjunctive lacks the Future and the Future Perfect. How it supplies this lack will be explained hereafter. The real time de- noted by the tenses of the Subjunctive must often be decided, as in English (19, page 6), by the sense. c. The Imperative has two tenses : Present and Future. The Present, as in English, has only the Second Person. The Future has the Second and Third Persons ; it is seldom used. d. The Infinitive has three tenses ; Present, Perfect, and Future. The Future Infinitive, Active, is made up of the Future Active Participle and esse (Present Infinitive of sum). The Future Infinitive, Passive, is described later. e. The tenses of the Participles have already been given (58). Personal Endings. 64. In English, the verb-form love may be in the Present Indicative} First or Second Person Singular, or in the First, Second, or Third Person Plural ; a Personal Pronoun, as subject, must be expressed, or other words given, before we can tell in what person the verb-form is. In a Latin tense, however, each of the six forms shows its person by its ending, and the Personal Pronouns may be, and usually are, omitted. These endings are therefore called Personal Endings (54, 2). Only the Indicative, Sub- junctive, and Imperative have Personal Endings. The endings of the Perfect Indicative (Active) and the Imperative are peculiar, and are given separately. The following table shows the Personal Endings : — a. Personal Endings : Indicative and Subjunctive, Active. Passive. Subject. (1. m (or 5) (1. r /. Singular. < 2.S Singular. <^ 2. ris (or re) you. U. t (3. tur he, she, it. (1. mus fl. mur we. Plural. - < 2. tis Plural. <^ 2. mini you. V3. nt (3. ntur they. 172 NOTES. ;i. i. Singular. < 2. isti. b. Perfect Indicative , Active* 1. imus. 2. istis. Plural. J. it. 3. erunt (or ere). c. Imperative, Active. Passive. Present, Present. Sing. 2. same as Pres. Stem. Sing. 2. re (like the Pres. Inf. Act. ). Plur. 2. te. Plur. 2. mini. Future. Sing. 2. to. 3. to. Plur. 2. t5te. 8. nto. Future. Sing. 2. tor. 3. tor. Plur. 2. wanting. 3. ntor. Conjugations. 65. Latin Verbs are divided into four Conjugations (54). They are distinguished by the vowel before re in- the Present Infinitive Active. That part of the Present Infinitive which is left after taking away re is called the Present Stem. This Present Stem is here shown for the four Conjugations : — Conjugation. Present Infinitive. Present Stem. 1. amare. ama. II. monere. mone. III. reggre. regg.* . IV. audire. audi. Principal Farts. 66. The Principal Parts of a verb are so called because from them all the other forms of the verb are made up. They are four in number. The Koman figures indicate the Conjugations : — Present Indicative. Present Infinitive. Perfect Indicative. Supine. I. II. amo. moneS. amare. monere. amavi. monui. amatum. monitum. III. IV. rego. audio, reggre. audire. rexi. audivi. rectum. auditum. * The Verb-Stem of the Third Conjugation is usually not the same as the Present Stem. It is described in 79, 2, and a. NOTES. 173 Remark. As the Passive has no Supine, it has but three Principal Parts ; as, Present Indicative, amor ; Present Infinitive^ amari ; Perfect Indicative, amatus sum. Steins. 67. A Verb has three Stems : Present, Perfect, and Supine. The Present Stem has been described in 65. To find the Perfect Stem, cut off i from the Perfect Indicative. To find the Supine Stem, cut off um from the Supine. The Stems of the verbs given in 66 are ; — Peesent Stem. Pekfect Stem. Supine Stem. I. ama- amav- amat- II. mone- monu- monit- III. reg€- rex- rect- lY. audi- audiv- audit- Formation of Tenses: Indicative Active. 68. a. The Present has no Tense Sign. It = Present Stem + Personal Endings. In the First and Third Conjugations, the stem -vowel is lost be- fore o (as, amo = ama5). In the Third, there are vowel changes. In the Fourth, the Third Person Plural is audiunt (not audi-nt). h. The Imperfect always has the Tense Sign ba. The vowel e (before ba) is always long. c. The Future of the First and Second Conjugations always has the Tense Sign bi. The i disappears before o [as, amab(i)o, mo- neb(i)6], and becomes u in the Third Person Plural. The Future of the Third Conjugation consists of the Present Stem + Personal Endings. E becomes a in the First Person Singular. Verbs in io retain the i (like those of the Fourth Conjugation), The Future of the Fourth Conjugation consists of> the Present Stem -I- am, es, etc. It is inflected like that of the Third Conjugation. d. The Perfect = Perfect Stem -f Personal Endings of the Perfect, for all Conjugations. e. The Pluperfect always has the Tense Sign gra. /. The Future Perfect always has the Tense Sign €ri. The i disappears before o [as, monu€r(i)6, amav6r(i)o]. Formation of Tenses: Subjunctive Active* 69. a. The Present consists, in the First Person Singular of the (1. ) First Conjugation, of the Present Stem + m; a is changed to e, (2.) Second Conjugation^ of the Present Stem + am. 174 « NOTES. (3.) Third Oonjugation, of the Present Stem + m; e changed to a. (4.) Fourth Conjugation^ of the Present Stem + am, h. The Imperfect always has the Tense Sign re. It may be obtained by adding m to the Present Infinitive Active. c. The Perfect always has the Tense Sign 6ri. d. The Pluperfect always has the Tense Sign isse. Formation of Tenses: Imperative Active* 70. The Present, Second Person Singular = Present Stem. As the forms of the Imperatives of the four Conjugations differ somewhat from each other, and are apt to confuse a beginner, this simple Kule will be found useful : All the forms of the Imperative Active (except the Present ^ Second Singular) can he obtained from the Present Indicative (Second and Third PersoQis) by changing the Personal Endi7igs to those of the Imperative, Formation of Tenses: Infinitive Active* 71. a. Present — Present Stem + re. h. Perfect = Perfect Stem + isse. c. Future — Future Participle + esse (Present Infinitive of sum). Formation of Participles, Gerund, and Supine. 72. a. Present Participle = Present Stem + ns or ens ; as, ama-ns, rege-ns, audi- ens. b. Future Participle = Supine Stem -+- urus ; as, amat-urus. c. Gerund = Present Stem 4- ndi or endi ; as, ama-ndi, audi-endi. d. Supine = Supine Stem 4- urn ; as, monit-um. Formation of Tenses: Indicative Passive. 73. a. The Present is formed as in 68, «, but with Passive endings. Notice, however, that in the Third Conjugation, the Second Person Singu- lar has 6 and not i ; as, reggris (Active, regis). d. The Imperfect has the regular Tense Sign and Passive endings. c. The Future of the First and Second Conjugations has the Kegular Tense Sign ; but notice that the Second Person Singular has bS (not bl); as, amabgris, monebgris. The Future of the Third and Fourth Conjugations has the same general form as the Future Active, with Passive endings ; as, regeris, audieris. d. The Perfect Stem is not used in the Passive Voice. The Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect, Passive, are compound, consisting of the Perfect Passive Participle with sum, eram, ero. NOTES. 175 Formation of Tenses: Subjunctive Passive* 74k a. The Present and Imperfect are formed as the same tenses are in the Active, but with Passive endings. h. The Perfect and Pluperfect are compound, and consist of the Perfect Passive Participle with sim and essem. Formation of Tenses: Iniperative Passive* 75. Notice : — a. That the Second Person Singular, Present, is the same in form as the Present Infinitive Active. b. That there is no Second Person Plural in the Future. c. That the other forms can be obtained from the Present Indicative Passive according to 70. Formation of Tenses: Infinitive Passive* 76. a. In the First, Second, and Fourth Conjugations the Present is formed by changing final e of the Present Infinitive Active to i. In the Third it is formed from the Present Stem by changing S to i ; as, amari, but regi. b. The Perfect = Perfect Passive Participle + esse. c. The Future = Supine (Accusative) + iri. The word iri is the Present Infinitive Passive of e5 (I go), and amatum iri has the idea of going to be loved. This tense of the Infinitive is a peculiar form and one seldom used. What takes its place will be explained hereafter. Formation of Passive Participles* 77. a. The Perfect = Supine Stem + us ; as, amat-us. b. The Gerundive (or Future Participle) = Present Stem + ndus or endus ; as, ama-ndus, audi-endus. Synopsis* 78. A Synopsis is a general outline of a Verb. The following Synopsis of amo, / love, shows from what Stem each form is made. In the Synop- sis of any other Conjugation the same Modes, Tenses, etc., would be formed from the same Stems. The only differences would be those peculiar to each Conjugation, and described in 68-77, 176 NOTES. ACTIVE. Stem. Present, ama- Perfect, amav- Supine, amat- Indicative. Present, amo Imperfect, amabam Future, amabo Perfect, amavi Plu^ perfect,^^^''^^^^ Future - ^- Perfect, amavero Subjunctive. Present, amem Imperfect, amarem Perfect, amaverim T*1ii perfect,^^^^^^^^^ Imperative. Present, ama Future, amato Infinitive. Present, amare Perfect, amavisse Future, ^^^f ^Jf^^ 6SS6 Participles. Present, amans Future, amaturus Gerund. Genitive, amandi Dative, etc. amando, etc. Supine. Accusative, amatum Ablative, amatu PASSIVE. Stem. Present, ama- Supine, amat- Indicative. Present, amor Imperfect, amabar Future, amabor Perfect, «-aU.s cram Subjunctive. Present, amer Imperfect, amarer Perfect, B.ma.tus sim Pluperfect^^^^^^ Imperative. Present, amare Future, amator Infinitive. Present, amari Perfect, amat"« Future, amatum iri Participles. Ger'dive, amandus Perfect, amatus Gerund. NOTES. 177 Some Peculiarities of the Four Conjueations. 79. Most verbs of the First and Fourth Conjugations have Principal Parts that are quite similar. The Perfect Stem is formed by adding v, and the Supine Stem by adding t, to the Present Stem ; but the Second and Third Conjugations, and some verbs of the First and Fourth, have peculiarities which should be carefully noticed. 1. Only a few verbs of the Second Conjugation form their Perfect and Supine Stem by adding v and t to the Present Stem. Deleo, / destroy ; fleo, I weep ; and the compounds of pleo, I fill (as, compleo), are those in common use ; as, compleo, complere, complevi, completum. Most verbs of the Second Conjugation form the Perfect by changing v to u (3, p. 17), and the e of the stem disappears ; as, monui (for moneui = monevi). They form the Supine by changing long e of the stem to short i; as, monltum (for monetum). 2. The Third Conjugation (like the Third Declension) has the greatest variety of forms of all the Conjugations. These differences occur in the Perfect and Supine, and can be best learned by practice. In other Conju- gations the Present Stem (sometimes slightly changed) is usually found in all the Principal Parts ; but, in the Third Conjugation, the final S of the Present Stem rarely appears, in any form, in the Perfect and Supine Stems. Rege-, therefore, is called the Present Stem of rego, but reg- is the Verb- Stem, a. The Third Conjugation is like the Third Declension in another re- spect : in many verbs s is added to the Verb-Stem to form the Perfect Stem (as, reg + s = Perfect Stem rex), just as s is added to the Stem to form the 'N'ominative Singular; as, reg + s = rex, a Icing. Likewise misi (Perfect of mitto) = mitt-si. 3. Verhs of tJie Third in io. Some verbs of the Third Conjuga- tion end in i5, and have some forms, in the Present-Stem Tenses, like those of the Fourth Conjugation. They are called Verhs in io. Capio, / taJce^ is one of this class. Notice this simple Rule for remembering its irregularities : Verhs in i5 have the forms of the Fourth Conjugation wher- ever the Fourth has {followed hy a vowel. Hence we have capio (audi5) ; capiebam (audiebam) ; capiens (audiens) ; but capere (audire). 4. V is often dropped in the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect ; as, audieram (= audiveram) ; iit (= ivit). Sometimes a contraction takes place ; as, amasse (= amavisse) ; consuesse (= consuevisse). 5. Dico, duco, f acio, fero (but see 88, Remark), drop final e in the Imperative Present, Second Singular, making die, diic, fac, fer. 6. The Perfect Stem of some verbs doubles the first two (sometimes three) letters of the Present Stem, often with vowel changes. This is 178 NOTES. called Reduplication (that is, redoubling) ; as, curro (Perfect, cucurri) ; do (Perfect, dedi) ; sto (steti) ; pello (pepuli) ; cado (cecidi) ; caedo (cecidi); disco (didici) ; posco (poposci). Kemark. In compounds, the reduplication is dropped; as, repellS, repuli; incldo (= in + cad5), incidi; incido (= in + caedo), incidi. But compounds of d5 and sto ahvays, and those of curro and some others often^ retain it; as, addo (addidi); insto (institi); decurro (decucurri). 7. Many verbs of the Third Conjugation do not add s to form the Per- fect Stem. The following verbs, in common use, should be noticed : — a. Lego (Perfect, legi), I choose ^ read. Three compounds of lego, however, have x in the Perfect : diligo (not deligo), intelligo, neglig5. h. Verto (Perfect, verti), I turn. c. Verbs having nd before final o; as, scandS (scandi) ; incendo (incendi) ; contend© (contend!). 8. Section 4, d (p. 18), will be found useful, as explaining many of the consonant changes taking place in the Third Conjugation ; as, reg-o, rec- tum; scrib-6, scriptum. Deponent Verbs. 80. Deponent Verbs have a Passive form but an Active meaning. The name [Deponent] means putting off, or aside, because they lay aside (depSnunt) the Passive sense. They occur in all four Conjugations, and are inflected like the Passive of other verbs of these Conjugations. Of course, the Present Imperative, Second Singular, has the same form as the Present Infinitive Active would have. Caution. Notice that, in Deponent Verbs, — a. The Future Infinitive is taken from the Actii^e Voice / as, hor- taturus esse (not hortatum iri). h. The forms of both voices are found after the Infinitive Mode ; that is, a Deponent Verb has all four ParticipleSy the Gerund^ and the Supine. Remarks. 1. Deponents are the only Latin verbs that have a Perfect Participle with an Active meaning. 2. The Gerundive is regularly Passive in meaning ; as, milites cohortandi sunt, the soldiers must he exhorted. 3. The Perfect Participle is sometimes Passive in meaning. Semi- Deponent Verbs. 81. Four verbs have no Perfect Stem, and are half Active and half Passive in form. They form the Present -Stem tenses, etc., regularly, NOTES. 179 according to their Conjugations. All other forms they "borrow from the Passive ; hence they are called Semi-Deponent (half -deponent) . Their meaning is Active. The list is : audeo, audere, ausus sum, / dare; gaude5, gaudere, gavisus sum, I rejoice; soleo, solere, solitus sum, I am accustomed ; fido, fidere, fisus sum, I trust. Periplirastic Conjugations. 82. The word Periphrastic is derived from two Greek words, and means roundabout speaking. The English word circumlocution (circum, around, and loquor, / speak) means the same thing. The Future Infinitives, Active and Passive, are examples of roundabout speaking. Amaturus esse means, literally, to be about to love; amatum iri has the general idea of the English going to be loved. Other forms might be mentioned, which, like the English / am going to go, state something in a roundabout way. In Latin there are two Conjugations (compound in their forms), which, from the frequency of their use, are called the Periphrastic Conju- gations. They are thus formed : — a. The First, or Activef Periphrastic Conjugation consists of the Indicative, Subjunctive, and the Present and Perfect Infinitive of sum, with the Future Active Participle. It expresses intention, or that something is going to happen ; as, amatiirus sum, / am about to love, intend to love, am going to love. Remark. The Subjunctive has no Future Tense. The Present is sometimes used with a Future meaning ; but when Future time is to be accurately stated, and distinguished from Present time, the form sim with the Future Active Participle must be used. Amaturus sim may, there- fore, be called the Future Subjunctive of amo ; as, dubium est utrum filium amaturus sit, necne, it is doubtful whether he will love his son, or not (utrum amet = whether he loves). b. The Second, or Passive, Periphrastic Conjugation has the same Mode and Tense forms as the_ First ; but the Gerundive is used. It expresses necessity, duty, etc. ; as, amandus sum, / ought to be loved, must be loved ; amandus fui, / was (worthy) to be loved, ought to have been loved. Irregular Verbs. 83. Each Conjugation forms its Principal Parts according to its own laws. Many verbs in these Conjugations, however, do not strictly obey these laws. For example, pet5 and quaerS belong to the Third Conjuga- tion ; yet they have petivi, quaes! vi, in the Perfect (more like the Fourth than the Third Conjugation). We do not, however, call such verbs 180 NOTES. IrregulaVy because their stems and inflection are, in gentral^ like those of their own conjugation. We call those verbs Irregular, which have two or three stems entirely unlike each other (like English am, was, been ; goy went, gone), or which have some forms of inflection not to be found in the four Conjugations. In studying an Irregular Verb, always notice how much of it is regular, as well as what are the irregular forms. The most common Irregular Verbs are sum, fero, e5, fio (and their com- pounds), vols, nolo, malo. 84. Sum, / am, has these stems : Present, es ; Perfect, fu ; Supine, fut (found only in the Future Participle). Its chief peculiarities are : — a. In the Present Indicative, sum, sumus, sunt, have lost the e (as though 'sum, etc.). The same is true in the Present Subjunctive ; as, sim (for esim). b. The stem es becomes er in the Imperfect and Future Indicative, according to 1 (2). c. The Supine, Gerund, and Present Participle are wanting. The Present Participle (used as an adjective) is found in three com- pounds : potens, absens, praesens. Therefore we may say that, if sum had a Present Participle, it would be ens. d. Instead of futurus esse we often find fore, and instead of essem, forem is sometimes used. 85. Two Compounds of sum have peculiar forms : — 1. Possum, I am able, I can, is made up of the adjective potis, able, and sum, I am. Only the first syllable of potis (pot) is employed, so that the verb is really potsum (1 (4) b). The same change occurs wher- ever pot would stand before s ; as, possunt, possim (for potsunt, potsim). Potesse is shortened to posse (hence the Imperfect Subjunc- tive is possem), and f is dropped from fui, etc. (potui, potuisse, etc., for potfui, potfuisse). It has a Present Participle (used only as an adjective); but no Im- perative, Future Participle, Gerund, or Supine. 2. Prosum, 1 am helpful, I assist, takes d before e ; as, prodesse, prSdest, proderam, etc. The form prod is used to separate the vowels, just as re, back, and eo, / go, form the compound redeo, / go back (like the English an, not a, before words beginning with a vowel). 86. Fer5, I bear, has three stems, very unlike each other : Present, fere (sometimes fer); Perfect, tul ; Supine, lat. The tenses formed from the Present Stem are exattly like those of the Third Conjugation with these exceptions : — a. The vowel e (or i) is lost : (1) in certain forms of the Present In- dicative, Active and Passive ; (2) in the Imperfect Subjunctive, NOTES. 181 Active and Passive ; (3) in the Imperative (certain forms), Active and Passive ; (4) in the Infinitive, Active and Passive. The Present Infinitive Passive (ferri) is the most irregular of all the forms. If like the Third Conjugation, it would be feri (like regi); but it has rr, as though it had been shortened from fer^ri. 87. E6, / go^ has the stems i, iv, it ; hence it resembles a verb of the Fourth Conjugation. It has these irregularities : — a. The vowel i, unlike the Fourth Conjugation, is short in the Supine stem ; as, itUrus. h. The Present stem is changed to e before a, o, u ; as, eo, eunt, earn. c. The Future Indicative is ibo, a mixture of the First (or Second) and Fourth Conjugations. d. The Present Participle has euntis, etc., in the Genitive and other cases, instead of ientis (as, audientis). The Gerund is eundi (not iendi, as in audiendi). Remark. Although e5 is Intransitive, yet some of its compounds (with Prepositions) are Transitive, and are followed by the Accusative ; as, adeo, I approach; transeo, I cross ; subeo, I undergo. 88. Fio, / am made, I become, is used as the Passive of facio, and also, as its second meaning indicates, as an Intransitive verb, in the sense of become, happen (that is, to be brought about). Some of its tenses evidently are the Passive of faciS. Its peculiarities are : — a. The Present Infinitive is fieri. b. The Imperfect Subjunctive is formed as though the Present Infini- tive were fiere. c. Tenses formed from the Present stem have Active endings, but (fre- quently) Passive meanings, Kemark. Compounds of facio with prepositions are regular in both Voices, with vowel changes (2) ; as, conficior, confici, confectus sum. Other compounds do not change the vowel a to i, and have fio in the Passive; as, patefaciS, / open (Passive, patefio, patefieri, patefactus sum). Therefore this simple rule may be foUowed ; Facio always has fio in the Passive ; but ficio is regular. Examples : Imperatives, fac, per- fice, patefi, conficere ; Infinitives, facere, patefieri, conficere, perfici. 89. Vols, / am willing, wish, resembles, in some respects, the Third Conjugation (as in the Future Indicative). It has these peculiarities : — a. The Present Infinitive loould be volere, if of the Third Conjugation. The o is changed to e (= velere); then, as in ferere, the second e is dropped (= velre); then the r is assimilated (made like) to the 1 {— velle). This same e is also seen in the Present and Imper- fect Subjunctive (velim, vellem). 182 NOTES. h. The Present Indicative would have volis, volit, volimus, volitis. Volis is shortened to vis; volit to vult (= volt); volitis to vultis (= voltis). Volimus becomes volumus (like sumus). c. Velim (Present Subjunctive) = volam. d. Lack of forms, as shown in the Grammars and Appendix. 90. Vols has two compounds : nolo, I am unwilling, and malo, / would rather, I prefer. N515 = non vol5 ; malo = magis volo (as though it were mavolo). Their similarity to volo will be seen in their conjugation. Remark. Notice that n5l6 is the only one of the " volo class" that has an Imperative. Notice, also, that this Imperative is a mixture of the Fourth and Third Conjugations. Defective Verbs. 91. Defective Verbs are such as lack many tenses, or parts of tenses. The most important Defective verbs are these three, which have no tenses formed from the Present stem : — 1. Coepi, / began. The verb incipiS, / begiii (in + capio), supplies the place of the Present ; as, incipiunt credere, they begin to believe. When coepi is followed by a Passive Infinitive, it is expressed in a Passive form ; as, urbem aedificare coeperunt, they began to build the city ; but urbs aedificari coepta est. 2. Memini, / remember, and odi, / hate. These verbs have, in the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect, the meaning of the Present, Im- perfect, and Future. From the fact that they employ the tenses of com- pleted action to express the meaning of the tenses of incomplete action, they are often called Preteritive (praeter + ire, to pass by); that is, they have only the tenses of completed action. Memini has these Imperative forms: memento, mementote (Future). E EM ARK. The Perfect of nosco, / begin (or learn) to know, and also that of consuesco, / become accustomed, have the same peculiarity, and mean, / know (that is, I have finished beginning, and now know)', I am accustomed (that is, have become accustomed). See 98, d. a. Inquam, say I, quoth I, has only one complete tense, the Present Indicative. It is used in direct qiwtations only, and never stands first ; as, " Venite,'* inquit, "in castra." b. These have Imperative forms only : salve ! ave ! hail ! Impersonal Verbs. 92. Study section 26, page 8. In Latin, as in English, an Impersonal Verb is one having no personal subject, and is used only in the Third NOTES. 183 Person Singular ; but these verbs are more numerous in Latin than in English, forming a class of words very important and very frequently used. With such verbs we often, in English, use it as a subject ; as, it rains. We hardly know what part of speech to call it. . In Latin no such word was expressed ; as, pluit, it rains. Caution. It must be clearly understood, at the very first, that every Latin verb has a subject ; and that, if the subject is not expressed^ it is to be understood. The subject of an Impersonal Verb is its general idea (that is, its stem). Pluit means rain is falling ; tonat, thunder crashes^ roars, etc. There are a few Impersonal Verbs in Latin that we cannot translate into English, giving the full value to the stem as subject, since the same thought is differently expressed in the two languages. For instance, me oportet really means necessity compels me ; but the English would be / 7nust, and therefore we must so render it. Ahnost all Im- personal Verbs, however, can and should be rendered with the stem (or thought) as subject ; as, pugnatur, fighting (or, the fight) is carried on (not they fight, or it is fought). 93. Impersonal Verbs, in Latin, are of two kinds : (1) Those whose regular use is Impersonal ; (2) Those often used Impersonally. 1. Verbs regularly Impersonal. These are : — a. Verbs denoting states of the weather, etc. (as in English); as, pluit, it rains ; ningit, it siiows ; grandinat, it hails ; tonat, it thunders; Idcescit, it grows light ; vesperascit, it 's getting dark, or draw- ing towards evening. The real subjects of these verbs (their stems) might be thus expressed : rain, s7iow, or hail, is falling; thunder sounds, crashes, etc.; light (lux) begins to appear, or break; evening (vesper) draws near. b. Verbs denoting mental state. These must be rendered according to the English use of such words ; as, me pudet, / am ashamed (literally, a feeling of shame possesses me). The most common of these verbs are given here, with the Accusative Case, which is regularly used with them as object, though, in translating, the English requires the Accusative to be rendered as though it were the subject: me miseret, T pity ; vos poenitet, you are sorry for, you repent ; te pudet, you are ashamed. c. Verbs having a Phrase or Clause as subject (as in English). Many of these are also used with personal subjects. Some of them are : libet, it pleases ; licet, it is permitted (English, license) ; oportet, it is necessary; accidit, it happens; accedit, there is another (added) reason (usually translated, it is added); videtur, it seems best; restat, it remains; praestat, it is better. 184 NOTES. 2. Very many verbs may be used Impersonally. Some of them have been given above (c) ; as, accidit, acc5dit, videtur. A very large class of them is composed of Passive forms of Intransitive verbs. Intransitive verbs can he used in the Passive only Impersonally. A variety of such forms is given under 198. A few of those most commonly used are given here (notice that the stem of the verb is the subject) : pugnatur, pugnatum est, pugnandum est, fighting is, was, must be carried on ; nobis matii- randum est, haste must be made on our part (or, we must hurry) \ nocetur, harm is done, injury is inflicted : manetur, a stay (or stop) is made ; itur, a march is made, is in progress ; imperatum est, the order was given. ADVERBS. 94. Learn section 28, page 9. Adverbs have the same use in Latin as in English, and are divided 'nto the same classes. Latin Adverbs may be, — a. Derived from Adjectives or Participles (see 38); as, care, acriter, docte. The Comparative of an Adverb is regularly the same in form as the Neuter Accusative of the Adjective (Comparative). See, also, d, below. h. Derived from Nouns ; as, diii, noctu, partim. c. Simple ; as, saepe. d. Besides the forms mentioned in a, b, c, there are forms of adjectives and pronouns used as adverbs. They can usually be explained as cases. 1. The Accusative and Ablative, Neuter, are often used as adverbs. The Accusative usually denotes Degree or Extent (142, c), and the Ablative, Degree of Difference (155); as, pliirimum potest, he is very (or most) powerful (literally, he is powerful to a very great degree) ; hostium impe- tus paulum tardati sunt, the attacks of the enemy were checked a little (literally, to a slight extent); nuntii multo crebriores erant, tlie mes- sages were (by) a great deal more frequent. 2. The Feminine Ablative Singular is often used as an adverb (the noun being omitted); as, qua, una, ultra, inf(e)ra (parte or via), whither (by which way), together (by one way), beyond (on the farther side), below (on the under side). PREPOSITIOlSrS. 95. Prepositions, in Latin as in English, are connectives (see 29, page 9). When not used as connectives, they are adverbs* (as in English) ; * This is the original use. NOTES. 185 as, paulo post (or ante) venit, he came a little while after (or before). They are followed by the Accusative or Ablative. The Accusative is used with about thirty prepositions ; the Ablative with about one third as many. Those (in common use) which are always used with the Ablative are seven in number. They are given below in rhyme, that they may be more easily remembered : — a (or ab), dS; cum, ex (or e) ; sine, pr5, prae. a. Two of these have double forms : a and e are used only before words beginning with a consonant; ab and ex before those beginning with a vowel or consonant (somewhat like a and an in English) ; as, a (or ab) flumine, e silva ; but ab urbe, ab hoc oppido (see 4, h, page 17), ex agro. h. Notice that a (ab) means away fro'm ; e (ex), out of; as, a flii- mine,/rom the river ^ that is, from the river-hank ; but e flumine, out of the river. c. In and sub with the Accusative answer the question Whither ? with the Ablative, the question Where ? as, in oppidum venit, he came into the town; sub jugum missi sunt, they were sent under the yoke; but in horto ambulat, he is walking in the garden; sub monte castra ponit, lie pitches his camp at the foot of the moun- tain, COlSTJUISrCTIONS. 96. Conjunctions, in Latin as in English (see 30, page 9), are : — (1.) Co-ordinate ; as, et, and ; sed, hut. (2.) Suhordinate ; as, si, if; quod, hecause ; ut, that, so that ; ne, lest, that not ; quum, when, since, although. a. There are three words meaning and : — 1. Et, and, connects independent words, phrases, and clauses. 2. Que, and, always an Enclitic (195, 3), connects words, etc. that naturally form a pair of objects or thought?, or convey one general idea ; as the names of two men in partnership, a general and his army, the senate and the people. Que is joined to the second of the two words con- nected. If it connects clauses, it is joined to the first word of the second clause. 3. Atque (sometimes written ac) = ad + que, and hence means and in addition, and too, and also. It indicates that the second word, etc., is more important than the first ; as, milites atque imperator, the soldiers and the commander, too. It is often used after words denoting comparison, etc., meaning as or than ; as, aliter ac, otherwise than. 186 NOTES. b. Regularly, with several words, et was either used before all but the first, or was omitted entirely ; as, equi et arma et obsides, or equi, arma, obsides. INTERJECTIONS. 97. Interjections are used as in English (see 31, page 9). DERIVED AND COMPOUND WORDS. Endings. 98. Many derived words have endings that give them special meanings. A few of those most common are given in this Note. a. Nouns composed of the Supine stem of Verbs + or denote the male agent; as, amator, monitor, rector, auditor, inventor, victor. Some nouns, derived from other nounSy have the same ending tor, and denote the agent; as, viator, a traveller (from via). A change of tor to trix gives a noun denoting the female agent ; as, victrix, inventrix. b. Nouns and Adjectives ending in ulus (a, um) denote smalhiess, and are called Diminutives; as, rivus, a stream, rivulus, a rivulet, or streamlet ; parvus, small, parvulus, very small ; ado- lescens, a youth, adolescentulus, a mere youth. c. Adjectives ending in osus denote fulness ; as, studiosus, zeal- ous, studious {full of study) ; bellicosus, warlike ( filled with the desire of war). d. Verbs ending in sco denote the beginning of an act ; as, nosco, / begin to know, or learn ; cognosc5, I find out ; lucescit, day begins to break. They are called Inceptives (from incipio, I begin), and are of the Third Conjugation. See 91, 2, Remark. The noun adolescens, a youth, is really the Present Participle of adolesco, / groio up, and means one who is getting his full growth. e. Derivative Verbs ending in to or ito denote repeated or vigorous action; as, jacto (from jacio), / hurl, keep throwing ; clamit5 (from clamo), I keep shouting; ventito (from venio), I keep toming ; also, verbs formed from Supine stems ; as, versor (trom vert5), I keep tur^iing, busy myself, am engaged in. These verbs are called Frequentatives, and are of the First Conjugation. Compound Words : Prefixes. 99. 1. Many Latin Prepositions^ when used as the first part of Compound Verbs, have the force of adverbs, and give a special meaning to the compounds. Some of these meanings are evident, and need no ex- planation. The following have some special force : — NOTES. 187 §, ab, away, off ; as, abiit, he lias gone away ; quinque milia (or milibus) passuum abest, he is five miles off, com, con (adverbial forms of cum), together, thoroughly, earnestly ; as, conveniunt, they assemble ; conferunt, they collect ; conjungere, to join together; conficio, I complete ; cohortor, I exhort earnestly; collaudat, he praises highly. de, down, away ; as, demisso capita, with downcast head {look)-, dejectus, downcast (discouraged); deduce, I withdraw, lead away. in, on, against ; as, Gallis bellum inferS, / rmke war on the Gauls. ob, towards, to meet ; as, occurro, / run to meet. per, through, thoroughly (through and through)-, as, epistolam perlegi, I've read the letter through ; perterritus, thoroughly frightened. 2. The following prefixes (never written alone) give a special meaning and force to Verbs : — dis (or di), apart, here and there, away ; as, discedo, / go away ; milites disponit, he places soldiers here and there ; ventus ignem dis- tulit, the wind spread the fire in every direction. in (English, in or un) gives a negative force ; as, innocentia, blame- lessness, uprightness (literally, a not doing harm)', imperitus, unskilled; integer (in + tango, I touch), whole, unwearied. re (red), hack, behind ; as, reduce, / lead hack ; me recipio (re + capio), / retreat, betake myself ; equites reliquit, he left the cavalry behind. se; apart, away ; as, secedo, I go away ; sejungo, I disjoin, separate. 188 NOTES. I^OTES 01^ STJ^TAX. THE SENTENCE. ICX). Sentences, in Latin as in English, are : — Declaratory ; as, vir fortis est, tJie man is brave. Interrogative ; as, quis aeger est ? who is sick ? Imperative ; as, fortes este, be brave ; veniant, let them come. Exclamatory ; as, quam sapiens fuit ! how wise he was I Interrogative Sentences. 101. Questions, in English or Latin, may be single or double. Is the man brave ? Did n't he call ? are single questions. Is the man brave, or cowardly ? Did he praise, or blame ? Did you calif or not ? are double questions. In Latin, every question requires an interrogative word. This word may be an Interrogative Pronoun or Adverb ; as, quis es ? who are you ? unde (cur) venisti ? whe7ice (ivhy) have you come ? Most of these words have a meaning and use as in English. A few, however, need special mention : — a. In Single Questions, expecting the answer yes or no, we must use a word indicating what answer is expected. If an answer merely is expected (either yes or no), use -ne. This word is always an Enclitic (195, 3), and is joined to the first word in the sentence ; as, puerine venerunt ? have the boys come ? If yes is expected, use nonne ; as, nonne vir bonus est ? is he not a good man ? or, he is a good man, is n't he ? Notice that -ne is an Enclitic in nonne. If no is expected, use num ; as, num miles fortis mortem timet ? does a brave soldier fear death ? b. In Double Questions an interrogative word is used with each part of the question. The words most commonly used are utrum (or -ne, enclitic) in the first part, and an in the second. Utrum is really the Neuter of the Adjective uter (51, Caution), and means, which (thing) of these two is the fact ? It is not to be trans- lated into English. An means or. If the second part is merely NOTES. 189 or not^ use annon ; as, utrum pugnavit an fugit ? did he fight^ or flee ? utrum patriam amat, annon ? does he love his country, or not ? Remark. Yes and no, in answer to questions, have no equivalent (in single words) in common use. Such an answer should usually be ex- pressed by repeating the verb (with a negative adverb, if no is the answer) ; as, venitne ? has he come ? venit, yes (he has co7ne) ; suntne amici tui ? are they your friends ? non sunt, no (they are not). Subject and Predicate. 102. Every sentence must contain a Subject and a Predicate. a. The Subject of a Finite^erb must be in the Nominative Case. It answers the question Who? or What? and must be a noun or some word or collection of words used as a noun (see 36, page 10); as, benefacere rei publicae pulchrum est, to contribute to the welfare of (literally, to do good to) the state is honorable (Subject, benefacere rei publicae). The Subject, if a Personal Pronoun, is very frequently omitted, as the Personal Ending of the verb shows what it is ; therefore, a sentence may consist of but one word ; as, vocatis, you are calling. b. The Predicate may consist of a verb alone, or with modifiers ; as, agricola vocat, the farmer calls; miles pugnat, the soldier fights ; agricola puellam vocat, the farmer calls the girl ; miles fortiter pugnat, the soldier fights bravely. Remark. The Direct Object of a Transitive Verb is in the Accusative Case ; as, puellam in the sentence above. Copula and Complement. 103. Review 37, a, page 10. The verb sum, / aw, is the Copula in Latin. A noun or adjective, in the same case as the subject, is the Com- plement. The Copula and the Complement form the Predicate ; as, puer bonus est, the boy is good ; Brutus mens amicus fuit. a. Review 37, b, c, page 10. In Latin, as in English, there are other Copulative Verbs besides sum ; as, fio, I am made, become ; videor, / seem, appear ; and the Passive of verbs signifying to choose, to call, to think, etc.; as, imperator creor (appellor, habeor), / am elected (called, considered) general. Modifiers. 104. Review 38, page 11. As in English, a Subject or a Predicate may be modified by a 190 NOTES. Word; as, milites fortes urbem expugnSverunt, brave soldiers stormed the city. Phrase; as, exercitus sub jugum missus est, the army was sent under the yoke. Clause; as, oppidum, quod hostes ceperunt, magnum fuit, the towUf which the enemy took, was large. Sentences Classified. 105. Review 40, page 11. Sentences, in Latin as in English, are : — Simple ; as, magister puero librum dat, the teacher gives a hook to the hoy. Compound; as, veni, vidi, vici, I came, ^ I saw, I conquered. Complex; as, puerum laudat, ut a puero laudetur, he praises the hoy that he may he praised hy the hoy. Apposition. 106. A noun used to describe or explain another Noun, or Pronoun, and meaning the same person or thing, is put (by Apposition) in the same case (46, page 13) ; as, Labienus legatus ad urbem Romam venit, Lahienus, the lieutenant, came to the city (of) Rome. Notice that Eome is not in the Genitive, as it denotes the same thing as city. a. If the Appositive describes two or more nouns, it must be in the Phiral ; as, per Marcum Silanum et Titum Sextium legates delectum habuit, he held a levy (of troops) through (using as agents) Marcus Sildnus and Titus Sextius, his lieutenants. Predicate Nominative. 107. A Noun used to complete the Predicate, with esse, or any other Copulative Verb (103), agrees with the Subject in case, and is called the Predicate Nominative (46, a, page 13) ; as, Cicero vir fortissimus fuit, Cicero was a very hrave man. Remark. This same principle applies to a Predicate Adjective (108, 1). ADJECTIVES. 108. An Adjective or Participle (that is, a Verhal Adjective) agreos with its Noun, or Pronoun, in gender, number, and case ; as, c5piae bonae, good troops ; viri fortissimi, very hrave men. Remark. This, of course, applies to all Pronouns having three gender- forms (Possessive, Demonstrative, etc.). NOTES. 191 1. An Adjective may be Attributive or Predicate. An Attributive Adjective modifies its noun directly ; that is, it is not connected with it by esse, or some other verb ; as, vir fortis bonus civis est, a brave man is a good citizen. A Predicate Adjective is one which helps to form the Predicate, and is connected with its noun by esse, or some other Copulative Verb. 2. An Attributive Adjective, modifying more than one noun, usually agrees with the nearest and is to be understood with the rest : or it is sometimes repeated ; as, omnes agri et maria ; or, agri omnes omnia- que maria, all lands and seas. 3. A Predicate Adjective agrees with the Subject in gender, number, and case ; as, puer studiosus est, the boy is studious. 4. A Predicate Adjective, agreeing with two or more nouns, must be in the Plural ; as, nauta et miles fortes erunt, the sailor and the soldier will be brave. 5. If the subjects are of different genders, a Predicate Adjective will be a. Masculine Plural, if the subjects denote living beings j as, pater et mater mortui sunt, my father and mother are dead. b. Neuter Plural, if the subjects denote things without life ; as, amor et amicitia simillima sunt, love and friendship are (things) very much alike. AdjectiTes used as Nouns. 109. Adjectives may be used as Nouns : the Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter denoting men, women, and things. This is more common in the Plural than in the Singular ; as, Romani, the Romans ; omnia, all things {or property); nostri, our men (or soldiers) ; finitimi, the neighbors ; novis- simi, the rearmost {soldiers); hibema (castra), winter -quarters ; bona, goods. a. Sometimes Adjectives are so used in the Singular ; as, patria (terra), native land, fatherland ; fera (bestia), a wild beast. b. The Neuter Singular of an Adjective very often agrees with an In- finitive or Clause used as a Substantive (see 36, Remark, page 10) ; as, dulce et decorum est pr5 patria mori, to die for one's country is (a) delightful and honorable {thing or service). c. Sometimes the Neuter Plural is used as a Noun, when the general sense must decide its translation ; as, bona, goods; praeterita, past events (English, bygones); haec respondit, he made this reply. Special Uses of Adjectives. 110. a. An Adjective is sometimes used where, in English, we should use an Adverb, an Infinitive, or a Relative Clause. The Adjective usually 192 NOTES. "describes the condition of the actor, rather than the manner of the action;" as, primus venit, ^e came first {was the first to ccmie, was the first who came); invitus (laetus, libens) veni, / came unwillingly (joy- fully, gladly). h. Often, in Latin, an Adjective is used, agreeing with a Noun, where the English idiom would require a Noun followed by a Genitive ; as, summus mons, the top of the mountain; medio in coUe, on the middle of the hill [half-way up the hill); extrema hieme, in the last part of winter ; prima aestate (or inita aestate), in the early part (or beginning) of summer ; reliqui Belgae, the rest of the Belgae. c. Adjectives, agreeing with Nouns, are often employed in Latin, where the English idiom requires a possessive form, or a phrase; as, do- mus aliQna.fa7iother person's house; bellum servile j the war with the slaves; bellum Veneticum, the war with the Veneti. d. When two Adjectives agree with one Noun, they are regularly con- nected by a Conjunction ; as, viri multi et boni, many good men (literally, m,en many andj good). Remark. This rule does not apply to Numerals or Adjective Pro- nouns ; as, decern (or illi) viri boni. PRONOUNS. Personal. 111. Personal Pronouns (as Subjects) are omitted, unless required for emphasis ; as, veni, vidi, vici, / came, I saw, I conquered ; ego te lau- davi, tu me culpavisti, / have praised you, (but) you have hlayned me. a. The speaker or writer often uses the First Person Plural, when he does not wish to make himself prominent in what he is saying (that is, he avoids egotism). Authors and editors often do the same in English; this use of the Subject is often called "the editor's we;'' as, Labienus, quern supra diximus, Lahienus, whom we (= /) have mentioned above. KeflexiTe. 112. The Reflexive Pronouns refer to the Subject of the sentence. The use of the Reflexives of the First and Second Persons (mei, tui) can be easily understood, but special care must be taken in the use of the Reflex- ive of the Third Person (sui), and of the Possessive Pronoun (suus), which is the Adjective form of sui (47, 48). NOTES. 193 a. In a Subordinate Clause, sui and suus may refer either to the sub- ject of their own clause, or to that of the principal clause ; as, Sabinus postulavit ut hostes se suaque omnia dederent, Sahiiius deTYianded that the enemy should surrender theynselves and all their property ; Ariovistus imperat ut obsides ad castra sua reducantur et sibi reddantur, Ariovistus gives orders that the hostag£S shall he brought hack to his camp and restored to him. h. Inter se means to each other j from each other, each other, mutually ; as, obsides inter se dederunt, they gave hostages to each other (that is, exchanged hostages); inter se cohortati sunt, they en- couraged each other {gave mutual encouragement). Possessive. 113. The Possessive Pronouns are usually omitted, when they are not emphatic, and can be easily understood from the general meaning of tlie sentence; as, mater valet, my (your) mother is well. They follow the same law of agreement as Adjectives. On the proper use of suus and ejus (eorum, earum), see 48, Caution. a. The Possessives are often used as Nouns (109) ; as, nostri, our men ; su5s hortatus est, he encouraged his men. DemonstratiTO* 114. The Demonstrative Pronouns may be used : — 1. As Adjectives; as, ille miles, hie puer, vir ipse, ea nox, that soldier there, this hoy here, the man himself (or the very man), that night. . 2. As Personal Pronouns. In this use is is very common, so that it is often called the Third Personal Pronoun (46) ; as, is venit, he came; ea flebat, she was weeping ; Caesar id animadverterat, Caesar had 7ioticed it {that thing or fact). So also, ipse dixit, he {himself) has said so; illi se receperunt, they retreated. a. Ipse, self, gives emphasis to the word with which it agrees, and may be translated in several ways ; as, vir ipse, the very man (or the TYian himself)-, ipsi se interfecerunt, they killed themselves with their own hands. h. Ille sometimes means "the former" (that is, the more distant), and hie, the latter (that is, the nearer), of two persons or things de- scribed ; as, ille huic subvenit, the former comes to aid the latter (somewhat like alter — alter). c. Hie is often used like the English as follows ; as, haee est ratio oppugnationis, the style of attack is as follows ; haec respondit, he thus replied {repXiet these things, or words). 13 194 NOTES. Helative* 115. In Latin, as in English, a Relative Pronoun takes the Gender, Number, and Person, of its. Antecedent ; its Case depends on the form of its own clause ; as, urbs, quam vides, Roma est, the city, which you see, is Roine ; ego, qui te laudavi, rex sum ; milites, a quibus urbs capta est, fortes sunt. a. The Antecedent is often omitted ; as, (eos) qui iter cognoscerent misit, he sent men to investigate the route ; quod jussi sunt, (id) faciunt, they do what they have been ordered {to do). h. Quod, id quod, or quae r5s, may be used to refer to a clause, or idea, as Antecedent ; as, nostri redintegratis viribus, quod in spe victoriae saepe accidit, pugnare coeperunt, our men be- gan to fight with renewed strength, which (that is, the renewal of strength) often happens in the hope of victory (when soldiers hope for victory), c. The Relative is often omitted in English ; it is never omitted in Latin. Its importance as a connective is shown by its use ; as, vir, quem vides, Caesar est, the man (whom) you see is Caesar. d. A Relative at the beginning of a sentence must often be translated as a Demonstrative ; as, quibus rebus cognitis, profectus est, having ascertained these facts, he started. e. In Latin, as in English, a Relative Adverb may take the place of a Relative Pronoun with a Preposition ; as, ad eum locum venit, ubi fuerant (or, unde profugerant), he came to the place, where they had been (or, whence they had fled). In this example, ubi = in quo ; unde = a quo. /. In English, as is often a Relative Pronoun, especially after sucli and same. In Latin, therefore, qui (after idem) should be translated as. Qualis and quantus (Relative Adjectives) should be translated as after talis, such, and tantus, such, so great (195, 8). Interrogative and Indefinite. 116. The general meaning and use of Interrogative and Indefinite Pro- nouns can be best learned from 51 and 52, and from the Vocabulary. VERBS. 117. A Finite Verb agrees with its Subject in Number and Person ; as, puellae vocant, the girls call; hostes superantur, the enemy are overcome ; beati estis, yo^i, are happy. NOTES. 195 Remark. As already stated (111), the Subject is generally omitted, if it is a Personal Pronoun. a. When a verb has two or more Singular subjects connected by a co- ordinate conjunction, it will be : — 1. Plural (as in English), if it agrees with them taken together ; as, virtus et vitium inter se contraria sunt, virtue and vice are contrary to each other. 2. Singular (as in English), if it agrees with them separately ; as, neque puer neque puella audit, neither the hoy nor the girl hears ; vel homo vel filius ejus hoc fecit, either the man or his son has done this. b. With two or more subjects the verb often agrees with the nearest, and is understood with * the others ; as, castra et imperator magno in periculo versabatur, the camp and commander were in great danger. Remark. Two Singular subjects may denote one thing, and then the verb is singular; as in the English, bread and milk is healthful. c. A Collective Noun (as in English) may take a Singular verb, when the body as a whole is spoken of ; but when the separate objects are thought of, the verb must be Plural ; as, civitas jxis suum armis exsequi conata est, the state attempted to assert its right by force of arms; but civitati persuasit ut exirent, he persuaded tJie state to go out (that the citizens should go out). d. In Latin, as in English, when a verb has several subjects, of differe^ni persons, it will be in the First Person rather than in the Second or Third, and in the Second rather than in the Third; as, ego et tu et Cassius valemus, CassiicSf you, and /(= we) are well; tu et filius tuus valetis. oj*:o THECASBS. NOMINATIVE. 118. The Nominative is the case of the Subject, as in English. It may also be an Appositive or a Predicate Noun, as already described (106, 107). GENITIVE. 119. The Genitive is most frequently used to modify another Noun, denoting a different person or thing. It is unlike the Appositive, since the 196 NOTES. latter denotes the sawe person or thing as the word it describes. It may- be translated by the Possessive, or by of with a Noun ; as, templa deo- rum, the temples of the gods ; pater puerf, the hoy's fatlier. Caution. In such expressions as the city of Rome, of must not be rendered by the Genitive, because Eome denotes the same thing as city. The Latin should be urbs Roma (Appositive). Genitive denoting Possession. 120. The Genitive denotes the Possessor, answering the question Whose? as, filius servi, the slave's son; castra Caesaris, Caesar's camp. Genitive of Quality. 121. The Genitive (with an Adjective) denotes Quality, answering the question Of what kind? or (as in the English ten foot pole, five days' march), Of what length, height, depth 1 etc. ; as, vir magnae sapientiae, a man of great wisdom; res ejus modi (or ejusmodi), affairs of that sort ; iter quinque dierum, a five days' journey (or march)-, fossa trium pedum, a ditch of three feet (a three-foot ditch). a. The Genitive of Quality is used to denote Indefinite Value, This is expressed by the Genitive Singular of an Adjective (Neuter, agreeing with pretii, understood). Among the forms so used are magni, parvi, tanti, quanti; as, magni tuae epistolae sunt, your letters are of great value. Partitive Genitive. 122. The Genitive denotes the whole of which a part is taken. This is called the Partitive Genitive. It is used : — a. With Nouns, Pronouns, and Adjectives ; as, pars equitum, a part of the horsemen ; quis vestrum ? which of you ? uter consulum ? which of the (two) consuls ? nihil reliqui est, there is nothing left [of a remainder). h. With Neuter Adjectives and Adverbs of Degree (both used as Nouns); as, plus doloris, more grief; tantum spatii (or loci), so much space; satis eloquentiae (or pecQniae), enough eloquence (or money). 123. Notice these facts concerning the Partitive Genitive : — a. Cardinal numbers regularly (and other words sometimes) take the Ablative with e (ex) or de, and owt the Partitive Genitive ; as, quinque ex militibus ; unus de n5bis. NOTES. 197 h. Nostrum and vestrum are used as Partitive Genitives ; nostri and vestri as Objective Genitives (124) ; as, quis nostrum ? uter vestrum ? But we must say nostri oblitus, forgetful of us. c. Mille (the noun) is followed by the Partitive Genitive ; as, quinque millia passuum, five miles ; sex millia hominum. d. Caution. All of us; all of you; all of the soldiers ; etc., must not be expressed by the Partitive Genitive, since all does not denote a part, but the whole. The Latin should be, nos omnes, we all ; v5s omnes ; milites omnes. e. Caution. The top of the mountain ; the middle of the night ; the rest of the Gauls; etc., must not be expressed by a noun and a Partitive Genitive (110, &), but thus: summus mons; media nox; reliqui Galli. Subjective and Objective Genitive. 124. Many Nouns and Adjectives have the general meaning of Transi- tive Verbs ; for instance, amor in the expression amor patriae, love of country. If this were to be expressed in the form of a sentence, it would be nos (tu, ego, is, etc.) patriam amamus (amas, amo, amat, etc.), we (yoUy /, he) love (loves) our {your, my, his) country. That is, patriae, as well as patriam, is the Object of the love. So also, cupidi belli sumus = bellum cupimus. Hence such a Genitive is called the Objective Geni' tive. If a Genitive of Possession were used, it would represent the actor, or Subject, and hence such a Genitive is called the Subjective Genitive. Amor Dei (love of God) may mean Deus nos amat, or nos Deum amamus; the former would represent the Subjective Genitive, and the latter the Objective Genitive. The following examples will illustrate both ; militis amor belli, the soldier's (Subjective) love of war (Objective) = miles bellum amat. — rerum novarum cupidi sunt, they are desirous of a revolution (Objective) = ii res novas cupiunt. — rerum non im- peritus (or ignarus) fuit, he was not unskilled in (or ignorant of) affairs (Objective). — Helvetiorum injuriae populi Romani magnae erant, the injuries inflicted by (literally, of) the Helvetii (Subjective) upon (liter- ally, of) the Roman people (Objective) were great. Genitive witli Verbs of Remembering and Forgetting. 125. Verbs meaning to remember, to forget (that is, to be mindful of, to be forgetful of), arc regularly followed by the Genitive ; as, nunquam illius noctis obliviscar, / shall never forget that night; mortis ejus memini, / remember his death. 198 NOTES. Genitive after Sum. 126. a. As in English, the noun which the Genitive limits is not always expressed. Nouns meaning duty, part, nature, mark, property, are often omitted, as in these examples : militis Romani est aut vincere aut mori, it is a Roman soldier's (duty) either to conquer or die; im- peratoris est jubere, it is a commanders duty (right) to order ; omnia sunt victoris, all things are {the property) of the victor (that is, belong to tlie victor), Kemark. If, however, a Personal Pronoun is used in the English sentence, the Latin requires the Neuter of the corresponding Possessive Pronoun ; as, tuum est videre ne mali mihi noceant, it is your (duty) to take care {see to it) lest had men harm me. In this sentence tuum agrees with videre (109, V). h. The Genitive is often used after sum, equivalent to the English composed of; as, de his duobus generibus alterum est Druidum, alterum equitum, of these two classes, one is composed of the Druids, the other of the knights. Genitive with Impersonal Verbs. 127. a. The Impersonal Verbs miseret, it causes pity ; poenitet, it causes repentance ; pudet, it causes shame; taedet, it causes weariness; piget, it causes vexation, take an Accusative (of the person) as Direct Object, and a Genitive expressing the cause of the feeling (93, b); as, eos poenitet horum consiliorum, they repent of these plans (literally, it causes them repentance for these plans). b. The Impersonal Verbs refert and interest {it is to the advantage of, it concerns) take the Genitive of the person to whose advantage anything is. The subject of these verbs is usually an Infinitive, or an Accusative with the Infinitive ;. as, interest omnium recte facere, it is to the interest of all to act rightly; interest rei publicae manus hostium distineri, it is to the states advantage thai the bands of the enemy be kept apart. Other Uses of the Genitive. 128. The Genitive is used before causa, gratia {for the sake of); instar (indeclinable noun, meaning likeness); pridie {the day before); postridie (the day after); as, amicitiae causa Caesarem secutus est, he followed Caesar for friendship's sake; haec saepes instar muri est, this hedge is like {the likeness of) a wall; pridie (postridie) ejus diei, the day before {the day after) that day. NOTES. 199 Remark. Pridie and postridie are contracted forms of pri5ri die and posters die; so that pri(ori)die ejus diei really means on that day's predecessor, and posterodie (in its shortened form) ejus diei = on that day's successor. DATIVE. 129. The Dative denotes the Indirect Object^ and answers the question To or For whom (or what) ? as, agricolae pecuniam nautis dant, the farmers give money to the sailors; non scholae sed vitae discimus, we learn, not for the school, hut for life ; puer mihi nomen dixit, the boy told (to) me his name; multa parentibus debemus, we owe much {many things) to our parents. Caution, a. In the sentences, h£ comes to the city; we follow him to the gate, there is no Dative, because city and gate do not denote the indi- rect object of an action. When the verb expresses motion, the Preposition ad with the Accusative must be used ; as, ad urbem venit. But see 159. b. When for means in defence of in behalf of pro with the Ablative must be used ; as, dulce est pr5 patria mori, it is sweet to die for (one's) country. Dative witli Intransitive Verbs. 130. Intransitive Verbs can, of course, take only an Indirect Object ; as, res legioni feliciter evenit, the affair turned out successfully (hap- pily) for the legion. Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage. 131. The Dative is very often used to denote Advantage or Disad- vantage ; that is, to denote that something is helpful or injurious (to any one), pleasant or disagreeable (to him), ft or unfit (for his use), etc. The Dative is thus used with very many Verbs and Adjectives ; as, domus dominis aedificatur, n5n muribus, a house is built for its owners, not for the mice ; Aedui Romanis amici erant, the Aedui were friendly to the Eomans ; Caesari Ariovistus inimicus fuit, Ariovistus was hostile to Caesar. a. The following Verbs (and others of similar meaning) would be Transitive in English ; in Latin they are regularly Intransitive, and take a Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage : — 1. Verbs meaning to benefit or irijure, please or displease, command or obey, serve or resist. 2. Verbs meaning to believe or distrust, persuade, pardon, envy, threaten^ be angry. 200 • NOTES. Caution. These verbs, if used in the Passive, must be Impersonal (134). h. Some of the Adjectives taking a Dative of Advantage or Disadvan- tage are these : — Friendly, amicus ; unfriendly, inimicus ; useful, utilis ; useless, in- utilis ; fit, aptus ; unfit, incommodus ; acceptable, gratus ; dear, carus ; displeasing, ingratus ; faithful, fidelis ; angry, iratus. Caution. Juvo, / help, takes the Accusative. Impero, / command, takes the Dative ; but jubeo, / order, takes the Accusative. c. The Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage is often used where we should expect to find the Ablative of Separation (147). It is thus used with Verbs compounded with ab, de, ex, and sometimes with other words. It usually represents a person; as, mihi hunc timorem eripe, relieve me of this fear (take this fear from ine); scut5 militi detracts, having snatched a shield from a soldier. Dative with Adjectives: Like, Equal, Near. 132. The Dative is used (as in English) to limit Adjectives meaning like (and unlike), equal (and unequal), near ; as, puer similis patri est, the hoy is like {to) his father ; hostes nostris (militibus) n5n pares sunt, the enemy are not equal to (a match for) our soldiers ; proximi Germanis SMTit, they are Clearest to the Germans; finitimi Galliae fuerunt, they were neighboring to Gaul (bordered on Gaul). a. As prope (near) is a Preposition, the Adjective and Adverb derived from it very often take the Accusative, as though they were Prepo- sitions ; that is, they retain the force of the Preposition prope ; as, Crassus proximus mare Oceanum hiemaverat, Grassus had passed the winter very near the Atlaiitic. Dative witli Compounds. 133. Compound Verbs containing the Prepositions ad, ante, con, in, inter, ob, post, prae, pro, sub, super, and sometimes circum, usually take the Dative of Indirect Object ; as, virtute omnibus praestabant, they excelled all in valor; aliquid ei accidit, something has happened to him; R5mani Germanis bellum inferunt, the Romans make war on the Germans; moenibus multitudo circumjecta est, the multitude was thrown about the walls (that is, surrounded them). Caution. Of course, if the simple verb is Transitive (as, mitto) the compound verb will remain Transitive, and take the Accusative of the Direct Object ; as, proelium committo, I join battle; equites praemitto, / send the horsemen ahead. NOTES. 201 Dative with Tmpersonal Verbs. 134. In English, Intransitive Verbs have no Passive ; in Latin, they may have a Passive, but it must be Impersonal. All verbs that take only the Dative, therefore, can be used in the Passive only Impersonally. This includes those verbs mentioned in 93, 2, as well as such verbs as venio, eo, pugno, contends, curro ; as, puero nocetur, harm is done to the hoy (the boy is harmed); militibus imperatur, a coinmand is given to the soldiers (the soldiers are commanded); legibus parendum est, ohedience must he rendered to the laivs (the laws must be obeyed); non parcitur hostibus, no quarter is given to the enemy (the enemy are not spared). Remark. The Impersonal Verbs libet {it pleases) and licet (it is per- mitted) take the Dative ; as, licet mihi ire, / may go (literally, it is permitted me to go). Dative of Possessor. 135. Instead of habeo with the Accusative, the Dative is very often used with the verb sum, to denote the Possessor ; as, nobis sunt libri, we have hooks ; viro quinque equi sunt, the man has jive horses. a. The Dative is also used with the compounds of sum (except pos- sum, which takes the Infinitive, and absum, which takes the Ablative, usually with a or ab); as, Caesari exercitus n5n dSfuit, an army was not wanting {lacking) to Caesar. Many of these are provided for by 133. Dative of Agent. 136. The Dative is regularly used with the Gerundive to denote the Agent. This is sometimes called the Dative of Apparent Agent, since the real Agent is expressed by the Ablative with £ or ab (151, Caution). The Dative, in this use, denotes that something must be done on a person's part, as far as he is concerned, for his advantage, etc.; yet it may usually be more simply rendered as though it were Ablative ; as, omnia Caesari agenda erant, aZZ ^Amf/s had to he done by Caesar (o7i Caesar's part); militibus castra relinquenda sunt, the camp must be abandoned by the soldiers. Two Datives. 137. Some verbs take two Datives ; one denotes the Purpose, and the other is the Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage ; as, militSs subsidio Sabino mittit, he sends soldiers as aid (relief) to Sabinus ; haec res magno impediments nostris erat, this circumstance proved a great hindrance to our men. 202 NOTES. Remark. The Dative of Purpose is sometimes used without the Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage. a. A Phrase (containing ad) is very often used to express a Purpose ; as, milites ad pugnandum alacres erant, the soldiers were eager for fighting ; ad urbem videndam venit, he came to see the city (180). Dative instead of tlie Genitive. 138. The Dative is often used where we should expect a Genitive. It will always be found, however, that the Dative expresses more than simple Possession ; as, advantage, disadvantage, etc. ; as, Galli Tito ad pedes se pr5jiciunt, the Gauls throw themselves at Titus's feet (literally, thi^ow themselves before (pro) Titus, at his feet) \ Pulfioni scutum transfigitur, Pulfio's shield is pierced through. ACCUSATIVE. 139. The Accusative denotes the Direct Object of a Transitive Verb ; as, magister puerum laudat, the teacher praises the hoy ; oppidani portas clauserunt, the townspeople closed the gates. a. Verbs of motion, which are Intransitive (as simple verbs), often be- come Transitive when compounded with ad, circum, in, trans; as, urbem adiit, he o^pproached the city ; consilia ineunt, they form (enter upon) plans; nostros circumvenerunt, they entrapped (English, ^'' got around'') our men; flumen transitis, you are crossing the 7'iver. Cognate Accusative* 140. In English, an Objective Case may be used after an Intransitive Verb (as well as after a Transitive Verb) to repeat the idea contained in the Verb ; as, he went his way ; we ran a race ; I have dreamed a dreo.m. It is called in English the Cognate Objective (Cognate, from con + nascor, means kindred, related) ; in Latin, it is called the Cognate Accusative ; as, mirum somnium somniavi, / have drearaed a wonderful dream ; jusju- randum jQravi, / have sworn an oath ; viam tridui processit, he ad- vanced a three days' journey. Tw^o Accusatives. 141. Some Verbs take two Accusatives : — a. Verbs of making, calling, thinking (as well as verbs of similar mean- ing), take two Accusatives (of the same Person or Thing), just as in English they take two Objectives ; as, Ancum Martium regem NOTES. 203 jpopulus creavit, the people elected Ancus Martins king ; Romu- lus urbem Romam vocavit, Romulus called the city Borne; te virum sapientem put5, / think you a wise man, "When these verbs become Passive, one Accusative becomes the Subject^ the other becomes the Predicate Nominative (as in English); as, urbs Roma vocata est. h. Verbs of asking and teaching (as well as verbs of similar meaning) take two Accusatives (one denoting the Person and the other the Thing), as in English ; as, sententiam me rogavit, he asked me my opinion; Caesar friimentum Aeduos flagitabat, Caesar kept demanding corn of the Aedai ; pacem te poscimus, we de- mand peace of you. In the Passive, the Accusative of the Person becomes the Subject; the Accusative of the Thing remains (as in English); as, sententiam rogatus sum, I was asked my opinion. Remark 1. Celo, / conceal, takes two Accusatives, like verbs of asking ; as, me haec celabas, you were concealing these things from me (that is, you were concealing these things, and were keeping me "in the dark"); amicum sermonem celavit. Remark 2. Peto, / seek ; postulo, / demand; quaero, / ask, do not take two Accusatives (like rogo). They take the Accusative of the thing, but the Ablative of the p)erson (as the source of information) with a Preposition. Peto and postulo take a or ab ; quaero takes a (ab), de, or e (ex); as, pacem a Romanis petunt; auxilium a me postulavit; de lis causam quaesivit {he asked them the reason). c. Some Transitive verbs, compounded with trans, take two Accusa- tives, one being the object of the simple verb, and the other de- pending on the Preposition ; as, equites Rhodanum transduxit (=equites trans Rhodanum duxit); so also, c5pias flumen transmisit (= copias trans flumen misit). Remark. In the Passive, the Accusative depending on the Preposition may remain ; as, major multitiido Germanorum Rhenum trans- ducitur. Accusative used Adverbially. 142. The Accusative is very often used adverbially, especially to de- note degree or extent. In very many instances it is like the English Objec- tive similarly used (see 54, page 15). Some of these uses are : — a. The Accusative denotes length of time, answering the question, ITow long? as, quinque dies morabitur, he will delay five days; trl- duum ibi manebat, he remMned there for the space of three days ; septem ann5s in Gallia vixit. 204 NOTES. h. The Accusative denotes extent of space, answering the questions Row far ? Row high ? How long 1 etc. ; as, octo millia passuum pro- cessit (progressus est), he advanced eight miles ; murus centum pedes longus est, the wall is 100 /cc^ long ; domus quadraginta pedes alta f uit, the house was 40 feet high. c. The Accusative has an adverbial force (of degree, extent, cause, etc. ) in many expressions. Some of these, as multum, plurimum, etc., have been mentioned under 94, d, 1. Examples are : — Suevi n5n multum frumento, sed maximam partem lacte atque pecore vivunt, tlie Suevi do not live rtiuch on corn, hut for the most part on milk and {the flesh of) cattle; plurimum potest, he is very powerful (he is able to a very great extent) ; quid venitis, why do you come ? (English, what fori); fama tantum valuit, the re- port had so great influence (availed to such a degree). Remark. The Accusative of Place to which is described in 159, h. Accusative as Subject. 143. The Accusative is used as the Subject of the Infinitive Mode. In English the Objective is often used in the same way (see 56, page 16). This use of the Accusative is more fully described in 166. Accusative TV'itli Prepositions. 144. The Accusative and Ablative are used with Prepositions. The list of those (most common) that take the Ablative is given under 95; those not contained in this list require the Accusative. But see 95, c. VOCATIVE. 145. The Vocative is the case of Direct Address ; as, studios! este, pueri, hoys, he studious. It is like the English Independent Case, as, in the example, pueri has no dependence on any other word in the sentence. ABLATIVE. 146. The Ablative usually expresses Adverhial ideas ; that is, it answers the questions From what? By whatl Why? Row? Where? When ? With what ? etc. In English, the same ideas are expressed by phrases containing the Prepositions from, hy, in, with, and sometimes others ; as, virum culpa liberat, he frees the man from hlame ; pallidus ira fuit, he was pale with anger (tells why)\ clara voce dixit, he spoke in a loud tone (tells how); poster© die hostes superavit, he overcame the enemy the following day (tells when). NOTES. 205 Ablative of Separation. 147. The Ablative ( = from) is very frequently used to denote Separa- tion ; as, me timore liberas, you free me from fear; finitimi agris expulsi sunt, the neighbors were driven from their lands ; conatu desti- terunt, they desisted from their attempt, a. Opus (indeclinable, used in Nominative and Accusative) and usus, meaning Tieedy take the Ablative, like verbs expressing separation or privation ; as, opus est magistratibus et pecunia, there is need of magistrates and money. Ablative of Origin, or Source. 148. The Ablative ( = from ) denotes Origin or Source^ especially with such a Participle as natus, horn {from) ; ortus, sprung (from) ; as, Lucius Catilina nobili genere natus fuit, Lucius Catiline ca'.ne from noble stock. Ablative of Cause. 149. The Ablative denotes Cause, answering the question Why? In a,ccordancs with what ? as, pallidus ira fuit, he was pale with anger ; senectute mortuus est, he died of old age ; victoria sua gloriantur, they boast of their victory ; stipendium jure belli capit, he takes the tribute by [in accordance with) the law of war. a. The Ablative causa is often used after a Genitive to express cause ; as, rei publicae causa, /o?' the republic's sake; rei frumentariae (or commeatus) causa, for the sake of supplies of corn (or sicp- plies) . Ablative of Manner. 150. The Ablative denotes Manner, answering the question How ? as, clara voce dixit, he sjyoke in a loud tone; magno fletu auxilium a Caesare petunt, with a flood of tears (great weejmig) they seek aid of Caesar; magna vi contenderunt, they strove ivith might and main. a. Caution. If 'with means in company with, in conflict with, cum must be used. The Ablative is then called the Ablative of Ac- companiment; as, cum decima legi5ne venit, he came with the tenth legion ; cum hostibus pugnant ; cum Germanis bellum gerunt. Remark. In military reports, or in describing military movements, cum is often omitted. 206 NOTES. Ablative of Means or Instrument. 151. The Ablative denotes Means or Instrument^ answering the ques- tions By what ? With what ? as, hostium fines ferrS et igne vastant, they lay waste the enemy s territory with sword and flames ; Deus mun- dum omnibus rebus bonis explevit, God has filled the world with all blessings (good things); legione fossam perducit, he digs (conducts) a ditch with (the help of) the legion. Caution. If the Noun or Pronoun denotes the person by whom something is done, it requires the preposition a (ab). It is then called, not the MeanSj but the Agent; as, pater a filiis amatur, the father is loved by his sons; naves militibus a Caesare completae sunt, the ships were filled with soldiers (Means) by Caesar (Agent). The indirect agent is expressed by per with the Accusative; as, Caesar per exploratores certior factus est, Caesar was informed through scouts (ab exploratoribus = by the scouts in person). See also 136. a. The Ablative of Means is used with the Deponent Verbs utor, fruor, fungor, potior, vescor, and also vivo (with the meaning, live upon)] as, auro et argento iituntur, they use (employ) gold and silver ; eadem conditione deditiSnis iisus est, he enjoyed the same condition (ov terms) of surrender ; lacte vescuntur, they live on (feed on) milk ; pecore vivunt, they live on (the ficsh of)cattle; castris potiti sunt, they got possession of the camp. Remark. Potior sometimes takes the Genitive, in the sense of become master of; as, totius Galliae potior, / become master of all Gaul. b. The Adjectives fretus, contentus, praeditus (= prae + datus), take the Ablative of Means ; as, freti virtute sua, relyiyig on their bravery ; paucis rebus contentus fuit, he was content with a few things; virtute praeditus et copiis fretus, Marcellus hostes vicit, endowed (gifted) with bravery, and relying on his troops, Marcellus conquered the enemy, c. The Ablative denotes the Price paid for anything. It is the ineans by which it is obtained or exchanged ; as, viginti talentis unam orationem vendidit, he sold one oration fm- 20 talents ; haec victoria Caesari multo sanguine stetit, this victory cost Caesar much blood (literally, stood to his account)] librum duodecim sestertiis emit, he bought the book for 12 sesterces (about 60 cents). Ablative of Quality. 152. The Ablative of Quality is used to describe a person or thing, answering the questions Of what kind? What sort of? Of what appear- NOTES. 207 ance? etc. See Genitive of Quality (121). Examples : Germanl viri corporum ingenti magnitudine fuerunt, the Germans were men of huge size of body ; moenia urbis magna altitudine sunt, the walls of the city are of great height ; horrido aspectu sunt, they are of dreadful appear- ance (have a dreadful look, are ^^dreadful-looking''). a. Although the Genitive may be used to denote Quality^ yet the Ablative is more common. The Genitive must be used to denote actual measurement (in days, fcet^ etc.); as in the Examples under 121. Ablative of Kespect. 153. The Ablative often answers the question In what respect ? and is then called the Ablative of Respect (or Specification). It is used with Nouns, Adjectives, and Verbs ; as, rex nomine fuit, he was a kiiig in name; Gallos reliquos virtute praecedunt, they surpass the rest of the Gauls in bravery; puer patri omnibus rebus similis est, the boy is like his father in all respects ; majores natu sumus, we are older {greater in respect to birth). Remark. The Ablative of the Supine is an Ablative of Respect (191, b). Ablative with. Comparatives. 154. The Ablative may be used after Comparatives, instead of quam (with the Nominative or Accusative) ; as, TuUus Hostilius R5mul6 (= quam Romulus) ferocior fuit, Tullus Hostilius was more warlike tJmn Romulus ; scimus solem majorem esse terra (= quam terram), we knoiu that the sun is greater than the earth ; castra amplius millibus passuum octo in latitudinem patebant, the camp extended more than eight miles in width. a. A few Ablatives (like opinione, spe) are used with a Comparative, and have the force of entire clauses ; as, celerius opinione om- nium venit, he came quicker than any one supposed he would (lit- erally, quicker than the ojnnion, or expectation, of all). b, Quam is often omitted after pliis, minus, amplius, longius, with- out affecting the case of the following noun ; as, amplius (Accusa- tive) tria millia (Accusative) passuum castra patebant, the camp extended more than three miles ; that is, three miles (Accusative) and more (Accusative). Ablative expressing Measure of Difference. 155. The Ablative denotes the Measure (or Degree) of Difference between two objects compared, telling by how much one thing is greater or less than 208 NOTES. another. Notice a similar use of the Objective in English (54, 7, page 15). Examples : ille vir t6t5 capita altior est, that man is a whole head taller ; Hibernia dimidio minor est quam Britannia, Ireland is a half smaller than Erigland ; tempus multo brevius est, the time is much shorter, a. The Ablative expressing Measure of Difference is found with all words and phrases which contain a Comparative idea; as, hie locus aequ5 spatio ab castris Ariovisti et Caesaris aberat, this spot VMS the sams distoMce (off) from the camp of Ariovistus and {that of) Caesar ; paulo post (ante) venit, he came a little after (or before) ; flumen triginta millibus passuum infra (supra) eum locum fuit, the river was 30 miles below (or above) that place. b. The Ablative of Measure of Difference is very often expressed in the form of correlatives (195, 8), as, quo — eo (or hoc) ; quanto — tantS, which are to be translated the — the ; as, quo major vis aquae se incitaverit, h5c (eo) artius continebuntur, the (by how much) greater the force of the current shall have been, the (by so much) more tightly will they be held together, c. The Ablative with Comparatives (154) and the Ablative of Measure of Difference are very often found in the same sentence ; as, servus multo fortior domino suo est, the slave is much braver than his master; turris quinque pedibus mur5 altior est, the tower is five feet higher than the wall. Ablative with Dignus and Indignus. 156. The Adjectives dignus, worthy, and indignus, unworthy, take the Ablative ; as, ignavus vita indignus est, a coward does n't deserve to live (is unworthy of life) ; milites laude dig^i erant, the soldiers were worthy of praise. Ablative Absolute. 157. The Ablative is often used independently of the rest of the sen- tence, and is then called the Ablative Absolute (absolute means freed from dependence). In English, the Independent Case is employed in the same way with Participles, and has three uses : — (1.) Substantive + Participle; as, the camp having been fortified^ he came to Rome. (2.) Substantive + being + Adjective ; as, the soldiers being brave, the enemy were overcome. (3.) Substantive + being + Substantive; as, Caesar being the judge, you will be condemned. NOTES. 209 The verb to he is a Copula ; hence hrave is a Predicate Adjective, and judge, a Predicate Noun. The verb sum has no Present Participle, how- ever, and therefore, in expressing these examples in Latin, being must be omitted in the second and third. Of course, hrave must agree with soldiers, and judge must be in Apposition with Caesar. Therefore, the Latin for these examples will be : — (1.) Substantive + Participle, castris munitis, Romam venit. (2.) Substantive + (^>em^) + Adjective, militibus fortibus, hostes victi sunt. (3.) Substantive + {heing) + Substantive, Caesare judice, condem- naberis. Judging from potens (Present Participle of possum), we may say that the Present Participle of sum would he ens ; so that militibus (entibus) fortibus, and Caesare (ente) judice, will show how much alike the English and Latin are in the use of the absolute case and the Predicate Noun or Adjective. RemarIc 1. Verbs in Latin (except the Deponents) have no Perfect Active Participle. The Ablative Absolute is required, to supply this lack as nearly as possible; as, having seen the city; having heard the speech, must be translated thus : urbe visa {the city having heen seen) ; oratione audita (the speech having heen heard). In these sentences, however, there will be no Ablative Absolute, as the Participles are Active in meaning : having followed the enemy, our men killed a large number of them; having delayed five days, he set out. They must be written thus : hostes seciiti (Nominative), nostri magnum numerum eoruip occiderunt; quin- que dies moratus (Nominative), profectus est. Remark 2. The Ablative Absolute phrase, like the English Indepen- dent phrase, is usually equivalent to a shortened clause, and should gener- ally be translated as a Subordinate Clause ; as, militibus fortibus, because the soldiers were hrave; oratione habita, when the speech had been de- livered; se invito, although he was (or if he should he) unwilling (or without his permission). Remark 3. It is much more common than the English Independent Case, and often cannot be translated literally so as to make good sense. The student must use that translation which is best and smoothest ; for ex- ample : — Caesare jiidice, if Caesar is judge, because Caesar is judge; Cicerone et AntoniS consulibus, when Cicero and Antony were consuls, in the consulship of Cicero and Antony ; hostibus victis ; (1) when (although, since, because) the enemy have heen conquered; (2) having conquered the enemy ; (3) the enemy having heen conquered ; (4) after having conquered the enemy. 210 NOTES. PLACE. 158. The Ablative with a Preposition denotes place where (or in which) and whence (or from which); as, in Gallia, in Gaul; ab oppido, from the town; ex silva, out of the forest. Place to which is expressed by the Accusative with a Preposition; as, ad urbem, to the city; ad castra, to the camp. Remember, this is the rule ; the next Note gives the exceptions. 159. To express Place where (in or at which) ^ whence (from which), whither (to which), Prepositions are omitted with the following : — (1) Names of Cities and Towns ; (2) domus (home), rus {country); (3) smMll Islands. These nouns obey the following Rules : — a. Flsicefrom which is expressed by the Ablative ; as, Catilina R5ma fugit, Catiline has fed from Pome; rure revocatus est, he was recalled from the country. b. Place to which is expressed by the Accusative ; as, domum ivit, he went home ; Corintho Romam prof ectus est, he set out from Corinth for Pome. c. Place in (or at) which is expressed by a case called the Locative (locus, place), which is mentioned in 20, Remark, page 24, as the seventh Latin case. It is found in the First, Second, and Third Declensions, has a Singular and a Plural form, and has endings like the Genitive Singular or Ablative (Singular and Plural). This table shows the endings of the Locative Case : — Declension. I. II. III. Singular. ae. i. e (rarely i). Plural. is. is. ibus. Some names of Cities and Towns have no Singular form ; as, Athenae (arum), Athens; Veil (orum), Veii ; Sardes (ium), Sardis. The above table and its correct use can be remembered by this Rule : To express Place where, names of Cities and Towns, also domus,* rus, and small Islands, must have the form of the Genitive, if of the First or Second Declension and Singular Number. Ablative, if of the Third Declension or Plural Number. Examples : Capuae ; Karthagine ; Veils ; Athenis ; Sardibus ; R5mae; Lugduni (Nominative Singular, Lugdunum) ; domi: at (or in) Capua, Cartilage, Veii, Athens, Sardis, Pome, Lyons ; at home. * Domus, meaning home, is of the Second Declension (21, b). NOTES. 211 Eemark 1. To express towards, in-the-vicinity-off near, from-the- vicinity (or neighborhood) -of, Prepositions must be used ; because without them we could not tell whether Romam ivit meant he went to Rome, or towards Rome. These examples will show what Prepositions should be used for such meanings : ad Romam profectus est, he started towards (in-the-directioii-of) Rome; ad Genevam pervenit, he arrived in-the- vicinity -of Geneva ; ad (circum, apud) Capuam hiemavit, he passed the winter near Capua ; a Capua venit, he came from-the-neighhorhood-of Capita. Remark 2. There are some common, every-day words (loc5, parte, etc.), which often express Place where without a Preposition. These can be best learned by experience. Remark 3. The Ablative expressing the way by which (or through which) is an Ablative of Means; as, via breviore ivit, he went by a shorter way ; hostes locis impeditis sequitur, he follows the enemy through places difficult of passage. TIME. 160. The Ablative answers the questions When ? Within wlmt time ? (like the English Objective with a Preposition, expressed or understood). The Accusative (142, a) answers the question How long ? (like the Eng- lish Objective) ; as, solis occasu, at sunset; bell5 servili, in the war with the slaves (servile ivar) ; totam noctem ierunt, they marched all might ; quinque horas pugnabant, they fought five hours; Kalendis Martiis, on the first of March (on the March Kalends). DATES. 161. The Romans did not number the days of the month as we do. There were three fixed points in each month, and any particular day was reckoned as so many days before the nearest of these points. These three points were called : — 1. Kalendae (arum), the Kalends: the first day of the month. 2. Nonae (arum), the Nones (so called from nonus, ninth; being nine days before the Ides) : the 7th of March, May, July, and October, and the 5th of the other months. 3. Idus (uum). Feminine, the Ides: the 15th of March, May, July, and October, and the 13th of the other months. It was the pay-day for interest, tuitions, etc. a. The names of the Months are Adjectives ; as, Kalendae Apriles (often written Kal. Apr.), the 1st of April ; Idibus Novembribus (Id. Nov.), on the V3fh of November. 212 KOTES. h. To express March 2'^th, the Eomans said the 5th day before the April KalendSf because they included the day from which and the day ta which they counted. "We should suppose that this would be ex- pressed thus : quints die ante Kalendas Apriles; but they said ante diem quintum Kalendas Apriles, as though ante diem were a Preposition followed hy the Accusative. Rule 1. To find how many days before the Kalends an English day of the month falls, add two to the number of days in that month, and eubtract the number of the given date ; as, March 28th = 31 + 2 (33) — 28 = 5 ; that is, March 28th = the 5th day before the April Kalends. By adding two, they counted in the first day of the next month, because it was an extra day, beyond the month; this, with the dsij fvm which they reckoned, made the two extra days. Rule 2. To find how many days before the Nones or Ides an English day of the month falls, add one, and subtract the number of the given date; as, ante diem quartum Nonas Junias = (5 + 1) — 4 = June 2j ante diem quartum Idus Septembres = (13 + 1) — 4 = Sept. 10. MODES OF THE VERB. Indicative. 162. The Indicative Mode is used a. To state something as afact; as, puerum laudat, he praises the boy; veni, vidi, vici, / camCy I saiv, I conquered. b. To ask a direct question ; as, quis putat Cassium ig^avum esse ? , who supposes that Cassius is a coward ? pugnatne servus ? does the slave fight ? The forms of questions are given in 101. Imperative. 163. The Imperative Mode expresses a direct command (that is, one to the Second Person); as, convoca, magister, pueros, teacher, call the boys together ; studios! este, be industrious; cave, beware. Caution. To express a prohibition (negative command) a peculiar idiom is required. This is given in 178, Caution 2. Subjunctive.* 164. The Subjunctive Mode has a variety of uses ; the simplest are : — * Only a few of the simplest uses are given in this section; the Mode is more fully described hereafter. This Note gives such uses of the Subjunctive as can be readily appreciated by contrast with the Indicative and the Im- perative. NOTES. 213 a. To state something as doubtful or possible ; as, si Caesar pugnet, German5s superet, if Caesar should fight ^ he would overcome the Germans. (The Indicative states 2^ fact.) b. To ask an indirect question ; as, rogat quid die am, he asks what 1 am saying. It is also used to ask a qnestion implying doubt or uncertainty ; as, quis putet Cassium ignavum esse? who would suppose that Cassius is a coward ? (The Indicative asks a direct question, and one which does not imply a doubt. ) c. To express an indirect command ; that is, commanding an act in which the First or Third Person is to be the actor, but the com- mand is not addressed to the First or Third Person (see Remark, below). It may express all such ideas as exhortation, ivarning, etc.; as, magister pueros convocet, let the teacher call the boys together; omnes studiosi simus, let us all be studious ; caveat, let him beware. (The Imperative expresses a direct command.) Remark. If, in an Imperative sentence, the First or Third Person is required, the Subjunctive must be used. This table will show the forms of command, exhortation, etc., for amo and sum, in all Persons, Present Tense : — Singular. 1. amem, let me love. 1. sim, let me be, 2. ama, love {thou). 2. es, be (thou). 3. amet, let him (her, it) love. 3. sit, let him (her, it) be. ' Plural. 1. amemus, let us love. 1. simus, let us be, 2. amate, love (ye). 2. este, be (ye). 3. ament, let them love. 3. sint, let them be. d. To express purpose, answering the questions, Why ? For what ? as, Caesar militSs misit ut urbem expugnarent, Caesar sent sol- diers to take (that they 'might take) the city. Notice that expug- narent does not state a fact, but something intended, or possible. INFIlSriTIVE. 165. The Infinitive is usually employed as an indeclinable Verbal Noun (aa in English). 214 NOTES. a. The Infinitive is often used as Subject of a Verb {impersonal). Of course, a Predicate Adjective will be Neuter (109, b). Examples: esse melius quam videri est, to be is better thmi to seem ; dulce pro patria mori est, to die for (one's) native land is sweet. b. The Infinitive is used after many verbs, sometimes as Object, and sometimes to fill out their meaning. In the latter use it is called the Complementary Infinitive (that is, it completes the thought) ; as, Caesar bellum cum Germanis gerere constituit, Caesar determined to carry on war with the Germatis ; urbem expugnare non possunt, they cannot take the city by storm ; iter facere coepit, lie began to march. Infinitive with Subject AccusatiTe. 166. Verbs and expressions of telling, thinking, perceiving, knowing (and others of similar meaning), are followed by the Infinitive^ with the Accusative as Subject. This use of the Infinitive may be more easily un- derstood, if stated thus : — I. Verbs of saying are followed by the Accusative with the Infinitive, when they introduce, not a Direct Statement (that is, the exact words of the speaker), but an Indirect Statement (that is, the general idea of what he said, but not his exact words). Such an Indirect Statement, in Eng- lish, is introduced by the Conjunction that; but the word that is omitted in Latin. Examples : (Direct Quotation) ^^The sailors fight,'* ** Nautae pugnant ; " (Indirect Statement) He says that the sailors fight, Dicit nautas pugnare. II. A beginner, however, often finds it hard to understand why a verb of thinking should follow the same rule as a verb of telling. The reason is that, when a person thinks, he "says to .himself," as in this sentence : 1 said to myself (= thoitght, determined, hoped) that I should be elected. A similar construction is seen in English (56, page 16) after verbs of seeing and hearing ; as, I heard him {to) call; he saw the boy {to) jump. In Latin, the Accusative with the Infinitive is a very common construc- tion, after verbs of saying, etc. ; as, dicit (negat, respondet, putat, sperat, audit, credit) Romanos superatiiros esse Gall5s, he says {denies, replies, thinks , hopes, hears, believes) that the Romans will overcome the Gauls, Caution. Verbs of asking do not state anything, and therefore cannot take the Accusative and Infinitive. They should be followed by a Sub- junctive o^ Purpose or Indirect QucsHon (see 179, d ; 177, b). NOTES. 215 Historical Infinitive. 167. Latin writers often use the Present Infinitive, instead of the Im- perfect and Perfect Indicative (without have). It is then called the Historical In/initiiJe. In this use its Subject is in the Nominative Case. Perhaps some verb (like coepi), upon which the Infinitive depends, has been omitted. It is used in lively descriptions ; as, flagitare, ducere, and dicere, in these sentences : Caesar Aeduos frumentum flagitare. Diem ex die Aedui ducere ; friimentum conferri, comportari, adesse dicere, Caesar kept demanding corn of the Aedui, The Aedui kept putting (him) offy day after day ; they said (at one time) that the corn was being collected f (at another) that it was on the way, (and again) that it was at hand. TENSES. 168. Indicative, The Indicative has all the Tenses, which are described in 61. a. Both the Future and Future Perfect are sometimes required, when the English verb contains the idea of a Future, but does not have a Future form (17, Note, page 5) ; as, si Romam venerit (or veniet), felix ero, if he comes (that is, shall have co7ne, shall come) to Rome, I shall he happy, b. The Present Tense is often used for a past tense, to represent a past event vividly, as though now taking place. It is then called the Present Historical (like the Historical Infinitive, 167), because it really describes past events ; as, dum haec geruntur, dux nuntios mittit, while these things are going on, the leader sends messengers. Webster, when pleading a case before a jury, thus used the Present Historical : "The deed is done. He (the crimi- nal) retreats, retraces his steps to the window, passes out through it as he came in, and escapes. The secret is his, and it is safe." Remark. The Present Historical is almost always used with dum, while, though the other verbs in the sentence may be in tenses denoting past time ; as, dum haec parantur, Saguntum jam oppugnabatur, while these preparations are being made, Saguntum was already under siege (being besieged). 169. Imperative Tenses, The Imperative Mode has only one tense (the Present) in common use. The Future is used in laws and com- mandments (like the English, '*Thou shalt not steal"). The Present Imperative tells the time of giving the command, the time of obeying may 216 NOTES. he future (as in English). The Present has only one Person, the Second ; how the lack of the First and Third Persons is supplied is explained in 164, c, Remark. 170. Subjunctive Tenses, The Subjunctive Mode has no Future or Future Perfect. This lack is sometimes supplied (for the Future) by the use of the Active Periphrastic Conjugation (as shown in 82, Remark), and sometimes by using the Present Subjunctive as a Future and the Per- fect as a Future Perfect (as described in 175). The Imperfect Subjunc- tive also has a peculiar use (described in 175, Remark 1). In a word, the time denoted by the Subjunctive tenses must often be decided by the sense, and not by the name of the tense (see 19, page 6). Primary and Secondary Tenses. 171. Tenses expressing Present or Future time are called Primary (or Principal); those expressing Past time are called Secondary (or Historical). Historical means describing past events (as in the terms, Historical Pres- ent and Historical Infinitive). The tenses are thus divided : — Primary : Present, Future, Perfect (Definite), Future Perfect. Secondary : Imperfect, Perfect (Indefinite, or Aorist), Pluperfect. Sequence of Tenses. 172. The tense of a verb in the Subjunctive, in a Dependent Clause, is determined by the tense of the verb on which it depends. That is. Present or Future time must be followed by Present or Future time, and Past time must be followed by Past time. This law is called the Sequence of Tenses (from sequor, I follow) , and can be thus stated : Primary tenses follow Primary tenses, and Secondary tenses follow Secondary. This is illustrated by the following : — (^venio ut te videam, / come that I may see you. Jveniam '' '' " I shall " " jveni " " " I have '' ** tvgnero " " " I shall have " " Primary. j^veniebam ut t5 viderem, Twos comiyig that I might see you. Secondary. •< veni " " ** I came *' *' " Iveneram *' " " Ihadcome *' " " Also, rogo quid agas, / ash what you are doing (Present Subjunctive). rogabo quid acturus sis, / will ask what you are going to do, or will do (Future Subjunctive). Remark 1. The Imperfect Subjunctive {not the Perfect) is regularly used after Secondary tenses ; as, viderem in the examples above. NOTES. 217 Remark 2. The Historical Present (168, b), being really Sipast tense, is regularly followed by a past tense ; as, Helvetii legates ad Caesarem mittunt, qui pacem peterent, the Helvetii send envoys to Caesar to ask for peace. 173. Infinitive Tenses, The tenses of the Infinitive are named Present, Perfect, and Future ; but the Present may have the meaning of a Present or Imperfect, and the Perfect may have that of the Perfect or Pluperfect. The time of an Infinitive tense is determined by the time of the verb on which it depends. If the Infinitive denotes, — (1.) The savie time as the principal verb, use the Present. (2.) Time before that of the principal verb, use the Perfect. (3.) Time after that of the principal verb, use the Future. Compare these rules carefully with the following examples : dicit militem pugnare, he says that the soldier fights; dixit magistrum pueros laudare, he said that the teacher was praising the boys; putat Romanos fortissimos fuisse, he thinks that the Romans have been very brave; nuntiavit Gallos nostros superavisse (superaturos esse), Ae announced that the Gauls had overcome (would overcome) our men. Caution. With verbs denoting necessity, permission, ability (as, oportet, licet, possum) the Present Infinitive must be translated by the Pel feet, when those verbs are in the Perfect ; as, oportuit me ire (not ivisse), I ought to have gone (it was necessary for me to go); mihi venire licuit, I might have come (it was permitted me to come)] urbem videre potuisti, you could have seen the city (you were able to see). CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 174. A Conditional Sentence consists of a Principal Clause, making a statement, and a Subordinate Clause, connected by si (if), or a compound of si (as, nisi, unless; etsi, although; sin, but if). The clause containing si is called the Condition; the clause containing the statement (that is, the Principal Clause) is called the Conclusion. The Condition is also called the Protasis; the Conclusion, the Apodosis. Conditional Sentences are divided, — (1.) According to the time denoted by them. (2. ) According to the kind of statement made, or the thought expressed. a. Time. Conditional Sentences may express Past, Present, or Future time. b. Kind of Statement. As the Mode of a verb expresses the "mood" of the speaker, he will use thii Indicative to make a simple state- ment (that is, a statement without any hint of doubt); but he will use the Subjunctive to state something which he regards as uncer" tain (that is, possible) or contrary to the truth (that is, impossible). 218 NOTES. Table of Conditional Sentences* 175. This Table shows what time and what thought a Conditional Sentence may express. Remember that the Subjunctive has no Future or Future Perfect. The Present is also used as a Future (as in c), and the Perfect as a Future Perfect (as in Remark 3). ;r ^ ^ ?^ ^ S +- .^, ->* -^ > > 3 to ^5S 3 ^sS O ^ 5> 3 . •"* '^ ;s <^ > § > .ti '^- ^ > r^ % ^ Z^. O CO O « II P. a 1 P4 iH s:3 1^ t h-t m m If -M* ^w I a H I I § p. tc 03 e 5.^ o ^ .== t: ^ ^ Eti S 1J S 5 s a ^ S II « S rt^ *=" ftf CO ^ — ' CP OP 5 *« ^ '<* ^ © ^ fl ft " w P O ^ aj +=* .. ^,-^ O ••-• ^ o I s — ^-^ i O (-! "^ <2 cT^ s .§ ?^ « S e eg e <U g § o Ip III .S tS +3 t r .JS .r a § I a « «, "S .£ X Id ^ § § 02 P ^ aT !^ i-H ^ o a> g S 3^ "^atli'^- •A ^ o Is--' s (M 1"^ 7- S ? Mils I ft « - !.a I « :S ^ 5^ ^ .^ 5 5 's -^ M NOTES. 219 Subjunctive of Wish. 176. The Subjunctive is used to express a wish. Of course, the In- dicative cannot denote such an idea, as the thing wished for must be possible or impossible. *' There is an if about every wish ; " and, in Latin, a sentence expressing a wish is really a clause of a Conditional Sentence, following the laws stated in 175, a (2), b (2), c (2). With the Subjunctive of Wish the particles utinam, O si (would that) are often used. a. A wish for something impossible at the present time requires the Imperfect Subjunctive ; as, (utinam) copias majores habere- mus! would tliat we (now) had greater forces ! b. A wish for something impossible in past time requires the Pluperfect Subjunctive ; as, (utinam, O si) milites fortiores fuissent ! would that the soldiers had been braver I c. A wish for something possible in the future requires the Present Sub- junctive ; as, (utinam) pater veniat! would that my father would come ! Caution. A negative wish requires ne, and not n5n ; as, ne vivam, si scio, I wish I may not live, if 1 know. Subjunctive In Questions* 177. a. The Subjunctive is used to ask a question implying a doubt (see examples under 164, b), b. The Subjunctive is used to ask an Indirect Question; as, rogavit quis se vccaret, he asked who was calling him (Direct Question^ "Quis me vocat?") c. The question is often hinted^ but not tqqWy asked ; as, cog^novit quid fecerit, he has found out [by inquiry) what he has done ; die mihi quid facias, tell me (for I wish to know) what you are doing ; quae agat, quibuscum loquatur, scit, he knows (by in- quiry) what he does (and) with whom he converses. d. Indirect Questions are either single or double ; like Direct Questions, they require interrogative words. (Review 101.) Notice, how- ever, these two points in which they differ from Direct Questions : (1.) In a Single Indirect Question, num (whether) is regularly used, but it does not necessarily expect the answer No; (2.) In Double Indirect Questions, utrum — an (or -ne — an) are used, as in Direct Questions ; but or not is expressed by necne (annon being used in Direct Questions) ; as, rogavit utrum amicus an inimicus essem, he asked whether I were a friend or foe; dubium est utrum venturus sit, necne, it is doubtful ^ whether he will come, or not. 220 NOTES. Eemarks. 1. Sometimes si is used in the sense of whether (as iii English). This use is common with exspecto, in a single question ; as, si venirent exspectavi, / waited (to see) whether they would come. 2. Ut {how) is sometimes used in questions ; as, docebat ut omni tempore tatius Galliae principatum Aedui tenuissent. Subjunctive of Command, Exhortation, etc 178. Any form of Command not direct (that is, implying that the First or Third Person is the actor, and expressing exhortation, warning, etc.) requires the Subjunctive. Cautions. 1. To express a negative form of exhortation, etc., ne, and not n5n, must be used ; as, ne pugnemus, let us not fight. 2. To express d^ prohibition (that is, a negative command to the Second Person), the Imperative must not be used. There are several forms that may be used ; these two, however, are most common : — a. For the Singular, nS with the Perfect Subjunctive ; as, ne hoc flii- men transieris, don't cross this river (literally, do not have crossed, etc. ). The use of the Perfect arises from the fact that the Romans often wished to describe an act as finished. h. For the Singular or Plural, use noli (Imperative of nol5) with the Complementary Infinitive ; as, nolite ignavi esse, do not he cow- ardly (literally, he unwilling to he). Subjunctive of Purpose. 179. The Subjunctive is used to express a purpose, answering the questions JVhy ? For what? A Purpose may be positive or negative; the conjunction ut (also written uti), that, in order that, is commonly used with the positive, and ne, that not, lest, with the negative; as, venit ut urbem videret, he came that he might see [to see) the city ; pugnamus ne servi simus, we fight that we may not he slaves. Cautions. 1, The Infinitive must not he used to denote a Purpose (see first example). 2. Ut non must not he used for a negative Purpose, hut for a negative Result (181). a. The Relative qui is very often used to introduce a clause of Purpose, being equal to ut is (ego, tii, etc.); as, c5pias misit quae (= ut eae) urbem expugnarent. h. The Ablative quo (= ut eo) is regularly used, instead of ut, when there is a Comparative in the clause. It is thus both a Conjunc- tion (ut) and an Ablative of Measure of Difi'erence (155); as, l5gem brevem esse oportet, qu5 facilius intelligatur, a law should he short, that it may the more easily he understood. NOTES. 221 c. Quominus (also written quo minus, hy which the less) takes the Subjunctive, with the meanings that not, fromy etc., after verbs signifying to hinder, prevent, object, being equivalent to ne, lest; as, quid Caesarem impedit quominus urbem oppugnet ? (hiiiders from assaulting)-, recusavit quominus sub imperio populi Roman! esset {refused to he). d. Verbs of asking, coimnanding (except jubeo), urging, permitting (except patior), and others of like meaning, take a Subjunctive of Purpose, a7id not the Accusative with the Infinitive, as they do not make a statement; as, legiones hortatus est ut pugnarent, he urged the legions to fight. e. Verbs oi fearing take the Subjunctive : with ne, when the event is not desired ; with ut, when it is desired. Translate ne by that or lest, ut by that not, and the Present Subjunctive like the Future Indicative. Study these examples carefully, and notice that ^^not " comes from the thought, rather than from ut: vereor ne le5 veniat, I fear that (Jest) the lion will come (literally, / have my fears about his not coming); vereor ut vincat, I fear that he will not conquer (literally, I have tny fears about his conquering), f Ut is often omitted, especially after verbs of asking, commanding, and others of similar meaning ; as, huic mandat, Remos adeat, he instructs him to visit the Remi, 180. There are, in common use, five ways of expressing a Purpose ; but the hifinitive is not one of them. He came to see the city may be written : — 1. venit ut urbem videret. 3. venit ad urbem videndam (190, a). 2. venit qui urbem videret. 4. venit urbis videndae causa (190, a). 6. venit urbem visum (191, a). SubjunctlTe of Kesult* 181. The Subjunctive is used to denote a result. A positive Result regularly has, for its conjunction, ut, so that ; a negative Result has ut non, so that not. Remark. The Subjunctive of Result is common after sic (ita, tam), so; talis, such ; tantus, so great; is, such; ejusmodi, of such a kind. a. A Subjunctive of Result is used with Impersonal Verbs like accidit (fit), it happens; sequitur, it follows ; and other verbs and ex- pressions of like meaning. Of course, the thing that happens, etc. , is the real Subject of such a verb ; as, accidit, ut luna plena esset, it happened to be full moon {that the moon was full); sequi- tur, ut haec falsa sint, it follows that these things a,re false. 222 NOTES. Remark. The Future Infinitive Passive (as amatum iri) is seldom found. In its place is used futiirum esse (or fore) followed by a Sub- junctive of Result ; as, dixit fore (futiirum esse) ut omnes inter- ficerentur (not omnes interfectum iri), he said that (it would happen that) all would be killed. h. A Result clause may also be the Object of a verb ; as, fecerunt ut profectio consimilis fugae videretur, they made their departure seem very like a flight; ne committat ut locus hoc nomen capiat, let him not cause the place to take this name. c. The Relative qui is often equivalent to ut is, ego, etc., introducing a Result. This use of the Subjunctive expresses a Result of some quality of the Antecedent, and hence is called the Characteristic Result. Sometimes the thought of Result is not at once evident, and we must supply some such word as talis, tantus, ejusmodi, to modify the Antecedent and give to it the idea of quality, which the Romans associated with it; as, n5n is (= talis) sum qui (= ut ego) periculo terrear, / a,m not such (a coward) as to be [that I am) terrified by danger; tempestas (tanta) coorta est, quae (= ut ea) naves rejiceret, a storm arose (so great) which (that it) drove the vessels back. d. Quin, a peculiar compound of the Relative Pronoun and non (or ne), is used with the Subjunctive after words implying doubt, and is translated by tJiat, but that. The qui is an old Ablative, equiva- lent to quo ; so that quin = ut eo non. Quin is sometimes used instead of quSminus (179, c) after verbs of hindering, etc. Ex- amples are : non est dubium (or non dubito) quin fortis sit, there is no doubt (or I do not doubt) that he is brave; nunquam me poteris deterrere, quin haec loquar, you can never deter 7ne from saying these things. Cautions. 1. If the thought is, / doubt whether, or it is doubtful whether, the Subjunctive of Indirect Question must be used ; as, fortisne an ignavus sit, dubium est. 2. Dubito, meaning / hesitate, takes the Infinitive ; as, nostri flumen transire non dubitaverunt. e. A clause of Result is often used as an appositive ; as, id, quod con- stituerant, facere conantur, ut e finibus suis exeant (ut — exeant is in apposition with id). How to express Cause or Reason. 182. a. Quod (because), quoniam (since), quia {because), regularly require the Indicative. NOTES. 223 b. Quum (or cum), meaning since, and introducing a reason, requires the Subjunctive ; as, quum fortis sit, vincet, since he is brave, he will conquer. c. The Relative qui is often equal to quum is (ego, etc.) meaning since he (I, etc.), and takes the Subjunctive of Cause; as, con- demnatus est, qui amicum interfecerit, he has been condemned, since he has killed his friend. d. Quod is often used to introduce a Substantive Clause (188, b) which may be Subject or Object ; as, quod Regulus rediit mirabile videtur, the fact that Reguhcs returned seems strange. It is gen- erally best translated by the fact that, or as to the fact that. e. For quod (because) with the Subjunctive, see 187,/. How to express Concession* 183. Concession means granting ; for instance, although he is innocent means granting that, etc. a. Quum (or cum), meaning although, requires the Subjunctive of Concession ; as, quum pauci sint, fortissimi sunt, although they are few, they are very brave. Caution. Etsi, tametsi, meaning although, being compounds of si, take the Indicative or the Subjunctive according to the laws of Conditional Sentences (175). Quamquam (although) takes the Indicative. b. The Relative qui is often equal to quum is (ego, etc.) meaning although he (/, etc.), and takes the Subjunctive of Concession ; as, culpatur, qui innocens sit, he is blamed, although he is innocent. c. Quamvis ( = quam + vis, Second Person Singular of volo) means, literally, as much as you 'please, but is translated although. It requires the Subjunctive ; as, quamvis fortes sint, although they are brave (let them be as brave as you please). d. Dum, modo, dummodo, meaning provided, require the Subjunc- tive of Concession ; as, dum eat, provided he go. Clauses of Time. 184. a. Quum (or cum), when, regularly takes the Subjunctive in the Imperfect and Pluperfect tenses, but the Indicative in the others ; as, quum in citeriSre Gallia esset ; quum quaesivisset. The Imperfect and Pluperfect, Indicative, sometimes occur, emphasizing a, fact. Caution. Ubi, when, postquam (or posteaquam), after, and others of like meaning, take tlie Indicative. 224 NOTES. h Dum, meaning until, and implying purpose, takes the Subjunctive ; when it means while, or until (not denoting purpose), it takes the Indicative ; as, dum reliquae naves convenirent, exspectavit, he waited until the rest of the ships should assemble ; but dum pauc5s dies moratur, while he tarries a few days. Remark. Dum, meaning while, regularly takes the Present Histori- cal (168, h. Remark), as moratur, in the above example. c. Antequam and priusquam, meaning before, take the Subjunctive, when there is an idea of doubt or purpose ; but when they simply connect two facts, one occurring before the other, they take the Indicative ; as, priusquam quidquam conaretur, Divitiacum ad se vocari jubet, before he should attempt anything , etc.; ad eum locum contendit, antequam hostes oppidum expugna- rent, he hastened to that place, before the enemy should capture the town (= lest, ne); but neque prius fugere destiterunt quam ad flumen pervenerunt. Remark. Antequam and priusquam, as in the last example, are often written as separate w^ords. Subjunctive "by Attraction." 185. The Subjunctive is often used in a dependent clause, not for any reason of its own, but because the verb on ivhich it depends is in the Sub- junctive. Such a clause must be so closely connected with the other Sub- junctive clause as to become a necessary, or explanatory, part of it, and its verb is said to be in the Subjunctive by Attraction ; as, velit in this sentence : nem5 tam potens est ut omnia quae velit efficere possit, no one is so powerful as to be ahle to accomplish all that he wishes. That is, velit is a part of the Result. INDIRECT DISCOURSE (Oratio Obliqua). 186. A Direct Quotation gives the exact words of the speaker ; an In- direct Quotation gives the general idea of what he said, but not his exact words. "We call the former Direct Discourse (OratiS Recta); the latter. Indirect Discourse (Oratio Obliqua). In changing from the Direct to the Indirect, the First Person regularly becomes the Third. a. Review the whole of 166 ; also 177, b, c, d. The constructions of Indirect Discourse are found, not only after Verbs of saying, ask- ing, thinhioig, perceiving, knowing, but also in connection with any Verb, IN'oun, or Adjective, containing the same idea; as, cognovit virum fortem esse (Object), he ascertained that the NOTES. 225 man was brave ; cognitum est virum fortem esse (Subject), it was ascertained, etc.; certior factus est exercitum venisse, ^e was informed that the army had come; spes (fama) erat Caesarem venturum esse, there was a hope {report) that Caesar would come; die mihi quid facias, tell me what you are doing, liaws of Modes and Tenses in Indirect Discourse. 187. In changing from the Direct to the Indirect Discourse, the Verbs of all Subordinate Clauses become (or remain) Subjunctive. The Mode of the Principal Verb depends on the kind of sentence. The modes ordinarily found in both Principal and Subordinate Clauses, and in Declaratory, Interrogative, and Imperative Sentences, are shown in this Table : — Sentence. a. Declaratory, } Clause. ( Principal. DiKECT DiSCOUESE. INDIRECT DiSCOUaSE. Subordinate. b. Interrogative. \ P^^i^^ipal. ( Subordinate. c. Imperative. ( Principal. ( Subordinate. Indicative. Indicative.* Indicative. Indicative.* Imperative. Indicative.* Accusative with Infinitive. Subjunctive. Subjunctive. Subjunctive. Subjunctive. Subjunctive. * Remarks. 1. Of course, if the Subjunctive (expressing Purpose, Result, Cause, etc.) were used in the Direct Discourse, instead of the Indicative, it would be retained in the Indirect Discourse. 2. If a Subordinate Clause is not a part of the quotation, but is merely explanatory, its verb may be in the Indicative ; as, dixit oppidum, quod vides, Ariovisti fuisse, he said that the town, which you see, had beeri (the property) of Ariovistus. d. Tenses in Indirect Discourse. The Tense of the Subjunctive in Indirect Discourse is decided by the laws for the Sequence of Tenses (172). Refcaember that the tense of the introductory verb (dic5, respondeo, puto, etc. ) must be carefully noticed in apply- ing these laws. e. This passage (Caesar's Gallic War, I. 13) will furnish applications of these principles : — 16 226 NOTES. Direct Discotjrse. Divico said to Caesar : — "Si pacem populus Eomanus cum Helvetiis facietf in earn partem ibunt atque ibi erunt Helvetii, ubi eos constitueris atque esse volueris : sin bello \)QY^Q(\}\i perseverahis^ remi- 7iiscere* et veteris incommodi populi Romani, et pristinae virtutis Hel- vetiorum. Quod improviso unum pagum adortus es, cum ii qui flumen transierant suis auxilium ferre non possent, ne ob earn rem aut tuae magnopere virtuti tribueris [178, 2 (a)], aut nos despexeris : nos ita a patribus majoribusque nostris didi- cimuSf ut magis virtute quam dolo contendamus, aut insidiis nitamur. Quare noli committer e [178, 2 (&)], ut is locus ubi constiterimus ex calamitate populi Romani et inter- necione exercitus nomen capiat, aut memoriam prodat^ Indirect Discourse. Divico said to Caesar (that) : — Si pacem populus Romanus cum Helvetiis faceret, in earn partem ituros atque ibi futiiros Helvetios, ubi eos Caesar constituisset atque esse voluissict : sin bello persequi perseveraret, reminisceretur et vete- ris incommodi populi Romani, et pristiuae virtutis Helvetiorum. Quod improviso unum pagum ador- tus essety cum ii qui flumen transis- sent suis auxilium ferre non possent, ne ob cam rem aut suae magnopere virtuti tribueret, aut ipsos despiceret : se ita a patribus majoribusque suis didicisse, ut magis virtute quam dolo contenderenty aut insidiis nite- rentur. Quare ne committeret, ut is locus ubi constitissent ex calamitate populi Romani et internecione exer- citus nomen caperet, aut memoriam proderet. /. The sentence, The leader praised the soldier because he had fought bravely, may have two meanings : (1) that the speaker gives the reason ; (2) that the speaker quotes the leader' s i^^i^on. The Latin for the first is quod pugnaverat ; for the second, quod pugna- visset, because it is quoting the leader's reason (Subordinate Clause) indirectly. The sentence, The boy did not come, because he was sick, may be written : puer, quod aeger erat, non venit ; or puer, quod aeger esset, non venit. The first is the reason given by any one; the second is the boy's reason (= as he said). SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 188. "A Substantive Clause is one which, like a Noun, is the Subject or Object of a verb, or in Apposition with the Subject or Object." (Review 42, a, page 12.) a. Of course, the verb of which a Substantive Clause is Subject must be Impersonal, or used Impersonally ; as, accidit ut luna plena ftsset J utrum vincat an vincatur, incertum est. * Imperative. 2. Subjunctive Clauses of NOTES. 227 h. Substantive Clauses are, — 1. Infinitive with. Subject Accusative: me ire oportet. (a.) Purpose (after askj fear, command, etc.; 179, d, e). {b.) Result (after happen, effect, doubt, etc. ; 181, a, b, d). 3. Indicative with Quod (the fact that)-, 182, d. 4. Indirect Questions ; as in the second example under a (above). PAETICIPLES. 189. A Participle is a Verbal Adjective; that is, it agrees with some Noun or Pronoun in gender, number, and case. Participles are declined, the Present Active being in the Third Declension (one termination), like recens, and the others in the First and Second, like bonus. a. The names of the Tenses of Participles (except of the Future) give no accurate idea of the time expressed. The time of the Present and Perfect Participles (like that of the Present and Perfect Infini- tive, 173) depends on the time of some other verb. The Present Participle denotes an action as going on, and the Perfect Participle as completed, at the time of that verb; as, pugnans (vulneratus) cadit (cecidit), he falls (fell) fighting (wounded). b. A Participle may be used as a Predicate Adjective ; as, Gallia in tres partes est divisa, Gaul is divided (in a divided condition) into three parts. c. The Active Voice (except in Deponent Verbs) has no Perfect Parti- ciple. Its place is supplied by the Ablative Absolute (in which the Perfect Passive Participle is used), or by the Pluperfect Subjunc- tive with quum (when, after, etc. ) ; as, having seen the city, urbe visa, or quum urbem vidisset. d. A Participle is often best translated by a clause ; as, eum procur- rentem vulneravit, he wounded him as he ran forward; eos transductos necavit, he carried them over and put them to death. e. The Future Active Participle is most frequently used with sum to form the Active Periphrastic Conjugation (82, a) . The form esse is frequently omitted (199, 2). /. The Gerundive (or Future Passive Participle) has two regular uses : (1.) With sum, to form the Passive Periphrastic Conjugation (82, b), when it always denotes necessity ; as, urbs delenda est, the city must be destroyed; maturandum est, haste must be made. (2.) Instead of the Gerund, as explained in 190, a. 228 NOTES. g. The Gerandive is also used as a Predicate Participle ; as, n5n vidS- tur ferendus, he does not seem bearable. h. The Gerundive is used with euro (/ care for^ provide for) and some other verbs to denote a Passive Purpose ; as, naves aedificandas ciiravit, he arranged for the building of ships. GERUND. 190. The Gerund is a Verbal Noun of the Second Declension, lacking the Nominative and Vocative, and used only in the Singular. The Infini- tive supplies the place of its Nominative ; as, scire est regere, knowledge is power (knowing is ruling); bellandi cupidi sunt, they are desirous of waging war; facultas regrediendi non datur, an opportunity for [of) retreating is not afforded. a. A Transitive Gerund (that is, one from a Transitive Verb) sometimes takes an Object in the Accusative, but regularly it does not. This Eule should be followed: TThen the Gerund would take a Direct Object, the Gerundive should be used instead. The Noun or Pro- noun that would be the Object takes the case that the Gerund would have, and the Gerundive agrees with it, as an Adjective. For in- stance, tlie hope of seeing the cities should not be written spes urbes videndi, but spes urbium videndarum : also, ad pacem petendam (not petendum); facultas ejus loci relinquendi (Gerundive), an opportunity for (of) leaving that place. SUPINE. 191. The Supine is a Verbal Noun of the Fourth Declension, having only the Accusative and Ablative Singular. a. The Accusative (often called the Former Supine) is used after verbs oi motion, and denotes ^wrjoose (180). If it is from a Transitive Verb, it may take a Direct Object ; as, venerunt pacem petitum, they came to seek peace. Eemark. The Future Infinitive Passive (as, laudatum iri) is a pecu^ liar instance of the use of the Supine in um. The form iri is the Passive Infinitive of e5 (I go); so that dicit nocitum iri means he says that harm is going to be done. b. The Ablative of the Supine is an Ablative of Respect, or Specification (153), and is most frequently used with Adjectives ; as, probat perficere c5nata perfacile factu esse, he shows that to accomplish their undertakings is {a thing) very easy to do (literally, with respect to the doing). NOTES. 229 ORDER OF WORDS IN A LATIN SENTENCE. 192. No absolute laws can be given for the order of words in a Latin sentence, as it is constantly changed to make one or more words emphatic. There is, however, a regular arrangement, which is usually observed in ordinary prose. This Megular Order is : 1. The Subject ; 2. Modi- fiers of the Subject ; 3. Modifiers of the Verb ; 4. The Verb. 193. A few rules for the position of certain words are here given : — 1. An Adjective^ expressing Quality, (if not emphatic) follows the word which it describes ; but a Numeral precedes. 2. A Genitive (if not emphatic) follows the word on which it de- pends ; as, liber pueri, the boy's book. Pueri liber means the boy's boolz (and not the girl's). 3. Direct and Indirect Object, The Direct Object stands nearer the Verb than the Indirect ; as, puero librum dat. 4. Pronouns, A Demonstrative Pronoun precedes its Noun. A Eelative Pronoun stands first in its clause, because it is a connective. An Interrogative Pronoun stands first, because, as an interrogative word, it serves to introduce the sentence or clause (like nonne, num). 5. An Adverbial element (Adverb, Ablative, Phrase) regularly stands immediately before the word which it modifies. Caution. Ne — quidem, not even, must have the emphatic word be- tween them ; as, ne Caesar quidem, not Caesar even, 6. Est, sunt, etc. {there is, there are), often stand first. Caution. Inquit, quoth he, must follow one or more words of the quotation. 7. A Preposition very frequently stands between its noun and the adjective modifying the noun ; as, magn5 in periculo ; omnibus cum copiis. 8. In the order of Personal Pronouns, the Latin is the reverse of the English; as, ego-et tu, you and I; ego et Caesar, Caesar and I, ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 194. Sections 34 to 44, pages 9-13, should be carefully studied. The same general principles apply to the analysis of both English and Latin sentences. They are here stated in brief form : (1.) Tell whether it is Simple, Compound, or Complex. a. Simple Sentence. (2.) Tell whether it is Declaratory, Inter- rogative, Imperative, or Exclamatory. (3.) Tell its Subject and Predicate. (4.) Name the modifiers of the Subject (if there are any). (5.) Name the modifiers of the Verb (if there are any), and tell what each expresses, — manner ^ cause, etc. 230 ' NOTES. b. Compound Sentence, Analyze each Clause as a Simple Sen- tence, and name the Connective, if one is expressed. c. Complex Sentence, Analyze the Principal Clause as a Simple Sentence. Name the Subordinate Clauses ; tell what each modi- fies, and why; analyze each as a Simple Sentence, naming its Connective. GENERAL FACTS AND USEFUL HINTS. 195. 1. Two negatives equal an afl&rmative ; as, nulli, none; nonnulli, some; nunquam, never; nonnunquam, sometimes. 2. Ne quidem, not even, always have the emphatic word between them ; as, ne equites quidem, not the horsemen even. 3. An Enclitic is a word which is always attached to another. The word means leaning on, as though Enclitics were too weak to stand alone. The most common Enclitics are -que (and), -ne (asking a question), and cum (with) when used with Personal, Reflexive, Relative, and Interroga- tive Pronouns. As an illustration of the weakness of -que, compare the- English bread *n' milk, horse 'n' carriage (as those expressions are some- times hastily pronounced). 4. When an Enclitic is added to a word, the acce7it is placed on the syllable before the Enclitic; as, itine'ribus,but itineribus^que; Ci'cero, but Cicero'ne (as. Cicerone valet? is Cicero well?). 5. Itaque may be a Conjunction meaning therefore (i^taque), or ita -f- que, meaning and so (ita'que). In the former sense it stands at the beginning of a sentence ; in the latter, the que connects the clauses of a sentence. 6. Two Adjectives (not Numerals) modifying a noun are regularly con- nected by et or que ; as, urbes multae et magnae, ma7iy great cities. 7. Quis = ?x-^o? (of several). XJter = which one? (of two). Alius = another (of several). Alter = the other (of two). Alienus = another's; as, servus alienus, another's slave. 8. Words used in pairs .£ire called Correlatives (because they relate to each other). Usually, the first has a Demonstrative idea, the second, a Relative force. The most common Correlatives are : — alius — alius, one — another. e5 — qu3, thither — whither. alii — alii, some — others. et — et, both — and. alter — alter, the one — the other. ibi — ubi, there — where. alter! — alteri, the one party — the inde — unde, thence — wheTice. other party. is — qui, lie — who. aut — aut, eith£r — or. . NOTES. 231 neque (nee) — neque (nee), neither talis — qualis, such — as. — no7\ tametsi — tamen, although — yet, non solum — sed etiam, not only tantus — quantus, as great — as, — hut also. tot — quot, as many — as. quum — turn, not only — hut also. turn — quum, at that time — when. quum — tamen, although — yet. vel — vel, either — or. 9. Alius has a peculiar use. To express these sentences : some did one thing, and some another ; one was running from one shi]?, another from another, it would seem, right (in view of 8, above) to say, alii aliud fecerunt, alii aliud ; alius alia ex navi currebat, alius ex alia. This, however, would be merely repeating the same words, and therefore the Latins simply said, alii aliud fecerunt; alius alia ex navi currebat. Also, alius alii auxilium tulerunt, they hore aid to one another {one to another). 196. "When shall I use Quin, and when Quominus?" A good authority says ; "The use of quominus springs from the courtesy of the Latin language. It is more polite to say, * I will hinder you so that you shall the less do what you wish,' than to say, * so that you shall not (quin) do it.' So after reciis5 the refusal is less point blank with quSminus than with quin." 197. 1. Impero takes the Dative ; jubeo, the Accusative. 2. Licet takes the Dative of Advantage ; oportet, the Accusative. 3. May (meaning permission), can, must, might (meaning per- mission), could, should (meaning duty), are not signs of the Subjunctive, but require separate verbs. May and might require the proper tense of licet ; can and could require possum ; must, ought, should, re- quire oportet or the Gerundive. 4. Ne may be an Adverb ; as, ne eamus, let us not go. Ne may be a Conjunction ; as, vereor ne veniat, I fear that he will come (lest he may come). N6 is an Interrogative word, always Enclitic; as, audivitne ? did he hear ? 5. Ut (meaning as) takes the Indicative, forming with it a parentheti- cal clause ; as, ut aiunt, as they say. 6. The Relative Qui may be equivalent to Ut is, ego, etc., expressing Purpose (179, a). Ut is, ego, etc., expressing Result (181, c). Quum is, ego, etc., expressing Cause (182, c). Quum is, ego, etc., expressing Concession (183, h). 7. Quum (cum) meaning When, takes the Subjunctive in WiQ Imperfect diXidi Pluperfe&t \Q\i%Q% \ but the Indicative in the other tenses. 232 NOTES. Since, takes the Subjunctive in all tenses. Although^ takes the Subjunctive in all tenses. 8. Jubeo, / order; veto, I forbid; cog5, / corrtfel ; patior, I allow, are regularly followed by the Accusative and Infinitive, and not by ut and the Subjunctive. 198. These forms, as well as others from the same Verbs, are often used Impersonally : — ipMgTidXuT, fighting is carried on; nocetur, haryn is done; non ex- spectandum est, no delay must he made ; quaeritur, the question is asked ; cogitandum est, thought must he taken; imperatum est, the order was given ; maturandum est, haste must he made ; ad arma concurritur, a general (con) rush to arms is made; parendum est, obedience must be rendered ; prospiciendum est, provision mtcst be made (rei frumenta- liae, for the corn supply); praecavendum est, care (precaution) must he taken; his rebus occurrendum (esse) existimavit, he thought that a rem.edy must he found for these things; parcitur hostibus, quarter is given to the enemy ; legibus utendum est, use must he made of the laws. 199. 1. Dubito takes The Infinitive, when it means hesitate, Dubito and dubius take The Subjunctive with quin, when mea»ing doubt (or doubtful) that. The Subjunctive of Indirect Question; as, dubitat utrum hoc facile an difficile sit. 2. Esse is very often omitted, especially with the Future Participles, This should never cause any difficulty, as the Infinitive will always be required by a word of saying, thinking, etc. ; as, Caesar se castra rnStQ- rum (esse) dixit; exspectandum (esse) non existimavit, he did not think that any delay should he made. 3. Remember that not only verbs, but words and phrases, of saying, thinking, etc., require the Accusative and Infinitive ; as, fama erat, eum interfectum esse ; habeo spem maximam hostes pacem facturSs (esse) ; Caesarem certiorem facio me venisse. 4. Case of the Person after Verbs of asking : — Rogo takes the Accusative ; peto, postulo, the Ablative with a (ab) ; quaerS, the Ablative with a (ab), de, or e (ex). 5. To express I say — not, use nego rather than dic5 non; as, negat se venire posse, he says that he canH come. HINTS ON TRANSLATION. 200. The beginner will notice, of course, that the order of words in a Latin sentence is often very different from the order of words in the same NOTES. 233 sentence when expressed in English. For example, in this sentence, Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus et ditissimus fuit Orgetorix, Among the Helvetii hy far the noblest and richest (man) was Orgetorix, the subject stands last ; yet the sentence makes perfectly good sense when read exactly in the order of the Latin words. In every Latin sentence the same method of translation should he observed, as nearly as possible. It will often be necessary, after the general meaning of a sentence has been found, to change the order of certain words to secure a better English order ; but the pupil who has mastered the idea, in just the order of words that the Latin presents, will find no difficulty in giving the sentence a more natural English order. To the Teacher, A good example for practice is the sentence on page 139, lines 25-29. If the teacher will read with the class several such sentences each day, even before the class has mastered the meaning and forms of all the words contained in those sentences, the pupils will very soon be able to **hold the sentence in suspense" until the whole has been read and the entire thought developed. APPE:tTDIX. FOEMS OF DEOLEITSIOlf, OONJUGATIOU, ETC. The References are to the Notes, in which Principles and Exceptions are more fully stated. NOUNS. 1. First Declension (N. 9): Stem-Vowel, A. Singular. Nominative, silva, a {the) forest. Genitive. silvae, of a forest. Dative. silvae, to {for) a forest. Accusative. silvam, a forest. Vocative. silva, forest! Ablative. silva, with {by, etc.) a forest. Plural. silvae, ybres^5. sil varum, of forests. silvis, to {for) forests. 8ilv3i,s, forests. silvae, forests! silvis, with {by, etc.) forests. a. For the Declension of Dea and Filia, see N. 9, e. 2. Second Declension (N. 10): Stem- Vowel, O. Singular, slave (m.) boy (m.) feld (m.) man (m.) NoM. servus puer ager vir Gen. servi puerl agri viri Dat. servo puero agro viro Ace. servum puerum agrum virum Voc. serve puer ager vir Abl. servo puero agro viro Plural. NOM. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. a. For the N. 10, d. " b. For the servi pueri servorum puerorum servis servos servi servis pueris pueros pueri pueris agri agrorum agris agros agri agris viri virorum viris viros viri viris gift (N.) donum doni dono donum donum dono dona dSnorum donis dona dona donis Declension of Filius and Proper Names in ius (as, Cassius), see Declension of Deus, see N. 10, y. 236 APPENDIX. 3. Third Declension; I. (N. 15, a, b) Stem ending in a Consonant {Mute). Singular. Icing (m.) NoM. rex Gen. regis Dat. regi Ace. regem Voc. rex Abl. rege Plural. N., Acc.jV. reges Gen. regum Dat., Abl. regibus judge (m.) judex judicis judici judicem judex judice soldier {m.) manhood (f.) head (n.) miles militis militi militem miles milite virtus virtutis virtuti virtutem virtus virtute caput capitis capiti caput caput capite judices milites virtutes capita judicum militum virtutum capitum judicibus militibus virtutibus capitibus 4. Third Declension: II. (N. 15, a, b) Stem ending in a Consonant (Liquid). Singular. consul (m.) sister (f. ) maiden (f.) name (n.) body (n.) NOM. consul soror Virgo nomen corpus Gen. consulis sororis virginis nominis corporis Dat. consul! sorori virgini nomini corpori ACG. consulem sororem virginem nomen corpus Voc. consul soror Virgo nomen corpus Abl. consule sorore virgine nomine corpore Plural. N.,Acc.,V. consules sorores virgines nomina corpora Gen. consulum sororum virginum nominum corporum Dat;, Abl. consulibus sororibus virginibus nominibus corporibus Remark. Pater, Mater, Frater (Genitives, Patris, Matris, Fra- tris) do not increase in the Genitive (N. 15, Remark). 5. Third Declension: III. (N. 16, 17) Stem ending in a Vowel (I). Singular . tower (f.) cloud (f.) sea (n.) animal (n.) spur (n.) Nom. turris niibes mare animal calcar Gen. turris nubis maris animalis calcaris Dat. turri niibi mari animali calcari Ace. turrem (im ) niibem mare animal calcar \^oe. turris niibes mare animal calcar Abl. turre (i) nube mari animali calcari Plural. NOM. turres nubes maria animalia calcaria Gen. turrium niibium marium animalium calcarium Dat. turribus niibibus maribus animalibus calcaribus Ace. turres (is) nubes(is) maria animalia calcaria Voc. turres niibes maria animalia calcaria Abl. turribus niibibus maribus animalibus calcaribus APPENDIX. 237 6. Third Declension: IV. (N. 18) Stem ending in a Consonant (Singular) and a Vowel (Plural). Singular, city (f.) mountain (m.) night (f.) Stem. NOM. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. Plural. Stem, NOM. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. (urb-) urbs urbis urbi urbem urbs urbe (mont-) mons montis monti montem mons monte (noct-) nox noctis nocti noctem nox nocte cohort (f.) (cohort-) cohors cohortis cohort! cohortem cohors cohorte client (c.) (client-) cliens clientis client! clientem cliens cliente (urbi-) (monti-) (nocti-) (cohorti-) (clienti-) urbes montes noctes cohortes elientes urbium montium noctium cohortium clientium urbibus montibus noctibus cohortibus clientibus urb§s (is) montes (is) noctes (is) cohortes (is) elientes (is) urbes montes noctes cohortes elientes urbibus montibus noctibus cohortibus clientibus 7. Third Declension; Irregular Forms, Singular, old man (m.) force (f.) NoM. senex Gen. senis Dat. sen! Ace. senem Voc. senex Abl. sene Plural. N., Ace, V. senes Gen. senum Dat., Abl. senibus 8. Fourth Declension (N. 20): Stem- Vowel, U. , Singular. Plural. Singular. orce (f.) ox^ cow (c.) Jupiter (m.) vis bos Jiipiter vis bo vis Jovis . • • bovi Jovi vim bovem Jovem vis bos Jiipiter vi bove Jove vires boves virium boum viribus bobus (biibus) Plural. chariot (m.) horn (n.) NOM. currus currus cornu cornua Gen. curriis curruum cornus cornuum Dat. currui curribus cornti cornibus Ace. currum currus cornii cornua Voc. currus curriis cornii cornua Abl. curru curribus cornu cornibus 238 APPENDIX. a. Domus, house, home (N. 21, 6), belongs to the Second and Fourth De- clensions. Singular. Plural. NoM. domus domiis Gen. domus (domi*) domuum (domorum) DAT. domui (domo) domibus Ace. domum domos (domus) Voc. domus domiis Abl. , domo (domu) domibus 9. Fifth Declension (N. 22) : ; Stem- Vowel, E. Sing, day (m.) Plur. Sing, thing (f.) Plur. faith (f.) NoM. dies dies res res fides Gen. diei dierum rgi (N. 22, d) rerum fidgi DAT. diei diebus r6i rebus fidgi Ace. diem dies rem res fidem Voc. dies dies res res fides Abl. diS diebus re rebus fide ADJECTIVES. 10. First and Second Declensions (N. 24, a): US. Magnus, great. Singular. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. NoM. magnus magna magnum Gen. magni magnae magni DAT. magno magnae magno Ace. magnum magnam magnum Voc. magne magna magnum Abl. magno magna magno Plural. NOM. magni magnae magna Gen. magnorum magnarum magnorum DAT. magnis magnis magnis Ace. magnos magnas magna Voc. magni magnae magna Abl. magnis magnis magnis a. First and Second Declensions: EB. Liber,. /Vee. Singular. Plural. M. F. N. M. F. N. N. liber libera liberum Hberi liberae Ubera G. Kberi liberae Hberi liberorum Hberarum Kberorum D. libero liberae libero liberis Hberis Hberis Ac. liberum liberam liberum liberos Hberas \ Hbera V. Kber libera liberum Hberi Hberae Hbera Ab. libero Hbera libero Uberis Hberis Hberia * Really the Locative Case (N. 159, c). APPENDIX. 239 Niger, hhch. Singular. M. F. N. NoM. niger nigra nigrum Gen. nigri nigrae nigri Dat. nigro nigrae nigro Ace. nigrum nigram nigrum Voc. niger nigra nigrum Abl. nigro nigra nigro Plural. M. F. N. nigri nigrae nigra nigrorum nigrarum nigrorum nigris nigris nigris nigros nigras nigra nigri nigrae nigra nigris nigris nigris 11. First and Second Declensions : Genitive in lUS, Dative in i. For the entire list of these Adjectives {with English meanings)^ see N. 43, 6. The declension of the Singular of unus, alius, uter, and alter is her* given* The Plural endings are like those of bonus. M. NoM. iinus Gen. unius Dat. uni Ace. unum Abl. uno M. NoM. alius Gen. alius Dat. alii Ace. alium Abl. alio F. una iinius uni linam iina F. alia alius alii aliam alia n. iinum unius uni unum tino N. aliud alius alii aliud alio M. F. N. uter utra utrum utrius utrius utrius utri utri utri utrum utram utrum utro utra utro M. F. N. alter altera - alterum alterius alterius alterius alteri alteri alter! alterum alteram alterum alters altera altero 12. Third Declension; M. NoM. acer Gen. acris Dat. acri Acc. acrem Voc. acer Abl. acri Singular. F. acris acris acri acrem acris acri Three Endings: ER (N. 25, a; 26, a). Acer, sharp. N. acre acris acri acre acre acri Plural. M. F. N. acres acres acria acrium acrium acrium acribus acribus acribus acres (is) acres (is) acria acres acres acria acribus acribus acribus 13. Third Declension: Two Endings:* 18(^.25,5; 26,6). Fortis, brave. Singular. NOM. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. M. and F. fortis fortis forti fortem fortis forti N. forte fortis forti forte forte forti Plural. M. and F. N. fortes fortia fortium fortium fortibus fortibus fortes (is) fortia fortes fortia fortibus fortibus * The Declension of Comparatives is given in 15. 240 APPENDIX. 14. Third Declension: One Ending (N. 25, c; 26, c). NOM. Gen. DAT. Ace. Voc. Abl. NOM. Gen. DAT. Ace. Voc. Abl. Singular. M. and F. N. audax {hold) audax audacis audaci audacem audax audace (i) audacis audaci audax audax audace (i) Plural. M. and F. audaces audacium audacibus audaces (is) audaces audacibus N. audacia audacium audacibus audacia audacia audacibus Recens, recent, recens recens recentes recentia recentis recentis recentium recentium recenti recenti recentibus recentibus recentem recens recentes (is) recentia recens recens recentes recentia recentibus recentibus recente (I) recente (i) In the following Adjectives (one ending) only the Nominative and Genitive, Singular and Plural, are given to show the general form of declension : — Sing. M. and f. n. NoM.. par {equal) par Gen. paris paris (Abl. pari) M. and f. n. dives {rich) dives divitis divitis M. and f. n. vetus {old) vetus veteris veteris Plural. NoM. pares paria divites (ditia) veteres Vetera Gen. parium parium divitum divitum veterum veterum Singular, m. and f. n. NoM. praeceps {headlong) praeceps Gen. praecipitis praecipitis Plural. M. and F. N. iens {going) iens euntis euntis NOM. praeclpites praecipitia euntes euntia Gen. praecipitium praecipitium euntium euntium 15. Comparatives have Two Endings, and are thus declined: — Singular. Plural. M. and F. N. M. and F. N. NOM. fortior fortius fortiores fortiora Gen. fortioris fortioris fortiorum fortiorum DAT. fortiori fortiori fortioribus fortioribus Ace. fortiorem fortius fortiores (is) fortiora Voc. fortior fortius fortiores fortiora Abl. fortiore (i) fortiore (i) fortioribus fortioribus APPENDIX. 241 a. Pliis (N. 27) is a Neuter Noun in the Singular, and an Adjective in thi Plural. Singular. Plural. Neuter. m. and f. n. NoM. plus plures plura Gen. pluris plurium pltirium Dat. loanting pluribus pluribus Ace. plus plures (is) plura Abl. plure pluribus pluribus COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 16. Regular Comparison. (See N. 30.) The following classes of Adjectives are somewhat Irregular in Comparison* a. Adjectives ending in er. (See N. 31, a.) b. Six Adjectives in lis. (See N. 31, 6.) c. Adjectives ending in dicus, ficus, and volus. (See N. 32.) 17. Irregular and Defective Comparison. (See N. 33.) a. bonus, melior, optimus, good, better, best. malus, pejor, pessimus, bad, worse, worst. magnus, major, maximus, great, greater, greatest, parvus, minor, minimus, little, less, least. multus, — , plurimus, much, most (Masculine). multa, , pliirima, much, most (Feminine). multum, pliis (App. 15, a.), pliirimum, much, more, most (Neuter). multl, plures, plurimi, many, more, most. b. These Adjectives have no Positive (see N. 34) ; they are derived from Prepositions : — PREP. PCS. COMP. SUP. (cis, citra), citerior, citimus, hither, hithermost. (in, intra), interior, intimus, inner, innermost (inmost). (prae, pro), prior, primus, /b?'mer,j^?'s^ (prope), propior, proximus, nearer, nearest (next). (ultra), ulterior, ultiTnus, farther, farthest. c. These are also derived from Prepositions (N. 35) ; the Positive is generally used as a Noun : — PCS. COMP. SUP. exterus, exterior, extremus (or extimus) outer, outermost. inferus, inferior, infimus (or imus), lower, lowest. posterus, posterior, postremus (or postumus), hinder (later), last superus, superior, supremus (or summus), higher, highest. d. For the Comparison of dives, juvenis, senex, see N. 36, a, b. e. For Comparison by magis and maxime, see N. 37. 18. For the Formation and Comparison of Adverbs, see N. 38, 39. 16 242 APPENDIX. 19. The Numeral Adjectives (N. 41) and Adverbs (N. 44) are: — Cardinal, Ordinal, answering the question, which in order ? Distributive, Adverbs, answering the question, answering the question. answering the question, Jww many ? how many each ? how often ? 1 unus, a, um primus, a, um singuli, one by semel, once. 2 duo, ae, o secundus or alter bini [one. bis 3 tres, tria tertius terni or trini ter 4 quattuor quartus quaterni quater 5 quinque quintus quinT quinquies 6 sex sextus seni sexies 7 septem Septimus septeni septies 8 octo octavus octoni octies 9 novem nonus noveni novies 10 decern decimus deni decies 11 undecim undecimus undeni undecies 12 duodecim duodecimus duodeni duodecies 13 tredecim tertius decimus terni deni tredecies 14 quattuordecim quartus decimus quaterni deni quattuordecies 15 quindecim quintus decimus quini deni quindecies 16 sedecim sextus decimus seni deni sedecies 17 septendecim Septimus decimus septeni deni septies decies 18 duodeviginti (octodecim) duodevicesimus duodeviceni duodevicies 19 undeviginti (novendecim) undevicesimus undeviceni undevicies 20 viginti vicesimus viceni vicies 21 unus et viginti (viginti unus) vicesimus primus viceni singuli semel et vicies 30 triginta tricesimus triceni tricies 40 quadraginta quadragesimus quadrageni quadragies 60 quinquaginta quinquagesimus quinquageni quinquagies 60 sexaginta sexagesimus sexageni sexagies 70 septuaginta septuagesimus septuageni septuagies 80 octoginta octogesimus octogeni octogies 90 nonaginta nonage simus nonageni nonagies 100 centum centesimus centeni centies 101 centum et unus centesimus primus centeni singuli centies semel 200 ducenti, ae, a ducente simus duceni ducenties 300 trecenti trecentesimus treceni trecenties 400 quadringenti quadringente simus quadringeni quadringenties 500 quingenti quingentesimus quingeni quingenties 600 sexcenti sexcentesimus sesceni sexcenties 700 septingenti septingentesimus septingeni septingenties 800 octingenti octingentesimus octingeni octingenties 900 nongenti nongentesimus nongeni nongenties 1000 miUe millesimus singula millia millies 2000 duo millia bis millesimus bina millia bis miUies APPENDIX. 243 20. Numeral Adjectives. The following require special notice : — a. Unus is declined in 11, a, of the Appendix. h. Duo and tres * are thus declined: — M. F. N. M. and F. N. N,V. duo duae duo tres tria Gen. duorum duarum duorum trium trium DAT. duobus duabus duobus tribus tribuB Ace. duos (duo) duas duo tres (tris) tria Abl. duobus duabus duobus tribus tribus c. Mille (N. 43, e) is indeclinable, as an Adjective; as a Noun {Neuter) it has, in the Singular, Nom. mille ; Ace. mille. In the Plural it is declined like the Plural of mare, thus: Nom. millia j Gen. miUium, etc. PRONOuisrs. 21. The Personal Pronouns f (N. 46) are thus declined: — First Person. Second Person. N. ego, /. nos, we, tu, thou, vos, ye or you. G. mei, of me. nostrum (til), o/ws. tui vestrum (vestri) D. mihi, to (for) me. nobis, to (for) us. tibi vobis Ac. me, me. nos, us. te vos V. wanting. wanting. tu vos ^ Ab. me, by (from, with) me. nohia, by (etc.) us. te vobis 22. The Reflexive Pronouns of the First and Second Persons are described in N. 47. The Reflexive Pronoun of the Third Person is declined alike in both numbers : — Gen. sui, of himself, herself itself, themselves. Dat. sibi, to (or for) himself, herself etc. Ace. se or sese, himself herself etc. Abl. se or sese, by {from, with) himself herself etc. 23. The Possessive Pronouns are declined like magnus and niger (see N. 48). Meus has mi in the Vocative Singular Masculine. 24. The Demonstrative Pronouns (N. 49) are thus declined : — Singular. Plural. M. F. N. M. F. N. NoM. hie haec hoc, this. hi hae haec, these. Gen. hujus hujus hujus horum harum horum Dat. huic huic huic his his his Ace. hunc hanc hoc hos has haec Abl. hoc hac hoc his his his Nom. is ea id, that. ii (ei) eae ea, those. Gen. ejus ejus ejus eorum earum eorum Dat. ei ei ei iis (eis) iis (eis) iis (eis) Ace. eum eam id eos eas ea Abl. eo ea eo iis (eis) iis (eis) iis (eis) * Declined like the Plural of fortis. t How is the lack of a Third Personal Pronoun I supplied V (N. 46.) APPENDIX. Singular. Singular. M. F. N. M. F. N. me* iUa iUud, that. ipse* ipsa ipsum, self. illius illius illius ipsius ipsius ipsius illi illi iUi ipsi ipsi ipsi iUum iUam iUud ipsum ipsam ipsum iUo iUa iUo ipso ipsa ips5 244 NOM. Gen. DAT. Ace. Abl. Iste, ista, istud, that {near you), is declined like ille. idem, the same. Singular. Plural. M. F. N. M. F. N. NoM. Idem eadem idem iidem (ei-) eaedem eadem Gen. ejusdem ejusdem ejusdem eorundem earundem eorundem Dat. eidem eidem eidem iisdem or eisdem Ace. eundem eandem idem eosdem easdem eadem Abl. eodem eadem eodem iisdem or eisdem 25. The Relative Pronoun Qui (N. 50), is thus declined: — Who, Which, That. Singular. Plural. M. F. n. M. F. N. NOM. qui ' quae quod qui quae quae Gen. cujus cujus cujus quorum quarum quorum Dat. cui cui cui quibus quibus quibus Ace. quem quam quod quos quas quae Abl. quo qua quo quibus quibus quibus 26. The Interrogative Pronoun Quis (Qui, N. 51) is declined in the Plural like the Relative. The Singular is : — Whof Which? What? quae quid (quod) cujus cujus cui cui quam quid (quod) qua quo 27. The Indefinite Pronouns are described in N". 52. The simple forms (Quis, Qui) are rare. Most of the Compounds are declined like the Relative and Interrogative. Aliquis, si quis, ne quis, are thus declined: — Some one, Any. Plural. NOM. quis (qui) Gen. cujus DAT. cui Ace. quem Abl. quo Singular. NoM. aliquis t aliqua Gen. alicujus alicujus Dat. alicui alicui Ace. aliquem aliquam Abl. aliquo aliqua aliquidt aliqui aliquae aliqua alicujus aliquorum aliquarum aliquorum alicui aliquibus aliquibus aliquibus aliquid aliquos aliquas aliqua aliquo aliquibus aliquibus aliquibus The Plural of ille and ipse is like that of magnus or bonus. Or aliqui (Masculine), aliquod (Neuter), when used as an adjective. APPENDIX. 245 VERBS: FIRST CONJUGATION. 28. Active Voice. — Amo, / love. Principal Parts. Pres. Indie. Pres. Infin. Perf. Indie, Supine. amo, amare, amavi, amatum. Steins : Present^ ama ; Perfect, amav ; Supine, amat. INDICATIVE MODE. Present Tense. SINGULAB. amo, / love. amas, you love. amat, he {she) lovts. PLURAL. amamus, we love. amatis, you love, amant, they love* amabam, I was loving, amabas, you were loving, amabat, he was loving. Imperfect. amabamiud, we were loving, amabatis, you were loving, amabant, they were loving. amabo, / s amabis, you will love, amabit, he will love. Future. amapbimus, we shall love. amabit is, i/ou will love, amabunt, they will love. Perfect. amavi, / have loved, I loved. amavisti, you have loved, you loved. amavit, he has loved, he loved. amavimus, we have loved, we loved. amavistis, you have loved, you loved, amaverunt (ere), they have loved, they loved. amaveram, / had loved, amaveras, you had loved, amaverat, he had loved. Pluperfect. amaveramus, we had loved, amaveratis, you had loved. amaverant, they had loved. Future Perfect. amavero, / shall have loved. amaveris, you will have loved. amaverit, he will have loved. amaverimus, we shall have loved, amaveritis, you will have loved. amaverint, tliey will have loved. 2 46 APPENDIX. SUBJUNCTIVE.* SINGULAB. Present. PLURAL. amem ames amet amemus ametis ament Imperfect. amarem amares amaret amaremus amaretis amarent Perfect. amaverim amaveris amaverit amaverimus amaveritis amaverint Pluperfect. amavissem amavisses amavisset amavissemus amavissetis amavissent IMPERATIVE. Present. 3. 2. amate Future. , love {ye). 2. 3. amat5, thou shalt love. amato, he shall love. 2. amatote, ye shall love, 3. amanto, they shall love INFINITIVE. Present, amare, to love. Perfect, amavisse, to have loved. Future, amaturus esse, to be about to love. PARTICIPLES. Present. Future. amans, ( amatiirus, about to love Ace. amatum, to love. Abl. amatu, to love. GERUND. SUPINE. Gen. amandi, of loving. Dat. amando, to {for) loving. Ace. amandum, loving. Abl. amando, by loving. * The Subjunctive has a great variety of meanings; they can be best learned by a study of the different uses of the mode, as they are presented in the Lessons. APPENDIX. 247 verbs: first conjugation". 29. Passive Voice. — Amor, / am loved. Principal Farts* ^res. Ind. Pres. Inf. Pejf. Ind. amor, amari. amatus sum Stems : Present, ama ; Supine^ INDICATIVE MODE. Present Tense. amat SINGULAR. amor, / am loved. amaris (re), you are loved. amatur, he (she, it) is loved. PLURAL. amamur, we are loved. amamini, you are loved, amantur, they are loved. Imperfect. / was loved. amabar amabaris (re) amabatur amabor amaberis (re) amabitur amatus sum amatus es amatus est amatus eram amatus eras amatus erat amatus ero amatus eris amatus erit amabamur amabamini amabantur Future. / shall be loved. amabimur amabimini amabuntup Perfect. / have been loved, was loved. amati sumus amati estis amati sunt Pluperfect. / had bee7i loved. amati eramus amati eratis amati erant Future Perfect. / shall have been loved. amati erimus amati eritis amati erunt 248 APPENDIX. SINGULAR. amer ameris (re) ametur SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. PLURAL. amemur amemini amentur amarer amareris (re) amaretur Imperfect. amaremur amareminl amarentur amatus aim axaatus sis amatus sit Perfect. amati simus amati sitis amati sint amatus ess^m amatus esses amatus esset Pluperfect. amati essemus amati essetis amati essent 2. amare, b$ (thou) loved. IMPERATIVE. Present. I amamini, be (ye) loved. 2. amator, thou shalt be loved. 3. amator, he shall be loved. Future. 2. wanting. 3. amantor, they shall be loved. INFINITIVE. Present, amari, to be loved. Perfect, amatus esse, to have been loved. Future, amatum iri, to be about to be loved. PARTICIPLES. Perfect, amatus, having been loved. Gerundive, amandus, to-be-loved, deserving to be loved. APPENDIX. 249 VERBS: SECOND CONJUGATION. Moneo, / warn, advise, Prin. Parts : Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. Supine. 30. Active: moneo, monere, monui, monitum. 31. Passive: moneor, moneri, monitus sum. Steins: Present^ mone ; Perfect, monu; Supine^ monit. Notice that only a few tenses of moneo are here given in full ; the others have the same tense-signs and endings as in amo. (30) ACTIVE. (31) PASSIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. SINGULAR. moneor monear moneris (re) monearis (re) monetur moneatur PLURAL. moneamur moneamini moneantur SINGULAR. moneo mone am mones moneas monet moneat PLURAL. monemus moneamus monemur monetis moneatis monemird monent moneant monentur Imperfect (like amo). monebam, etc. monerem, etc. | monebar, etc. Future (like amo). monebo, etc. | monebor, etc. Perfect (liJce amo). monui, etc. monuerim, etc. I monitus sum,etc. monitus sim, etc. Pluperfect (like amo). monueram, etc. monuissem, etc. I monitus eram, monitus essem. monerer, etc. etc. etc. monuero, etc. SING. Pres. 2. mone Fut. 2. moneto 3. moneto PLUR. monete monetote monento PLUR. monemini wanting. monentor Future Perfect (like amo). I monitus ero, etc. IMPERATIVE. SING. Pres. 2. monere Fut. 2. monetor 3. monetor INFINITIVE. Pres. monere Perf. monuisse I Pres. moneri Perf. monitus esse Fut. moniturus esse | Fut. monitum iri PARTICIPLES. Pres. monens Fut. moniturus I Perf. monitus G've. monendus Gerund, monendl. o, um, o I y^^^^^ ^^^^^ bupiNE. monitum, monitu ) 250 APPENDIX. VERBS: THIRD CONJUGATION. Rego, / direct, rule, Prln. Parts s Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. Supine. 32. Active: rego, regere, rexi, rectum. 33. Passive: regor, regi, rectus sum. Steins: Present, rege (N. 79, 2); Perfect, rex; Supine, red. (32) ACTIVE. (33) PASSIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. regS regam regor regar regis regas regeris (re) regaris (re) regit regat regitur regatur PLURAL. PLURAL. regimus regamus regimur regamur regitis regatis regimim regamini regunt regant reguntur . regantur regebam SINGULAR. regam reges reget PLURAL. regemus regetis regent rexX SING. Pres. 2. rege Put. 2. regito 3. regito Imperfect (like moneo). regerem J regebar regerer Future. SINGULAR. regar regeris (re) regetur PLURAL. regemur regemini regentur Perfect (like moneo). rexerim | rectus sum rectus sim Pluperfect (like moneo). rexissem | rectus eram rectus essem Future Perfect (like moneo). I rectus ero IMPERATIVE. PLUR. SING. INFINITIVE, •I regite regitote regunto ACTIVE. Pres. 2. regere Fut. 2. regitor 3. regitor PASSIVE. PLUR. regimim wanting reguntor Pres. regere Perf. rexisse Pres. regi Perf. rectus esse Fut. rectum iri [ Fut. recturus esse PARTICIPLES. Pres. regens Fut. recturus Perf. rectus G've. regendus VERBAL NOUNS. Gerund, regendi, etc. Supine, rectum, rectu. APPENDIX. 251 VERBS: THIRD CONJUGATION, 34. Verbs in IO. This class of Verbs is described in Note 79, 3. Prin. Parts: Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Active : capio, / taJce. capere Passive : capior capi Steins : Present, cape ; Perfect, cep ; ACTIVE. PASSIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. Perf. Ind, Supine. cepi captum captus sum capt. capio capis capit capimus capitis capiunt capiebam capiam capies capiet, etc. cepi ceperam cepero Pres. 2. cape Put. 2. capit 6 3. capit 6 SINGULAR. capiam capias capiat PLURAL. capiamus capiatis capiant capior caperis (re) capitur SINGULAR. capiar capiaris (re) capiatur PLURAL. capiamur capiamini capiantur capimur capimini capiuntur Imperfect. caperem | capiebar caperer Future. capiar capieris (re) ^ capietur, etc. Perfect. I captus sum Pluperfect* I captus eram Future Perfect. I captus ero IMPERATIVE. Pres. 2. capere Fut. 2. capitor 3. capitor INFINITIVE, cepisse I Pres. capi Perf. captus esse I Fut. captum iri ceperim cepissem capite capitote capiunto captus Sim captus essem capimini wanting capiuntor Pres. capere Perf. Fut. capturus esse PARTICIPLES. Pres. capiens Fut. capturus | Perf. captus Gerund, capiendi, 6, urn, o ) y^^^^^ ^^^^^^ bupiNE. captum, captu . ) G've. capiendus 252 APPENDIX. VERBS: FOURTH CONJUGATION. Audio, / hear. Prin. Parts: Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. 35. Active: audio audire 36. Passive: audior audiri Steins : Present, audi ; Perfect, audiv ; (35) ACTIVE. INDICATIVE. S UB JUNCTIVE. INDICATIVE. Present. Supine. auditum Perf. Ind. audivi auditus sum )upine, audit. (36) PASSIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE SINGULAR. SINGULAR. audio audiam audior audiar audis audias audiris (re) audiaris (re) audit audiat auditur audiatur PLUKAL. PLURAL. audimus audiamus audimur audiamur auditis audiatis audimini audiamini audiunt audiant audiuntur audiantur Imperfect. audiebam audirem 1 audiebar Future. audirep SINGULAR. SINGULAR. audiam audiar audies audieris (re) audiet audietur PLURAL. PLURAL. audiemus audiemur audietis audiemini audient audientur Perfect. audivi audiverim 1 auditus sum Pluperfect. auditus Sim audiveram audivissem 1 auditus eram auditus essem Future Perfect. audivero 1 auditus ero IMPERATIVE. Pres. 2. audi audite Pres. 2. audire audimini Fut. 2. audits auditote Fut. 2. auditor wanting. 3. audits audiunto 3. auditor audiunt or INFINITIVE. Pres. audire Perf. audivisse Pres. audiri Perf. auditus ese Fut. audi turns esse I Fut. auditum iri PARTICIPLES. Pres. audiens Fut. auditiirus | Perf. auditus G've. audiendus Gerund, audiendi, o, um, 6 j y^rbal Nouns. Supine, auditum, u > APPENDIX. 253 DEPONENT VERBS: ALL CONJUGATIONS. 37. (See Note 80.) The Principal Parts and meanings of these verbs are given in the Vo^ cabulary. INDICATIVE. I. II. III. IV. Pres. hortor vereor sequor potior hortaris (re) vereris (re) sequeris (re) potiris (re) hortatur veretur sequitur potitur hortamur veremur sequimur potimur hortamini veremini sequimini potimim hortantur verentur sequuntur potiuntur Imp. hortabar verebar sequebar potiebar Fut. hortabor verebor sequar potiar Perf. hortatus sum veritus sum secutus sum potitus sum Plup. hortatus eram veritus eram secutus eram potitus eram F. P. hortatus ero veritus ero secutus ero potitus ero SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres. horter verear sequar potiar Imp. hortarer vererer sequerer potirer Perf. hortatus sim veritus sim secutus sim potitus sim Plup. hortatus essem veritus essem secutus essem potitus essem hortare, ator IMPERATIVE, verere, etor sequere, itor potire, itor INFINITIVE. Pres. hortari vereri sequi potiri Perf. hortatus esse veritus esse seciitus esse potitus esse Fut. hortaturus esse veriturus esse secuturus esse potiturus esse PARTICIPLES. Pres. hortans verens sequens potiens Fut. hortaturus veriturus secutiirus potiturus Perf. hortatus veritus seciitus potitus G've. hortandus verendus VERBAL sequendus NOUNS. potiendus Ger. hortandi, etc. verendi, etc. sequendi, etc. potiendi, etc. Sup. hortatum, ix veritum, u secutum, u potitum, u 38. Semi-Deponent Verbs. (See Note 81.) audeo, audere, ausus sum, dare ; gaudeo, gaudere, gavisus sum, rejoice; fido, fidere, fisus sum ^ trust ; soleo, solere, solitus sum, 6e wont. 254 APPENDIX. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATIONS. 39. a. First (or Active). — Amaturus sum, / am about to love (see N. 82). Amattirus, Moniturus, Rectums, Auditurus, — Imperf. Future. Perfect. Pluperf. Indic. sum eram ero fui fueram SuBj. Sim essem fuerim fuissem Infin. esse fuisse b. Second (or Passive). — Amandus sum, / must be loved. Amandus, Monendus, Regendus, Audiendus, — Present. Imperf. Future. Perfect. Pluperf. Indic. sum eram ero fui fueram SuBj. Sim essem fuerim fuissem Infin. esse fuisse Fut. Perf. fuero Fut. Perf. fuero IRREGULAR VERBS. 40. Sum, I am. (See Note 84.) Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf Ind. Supine. Prin. Parts t sum, esse, fui, wanting. Stems : Pres. es ; Perf. fu ; Sup. fut (found in the Future Participle). INDICATIVE. Present. PLURAL. sumus, we are. SINGULAR. sum, / am. es, thou art (you are). est, he (she, it) is. eram, / was. eras, you were. erat, he (she, it) was. ero, I shall be. eris, you will be. erit, he will be. fui, / have been (was). fuisti, you have been (were). fuit, he has been (was). fueram, I had been. fueras, you had been. fuerat, he had been. fuero, / shall have been. fueris, you will have been. fuerit, he loill have been. estis, you are, sunt, they are. Imperfect. eramus, we were. eratis, you were. erant, they were. Future. erimus, we shall be. eritis, you will be. erunt, they will be. Perfect. fuimus, we have been (were). ^ fuistis, you have been (were). fuerunt (ere), they have been (were). Pluperfect. I fueramus, we had been. fueratis, you had been. I fuerant, they had been. Future Perfect. fuerimius, we shall have been, fueritis, you will have been, fuerint, they will have been. APPENDIX • 2 SUBJUNCTIVE OF Sum. Present. Imperfect. Perfect. Pluperfect. SINGULAR. sim essemi fuerim fuissem SIS esses fueris fuisses sit esset fuerit fuisset PLURAL. simus essemus fuerimus fuissemus sitis essetis fueritis fuissetis sint essent fuerint fuissent 255 IMPERATIVE. Present. 2. es, be thou. este, he ye. Future. 2. esto, thou shalt be. estote, ye shall be. 3. esto, he shall be. sunto, they shall be* INFINITIVE. Present, esse, to be. Perfect, fuisse, to have been. Future, futurus esse,^ to be about to be. PARTICIPLES. Present, wanting Future, futurus 1 For essem, forem is often used. 2 Yox futurus esse, fore is often used. Compounds of Sum. 41. Possum (/ am able, can) =■ potis (able) + sum. Possum = pot- sum ; t becomes s before s (N. 1 (4) 6), as, pos-sum, and is retained before e, as, pot-es. The verb is described in N. 85, 1. Prin. Parts: possum, posse (for pot-esse), potui (for pot-fui). INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. possum, / am aUe, can. possim INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Perfect. potui, / could. potuerim Pluperfect. potueram potuissem Future Perfect. potuero IMPERATIVE. wanting INFINITIVE. Pres. posse Perf. potuisse PARTICIPLES. Pres. potens (used as an adjective), powerful. a. In Prosum, Iprojit, help, pro becomes prod before e, as in the Present Indicative: (Singular) pro-sum, prod-es, prod-est; (Plural) pro-sumus, prod-estis, pro-sunt. Other instances are prod-eram, prod-ero. potes, you can. possis potest, he can. possit possumus, we can. possimus potestis, you can. possitis possunt, they can. possiut Imperfect. poteram, / could. possem Future. potero, / shall be able. 256 APPENDIX. IRREGULAR VERBS. 42. Pero, / hear. (See Note 86.) Prill. Farts: Active: fero, ferre, tuli, latum. Passive: feror, ferri, latus sum. ACTIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. PASSIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres. fero feram feror ferar fers feras ferris (re) feraris (re) fert ferat fertur feratur ferimus feramus ferimur feramur fertis feratis ferimini feramini ferunt ferant feruntur ferantur Imperf . ferebam ferrem ferebar ferrer Put. feram ferar Perf. tuli tulerim latus sum latus Sim Plup. tuleram tulissem latus eram latus essem P. Perf. tulero latus ero Imp. Pres. fer ferte ferre ferimini Put. ferto fertote fertor wanting ferto ferunto fertor feruntor Inf. Pres. ferre Perf. tulisse Pres. ferri Perf. latus esse Put. laturus esse Put. latum iri Part. Pres. fer ens Put. laturus Perf. latus G've. ferendus Ger. ferendi, etc. Sup. latum, u 43. Irregular Verbs: EO, I go, (See Note 87.) Prin. Parts : eo, ire, ivi, itum. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE, eam, eas, eat eamus, eatis, eant irem, ires, Iret iremus, iretis, irent Pres. SING, eo, is, it PLUR. imus, itis, eunt Imperf. ibam, ibas, ibat ibamus, ibatis, ibant ibo, ibis, ibit ibimus, ibitis, ibunt ivi iverim iveram ivissem Put. Perf. ivero Imperat. Pres. I, ite ; Fut. ito, ito, itote, eunto. Infin. Pres. ire Perf. ivisse Put. iturus esse Part. Pres. iens (Genitive, euntis) Put. iturus Gerund. eundi, etc. Supine, itum, itu Future. Perf. Pluperf. APPENDIX. 257 44. Irregular Verbs: Flo (/ am made^ become) is the Passive of Facio (See Note 88.) SUBJUNCTIVE, flam, fias, flat fiamus, fiatis, fiant fierem, fieres, etc. factus sim factus essem Imperat. Pres. fi, fite ; Fut. fito, fito, fitote, flunto Infin. Pres. fieri Perf. factus esse Put. factum iri Part. Perf. factus G've. faciendus 45. Irregular Verbs : Volo and its compounds (see Notes 89, 90) : — volo, velle, volui, to wish. nolo (= non volo), nolle, nolui, to be unwilling. malo (= magis volo), malle, malui, to wish rather, prefer. Present. INDICATIVE. Pres. SING. fio, fis, fit PLUR . flmus, fitis, fiunt Imp. fiebam, fiebas, etc Fut. flam, fies, etc. Perf. factus sum Plup. factus eram Fut. Perf. factus ero INDIC. SUB J. INDIC. SUB J. INDIC. SUBJ. volo velim n516 nolim malo malim VIS velis nonvis nolis mavis mails vult velit nonvult nolit ma vult malit volumus velimus nolumus nolimus malumus malimus vultis velitis nonvultis nolitis mavultis malitis volunt velint nolunt nolint Imperfect. malunt malint volebam vellem nolebam nollem Future. malebam mallem volam nolam Perfect. malam volui voluerim nolui noluerim Pluperfect. malui maluerim volueram voluissem nolueram noluissem malueram maluissem Future Perfect. voluero noluero maluero IMPERATIVE. Pres. nSli, nolite, do not. Fut. nolito, nolitote, thou shalt not, ye shall not, nolito, nolunto, he shall not, they shall not. INFINITIVE, velle voluisse nolle noluisse malle maluisse PARTICIPLES, volens, loiUlng. nolens, unwilling. 258 APPENDIX. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 46. (See Note 91.) The following have (in common use) only the tenses fonned from the Perfect Stem: coepi,* 1 began {have begun)-, meinini,t I remember; 6di,t I hate. r coep- \ Synopsis. < memin- > i, eram, ero, erim, issem, isse Ud- ) Remark 1. Passive forms of coepi (as coeptus sum) are used with the Passive Infinitive (N. 91, 1). Remark 2. Inquam and other Defective verbs are described in N. 91, a, b, IMPERSONAL VERBS. 47. (See Note 92.) Impersonal verbs are used in the Third Person Singu- lar of the Indicative and Subjunctive Modes (all tenses), and also in the Infinitive. A synopsis of three classes of Impersonal verbs is here given, as well as their Principal Parts : — 1. Regularly Impersonal (licet, Second Conjugation). 2. Used Impersonally in tlie Active (constat, accidit, First and Third Conjugations). 3. Used Impersonally in the Passive (pugnatur, nocetur [see N. 134]). Prin. Parts: constat, constare, constitit, it is evident, licet, licere, licuit, it is permitted. > accidit, accidere, accidit, it happens. pugnatur, pugnarl, pugnatum est, fighting is carried on. nocetur, noceri, nocitum est, harm is done. constat licet accidit pugnatur nocetur constabat licebat accidebat pugnabatur nocebatur constabit Hcebit accidet pugnabitur nocebitur constitit licuit accidit pugnatum est nocitum est constiterat licuerat acciderat pugnatum erat nocitum erat constiterit licuerit acciderit pugnatum erit nocitum erit constet liceat accidat pugnetur noceatur constaret liceret accideret pugnaretur noceretur constiterit licuerit acciderit pugnatum sit nocitum sit constitisset licuisset accidisset pugnatum esset nocitum esset constare licere accidere pugnarl noceri constitisse licuisse accidisse pugnatum esse nocitum esse constaturum liciturum pugnatum iri nocitum Iri esse esse * The Present-stem tenses of coepi are borrowed from incipio, / begin. t Novi, / hnow (from nosco), and consuevi, / am wont (from con- suesco), as well as memini and odi, are used in the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect, with the meaning of the Present, Imperfect, and Future; that is, they are preteritive verbs (N. 91, 2 and Remark). SPECIAL VOCABULARIES AND EXAMPLES. These Vocabularies have been prepared for the first 29 Lessons. The same Latin words are also given in the General Vocabulary. Beyond the 2^th Les- son, Special Examples are given for such Lessons as require them. adv., adverb. conj., conjunction. Abbreviations. f ., feminine gender. m., masculine gender. n., neuter gender, prep., preposition. LESSON I. agricola, ae, m. farmer. causa, ae, f. cause, reason, gloria, ae, f. glory. lingua, ae, f. tongue, language. memoria, ae, f. memory. mensa, ae, f. table. nauta, ae, m. sailor. amo. Hove. laudo, I praise. ager, agri, m.feld, amicus, i, m. friend. do, / give. equus, 1, m. horse, liber, libri, m. booh. libero, I free, release. Nouns. bellum, I, n. war. donum, i, n. gift. praemium, i, n. reward. templum, i, n. temple. peciinia, ae, f. money, Koma, ae, f. Rome. rosa, ae, f. rose, silva, ae, f. forest, Stella, ae, f. star, via, ae, f. way, road, victoria, ae, f. victory. LESSON IL puella, ae, f. girl, pugno, I fight. voco, / call. LESSON IIL magister, tri, m. master^ teacher, puer, 1, m. boy. Komanus, i, m. a Roman, servus, i, m. slave. vir, viri, m. man. LESSON IV. Adjectives. aeger, aegra, aegrum, sick. bonus, bona, bonum, good. liber, libera, liberum,/ree. magnus, magna, magnum, great, large, miser, misera, miserum, wretched. niger, nigra, nigrum, blacJc. parvus, parva, parvum, small. 260 SPECIAL VOCABULARIES AND EXAMPLES. LESSON V. c5pia, ae, f. (in the Singular) aburi- dance, plenty; (in the Plural) forces^ troqpSy supplies. et, conj. and. GaUi, orum, m. the Gauls. Geneva, ae, f. Geneva, Germani, orum, m. the Germans. gladius, I, m. sword. legatus, i, m. legate, lieutenant. occupo, / occupy, seize. oppidum, i, n. town (fortified). porto, I carry. Sabinus, i, m. Sabinus. supero, I overcome. Titus, i, m. Titus. vasto, / lay waste. LESSON VI. acutus, a, um, sharp. albus, a, um, white. altus, a, um, high, lofty, deep. attentus, a, um, attentive. beatus, a, um, happy, fortunate. clarus, a, um, bright, clear. exemiplum, i, n. example. insula, ae, f. island. latus, a, um, wide, broad. longus, a, um, long, multus, a, um, much, many. Humerus, i. m. number. periculum, I, n. peril, danger. porta, ae, f. gate, door, regnum, i, n. kingdom, sum, / am. timiduSt a* um, timid. LESSON vm. dea, ae, f. goddess, filia, ae, f. daughter, murus* I, m. wall. Principal Parts of Verbs* PRES. INDIC. , PRES. INFIN. PERF. INDIC. SUPINE. amo. amare. amavi. a.matum, love. do. dare. dedi, datum, give. laudo. laudare. laudavi. laudatum, praise. libero. liberare. libera vi. liberatum, /ree. monstro, monstrare. monstravi. monstratum, show. narro, narrare, narravi. narratum, tell. ports. portare, porta vi. portatum, carry. pugno. pugnare. pugnavi. ■pugnBstuinjJight. servo. servare. servavi. servatum, save, protect vasto. vastare. vastavi. vastatum, lay waste. LESSON IX. The new Verbs used in this Lesson are given in the Vocabulary for Lesson VIH fabula, ae, f. story. frumentum, i, n. corn. injuria, ae, f. injury, wrong. non, adv. not. SPECIAL VOCABULARIES AND EXAMPLES. 261 LESSON XI. auxilium, i, n. (in Sing.) aid; (in Plur.) auxiliaries. Caius, i, m. Caius. Cassius, i, m. Cassius. concilium, i, n. council. filius, i, m. son. Juliust it m. Julius. Marcus, i, m. Marcus. meus, a, um, my, mine. nuntio, are, etc. announce. patria, ae, i. fatherland, native land. Pompeius, i, m. Pompey. proelium, i, n. battle. LESSON XIII. aedifico, are, etc., build. alius, a, ud, other. alter, era, erum, the other (of two). natiira, ae, f. nature. neuter, tra, trum, neither. nullus, a, um, no, none. poeta, ae, m.poet. solus, a, um, only, alone. totus, a, um, entire, whole. ullus, a, um, any. unus, a, um, one, uter, tra, trum, which (of two). vaco, are, etc., be empty, unoccupied- vita, ae, f. life. LESSON XIV. caput, capitis, n. head, [capit-al] consul, consulis, m. consul. corpus, corporis, n. body, [corpor- al.] malus, a, um, bad, evil. miles, militis, m. soldier, [mili- tary.] nomen, nominis, n. name, [nomin- ate] rex, regis, m. king, [reg-al] soror, sororis, f. sister. Virgo, virginis, f. maiden, [virgin] LESSON XVI. altitildo, inis, f. height. ci vitas, atis, f. state. custos, odis, m. keeper, guard. dux, ducis, m. and f. leader, chief. flos, floris, TO., flower. f rater, tris, m. brother. honor, oris, m. honor. latitude, inis, f. width. Iegi5, onis, f. legion. leo, onis, m. lion. longitudo, inis, f. length. lux, liicis, f. light. mater, tris, f. mother. mos, moris, m. custom. opus, eris, n. work, task. pater, tris, va. father. princeps, ipis, m. chief, prince. tempus, oris, n. time. virtus, litis, f. manhood, courage. 262 SPECIAL VOCABULARIES AND EXAMPLES. LESSON XVII. animal, alls, n. animal, arx, arcis, f. citadel. calcar, aris, n. spur. coUis, is, m. hill. dux, ducis, m. and f . leader, chief. finis, is, m. (in Sing.) end, limit ; (in Plur.) territory. Gallia, ae, f. Gaul. hostis, is, m. and f . enemy (regularly in the Plural, to denote the enemy as a body). ignis, is, m.Jire, mare, is, n. sea. mons, mentis, m. mountain. navis, is, f. ship. nox, noctis, f. night. nubes, is, f. cloud. pars, partis, f . part. pulcher, chra, chrum, beautiful. turris, is, f. tower. urbs, urbis, f. city, vectigal, alls, n. tax. LESSON XIX. arma, orum, n. arms, Caesar, aris, m. Caesar, castra, orum, n. camp, expugno, are, etc., storm, take by storm. ignavus, a, um, cowardly. injustus, a, um, unjust. judex, icis, m. judge. Justus, a, um.tjust^. Examples. Urbem expugnare potes, you can (are able to) storm the city. Hostes superare potuisti, you could have (were able to) overcome the enemy. LESSON XX. dicit (3d. Conj.), he says. iter, itineris, n. way, journey, march. nego, are, etc., deny^ say not puto, are, etc., think, suppose. spero, are, etc., hope. Examples. ** Urbs magna est," (he says) " The city is great.^' Dicit urbem magnam esse, he says {that) the city is great. Sperat urbes magnas futuras esse, he hopes (that) the cities will be great. Putat iter longum fuisse, he thinks (that) the journey was (has been) long. SPECIAL VOCABULAKIES AND EXAMPLES. 263 LESSON XXI. Examples. SI pugnat, hostes superat, ifhejights, he overcomes the enemy. Si pugnabat, hostes superabat, if he was fighting, he was over- coming, etc. Si pugnabit, hostes superabit, if he fights {shall fight), he will Fact, -j overcome, etc. Si pugnavit, hostes superavit, if he fought (has fought), he overcame (has overcome), etc. Si pugnaverit, hostes superabit, if he fights (shall have fought), he will overcome, etc. Future Possible. Si pugnet, superet, if he should fight, he would over- come. Future Possible. Si pugnaverit, superet, if he should have fought, he would overcome. Pres. Impossible. Si pugnaret, superaret, if he were fighting (now), he would be overcoming. Past Impossible. Si pugnavisset, superavisset, if he had fought, he would have overcome. LESSON XXII. a, or ab, prep, (in this Lesson) by. decimus, a, um, tenth. lapis, idis, m. stone. signum, I, n. sign, signal. telum, i, n. weapon. tuba, ae, f. trumpet. vulnero, are, etc., wound. Examples. Titus gladio vulneratur, Titus is wounded with a sword (Means). Urbes ab Ariovisto expugnantur, the cities are stormed by Ariovistus (Agent). Oppidum a (or ab) militibus servatum est, the town was saved by the soldiers (Agent). LESSON XXIIL defensor, oris, m. defender. nudo, are, etc., strip. -que, enclitic conj. (N. 195, 3) and. servitus, litis, f. slavery. suspicio, onis, f. suspicion, timer, oris, m.fear. Examples* Urbem timore libero, I free the city f^om fear. Miirus defensoribus nudatus est, the wall has been stripped of defenders. 264 SPECIAL VOCABULAEIES AND EXAMPLES. LESSON XXIV. Sxamples. Compare the Examples for Lesson XXL Si ignavi f uissemus, urbs expugnata esset, if we had been cowardly, the city would have been taken by storm. Si pugnares, laudareris, if you were fighting (now), you would be praised. Si lauderis, pugnes, if you should be praised (hereafter), you would fght. Si laudatus sis, pugnes, if you should have been praised (hereafter), etc. LESSON XXVL aestas, atis, f. summer. alacer, cris, ere, eager, active. brevis, e, brief, short. celer, eris, ere, swift, quick. diflacilis, e, difficult. faeilis, e, easy, fort is, e, brave. gravis, e, heavy. homo, inis, m. and f. man (i. e. hu- man being). immortalis, e, immortal. levis, e, light. mortalis, e, mortal. omnis, e, all, every. onus, eris, n. load, burden. socius, i, m. ally, companion, tristis, e, sad. utilis, e, useful. LESSON XXVII. audax, acis, bold. dives, itis, rich. felix, icis, happy. florens, entis, flourishing. infelix, icis, unhappy. ingens, tis, huge, mighty. nobilis, e, noble. par, paris, equal. potens, tiSi powerful. recens, tis, recent. Romanus, a, um, Roman, sapiens, tis, wise. vetus, eris, old. LESSON XXVIIL amans, tis, loving, affectionate. amicus, a, mxd., friendly . Aedui, orum, m. ^^e Aedui. Ariovistus, i, m. Ariovistus. cams, a, um, dear. eques, itis, m. horseman; (Plural) cavalry. lex, legis, f. law. pedes, itis, m. foot-soldier ; (Plural) infantry. SPECIAL VOCABULARIES AND EXAMPLES. 265 LESSON XXIX. acriter, sharply, fiercely. attente, attentively. audacter, boldly. celeriter, swiftly, quickly. diligenter, diligently, carefully. dissimilis, e, dissimilar, unlike. facile, easily. for titer, bravely. inimicus, a, um, unfriendly ; (as a noxm) foe, personal enemy. quam, adv. than. sapienter, wisely. similis, e, similar, like. Example. Virtus militum major quam ducis fuit, the soldiers' bravery was greater than the leader'' s. No Special Vocabularies will be given for the remaining Les- sons; FOR SOME OF THEM, HOWEVER, SPECIAL EXAMPLES ARE PROVIDED. LESSON XXXIV. Gives mall civitati inimici sunt, bad citizens are hostile to the state. Locus castris magis idoneus est, the place is more suitable for a camp. Puer sorori similis est, the boy is like (his) sister. Gallis Belgae proximi sunt, the Belgae are nearest to the Gauls. Summus mons ab hostibus tenetur, the top of the mountain is held by the enemy. Servis pares sunt, they are a match for {equal to) the slaves. LESSON XXXV. a dextro (sinistro) cornii, on {from) the right (or left) wing. castra movet, he breaks up {moves) camp. Caesar domi est, Caesar is at home. LESSON XL. Xiaudo Caium, ut a Caio lauder, I praise Caius, that I may be praised by Caius. Laudabo Caium, ut a Caio lauder, / shall praise Caius, that I may be praised by Caius. Laudavi Caium, ut a Caio lauder, / have praised Caius, that I may be praised by Caius. Laudavero Caium, ut a Caio lauder, I shall have praised Caius, that I may be praised by Caius. 266 SPECIAL VOCABULARIES AND EXAMPLES. ' Xjaudabam Caium, ut a Caio laudarer, / was praising Caius, that I might be praised by Caius. Laudavi Caium, ut a Caio laudarer, I praised Caius, that 1 might be p7'aised by Caius. Laudaveram Caium, ut a Caio laudarer, I had praised Caius, that I might be praised by Caius, LESSON XLI. Multi regem laudant, many (men) praise the king. Omnia omnibus non sunt utilia, all things are not useful for all (men). Multa audit, he hears many (things). Jiidices justi esse videntur, the judges seem to be Just. LESSON XLTV. Consul ab urbe discedens servum interfici jussit, the consul, (as he was) departing from the city, ordered the slave to be killed. Litteras a puero scriptas misit, he sent the letter (which had been) written by the boy. Dux hostes ad flumen seciitus legionem reduxit, the leader, having followed the enemy to the river, led bach the legion. Xiapides conjectos rejiciunt, they throio bach the stones (which had been) hurled. Per Galliam iter fecit, he marched through Gaid. Titum de victoria certiorem feci, / informed (made more certain) Titus about the victory. LESSON XLVII. Impetus paulum tardatus est, the attach was cheched a little. Plurimum poterat, he was very powerful (i. e. to a very great extent). Maximam partem frumento vivunt, for the most part they live on torn, Pliis auctoritatis habet, he has more (of) authority. De tertia vigilia, in the third watch. Castra tantum spatii patebant, the camp extended over so much (of) Prima luce, at day-breah. Multo die, late in the day. Prima nocte, in the early part of the night. Exercitus (from exerceo), a drilled army; agmen (from ago), an army on the march ; acies, a line-of -battle. SPECIAL VOCABULARIES AND EXAMPLES. 267 LESSON XL VIII. Rogat Caesarem, ut veniat, he asks Caesar to come {that he may come). Milites hortatus sum, ne fugerent, / exhorted the soldiers not to fiet {that they should not flee). Nitemur ut vincamus, ive shall strive to conquer. Alter! fortes erant, alter! fugerunt, the one party were brave, the other fled. LESSON LX. Pugnaturi sumusj we are going tojight. Hoc mihi faciendum est, this {thing) must be done by me ; I must do this. Quis nobis mittendus fuit ? who ought to have been sent by us ? whom ought we to have sent f Ducend! erunt, they will have to be led. LESSON LXIV. The subject of each Impersonal form is printed in italics. Mihi non exspecta-ndwai est, / must not wait {delay must not be made by me). Pugnd-tura. est, fighting was carried on. Z7ie-ndum est arm!s, use must be made of the arms. Iiicuit Caio Romam venire, Caius might have come to Rome {it was per- mitted to Caius to come to Rome). Oportuit me injurids ferre, 1 ought to have borne the injuries {it was necessary for me to bear the injuries). This sentence may also be written; Injuriae mihi f erendae f uerunt. Optimum v!sum est copids mittere, it seemed best to send troops. Urbem expugnare potuit, he could have stormed the city. LESSON LXV. Fit ut naves capiantur, it happens that the ships are taken. Dixit fore ut sub jugum mitteremur, he said that we should be sent under the yoke (literally, that it would come to pass that, etc.). Non est dubium qu!n Justus sit, there is no doubt {it is not doubtful) that he is just (about his being just). Caesar non is {= talis) fuit, qui (= ut is) fugeret, Caesar was not the man to flee (literally, not such a man that he would flee). GE:f^EEAL YOOABULAET. Latin -Englishf pers., personal, y\m\, plural. '" ABBREVIATIONS. ahh, ablative, int. ^ future. adj., adjective, gen., genitive, ace, accusative, impers., impersonal, adv., adverb. indecl., indeclinable, coll., collective. indef., indefinite. comp., compas^ative. inf., injinitive. conj., conjunction, interrog., interrogative, def., defective. irr,, irregular. deg., degree, m., masculine, dem., demonstrative. n., neuter. dep., dejjonent. nom., nominative. diff., difference. num., numeral. dim., diminutive. "paxt., participle. distrib., distributive, ipsLSS.^ passive, f., feminine, i^eri., perfect. Numeral Adjectives (except unus, duo, tres, mille) are wo* ^ivew /w ^Au Vocabulary ^ but may be found in the lists, page 242. prep., preposition, pres., present. ipron., pronoun. quest., question. refl., reflexive, rel., relative. semi-dep., semi-deponent. sing., singular. sup., superlative, voc, vocative. A. a, ab, prep, with abl. [A is used only before a consonant; ab, before a vowel or consonant], from, by, on the side of; a dextr5 cornu, on the right wing. Sometimes used as an adverb (= ojf ); as, ab millibus passuum quinque,^ve miles off. abdo, dere, didi, ditum (ab + do), remove, hide. Sese in silvas, to go into the forests and hide. abduco, ere, xi, ctum (ab + duco), lead away, withdraw. abeo, ire, ivi (ii), itum (ab + eo), go away, depart, absum, esse, fui (ab + sum), be absent (away), be distant, be wanting. ac, conj. See atque. acceptus, a, um, part, as adj. (ac- cipio), acceptable, welcome, 6e- loved. accido, ere, accidi (ad + cado), fall upon, happen; accidit (im- pers.), it happens. accipio, ere, cepi, ceptum (ad + capio), receive, accept. accuso, are, avi, atum (ad + causa), accuse, blame. acer, acris, acre, sharp, keen, eager, vigorous. acies, ei, f., old gen., acie (root ac in acer), sharp edge, keenness, line of battle. acriter, acrius, acerrime (acer), vigorously, keenly, fiercely. 270 GENERAL VOCABULARY. acutuS} a, um, sharp, pointed. ad, prep, with ace, to, towards, near, in {into) the vicinity of, according to, for. ad, adv. (with numerals), about. adamo, are, avi, atum (ad + amo), love exceedingly, covet. adduce, ere, xi, ctum (ad + duco), lead to, induce, infuence. adeo, ire, ivi (ii), itum (ad + eo), go to, approach, visit, adhibeo, ere, ui, itum (ad + ha- beo), summon, invite. adorior, iri, ortus sum, dep. (ad + orior, rise up against), attach. adscisco, ere, scivi, scitum (ad + solo), receive, admit. adsum, esse, adfui or affui (ad -f sum), be near, be present, aid. adventus, us, m. (ad + venio), coming, arrival. adversus, a, um (ad + verto, turn), contrary, opposite, face to face. aedificium, I, n. (aedifico), build- ing. aedifico, are, avi, atum, build, construct. Aeduus, a, um, of the Aedui, Aeduan, Aeduus, i, m. an Aeduan; (plur.) the Aedui, a Gallic tribe, aeger, gra, grum, sich, feeble. aegre, aegrius, aegerrime (aeger), with difficulty, scarcely, hardly. aequus, a, um, equal, just, right. aestas, atis, f., summer. affero, ferre, attuli, allatum (ad + fero), bring (to). afficio, ere, feci, fectum (ad + facio), affect, injluence ; dolore affici, to be greatly vexed, or dis- tressed. ager, agri, Wi.,feld, territory. aggredior, edi, essus sum, dep. (ad + gradior), go against, attack, agmen, inis, n. (ago), army (on the march) ; primum agmen, the van; novissimum agmen, the rear. ago, ere, egi, actum, lead, drive, act, do, treat (= discourse). agricola, ae, m. (ager + colo), farmer. agricultura, ae, f. (ager + colo), agriculture, alacer, cris, ere, eager, active. albus, a, um, white. alienus, a, um (alius), another^s, foreign, unfavorable. aliquis (qui), qua, quid (quod), indef. pron., some, any, some one, any one (or thing). alius, a, ud (gen. alius), other, an- other; alius .... alius, one .... another; alii aliam in partem, some in one direction and some in another. Allobroges, um, m. (sing. Allo- brox), the Allobroges, a people in the southeastern part of Gaul. Alpes, ium, f., the Alj)s. alter, era, erum (gen. alterius), the other {oi two), the second; alter .... alter, the one . ... the other. altitudo, inis, f. (altus), height, altus, a, um, high, tall, lofty, deep, amans, tis (amo), part, as adj., lov- ing, affectionate, Ambarri, orum, m., the Aedui Am- barri, clients of the Aedui, north of the Allobroges. amicitia, ae, f. (amicus), friend^ ship. amicus, a, um (amo), friendly, amicus, i, m. (amo), fiend. amitto, ere, misi, missum (a + mitto), send away, let go, lose. amo, are, avi, atum, love, be fond of. amor, oris, m. (amo), love, affection. amplius, adv. (comp. of ample), more, further. amplus, a, um, of large extent, an, interrog. adv., or. angustiae, arum, f. (angustus), narrow pass, defle. angustus, a, um, narrow. animadverto, ere, tl, sum (ani- mus + ad + verto, turn), notice, punish (Eng. "attend to"). GENEKAL VOCABULARY. 271 animal, alls, n., living creature, animal. animus, i, m., mind, disposition; esse in animo, intend. annon, interrog. adv., or not; used only in direct questions, annus, i, m., year. ante, prep, with ace, before. ante, adv., before, ago; paulo ante, a little while ago. antea, adv. (ante + is), before, formerly. antequam, or ante .... quam, conj. (literally, before than, or that), before. Antonius, i, m., Antonius, a Roman name. appello, are, avi, atum, call, name. Aprilis, e, of April; Kalendae Apriles, the April Kalends, the first of April. apud, prep, with ace, near, with, among, in the presence of. Aquileia, ae, f., Aquileia, a town at the head of the Adriatic. Aquitani, orum, m., people of Aquitania, the Aquitanians. Aquitania, ae, f., Aquitania, the southwestern division of Gaul. Arar, aris, m. (ace. Ararim), the Arar, now the Saone, tributary of the Rhone, arbitrium, i, n., judgment, will. arbitror, ari,atus sum, de\)., judge, think. arcesso, ere, ivi, itum, summon, invite. Ariovistus, i, m., Ariovistus, a king of the Germans. arma, orum, n., arms, weapons. ars, artis, f., 5^*7/, art, science, pursuit. Arverni, orum, m., the Arverni, a Gallic people. arx, arcis, f., citadel, stronghold. Athenae, arum, f., Athens, a city of Greece. atque (or ac), conj. (ad + que), and too, and also ; with words of com- parison, as, than. attente, adv. (attentus), attentive- ly, diligently. attentus, a, um, attentive, attingo, ere, tigi, tactum (ad + tango), touch, border on, reach. auctoritas, atis, f., authority, in^ ^ Jluence, power. audacter (or audaciter), adv. (audax), boldly, courageously . audax, acis (audeo), bold, auda- cious, daring. audeo, ere, ausus sum, semi-dep. (N. 81), dare, venture. audiens, part, as adj. (audio), obedient. audio, ire, ivi, itum, hear, hear of. aufero, ferre, abstuli, ablatum (ab + fero), bear away, remove. Aulus, i, m., Aulus, a Roman per- sonal name. aut, conj., or; aut .... aut, either . ... or. autem, conj., but, moreover, how- ever. auxilium, i, n., aid, assistance ; (plur.) auxiliaries, auxiliary troops. avus, i, m., grandfather. barbarus, a, um, foreign, strange ; barbari, orum, m., barbarians. beatus, a, um, happy, fortunate. Belgae, arum, m., the Belgae, a people of Northern Gaul. bellicosus, a, um (bellum), war- like, eager for war. bello, are, avi, atum (bellum), carry on war, fight. bellum, 1, n., war, bene, adv. (bonus), wdl, success- fully, beneficium, i, n. (bene + facio), favor, kindness. Bibracte, is, n.", Bibracte, the chief city of the Aedui. biduum, i, n. (bis + dies), space of two days, biennium, I, n. (bis -f- annus), space of two years. 272 GENERAL VOCABULAEY. Boii, orum, m. the Boii, a wander- ing people of Germany and Gaul. bonus, a, um, good, friendly, well- disposed; bona, orum, n., goods, property. brevia, e, short, brief. Britannia, ae, f., the island of Brit- cado, ere, cecidi, casum, fall, perish. caedo, ere, cecidi, caesum, cut, hill. Caesar, aris, m., Caius Julius Caesar, a famous Roman general, conqueror of Gaul. Caius, i, m., Caius, a Roman personal name. calamitas, atis, f., calamity, disas- ter, loss. calcar, aris, n. (calx, heel), spur. Calendae, see Kalendae. capio, ere, cepi, captum, take, seize, select, adopt, reach. caput, itis, n., head, capital (chief city). carrus, i, m., cart, wagon. Carthago, see Karthago. carus, a, um, dear, beloved, precious. Cassianus, a, um (Cassius), per- taining to Cassius, Cassian; bello Cassiano, in the war with Cassius. Cassius, i, m., Cassius, a Roman name; Lucius Cassius, the consul slain by the Helvetii. castellum, i, n. (dimin. of cas- trum), fort, redoubt. Casticus, i, m., Casticus, a chief of the Sequani. castra, orum, n. (sing, castrum, fort), camp, encampment. casus, us, m. (cado), that which befalls, chance, misfortune, acci- dent. Catamantaloedes, is, m., Cata- mantaloedes, father of Casticus. Caturiges, um, m., the Caturiges^ a Gallic tribe. causa, ae, f ., cause, reason, excuse ; causam dicere, to plead a case ; causa (with a gen. preceding), ybr the sake {of). celer, eris, ere, swift, quick. celeriter, adv. (celer), swiftly, quickly. celo, are, avi, atum, hide, conceal. N. 141, Remark 1. Celtae, arum, ra., the Celts, Gauls, a people of central Gaul. Centrones, um, m., the Centrones, a Gallic tribe. centurio, onis, m. (centum), cen- turion, captain of 100. certus, a, um, sure, certain; certi- orem facere, to inform. cibarius, a, um (cibus, food), per- taining to food; cibaria, orum, n., provisions, supplies. Cicero, onis, m., Marcus TmIUus Cicero, a famous Roman orator. circiter, adv. of degree, about, nearly. circum, prep, with ace, about, around, near, in the neighborhood of- circumduco, ere, xi, ctum (cir- cum + duco), lead around, draw around, circumvenio, ire, veni, ventum (circum + venio), come around, surround, deceive, cheat. cis, prep, with ace, on this side of Cisalpinus, a, um (cis + Alpes), on this side of the Alps (south of the Alps), Cisalpine. citerior, us (cis; N. 34), on this side, hither. citra, prep, with ace. (cis), on this side of. civis, is, m. and f., citizen, fellow- citizen. ci vitas, atis, f. (civis), state, citi- zenship. clarus, a, um, bright, clear, loud. claudo, ere, si, sum, shut, close; claudere agmen, close the line of march, bring up the rear. cliens, tis, m. and f., dependant, subject, client* GENEEAL VOCABULARY. 273 Cneius, I, m., C nexus, a Roman per- sonal name. coemo, ere, emi, emptum (con + emo), buy^ buy up, coepi, isse, def. vb, (N. 91, 1), be- gan, have begun ; part, coeptus. cognosco, ere, novi, nitum (con + nosco), become acquainted with, ascertain, find out^ know, N. 91, 2, Rem. cogo, ere, coegi, coactum (con + ago), bring together^ collect, force, compel. cohors, tis, f., cohort, the tenth part of a legion. cohortor, ari, atus sum, dep. vb. (con + hortor), encourage, ex- hort. collatus, part, of confer©. coUis, is, m., hill. coUoquor, i, cutus sum, dep. vb. (con + loquor), speah with, con- verse, confer. colo, ere, ui, cultum, till, cultivate, honor. comburo, ere, bussi, bustum, (con + tiro, burn), burn up. commeatus, us, m. (commeo), means of transport, supplies, pro- visions. commeo, are, avi, atum (con + meo, go), go bach and forth, visit. committo, ere, misi, missum (con + mitto), join, connect ; proelium commit tere, to join battle, begin an engagement. Also, cause, give occasion. commoveo, ere, movi, motum (con + moveo), move greatly, ex- cite, alarm. communis, ire, Ivi, itum (con + munio), fortify on all sides, in- trench, secure. compare, are, avi, atum (con 4- paro), make ready, get, procure, bring together. compleo, ere, evi, etum (con + pleo, fill), fill up, finish, complete ; montem, cover. oomplures, ia (con + plures), %evcral (together), very many. comports, are, avi, atum (con + ports), bring together, collect, con, inseparable prefix, together (or adds emphasis). cSnatum, i, n., also cSnatus, us, m. (cSnor), attempt, undertaking, concedS, ere, cessi, cessum, yield, grant, concede. concidS, ere, cidi (con + cadS), fall, perish. concidS, ere, cidi, cisum (con + caedS), cut to pieces, cut down, kill. conciliS, are, avi, atum (concili- um), unite, win, procure, secure. concilium, i, n., council, assembly. concursus, us, m. (con + currS), running together, onset, attack. condemns, are, avi, atum (con + damns), sentence, condemn. condiicS, ere, xi, ctum (con + diicS), lead together, collect, hire. confers, ferre, tuli, coUatum (con + ferS), bring together, col- lect; se conferre, to betake them' selves, confertus, a, um, close, crowded, conficiS, ere, feci, fectum (con-h f ado), finish, accomplish, exhaust. confirms, are, avi, atum (firmus), make firm, establish, assure, en-- courage. congredior, i, gressus sum, dep. vb. (con + gradior, go), meet (with), contend, ^^come on.'^ conjiciS, ere, jeci, jectum (con -f- jaciS), throw together, hurl, put. conjungS, ere, xi, ,ctum (con + jungS), join together, unite. conjuratiS, Snis, f. (conjtirS), con- spiracy. conjiirS, are, avi, atum (con + jurS), swear together, conspire. cSnor, ari, atus sum, dep. vb., en- deavor, try, attempt. consanguineus, a, um (con + sanguis, blood), related by blood; as a noun, kindred, relatives. consciscS, ere, scivi, scitum (con + sciS), approve ; sibi mortem, to commit i 274 GENERAL VOCABULARY. conscrlbS, ere, psl, ptum (con + scribo), write in a list, enroll en- list, levy* consequor, I, cutus sum (con + sequor), dep. vb., follow afters overtake, obtain. consido, ere, sedi, sessum (con + sido, settle), settle, encamp. consilium, i, n., counsel, advice, plan, design, purpose, wisdom, coun- cil of war, consimilis, e (con + similis), quite like, very similar, consists, ere, stiti, stitum (con + sisto), take a stand, halt, depend on, consist in. conspectus, us, m. (conspicio), full view, sight, presence. conspicio, ere, spexi, spectum (con + specie, look), behold^ look at, perceive, see. constituo, ere, ui, iitum (con + statuo) place together, establish, determine, erect. constitutus, a, um, part, as adj., established, appointed. consto, are, stiti, statum (con + sto), stand firm, agree ; constat, impers., it is evident, settled, ^^ stands to reason.^* consuesco, ere, suevi, suetum (con + suesco, be wont), become accustomed, be wont ; consue- VI, / am accustomed. N. 91, 2, Rem. consul, ulis, m., consul, one of two chief magistrates at Rome, elected annually. consiimo, ere, sumpsi, sumptum (con + sumo), spend, destroy, con- sume. contends, ere, di, tum (con + tends, stretch, strain), strive, has- ten, contend, fight. contentus, a, um (contineS), con- tent, satisfied. continenter, adv. (contineS), un- interruptedly, without cessation. contineS, ere, ui, tentum (con + teneS), hold together, hem in, hound. contra, prep, with ace, against^ qppo* site, conveniS, Ire, veni, ventum (con + veniS), come together, assemble, meet ; convenit, impers., it is fit- ting, agreed. convocS, are, avi, atum (con + vocS), call together, summon. cSpia, ae, f., plenty, abundance ; copiae, arum, f., forces, troops, supplies, wealth. Corinthus, i, f., Corinth, a city in Greece. cornii, us, n., horn, wing (of an army); a sinistrS cornu, on the left wing. corSna, ae, f., crown, wreath. corpus, oris, n., body, person. Crassus, i, m., Crassus, a Roman name. creber, bra, brum, frequent, nu- merous. credS, ere, didi, ditum, trust, be- lieve. cremS, are, avi, atum, burn. creS, are, avi, atum, create, make, elect, appoint. culpS, are, avi, atum, blame. cultus, lis, m. (colS), culture, lux- ury, civilization. cum, prep, with abl., with, in com- pany with. cum == quum. cupiditas, atis, f . (cupidus), eager- ness, desire, ambition. cupidus, a, um, eager, desirous, cupiS, ere, ivi, itum, desire, long for, wish. cur, interrog. adv., why ? for what purpose f cura, ae, f., care, regard, attention. curS, are, avi, atum (cura), care for, manage, attend to; with ge- rundive, cause to be done ; as, pon- tem faciendum curare, cause a bridge to be built. currS, ere, cucurri, cursum, run. currus, lis, m. (currS), chariot, wagon. GENERAL VOCABULARY. 275 cursus, us, m. (curro), running j speedy course, custos, odis, m. and f., guard. damno, are, avi, atum, condemn, sentence. de, prep, with abl.,/ro?7i, down from, of, concerning, about (of), during, in; de secunda vigilia, in the second watch. In compounds, down, away, dea, aej f., goddess. debeo, ere, ui, itum (de + habe6), owe, ought, must. decedo, ere, cessi, cessum (de + cedo, go away), retire, withdraw, depart, die. dedo, ere, didi, ditum (de + do), give up, surrender, deliver up. deduce, ere, xi, ctum (de + du- c6), lead down, withdraw, conduct, defends, ere, di, sum (de + fen- do, only in compounds), ward off, defend, protect. defensor, oris, m. (defend©), de- fender. dejectus, a, um (dejicio), part, as adj., downcast, disappointed. deleo, ere, evi, etum, destroy, overthroiu, delibero, are, avi, atum, weigh, consider, deliberate. deligo, ere, legi, lectum (de + lego, select), choose out, select. demonstro, are, avi, atum (de + monstro), point out, show, declare. depopulor, ari, atus sum, dep. vb. (de + v^v^ot), plunder, lay waste, devastate. deprecator, 6ris,m. (de + precor, pray), intercessor, mediator. desisto, ere, stiti, stitum (de + sisto, stand), cease, desist. despicio, ere, spexi, spectum (de + specie, look), look down on, despise. deus, i, m., god, deity. dexter, tra, trum, on the right hand, right; dextra (manus, understood), right hand. dico, ere, xi, ctum, say, mention, tell, appoint; causam dicere, to plead a case, dictio, onis, f. (dico), speaking, pleading. dictum, i, n. (dico), word, com- maml; die to audiens, obedient, didici, perf . of disco, dies, ei, m. (sometimes f.), ''day, time; multo die, late in the day; diem ex die, day after day. differs, ferre, distuli, dilatum (dis + fero), differ, diflacilis, e (dis + facilis), difficult, difficult to pass. difficultas, atis, f. (difficilis), trouble, difficulty. dignus, a, um, worthy, deserving, diligens, tis, diligent, attentive, careful. diligenter, adv. (diligens), with care, punctually. dimitto, ere, misi, missum (dis + mitto), send different ways, dis- miss, send out. ^ dis (or di), inseparable prefix, apart, in various directions, hither and thither. disced©, ere, cessi, cessum (dis + cedo), depart, go away, disco, ere, didici, learn, dispone, ere, posui, positum (dis + pono), place here and there, dis- tribute, station. dissimilis, e, unlike, dissimilar. ditior, see dives. N. 36, a, diu, -tius, -tissime, for a long time, long. dives, ditior, ditissimus, rich. Divico, onis, m., Divico, a Helvetian noble. divide, ere, visi, visum, divide, separate. divisus (divido), part, as adj., di- Divitiacus, i, m., Diviiiacus, brother of Dumnorix, an Aeduan, friend of Caesar. 276 GENERAL VOCABULARY. do, dare, dedi, datum, give, grants permit, allow. doceo, ere, ui, ctum, teach, in- form, show, instruct. dolor, oris, m., pain, grief. dolus, i, m., cunning, deceit, f^aud. domus, us (i), f., house, home; doml, at honie. donum, i, n. (do), gift, present. dubitatio, onis, f. (dubito), doubt, hesitation. dubito, are, avi, atum, dmbt, hesi- tate (with inf.). dubius, a, um, doubtful, uncertain. duco, ere, xi, ctum, lead, guide, bring, 7'eckon, think, put off; in matrimonium, marry. dum, conj., while, until, provided. Dumnorix, igis, m., Dumnorix, brother of Divitiacus, an Aeduan. duo, ae, o, num. adj., two. duplex, icis (duo + plico, fold), twofold, double. dux, ducis, m. and f. (duco), leader, guide, chief. e (or ex), out of, from. educo, ere, xl, ctum (e + duco), lead forth, draw out. effemino, are, avi, atum (ex + femina, woman), make womanish, weaken, enervate. effero, ferre, extuli, elatum (ex + f ero), carry or bear forth, carry out, lift up, elate. ego, mei, pers. pron., /. egredior, i, gressus sum, dep. vb. (e + gradior, go), go forth or out, depart. ejicio, ere, jeci, jectum (e + jacio), cast out, drive forth, expel; se ejicere, rush forth. ejusmodi (or ejus modi), gen. of is + modus (N. 121), of that sort or kind, such. emitto, ere, misi, missum (e + mitto), send forth or out, let go, cast. enuntio, are, avi, Stum (e + nun- tio), report, announce, declare. eo, ire, ivi, itum, irr., go, march. eo, adv. (abl. of is), thither; as abl. of degree of diff., quo magis . . . eo minus, the more . . , the less. eodem, adv. (abl. of idem), to the same place. eques, itis, m. (equus), horseman ; (plur.) equites, um, cavalry, knights. equitatus, us, m. (equus), cavalry (in a body). equus, i, m., horse. eripio, ere, ui, reptum (e + ra- pio), snatch away, take away, res- cue. eruptio, onis, f. (e + rumpo, break), bursting forth, sortie, sally. et, conj., and, also, even; et . . . et, both . . . and. etiam, conj. (et + jam), and also, even, indeed, yet, besides ; sed etiam, but also. etsi, conj. (et + si), even if, although. exemplum, i, n., example. exeo, ire, ivi, itum (ex + eo), go forth or out, march out. exercitus, us, m. (exerceo, train), trained army, army, infantry. existimo, are, avi, atum (ex + aestimo, regard), Judge, think, consider. expeditus, a, um ( ex + pes, ybof), literally, freed (from a snare), un- encumbered, light-armed, without baggage, free from obstacles, handy, explorator, oris, m. (exploro, search out), spy, scout. expugno, are, avi, atum (ex + pugno), take by storm, storm, cap- ture. exsequor, i, cutus sum, dep. vb. (ex + sequor), follow out, fnish, assert, maintain. exspecto, are, avi, atum (ex + specto), look for, wait for, await, delay, wait to see. exterus, a, um (ex), more common in the comp. and sup., exterior. GENERAL VOCABULARY. 277 extremus (or extimus), outer ^ foreign. extra, prep, with ace, also adv., on the outside oj\ beyond^ besides. extremuaj a, um (exterus), outer- most, farthest^ most remote, extreme^ last. exuro, ere, ussi, ustum (ex + tiro, hurn)^ hum up, consume. fabula, ae, f. (for, speah), story. facilis, e (facio), easy (to do), easy, practicable. facile, adv. (facilis), easily, readily. facio, ere, feci, factum ; (pass.) fio, fieri, factus sum, make, do, perform, construct ; copiam fa,- ceve, furnish a supply ; certiorem facere, to inform, factio, onis, f. (facio), faction, party. facultas, atis, f. (facio), ability, opportunity, abundance, s^^pply ; (plur.) resources. familia, ae, £., household, retinue of slaves or dependents, family. felix, lois, happy. fere, adv., almost, nearly, for the most part, genejmlly. fero, ferre, tuli, latum, irr., bear, carry, bring, endure, produce. ferus, a, um, loiUU barbarous, cruel. fidelis, e (fides), trusty, faithful. fides, ei, f. (fido), trust, confidence, faith, pledge, promise, security, protection. p.do, ere, fisus sum, semi-dep., trust. filia, ae, f., daughter. fllius, i, m., son. finio, ire, ivi, itum (finis), limit, bound. finis, is, m., end, limit, boundary; (plur.) territory, country. finitimus, a, um (finis), bordering upon, adjoining ; as a noun (plur.), neighbors. fio, fieri, factus sum, irr., pass, of facio, be made, become ; fit, im- pers., it happens ; certior fio, / am informed. firmus, a, um, firm, strong, power- ful, valiant. flagito, are, avi, atum, demand {earnestly or repeatedly), dun. fleo, ere, evi, etum, weep, cry, lament. fletus, us, m., weeping, tears. florens, tis (fios), flourishing, pros- perous. flos, oris, m., flower. flumen, inis, n. (fiuo), river, fluo, ere, xi, x.unijflow. fore = futurus esse ; forem = essem. fortis, e (fero), strong, brave, val iant. fortiter, adv. (fortis), bravely, cour- ageously. fortitude, inis, f. (fortis), bravery, fortitude. fortuna, ae, f. (fors, chance), for- tune, chance. fossa, ae, f. (fodio, dig), ditch. frango, ere, fregi, fr actum, breah, crush, subdue. frater, tris, m., brother, ally. fretus, a, um, relying upon, depend- ing on. N. 151, b. frumentarius, a, um (frumen- tum), belonging to corn, abounding in corn ; res friimentaria, corn- supply, supplies. friimentum, i, n., corn, grain. fuga, ae, f., flight, rout. fugio, ere, fugi, fugitum, flee, escape, shun. fundo, ere, fiidi, fusum,/>owr* out, scatter, rout. . G. Gabinius, i, m., Gabinius, a Roman name. Gallia, ae, f., Gaul, including Bel- gium, France, and the greater part of Switzerland. 278 GENERAL VOCABULARY. Gallicus, a, um, Gallic. Gallus, 1, m., a Gaul; as a noun, Galli, the Gauls. Garumna, ae, m., the Garonne^ a river of Gaul, gaudeo, ere, gavisus sum, semi- dep., rejoice, be glad. Geneva (or Genava), ae, f ., Geneva, a city of the Allobroges. genns, eris, n., birth, race, kind. Germania, ae, f., Germany. Germanus, a, um, German; as a noun, Germ.ani, the Germans. gero, ere, gessi, gestum, bear, carry on (war), perform. gladius, 1, m., sword. gl5ria, ae, f ., glory, fame, glorior, ari, atus sum (gloria), dep., boast, glory. Graioceli, orum, m., the Graioceli, a people of Hither Gaul, gratia, ae, f. (gratus),/ai;or, esteem, popularity, influence, friendship; gratia (abl.), for the sake (of). gratulor, ari, atus sum, dep. (gratus), congratulate, wish joy. gratus, a, um, grateful, agreeable, acceptable. gravis, e, heavy, severe. graviter, adv. (gravis), severely. H. habeo, ere, ui, itum, have, hold, regard, consider, deliver (a speech). Hariides, um, m., the Harudes, a German tribe. Helvetius, a, um, Helvetian; as a noun, Helvetii, orum, the Hel- «?e<mw5,^people of Helvetia (Switzer- land). hiberna, orum, n. (hiems), winter- quarters (really an adj., castra being understood). hic, haec, hoc, dem. pron., this, he, she, it, the latter, as follows. hiemo, are, avi, atum (hiems), pass the winter, winter. hiems, emis, f., winter. Hispania, ae, f., Spain. homo, inis, m. and f., a being (man or woman), man, per- son. (See vir.) honor, oris, m., honor, esteem, office. hora, ae, f., hour. hortor, ari, atus sum, dep. exhort, encourage, urge. hostis, is, m. and f ., enemy (public) ; inimicus, personal enemy. hiimanitas, atis, f., humanity, kind- I. ibi, adv. (is), there, in that place. Iccius, 1, m., Iccius, a chief of the Remi. idem, eadem, idem, dem. pron. (is + dem, emphatic), the same, idoneus, a, um, fit, suitable. Idiis, uum, f. plur., the Ides, the 15th of March, May, July, October ; 13th of the other months, ignarus, a, um, ignorant, inex- perienced, ignavus, a, um, idle, cowardly, ignis, is, m., fire, ignosco, ere, novi, notum (in, not + nosco), overlook, pa7'don, forgive. illatus, part, of inferS. ille, ilia, illud, dem. pron., that (yonder), he, she, it, the former, the well-known or famous. immortalis, e (in, not + mor- talis), immortal, eternal, impedimentum, i, n. (impediS), hindrance ; (plur.) heavy-baggage. impedio, ire, ivi, itum (in + pes), entangle, hinder, impede, impeditus, a, um (impedio), part. as adj., hindered, impeded, ob- structed. impended, ere (in + pendeo, hang), overhang, impend, threaten. imperator, oris, m. (impero), com- mander-in-chief general, chief. imperitus, a, um (in, not + peri- tus, skilled), unskilled, ignorant, unacquainted with. GENERAL VOCABULARY. 279 imperium, I, n. (impero), com- mand, authority J ordei', power^ gov- ernment, empire, impero, are, avi, atum, command, order, rule over, levy (troops). impetro, are, avi, atum, accom- plish, effect, obtain by request. impetus, us, m., attach, onset, vio- lence, imploro, are, avi, atum, entreat, implore, beg for, impono, ere, posui, positum (in + pono), place on, impose on, imports, are, avi, atum (in + ports), bring in, import. improviso, adv. (in, not + pro- video, foresee), on a sudden, un- expectedly, imus, see inferus. in, prep, with ace. and abl. (1) With ace. (answering question Whither f), into, against, towards; in reli- quum tempus, for the future ; in Santonos, into the country of the Santoni, (2) With abl. (an- swering question Where f), in, on, among, over. incendo, ere, di, sum, set fire to, burn, inflame, excite, incertus, a, um (in, wo^ + certus), uncertain, doubtful. incipio, ere, cepi, ceptum (in + capio), talce up, begin, commence ; supplies the present-stem tenses of coepi. incite, are, avi, atum, hasten, rouse, incite, spur on. incolo, ere, colui (in -f- colo), dwell, inhabit. incommodum, i, n. (in, not + commodum, advantage), misfor- tune, disaster. incredibilis, e (in, not -f credo), incredible. inde, adv. (is), from that place, thence. indicium, i, n. (index, informer), information ; per indicium = per indices. indico, ere, xi, ctum (in + dico), declare, proclaim. indignus, a, um (in, not + dig* nus), unworthy, wrong. induce, ere, xi, ctum (in + duco), bring on or in, move, induce, influ- ence. ineo, ire, ivi, itum (in + eo), go into, enter, begin ; consilium ineo, I form a plan. infelix, icis (in, not + felix), un- happy. infero, ferre, intuli, illatum (in + f ero), bring in {upon, or against) : signa inferre, advance (to the at- tack); bellum inferre, to make war on ; spe illata, hope being in- inferus, a, um, below; Comp. in- ferior, lower, inferior ; Sup. infi- mus (imus), lowest, lowest part of. influo, ere, xi, xum (in + fluo), flow into, flow, empty into. infra, prep, with ace.; also an adv., below. ingens, tis, huge, vast, mighty, inimicus, a, um (in, not + ami- cus), unfriendly, hostile ; as a noun, an enem,y (personal). initium, i, n. (ineo), beginning. injiiria, ae, f. (in, not + jus), injury, wrong ; injuria (abl.), unjustly, injustus, a, um (in, not + Justus), unjust, wrong, inopinans, tis (in, not -f opinor, think), not expecting, unawares. inquam, def. (N. 91, a), say. insidiae, arum, f. (in + sedeo, sit), ambush, plot, treachery, stratagem. insigne, is, n. (insignis), mark, badge; (plur.) insignia, badges of office. insignis, e (in + signum), marked, distinguished, noted, remarkable. instituo, ere, ui, utum (in + statuo, establish), establish, ar- range, draw up (in battle array), bring up, train, educate. institutum, i, n. (instituo), custom, practice. instruo, ere, xi, ctum (in + struo, build), construct, arrange, draw up (in battle array). 280 GENERAL VOCABULARY. insula, ae, f., island. integer, gra, grum (in, »ot + tan- go), sound, fresh. intelligo, ere, lexi, lectum (inter + lego), perceive, understand, know. intentus, a, um, intent, attentive, inter, prep, with ace, between, among, during; inter se amant, they love each other. intercede, ere, cessi, cessum (inter + cedo, go), go between^ intervene. interdiii, adv. (inter + dies), by day, in the day-time. interea, adv. (inter + is), in the meantime, meanwhile. interficio, ere, feci, fectum (inter + facio), kill, slay. intermitto, ere, misi, missum (inter + mitto), cease, interrupt, discontinue, let pass. internecio, onis, f. (inter + neco, kill), massacre. intra, prep, with ace. ; also adv., within. invenio, ire, veni, ventum (in + venio), come upon, find, discover, invent. invito, are, avi, atum, invite, sum- mon. invitus, a, um, unwilling; me in- vito, without my consent. ipse, a, um, dem. pron., self, very, he, she, it. iratus, a, um (ira, anger), angry, enraged. is, ea, id, dem. pron., that, this, he, she, it. Iste, a, ud, dem. pron., that (near 3'ou), that (of yours). ita, adv. (is), in that manner, so, to such a degree ; ita ut (uti), just as. Italia, ae, f., Italy. itaque, conj. (ita + que), and so, therefore, accordingly. N. 195, 5. item, adv. (is), likewise, also. iter, itineris, n. (eo), way, road, journey, march, pass; iter mag- num, /orcec^ march. jacio, ere, jeci, jactum, throio, hurl, jam, adv., now, already. jubeo, ere, jussi, jussum, order, bid, command. judex, icis, m. (jiis + dico), judge. jiidicium, i, n. (judex), court, trial, judgment, decision, judico, are, avi, atum (judex), judge, decide. jugum, i, n. (jungo), yoke; a yoke formed by two upright spears sup- porting a third (horizontal), under which a defeated army was made to pass in token of subjection; ridge of a mountain or hill. Jiilius, i, m., Julius, a Roman name ; also, as an adj., pertaining to (of) July. jumentum, i, n. (jungo), beast of burden (ox, horse). jungo, ere, nxi, nctum, join, con- nect. Jura, ae, m.. Jura, a mountain- chain extending from the Rhine to the Rhone. jiiro, are, avi, atum (jus), Cake aw oath, swear, promise under oa^k^ jus, jiiris, n., law, right. jusjurandum, jurisjurandi, (jiis + juro), oath. Justus, a, um (jus), j^Msi, right. K. Kalendae (or Calendae), arumi f., the Calends, first day of each month. Karthago (or Carthago), inis, f., Carthage, a city of North Africa. Labienus, i, m., Labienus, Caesar's ablest lieutenant. labor, oris, m., toil, labor, hard' ship. GENERAL VOCABULAET. 281 lacus, us, m., laTce. laetor, ari, atus sum, dep. (lae- tus, glad), rejoice^ exult. lapis, idis, m., stone. largitio, onis, f. (largior, bestow gifts), liberality, generosity, brib- ery. latitude, inis, f. (latus), breadth, width. Latovici (or Latobrigi), orum, m., the Latovici, a Gallic people. latus, part, of fero. latus, a, um, wide, broad, spa- cious. laudo, are, avi, atum (laus), praise, commend, laus, laudis, i., praise, glory. laxo, are, avi, atum, loosen, open, expand ; manipulos laxare, to open the ranlcs. legatio, onis, f., embassy, legation. legatu^s, 1, m., ambassador, legate, lieutenant. legio, onis, f., legion, consisting of ten cohorts of foot-soldiers and 300 cavalry ; the total number varied from 4,200 to 6,000. lego, ere, legi, lectum, choose, select, read. Lemannus, i, m., Lahe Geneva. lenitas, atis, f. (lenis, gentle), gentleness, smoothness, leo, onis, m., lion. levis, e, light. lex, legis, f., law. liber, era, erum,/ree. liber, bri, m., booh. libere, adv. (liber), freely, unre- servedly. liberi, orum, m., children. libero, are, avi, atum (liber), mahefree, release, liberate. libertas, atis, f. (liber), liberty, freedom. licet, ere, uit, impers., it is allowed or permitted ; mihi licet ire, / may go. Lingones, um, m., the Lingones, a Gallic people. lingua, ae, f., tongue, language. linter, tris, f., boat, skiff. littera (or litera), f., (sing.) letter (of the alphabet) ; (plur.) ^e^^er (that is, an epistle), document. locus, i, m., (plur.) loca, orum, n., place, situation, condition, locutus, part, of loquor. Londinium, i, n., London. longe, adv. (longus), by far, far. longitiido, inis, f. (longus), length. longus, a, um, long, distant. loquor, i, lociitus sum, dep., speak, talk, tell, say. Lucilius, i, m., Lucilius, a Roman name. Lucius, i, m., Lucius, a Roman name. luna, ae, f., moon. lux, liicis, f., light ; prima luce, at daybreak, M. magis, adv. (magnus), more, rather. magister, tri, m. (mag-, root of magnus), master, teacher. magistratus, us, m. (magister), office of magistrate, magistracy, magistrate. magnitiido, inis, f. (magnus), greatness, size. magnopere, adv. (magno + ope- re), very much, greatly, exceed- ingly. magnus, a, um (comp. major; sup. maximus), great, large ; iter magnum, forced march, major (with or without natu), older (N. 36, b), plur. as noun, ancestors, elders. maleficium, i, n. (male + facio), wrong-doing, crime, mischief, malo, malle, malui, irr. (magis + volo), choose rather, prefer. malus, a, um (comp. pejor; sup. pessimus), bad, evil, mando, are, avi, atum (manus + do), 2^ut into one^s hands, commit, consign, command ; fugae se, to betake one^s self to fight. maneo, ere, mansi, mansum, stay, remain, abides 282 GENEKAL VOCABULARY. manipulus, I, m., maniple, a com- pany of soldiers, three of which formed a cohort. manus, us, f., hand, band (of troops). Marcus, i, m., Marcus, a Roman name. mare, is, n., sea. mater, tris, f., mother. matrimonium, i, n. (mater), mar- riage ; in matr. ducere, to marry. Matrona, ae, m., the Matrona (now the Marne), a river in Gaul. mature, are, avi, atum, hasten, make haste. maxime, adv. (maximus), very greatly, especially, exceedingly. maximus, sup. of magnus. medius, a, um, middle, midway, in the middle of; miedio in coUe, half-way up the hill. melior, comp. of bonus. memini, isse, def., remember, bear in mind. N. 91, 2. memor, oris, mindful. memoria, ae, f. (memor), memory, recollection. mens, mentis, f., mind, reason, judgment. mensa, ae, f., table. mensis, is, m., month. mercator, oris, m., merchant, trader. merces, edis, f., pay, wages, bribe. mereor, eri, itus sum, dep., de- serve, be worthy of, earn. meridies, ei, m. (medius + dies), midday, noon, south. Messala, ae, m., Messala, a Roman name. metus, lis, m.,fear, dread. meus, a, um, poss. pron. (ego, mei), my, mine. miles, itis, m., soldier (infantry). mille, adj. indecl., thousand. mille (nom. and ace. sing.), n., thou- sand; (plur.) millia (or milia), um, n., thousands; tria millia passuum, three miles. minime, adv. (minimus), least, by no means; minime saepe, very seldom. minimus, sup. of parvus, least. minor, comp. of parvus, smaller^ less. minus, adv., comp. of parum, less; si minus, if not. miror, ari, atus sum, dep. (mirus), wonder at, admire. mirus, a, um, wonderful, strange. miser, era, erum, wretched, unfor- tunate. mitto, ere, misi, missum, send, lei go, cast. modo, adv. (modus), only. modus, i, m., measure, manner, mode, way ; ejus modi, of that sort. moenia, ium, n. (munio), walls (of a town), f or tif cations. molitus, part, as adj. (molo, grind, Eng. mill), ground. moneo, ere, ui, itum, remind, warn, advise. mons, montis, m., mountain. monstro, are, avi, atum, show, point out. morior, mori, mortuus sum, dep., die; fut. part., moritiirus. moror, ari, atus sum, dep., delay, tarry, hinder. mors, mortis, f. (morior), death. mortalis, e (mors), mortal; as a noun, a mortal, a human being. mortuus, part, as adj. (morior), dead. mos, moris, m., (sing.) manner, cus- tom, practice ; (phir.) character. moveo, ere, movi, motum, move, excite; castra mover e, breah up camp. mulier, eris, f., woman. multitude, inis, f. (multus), multi- tude, crowd. multo, adv. (abl. of multus, as deg. of diff.), much, by far. multum, adv. (ace. neut. of mul- tus), much, very, exceedingly. multus, a, um (comp. neut. pliis; sup. plurimus) much ; (plur.) many, numerous; multo die, late in the day. munio, ire, ivi, itum, fortify, de- fendf protect. GENERAL VOCABULARY. 283 munitio, onis, f . (munio), fortiji- cation, rampart. murus, i, m., wall^ rampart. N. nam, con j., /or. Nameius, i, m., Nameius, a Helve- tian chief. narro, are, avi, atum, tell, re- late. nascor, nasci, natus sum, dep., be born, arise, be produced. natu, m., only in the abl. (nascor), by birth, in age; major natu (N. 36, 6), older ; as noun, elders, ancestors. natura, ae, f. (nascor), birth, na- ture. nauta, ae, m. (navis), sailor, sea- man. navis, is, f., ship; navis longa, ship of war. ne, conj., that not, lest, so that not. ne, adv. (especially with subjunctive of command, etc.), not ; ne . . . quidem, not even (emphatic word between). ne, inteiTog. enclitic particle. See N. 195, 3. nee = neque. necessarius, a, um, necessary, re- lated; as a noun, m., relative, kins- man. necne, adv., or not; used in indirect questions. nego, are, avi, atum, say no, deny, refuse. negotium, i, n. (nee + otium, leisure), occupation, employment, business; tibi negotium do, I em- ploy you. nemo, m. and f. (ne + homo), no man, no one, nobody. The gen. and abl. are borrowed from nullus. neque (or nee), conj. and adv. (ne + que), and not ; neque . . . ne- que, neither . . . nor. nequis (or nequi), nequa, nequid (or nequod), indef. pron., lest any. See N. 52, b. neuter, tra, trum (ne + uter), gen. neutrius, neither (of two) ; (plur.) neither party . niger, gra, grum, blach, dark. nihil, n. indecl., nothing; used as adv., not at all, in no respect. nihilo, adv. (abl. of nihilum, noth- ing), in no respect ; with com p. as deg. of diff., nihiia minus, never- theless, none the less. nitor, 1, nisus, or nixus sum, dep., strive, attempt. nobilis, e (nosco), famous, noble. nobilitas, atis, f. (nobilis), nobility (of rank); as a coll. noun, the no- bility, the nobles. noceo, ere, ui, itum, harm, injure. noctii, f., on]y in abl. (nox), by night. nolo, nolle, nolui, irr. (non + volo), be unwilling, wish not, re- fuse. nomen, inis, n. (nosco), name. nominatim, adv. (nomino, name), by name, expressly. non, adv. (ne + iinum), not, by no means. Nonae, arum (nonus, ninth [day before the Ides]), f. plur., Nones, the 7th of March, May, July, Octo- ber, and the 5th of other months. nondum, adv. (non + dum), not yet. nonne, interrog. particle (non + ne), expecting the answer Yes ; nonne venit, hasnH he come? nonnulli, ae, a (non + nullus), some, several. nonnunquam, adv. (n5n + nun- quam), sometimes, at times. Noreia, ae, f., Noreia, capital of the Taurisci, a German people of Noricum. Noricus, a, um, Noric, pertaining to Noricum. nosco, ere, novi, notum, become acquainted with, learn ; in perf.- stem tenses, know; novl, I know. N. 91, Rem. noster, tra, trum, poss. pron. (nos), our, ours; as noun, nostri, m., 284 GENERAL VOCABULARY. our men {soldiers, friends), nostra, n., our possessions (goods). Noviodunum, i, n., Noviodunum, name of three towns in Gaul. novissimus, a, um (novus), new- est (that is, of soldiers, the latest or last), hindmost, in the rear ; agmen novissimum, the rear. novus, a, um, new, strange, un- usual; res novae, revolution. nox, noctis, f ., night ; multa noc- te, late at night. nubes, is, f., cloud. nud5, are, avi, atum (nudus, bare), strip, deprive. nullus, a, um (ne + uUus), gen. nullius, no, none, not any. num, interrog. particle ; in direct questions, not translated, and ex- pects answer iVo; in indirect ques- tions, Whether. numerus, i, m., number, quantity, multitude. nunc, adv., now, atjjresent. nunquam, adv. (ne + unquam), never. nuntio (or nuncio), are, avi, atum (nuntius), announce, report, bring news. nuntius, i, m., messenger, message, news* nuper. adv. (for noviper, from novus), newly, lately, recently. o. ob, prep, with ace, on account of, for. _ obaeratus, i, m. (ob + aes, money), debtor. objicio, ere, jeci, jectum (ob + jacio), throw against, throw up, oppose, expose. oblitus, a, um (obliviscor), for- getful. obliviscor, i, oblitus sum, dep., fo'^get. obse«t, idis, m. and f., hostage, pledge, security. obstrictus, part, of obstringo, bound, attached. obstringo, ere, strinxi, strictum (ob + stringo, bind), bind close, pledge. obtineo, ere, ui, tentum (ob + teneo), hold, possess, gain, obtain. occasus, us, m. (occido), fall, set- ting ; occasus solis, sunset, the west. occido, ere, cidi, casum (ob + cado), fall doivn, fall, perish. occido, ere, cidi, cisum (ob + caedo), cut down, kill, slay. occisus, part, of occido, slain. occupo, are, avi, atum (ob + capio), seize, occupy. occurro, ere, curri and cucurri, cursum (ob + curro), run to- wards, meet with, encounter. Oceanus, i, m., ocean, the Atlantic. Ocelum, 1, n., Ocelum, a Gallic town. oculus, 1, m., eye, sight. odi, odisse, def., hate. N. 91, 2. offendo, ere, fendi, fensum, of- fend, displease. omnino, adv. (omnis), wholly, alto- gether, in all, at all. omnis, e, all, every. onus, eris, n., load, burden. oportet, ere, uit, impers., it is necessai'y, ought, must. oppidum, i, n., town (walled). oppugnatio, onis, f. (oppugno), siege, assault, attack. oppugno, are, avi, atum (ob + pugno), attack, assault, besiege, storm. optimus, sup. of bonus. opus, eris, n., work, task, for tif ca- tions or " works. ^^ opus, n. indecl., need ; opus est, there is need, it is necessary. oratio, onis, f. (oro, speak), speech, oration, words. Orgetorix, igis, m., Orgetorix, a chief of the Helvetii. oriens, tis, part, of orior, rising; sol oriens, (he rising sun, the east. orior, iri, ortus sum, dep., r/.>e, arise, begin, spring from, descend. GENERAL VOCABULAKY. 285 ortus, part, of orior, descended^ born. ostendo, ere, di, sum and turn (ob, towards + tendo, stretch)^ show, declare. pabulum, i, n. (pasco, feed),food^ fodder. paco, are, avi, atum (pax), pacify^ paene, adv., almost, nearly. pagus, i, m., district, canton. par, paris, equal, like, a match for. paratus, a, um (paro), ready, pareo, ere, ul, itum, obey. paro, are, avi, atum, prepare, get ready, provide, procure. pars, partis, i., part, share, portion, direction, side. parum, adv. (parvus), too little, not enough. parvus, a, um (comp. minor ; sup. minimus), small, little. passus, part, of patior. passus, us, m., pace (five Roman feet) ; mille passus, a mile ; duo millia passuum, two miles. patefacio, ere, feci, factum (pa- teo + facio), throw open, open, expose; pass., patefio. patens, tis (pateo), open, wide. pate5, ere, ui, lie open, extend. pater, tris, m., father, ancestor. patior, pati, passus sum, dep., suffer, allow, permit. patria, ae, f. (pater), native land, fatherland. pauci, ae, a, few. paulo, adv. (abl. of paulus, as deg. of diff.), by a little, a little. paulum, adv. (ace neut. of paulus), little, somewhat. paulus, a, um, little, small. ' pax, pacis, f., peace, quiet. pecunia, ae, f. (pecus, cattle), money; literally, wealth estimated in cattle. pedes, itis, m. (-^0:1)^ foot-soldier; (plur.) infantry. pejor, us, comp. of malus, worse; pejus as noun, a worse thing. pello, ere, pepuli, pulsum, drive, conquer, rout. pendo, ere, pependi, pensum, weigh, pay. per, prep, with ace, through, through- out, by; in compounds, through, thoroughly, very. perduco, ere, xi, ctum (per -f duco), bi'ing through or all the way, lead, conduct, extend, construct. perfacilis, e (per + facilis), very easy. perficio, ere, feci, fectum (per + facio), finish, accomplish, bring about. periculosus, a, um (periculum), perilous, dangerous. periculum, i, n. (root in experior, try), trial, rish, danger, peril. perlego, ere, legi, lectum (per + lego), read through. permoveo, ere, movi, motum (per + moveo), move thoroughly, arouse, excite. permulti, ae, a (per + multus), very many. perpauci, ae, a (per + pauci), very few. perrumpo, ere, rupi, ruptum (per + rumpo), break through, force a passage, persequor, i, cutus sum, dep. (per + sequor), follow persist- ently, 2>ursue, take vengeance on. persevere, are, avi, atum, ^ersw^, persevere. persolvo, ere, solvi, soliitum (per + solvo, release, pay), pay (in full). persuadeo, ere, si, sum (per + suadeo, advise), persuade, con- vince, prevail upon. perterreo, ere, ui, itum. (per + terreo), frighten thoroughly, ter- rify. pertineo, ere, ui (per + teneo), reach, extend to, relate or pertain to, tend to. 286 GENERAL VOCABULARY. pervenio. Ire, veni, ventum (per + venio), come {through) to, ar- rive at, reach. pes, pedis, m., foot. pessimus, sup. of malus, worst. peto, ere, ivi (ii), itum, seek, ask, strive after. pilum, i, n., heavy javelin, javelin. pirus, i, f., pear-tree. Piso, onis, m., Piso, a Roman name. placeo, ere, ui, itum, please, sat- isfy, seem good. planities, ei, f. (planus, level), level ground, plain. plebs, plebis, f,, the common people, the multitude. plenus, a, um (root in compleo), full, complete. plerumque, adv. (ace. neut. of plerusque), for the most part, mostly. plerusque, aque, umque ; usually in the plur., plerique, aeque, aque, very many, the most, most. pliiriniura, adv. (ace. neut. of pluri- mus), very much, exceedingly ; plurimum posse, to be very powerful. pliirimus, sup. of multus ; usually in plur., plurimi, ae, a, very many, most ; quazu plurimi, as many as possible. plus, pluris, comp. of multus; in the sing., a neuter noun (N. 27), more ; plus audaciae, more {of) boldness ; in the plur., an adj., more, several. plus, adv. (ace. neut. of plus, above), more; plus posse, to have more power. poena, ae, f., penalty, punishment. poeta, ae, m., poet. polliceor, eri, itus sum, dep., promise, offer. Pompeius, i, m., Pompey, a famous Roman general, rival of Caesar. pono, ere, posui, positum, put, place, station ; castra ponere, pitch a camp. pons, pontis, m., bridge. poposci, perf. of posc5. populor, ari, atus sum, dep. (populus), lay waste, ravage, dev^ astate, depopulate. populus, 1, III., people, nation, tribe. porta, ae, f., gate, entrance, door. porto, are, avi, atum, carry, bear, convey. posco, ere, poposci, ask for, de- mand. possessio, oiaiB, i., possession, estate, jjroperty. possum, posse, potui, irr. (potis, able + sum), be able, can, have in- fluence or power ; plus (pluri- mum) posse, to have more {very great) power. post, prep, with ace., after, behind. post, adv., after, afterwards. postea, adv. (post + is), after this, afterwards. posteaquam, conj. (postea + quam), after {that), after. posterus, a, um (post), comp. posterior ; sup. postremus and postumus, following, next. postquam, conj. (post + quam), after {that), after, when, as soon as. postremus, sup. of posterus, lat- est, last, in the rear. postridie, adv. (postero + die), on the following day ; p. ejus diei, on the day after that day. postulo, are, avi, atum (posco), ask, demand. potens, tis, part, of possum as adj.. able, powerful, influential. potentatus, us, m. {jpotens), power, dominion, rule. potestas, atis, f. (possum), power, ability, opportunity, right; potes- tatem facere, to give an oppor- tunity. potior, iri, itus sum, dep. (potis, able), get possession of, obtain, be- come master of. prae, prep, with abl., before, in front of, in comparison with. praebeo, ere, ui, itum (prae + habeo), furnish, offer, show. GENERAL VOCABULARY. 287 praecedo, ere, cessi, cessum (prae + cedo, go)^ go before^ sur- pass, excel. praeceps, cipitis (prae + caput), headlong, hasty, steep, praedor, ari, atus sum, dep. (praeda, prey), plunder, rob, make booty. praeficio, ere, feci, fectum (prae + facio), set over, place in com- mand of. praemitto, ere, misi, missum (prae + mitto), send before or ahead, send in advance. praemium, i, n., reioard. praescribo, ere, psi, ptum (prae + scribo), dictate, command, pre- scribe, appoint. praescriptum, i, n. (praescribo), command, order, direction. praesidium, i, n., defence, guard, protection, garrison, aid. praesto, are, stiti, stitum (prae + sto), surpass, excel, show ; im- pers., praestat, it is better . praesum, esse, fui, irr. (prae + sum), be in command of, have charge of. praeter, prep, with ace. (prae), beyond, except, besides, contrary to. praeterea, adv. (praeter -f is), besides this, besides, moreover. praeterquam, adv. (praeter + quam), besides, except. premo, ere, pressi, pressum, press, press hard or hard press. pretium, i, n., price, value, pay. primo, adv. (abl. of primus), at first. primum, adv. (ace. of primus), first, in the first place ; quam primum, as soon as possible ; quum primum, as soon as. primus, a, um, sup. of prior, firsts foremost, principal ; primum ag- men, the van; prima liice, at daybreak. princeps, cipis (primus + capio), first, chief; as a noun, m. and f., leader, leading man^ chief. principatus, lis, m. (princeps), fi7'st rank or place, chief position, leadership. prior, us (no pos., sup. primus), former, j^revious, superior, pristinus, a, um, former, early, original. priusquam, conj. (prius + quam), before, sooner than. privatus, a, um, private, one^s own. pro, prep, with abl., before, in front of, in behalf of or for, instead of in proportion to, considering. probo, are, avi, atum, try, ap- prove, show, prove. procedo, ere, cessi, cessum (pro + cedo, go), advance, proceed. procurro, ere, curri or cucurri, cursum (pro + curro), run for- ward, rush forth. prodo, ere, didi, ditum (pro -h do), give forth, hand down (to pos- terity), deliver, betray. proelium, i, n., battle, combat. profectio, onis, f. (proficiscor), departure, setting out. profectus, part, of proficiscor. proficiscor, i, profectus sum, dep. (pro + facio, that is, put one's self forward), set out, go, march. profugio, ere, fiigi, fugitum (pro + fugio), escape, flee, flee for refuge. progredior, i, gressus sum, dep. (pro + gradior, go), go forward, advance, proceed. prohibeo, ere, ui, itum (pro + habeo), hold back or off, check, re- strain, keep from. projicio, ere, jeci, jectum (pro + jacio), throw forth or forward, prostrate. prope, adv. (comp. propius ; sup. proxime), near, almost. prope, prep, with ace, near, close to. propior, us (no pos.; sup. proxi- mus), nearer. propter, prep, with ace., on account of, by reason of. 288 GENERAL VOCABULARY. propterea, adv. (propter + is), for this reason, on that account ; with quod, because that. prosum, prodesse, profui, irr. (pro + sum), be helpful, benefit. provide©, ere, vidi, visum (pro + video), foresee, provide for, care for. provincia, ae, f. (pro + vinco), subdued region, province. proxime, adv. (prope), next, very recently, last. proximus, sup. of propior, nearest, next, following ; with iter, shortest road. publicus, a, um, of the state, public. puella, ae, f., girl. puer, i, m., boy, child. pugna, ae, i., fight, combat, battle. pugn5, are, avi, atum (pugna), fight, contend. pulcher, chra, chrum, beautiful, handsome, noble. pulsus, part, of pello. punio, ire, ivi, itum (poena), punish. put5, are, avi, atum, thinh, sup- pose, recJcon, judge. Pyrenaeus, a, um ; as a noun, Pyrenaei (montes), the Pyre- nees, a mountain range between Gaul and Spain. Q. qua, adv. (abl. of qui, via under- stood), by which way, where. quaero, ere, quaesivi (ii), quae- situm, seeh, ask, inquire. qualis, e, (1) interrog. adj. (quis), of what nature or kind, of what sort, 2uhat kind of; (2) rel. adj. (qui), as; talis . . . qualis, such . . . as. quam, adv. (ace. of quis), how, how much, as, than ; with superlative, as possible ; quam primum, as soon as possible. quamobrem, adv. (quam + ob + rem), for what reason, wherefore, why, on this account. quantus, a, um (quam), how great, how much; as a correlative to tantus, as; as an abl. of deg. of diff., quanto . . . tanto, the . . . the. quare, adv. (qua + re), for what cause or reason, why, wherefore, therefore. -que, enclitic conj., and. quemadmodum, adv. (ad + quem + modum), after what manner, how. queror, i, questus sum, dep., complain, lament. qui, quae, quod, rel. pron., who, which, what, that. quidam, quaedam, quoddam or quiddam, indef. pron., a certain one, a certain, some one, somebody, something. quidem, adv., indeed, certainly, at least ; ne . . . quidem, not even. quin, conj. (qui + ne), that not, but that, that; quin Ireva, from going. quis (or qui), quae, quid (or quod), interrog. pron., who f which f what f quisquam, quaequam, quid- quam or quicquam, indef. pron., any, some, any one, something. quisque, quaeque, quidque or quodque, indef. pron., each, every, any; quisque ditissimus, all the wealthiest men. quo, adv. (abl. of qui), whither, where, why, wherefore ; with com- paratives, as deg. of diff., qu5 . . . eo, the . . . the. quo, conj. (abl. of qui), in order that, that (regularly with compara- tives). quod, conj. (ace. of qui), in that, that, because, as to the fact that ; quod si, now if, but if quominus (or quo minus), conj., by lohich the less, so that not, lest. quoniam, conj. (quum + jam), since now, because, since. quoque, conj., also, too. GENEKAL VOCABULARY. 289 quot, indecl. adj., how many, as many, as ; tot . . . quot, as many , . , as. quotidianus, a, um (quotidie, daily), every day, daily, ordinary. quum (or cum), conj., when, after, lohile, since, because, although ; quum . . . turn, not only . . . but also ; quum primum, as soon as. R. ratis, is, f., Jloat, raft. Rauraci, orum, m., the Rauraci, a Gallic people, on the Rhine, recens, tis, fresh, new, recent. recipio, ere, cepi, ceptum (re + capio), take back, recover, receive , se recipere, withdraw, betake one^s self. reddo, ere, didi, ditum (re -h do), give back, restore, return, give up. redeo, ire, ivi (ii), itum, irr. (re + eo), go back, return. reditio, onis, f. (redeo), returning, return. reduco, ere, xi, ctum (re + duco), lead back, bring back. refers, ferre, tuli, latum, irr. (re + fero), bring back, carry back, pay back, announce, report. regnum, i, n. (rex), sovereignty, rule, authority, kingdom. rego, ere> xi, ctum, rule, govern, guide, direct. rejicio, ere, jeci, jectum (re + jacio), cast, hurl or throw back, throw away, drive back. relictus, part, of relinquo. relinquo, ere, liqui, lictum (re + linquo, leave), leave behind, leave, abandon. reliquus, a, um (relinquo), re- maining, rest of, future ; reliqui Galli, the rest of the Gauls; nihil est reliqui, there is nothing left ; in reliquum tempus, for the future. reminiscor, i, dep. (re + root of memini), recall to mind, recollect, remember. remitto, ere, misi, missum (re + mitto), send back, hurl back, give back, restore. removes, ere, movi, motum (re + moveo), move back, take away, remove. Remus, i, m., one of the Remi; (plur.) Kemi, orum, the Remi, 0, (^llic people. ren^tio, are, avi, atum (re + nuntio), bring back word or news, report. repello, ere, puli, pulsum (re + pello), drive back, repel, repulse, drive away. repentinus, a, um, sudden, unex- pected. reperio, ire, peri, pertum, fnd, discover, learn, ascertain. repeto, ere, ivi, itum (re + peto), seek or ask again, demand back, claim. reprehend©, ere, di, sum, blame, rebuke, reprove. res, rei, f., thing, affair, fact, event, circumstance, property ; res f ami- liaris, private property ; res fru- mentaria, provisions, corn-supply ; respublica (or res publica), the state ; res novae, revolution. rescinds, ere, scidi, scissum (re + scindS, cut), cut down, break down, destroy. resists, ere, stiti (re + sistS, place), withstand, resist, oppose. respiciS, ere, spexi, spectum (re + speciS, look), look back, look be- hind, consider. respondeS, ere, di, sum, ansioer, reply, respond. responsum, i, n. (respondeS), answer, reply. respublica (or res publica), rei- publicae, f., republic, state, com- monwealth. rests, are, stiti (re + stS), stay behind, remain ; impers., restat, it remains. 19 290 GENERAL VOCABULARY. retineo, ere, ui, tentum (re + teneo), hold back, retain, keep, check, restrain. reverto, ere, ti, sum, and re- verter, 1, sus sum, dep. (re + verto, turn), turn back, return; the perfect-stem tenses are from the active forms; the others are from the deponent. rex, regis, m. (rego), king. Rhenus, i, m., the Rhine, eastern boundary of Gaul. Rhodanus, i, m., the Rhone, a large river of S. E. Gaul. ripa, ae, f., bank (of a river). rogo, are, avi, atum, ask, request, beg. Roma, ae, f., Rome, a city of Italy, capital of the Roman Empire. Romanus, a, um (Roma), Roman ; as a noun, a Roman, the Romans. rosa, ae, f., rose. rursus, adv. (reversus), back, again. rus, ruris, n., the country; ruri, in the country. Sabinus, i, m., Sabinus, one o^ Caesar's lieutenants. saepe, adv. (comp, saepius ; sup. saepissime), often, frequently ; minime saepe, very seldom. salus, utis, f ., safety, security, place of safety. Santoni, orum (or Santones, um), m., the Santones, a Gallic people. sapiens, tis, wise, discreet. sapienter, adv. (sapiens), wisely, prudently. sarcina, ae, f., pack, burden; espe- cially in plural, sarcinae, baggage (carried by each soldier), light bag- gage. Sardes, ium, f,, Sardis, capital of Lydia. satis, (1) indecl. adj. ; (2) indecl. noun; (3) adv., enough, sufficient, sufficiently, quite. satisfacio, ere, feci, factum (satis + facio), give satisfaction, satisfy, apologize. scio, ire, ivi (ii), itum, know, understand. scribo, ere, psi, ptum, write. secutus, part, of sequor. sed, conj., but, but yet. sedes, is, f. (sedeo, sit), seat, resi- dence, abode. Segusiavi, orum, m., the Segu- sidvi, a Gallic people. sementis, is, f ., a sowing. semper, adv., alivays, ever. senatus, us, m. (senex, old), coun- cil of elder's, senate. sententia, ae, f., opinion, thought, purpose, decision. septentriones, um, m. (literally, the seven plough-oxen), the north ; the seven stars forming the constel- lation called the Great Bear. Sequana, ae, m., the Seine, a river in Gaul. Sequanus, a, um, of the Sequani, Sequanian ; as a noun (masc. plur.), the Sequani, a Gallic people. sequor, i, cutus sum, dej)., follow, jmrsue. sermo, onis, m., discourse, conver- sation. servilis, e (servus), of a slave, ser- vile. servio, ire, ivi (ii), itum (servus), be a slave to, serve, servitus, utis, f. (servus), slavery, servitude. servo, are, avi, atum, preserve, save, keep, guard; fidem servare, to keep one's word. servus, i, m., slave, servant. sestertius, i, m., a sestertius or ses- terce, coin worth about five cents. si, conj., if; in ind. quest, whether, SIC, adv., thus, so. signum, i, n., mark, sign, signal, standard ; signa inf erre, to march to the attack, attack ; signa con- vertere, face about. silva, ae, f., forest, wood. similis, e, like, similar. GENERAL VOCABULAEY. 291 sin, conj. (si + ne), but if^ if how- ever. sine, prep, with abl., without. singuli, ae, a, distrib. adj., single, one by one. sinister, tra, trum, left, on the left^ unfavorable. siquis (siqui), siqua, siquid (si- quod), iiidef. pron. (also written separate!}^), if any, if any one, whoever^ whatever. sive, conj. (si + ve), also written sen, or if, whether ; sive . . . sive, whether . . . or. socer, eri, m., father-in-law. soclus, i, m., companion, ally. sol, solis, m., sun. soleo, ere, itus sum, semi-dep., be wont, be accustomed. solum, i, n., ground, soil, land. solum, adv. (ace. of solus), only, merely. solus, a, um (gen. ius), alone, only, merely. soror, oris, f., sister. spatium, i, n., space, distance, ex- tent^ period (of time), opportunity. specto, are, avi, atum (specio, looh), look at, observe, (of territory) face, lie towards. spero, are, avi, atum (spes), hope, expect, long for. spes, ei, f., hope, expectation. spolium, i, n., spoil, plunder. sponte, f. abl. (only other case in use, gen. spontis), of one's own free will or accord, by one's self without aid. status, ere, ui, utum, set up, establish, determine, decide. Stella, ae, f., star. stipendium, i, n., tax, tribute, pay. sto, stare, steti, statum, stand, stand firm or fast, persist, cost. studeo, ere, ui, be eager for, favor, desire, study. sub, prep, with ace. or abl. (N. 95, c), under, beneath, at the foot of, to- wards; sub monte, at the foot of the mountain ; sub vesperum, towards evening. subeo, ire, Ivi (ii), itum (sub + eo), go under, approach, undergo, encounter. sublatus, part, of tollo. subsidium, i, n., relief, reserve, help, protection. Suevus, a, um, of the Suevi, Sue- vian; as a noun (plur.), the Suevi, a verj^ powerful people of Germany. sui, sibi, se (sese), refl. pron. 3d pers., of {to, etc.) himself, herself itself, themselves. sum, esse, fui, irr., be, stay, belong, serve; vobis est in animo, you intend; praesidio urbi esse, to serve as a protection to the city. summus, sup. of superus, highest, chief greatest, most important, top of ; res summae, most iniportant subjects ; summa vi, with all their might; summus mons, top of the mountain. sumo, ere, sumpsi, sumptum, taJce, assume, claim, undertake ; supplicium de te sumere, to inflict punishment on you. superior, us, comp. of superus, higher, upper, former, superior, greater. super o, are, avi, atum (super, above, over), overcome, surpass, ex- cel, survive. supersum, esse, fui (super, over + sum), be over and above, be left, survive. superus, a, um, comp. superior ; sup. supremus or summus (su- per, above), upper, above. See summus. suppeto, ere, ivi (ii), itum (sub + peto), be at hand, be in store. supplicium, i, n., punishment, pen- alty, torture. supra, prep, with ace. or adv., above, before, previously. suscipio, ere, cepi, ceptum (sub + capio), take up, undertake ; sibi suscipere, to take upon one's self undertake. suspici5, onis, f., suspicion, dis- trust. 292 GENERAL VOCABULARY. suspicor, ari, atus sum, dep., sus- pect, distrust, mistrust, sustineo, ere, ui, tentum (sub + teneo), sustain, bear, endure, with- stand. suus, a, um, poss. and refl. pron. (sui), his, her, its, their ; masc. plur. sui, one^s friends, soldiers, etc. ; neut. plur. sua, one's prop- erty, possessions. T. talis, e, such (in quality), of such a kind. tain, adv., so, so very. tamen, conj., yet, nevertheless, still. tametsi, conj. (tamen + etsi), al- though, notwithstanding, tango, ere, tetigi, tactum, touch, reach, border on. tantum, adv. (ace. neut. of tantus), so much, so far, only, tantus, a, um (tam), so great, such (in size), so much, so many ; tanto, abl. of deg. of diff., by so much, the, tardo, are, avi, atum (tardus), delay, check, hinder. tardus, a, um, slow, sluggish, tardy. tego, ere, xi, ctum, cover, hide, defend. telum, 1, n., weapon (thrown from a distance), spear, javelin, tempero, are, avi, atum, restrain, govern, refrain, abstain. templum, i, n., temple. tempus, oris, n., time, season, occa- sion ; in reliquum tempus, for the future, teneo, ere, ui, tentum, hold, keep, occupy, possess, bind. terreo, ere, ui, itum, frighten, alarm, terrify. testis, is, m. and i., witness. Tigurinus, a, um, of the Tigurlni; as a noun (masc. plur.), the Tigu- rlni, a Helvetian tribe. timeo, ere, ui, fear, be afraid of. timidus, a, um (timeS), timid, afraid, cowardly. timor, oris, m. (timeo), fear, alarm. Titus, i, m., Titus, a Roman per- sonal name. tollo, ere, sustuli, sublatum, raise, take away, remove, destroy, be elated (pass.). Tolosates, ium, m., the Tolosates, inhabitants of Tolosa (modern Tou- louse). tot, indecl. adj., so many, totus, a, um (gen. ius), all, the whole, entire, trado, ere, didi, ditum (trans + do), give over, give up, surrender, traduco, see transduco. trans, prep, with ace, across, be- yond, over, on the farther side of, Transalpinus, a, um (trans + Alpes), situated beyond the Alps, Transalpine, transduco (or tradiico), ere, xi, ctum (trans + duco), lead across or over, bring over, transport, transeo, ire, ivi (ii), itum (trans + eo), go over, pass over, cross, tres, tria, num. adj., three, tribuo, ere, ui, iitum, impart, render, attribute, ascribe, triduum, i, n. (tres + dies), space of three days, three days, triplex, icis, threefold, triple. tristis, e, sad, gloomy, sorrowful, tu, tui, pers. pron., thou, you, tuba, ae, f., trumpet, Tulingi, orum, m., the Tulingi, a Gallic people. turris, is, f., tower. tuus, a, um, poss. pron. (tu), thy, your, u. ubi, adv. and conj., where, when, after. ulciscor, i, ultus sum, dep., take vengeance on, avenge, punish. ullus, a, um (gen. ius), any, any one. GENERAL VOCABULARY. 293 ulterior, us (ultra, beyond), sup. ultimus, farther, ulterior, more remote, ultimus, a, um (sup. of ulterior), farthest, most distant, last. lina, adv. (abl. of unus, via under- stood), at one or the same time, to- gether; with cum, together with. unde, adv., ichence, from which place. undique, adv. (unde + que), from all sides, on all sides, everywhere. unquam, adv. (for iinumquam), at any time, ever. iinus, a, um (gen. lus), num. adj., one, only, alone ; (plur.) iini, alone, urbs, urbis, f., city, the city (Rome), urgeo, ere, ursi, press, press hard, crowd, oppress. usus, Us, m. (utor)j use, practice, service, advantage. ut, conj., that, in order that, so that, (with verbs of fearing) that not; as an adv., how, as. uter, tra, trum (gen. utrius), which (of two). uterque, traque, trumque (uter + que), each (of two), both. Utl r= ut. iitilis, e (utor), useful, serviceable, advantageous. utinam, adv. (in clauses expressing wish), would that ! that ! utor, 1, usus sum, dep., use, make use of, employ, adopt, enjoy. utrum, adv., used in double ques- tions (uter) ; in direct questions, not translated ; in indirect ques- tions, whether. vaco, are, avi, atum, be empty, be unoccupied. vadum, I, n., ford, shoal. vagor, arl, atus sum, dep., wander about, roam. vallum, 1, n., wall, rampart, in- trench ment. vasto, are, avi, atum, lay waste^ ravage, devastate, destroy. vectigal, alis, n., tax, revenue. vel, conj., or, even ; vel . . . vel, either . , . or. vendo, ere, didi, ditum, sell, offer for sale. Veneti, orum, m., the Veneti, a Gallic people. venio, ire, veni, ventum, come. verbum, i, n., word ; (plur.) words, language, conversation. vereor, eri, itus sum, dep., fear, dread, be afraid of. vergo, ere, incline, lie towards, be situated towards. vero, adv. (abl. of verus, true), in truth, truly, but, indeed. versor, ari, atus sum, dep. (ver- to, turn), move about, be busy, dwell, be. Verudoctius, i, m., Verudoctius, a Helvetian. Vesontio, onis, m., Vesontio, a town of the Sequani. vesper, eri, m., evening; sub ves- perum, towards evening. vester, tra, trum, poss. pron. (vos), your, yours. vetus, eris, old, ancient. via, ae, f., way, road, journey, march. viator, oris, m. (via), wayfarer, traveller. victor, oris, m. (vinco), conqueror, victor ; as an adj., victorious. victoria, ae, f. (victor), victory. victus, part, of vinco ; as a noun, victi, the conquered, vanquished. vicus, i, m., village. video, ere, vidi, visum, see, be- hold, perceive. videor, eri, visus sum, dep. (pass. of video), seem, appear, seem good. vigilia, ae, f. (literally, a watching, watch), a watch, a fourth part of the night. The night was divided into four vigiliae, or watches, ex- tending from sunset to sunrise. The third watch began at midnight. The length of each watch depended, of course, on the season of the year. 294 GENERAL VOCABULARY. vinco, ere, vici, victum, conquer, overcome, subdue. vinculum, i, n. (vincio, bind), bond, fetters, chain; ex vinculis, in chains. vir, viri, m., man, brave man, hero ; homo means man or woman, human being, (in plur.) mankind. virgo, inis, f., maiden, maid, virgin. virtus, utis, f. (vir), manliness, courage, bravery, worth, ability. VIS, VIS, f., force, power, violence; (plur.) vires, ium, strength, power; vim facere, to use violence. vita, ae, f. (vivo), life. vito, are, avi, atum, avoid, shun, escape. vivo, ere, vixi, victum, live, dwell, vix, adv., with difficulty, scarcely, hardly. voco, are, avi, atum (vox), call, summon, invite, name. Vocontii, orum, m., the Vocontii, a Gallic people. volo, velle, volui, irr., wish, de- sire. voluntas, atis, f. (volo), wish, will, consent, good- will. vox, vocis, f., voice, sound, word. vulgus, i, n., common people, crowd. vulnero, are, avi, atum (vulnus), wound, hurt. vulnus, eris, n., wound, injury. English -Latin. able {to be), possum. about (= concerning), de. about, adv. with num. adj., circiter, ad. about to, use the 1st Periphrastic Con j. abundance, copia. accuse, accuse. accustomed (to be), consuevi, soleo. across, trans. active, alacer. advance, progredior. advise, moneo. after, (conj.) postquam ; (prep, or adv.) post. against, contra, in. ago, ante, aid, auxilium. alarm, commoveS. all, omnis. allow, patior. ally, socius. alone, solus. Alps, Alpes. although, quum, etsi, tametsi. always, semper. ambassador, legatus. among, inter, apud, in. and, et, que, atque (and also), animal, animal. announce, nuntio. another, alius. any, ullus ; any one, anything, ali- quis, aliquid; if any, siquis. arms, arma. arm,y, exercitus. arrival, adventus. arrive, pervenio. ascertain, cognosce. asTc (N. 199, 4), rogo, peto, quaero. attack, impetus : to attack, oppug- no, impetum in (+ ace.) facere. attempt, Conor. attentive, attentus. auxiliaries, auxilia. away from, a, ab. B. bad, malus. baggage (heavy), impedimenta \ (light) sarcinae. barbarian, barbarus. battle, proelium. be, sum ; be distant, absum. bear, fero. beautiful, pulcher. because, quod. before, ante. begin, coepi, incipio (for pres.-stem tenses). beginning, initium. behind, post. believe, credo. besiege, oppugno. best, optimus. between, inter. black, niger. body, corpus. bold, audax. boldly, audacter. book, liber. born (to be), nascor. both . . . and, et . . . et. boy, puer. brave, fortis. bravery, virtus. break up camp, castra movere. bridge, pons. brief, brevis. bright, clarus. bring, fero, affero. bring back word, renuntio. broad, latus. brother, f rater. build, aedificd. 296 GENERAL VOCABULARY. building^ aedificium. burden, onus. burn, burn up, exuro, comburd* but, sed. bj/, a, ab. call, voco ; call together, convoco. camp, castra. can, could, possum. capture, capio, expugno. careful, dlligens. carry, porto, fero. carry on war, bellum ger5. Carthage, Karthago. cause, causa. cavalry, equitatus, equites. certain (a), quidam. chief, princeps. choose, deligo. Cicero, Cicero. citadel, arx. citizen, civis. city, urbs. close, claudo. cloud, nubes. cohort, cohors. collect, confer©, cogo. come, venio. command, jubeo, impero ; to be in command of, praesum. commander, imperator. compel, cogo. commonwealth, respublica. concerning, de. congratulate, gratulor. conquer, vinco. conspire, conjuro. consul, consuL contest, see fight< corn, frumentum. council, concilium. country, fines, patria {native land), rus. courage, virtus. cowardly, ignavus. cross, transeo. custom, mos. D. danger, periculum. dare, audeo. daughter, filia. day, dies ; at day-breah, prima liice. dear, carus. death, mors. deep, altus. defend, defendo. delay, moror. demand, postulo. deny, nego. depart, discedo. depth, altitude. deserve, mereor. desirous, cupidus. destroy, deleo. determine, constituo. die, morior. differ, differo. difficult, diificilis ; very difficult, perdiflacilis. direction, pars. dismiss, dimitto. do, facio, ago. door, porta. doubt {to), dubito ; there is no doubt that, non est dubium quin. draw up, instruo. drive bach, rejicio. duty, see N. 126, a, dwell, incolo. E. each, quisque. eager, alacer. easy, f acilis ; very easy, perfacilis. easily, facile. elect, creo. embassy, legatio. empire, imperium. encounter, subeo, occurro. encourage, hortor, cohortor. end, finis. enemy, hostis ; the enemy, hostes. enlist, conscribo. equal, par. GENEEAL VOCABULARY. 297 every, quisque, omnis. example, exemplum. exhort, hortor, cohortor. exile, exsilium. extend, pertineo. eye, oculus. fact, res. fall, cado. far, by far, longe. farmer, agricola. father, pater. fear, timor, metus. fear {to), vereor, timeo. few, pauci. field, ager. fierce, ferox. fight (to), pugno ; the fight (contest) is carried on, pugnatur. fill, compleo. find, invenio, reperio. find out, cognosce. fire, ignis. flee, fugio. flourishing, florens. flower, flos. follow, sequor. following, posterus. foot, pes ; at the foot of the moun- tain, sub monte. for (= towards), ad. forces, copiae. forest, silva. forget, obliviscor. fortify, munio. free, liber. free (to), libero. friend, amicus ; friendly, amicus. frighten, terreo, perterreo. from, a, ab (away from), e, ex (out of)', from each other, inter nos, se, etc. G. gate, porta. Gaul, Gallia ; a Gaul, Gallus. general, imperator. German^ Germanus. get possession of, potior. gift, donum. girl, puella. give, do ; give back, reddo. glory, gloria. go, eo ; go out, exeo ; go baclc, redeo. god, deus. goddess, dea. going to, use 1st Periphrastic Conj. good, bonus. government, imperium. great, magnus ; so great, tantus ; how great, quantus. greatness, magnitude. guard, custos, praesidium, H. hand, manus. happen, accido. happy, beatus, felix. harm, noceo ; harm is done, no» cetur. hasten, mature, contend©. have, habeo. head, caput. hear, audio. heavy, gravis. height, altitude. hesitate, dubito. high, altus. hill, coUis. hinder, impedio. hither, hue. hold, teneo ; hold in possession, ob- tineo. home, domus. honor, honor. hope, spes. hope (to), spero. horse, equus. horseman, eques. hostage, obses. hour, hora. house, domus. how, quam, quemadmodum. how great, quantus. huge, ingens. hurl, conjicio. 298 GENERAL VOCABULARY. impose^ impono. in, in. infantry, pedites, peditatus. influence, auctoritas ; (to), adduce. inform, certiorem (es) facere. injury, injuria. intend to, 1st Periphrastic Conj. into, in. invite, invito. island, insula. Italy, Italia. J. Join {to), jungo, conjungo. join battle, proelium committere. journey, iter. judge, judex. judge (to), judic5. just, Justus. keep from, prohibeo. keeper, custos. king, rex. kill, interficio. know, scio. L. lake, lacus. language, lingua. large, magnus. last part of, extremus ; as, ex- trema hieme. lay waste, vasto. lead, duco ; lead across, transduce, lead back, reduco ; lead out, ediico. leader, dux. leave, relinquo. legate, legatus. legion, legio. length, longitudd less, minus. lest, ne. letter, (of the alphabet) littera ; (an epistle) litterae; epistola. lieutenant, legatus. life, vita. light, lux. light, levis ; light baggage, sar- cinae, like, similis. limit (to), finio. line of battle, acies ; line of march, agmen. lion, leo. lofty, altus. long, longus. lose, amitto. love (to), amo. lower, inferior. Lyons, Lugdiinum. M. magistrate, magistratus. maiden, virgo. make, facio ; make war upon^ bel- lum infer o. man, vir, homo. many, multi ; very many, per- multi. march, iter ; to march, iter facere. master (teacJier), magister. memory, memoria. message, nuntius. messenger, nuntius. midnight, media nox. mile, mille passiis ; miles, millia passuum. military science, res militaris. mind, animus, mens. mindful, memor. money, peciinia. more, plus, amplius. mortal, mortalis. mother, mater. mountain, mons ; mountain - top, summus mons. move, moveo. much, multus ; adv., multo (with comp.). must, oportet or gerundive. my, mine, meus. GENEEAL VOCABULARY. 299 name^ nomen. nature, natura. wear, prope. neighbors, finitimi. neighborhood of {in the), ad, circum. neither, neque (nee). new, novus. night, nox. no, nullus. noble, nobilis. noon, meridies. nor, neque (nee). not, non ; in negative commands and wishes, ne. nothing, nihil. number, niunerus. o. oath, jusjurandum. obey, pareo. obtain possession of, potior. often, saepe. one, unus ; one . . . another, alius . . . alius ; the one . . . the other, alter . . . alter. only, solus ; adv., solum ; not only, non solum. opinion, sententia. opportunity, potestas, facultas. or, aut, vel ; in double questions, an ; or not, (direct questions) an- non, (indirect questions) necne. order, jubeo (with ace), impero (with dat.). other, alius ; the other (of two), alter. ought, oportet, debeo. out of, e (ex). overcome, supero. pain, dolor. party pars. pass the luinter, hiemo. pay, merces, pretium. peace, pax. people, populus. peril, periculum. persuade, persuaded. pitch camp, castra ponere. place, locus; places^ loca. plan, consilium. poet, poeta. point out, monstro, demonstro. Pompey, Pompeius. possession {get or obtain), pbtior. possible {as), quam + superlative. powerful, potens ; to be more (or very) powerful, plus (or pluri- mum) posse. praise {to), laudo. praise, laus. prefer, malo. price, pretium. promise, polliceor. protect, servo ; esse praesidio (+ dat. of advantage). province, provincia. punish, punio, animadverto. quick, celer. Q. R. rampart, vallum. read, lego. reason, causa ; for this reason, propterea. receive, accipio, recipio. recent, recens. rejoice, laetor, gaudeo. release, llbero. remain, maneo. reply {to), respondeo. reply, responsum. respublica, resisto. respecting, de. rest of, reliquus. restrain, retineo ; restrain from^ retinere quin. return, reverter, redeo. 300 GENERAL VOCABULARY. revolution, res novae. reward, praemium. Rhine, Rlienus. Rhone, Bhodanus. rich, dives. right, jiis. river, flumen. road, via, iter. Roman, Komanus. Rome, Roma. rose, rosa. route, iter. rule, rego. s. sad, tristls. sailor, nauta. salce of {for the), causa. same. Idem. satisfy, satisfacio. save, servo. say, dico ; he says, dicit. science (military), res militaris. sea, mare. see, video. seek, peto. seize, occupo. seem, videor. self, ipse. sell, vendo. senate, senatus. send, mitto ; send ahead or for- ward, praemitto ; send bach, re- mitto. serve (as), sum, with dat. of purpose. sesterce or sestertius, sestertius. set f re to, incendo. set out, proficiscor. severe, gravis. ship, navis ; ship of tvar, n. longa. short, brevis. show, monstro. sich, aeger. side of (on this), cis, citra. signal, signum. since, quum. sister, soror. size, magnitudo. skilled, peritus. slave, servus. i slavery, servitus. small, parvus. so, ita, tam ; so many, tot. soldier, miles. some . . . others, alii . . . alii. some one, something, aliquis, ali- quid. son, filius. sort (of such a), ejusmodi. speak, dico, loquor. speech, oratio. spur, calcar. star, Stella. state, civitas, respublica. stone, lapis. storm, take by storm, expugno. story, fabula. strength, vis. summon, voco, convoco. sunset, occasus solis. supplies, commeatus, copiae. suppose, puto. surpass, praesto (with dat.), prae- cedo (with ace). surrender, dedo. suspect, suspicor. sustain, sustineo. sword, gladius. table, mensa. take, capio ; take by storm, ex- pugno. tall, altus. tax, vectigal, stipendium. teach, doceo. teacher, magister. tell, dico, narro. temple, templum. terrify, terreo, perterreo. territory, fines, ager. than, quam. that, conj., ut ; dem. pron., is, ille ; rel. pron., qui. that not, (purpose) ne, (result) ut non. thing, res or the neuter form of an adj. or pron. I think, puts, existimo. GENEEAL VOCABULARY. 301 this, hie. through^ per. throw, jaeio. till (to), eolo. time, tempus. timid, timidus. to, ad. tongue, lingua. top of, summus. towards, ad, sub (of time). tower, turris. town, oppidum. tribute, stipendium, troops, copiae. trumpet, tuba. try, Conor. u. ' uncertain, ineertus. under, sub. undergo, subeo. understand, intelligo. unfriendly, inimicus. unhappy, infelix. unjust, injustus. unlike, dissimilis. imtil, dum. unwilling {to be), nolo. upper, superior. urge, hortor, cohortor. use, utor, useful, utilis. V. very, (1) sup. of adj. or adv.; (2) per as a prefix. vicinity of (in the), ad, circum ; from the vicinity of, a, ab. victor, victor. victory, victoria. violence, vis. voice, vox. w. wait, exspecto. wall, murus ; ivalls oj a city, moe- nia ; as a rampart, vallum. wander about, vagor. luar, bellum. watch, vigilia. way, via, iter. weapon, telum. weep, fleo. well, bene. what, interrog., quis (qui) ; rel., qui. when, quum, ubi. whether, utrum, num. which, (of two) uter, (of several) quis (qui). w\ile, dum ; a little while, paulis- per ; a little while ago, paulo ante. white, albus. who, interrog., quis (qui); rel., qui. whole, totus. why, cur, quare. wicked, malus. wide, latus. width, latitude. wing (of an army), cornu. winter (to pass the), hiemS ; winter- quarters, hiberna, wise, sapiens. wish, volo. with, cum. without, sine. woods, silva. word, verbum. work, opus. worthy, dignus. wound, vulnus ; to wound, vulnerS. wretched, miser. write, scribo. yet, tamen. yoke, jugum. your, yours, tuus, vester. INDEX. In this Index N. stands for NOTE, L. for LESSON, and A. for APPENDIX. The sig- nijicance of other abbreviations is evident, and needs no explanation. a, final, long in Abl. sing., N. 8 (8), 9, d. a (ab), how used, N. 95, a; how diff. from e (ex), N. 95, b ; with Abl. of Agent, N. 151, Caution ; as prefix, N. 99, 1. Ablative Case, pi. ending in -abus, N. 9, e ; ending in -i, or -e or -i, N. 17, b, 26, 28 ; position, N. 193, 5. Use (general), 20 (page 24), N. 146 ; used Adverbially, N. 39, a,'94, 1, 2, 146; with e (ex) or de, instead of Part. Gen,, N. 123, a, L. xlvi ; with peto, postulo, quaero, N. 141, r. 2, 199, 4 ; of Separation, N. 147, L. xxiii (but see N. 131, c) ; with opus and usus, N. 147, a; of Source, Birth, etc., N. 148 ; of Cause, N. 149, L. xl ; of Manner, N. 150, L. xlix ; of Ac- companiment, N. 150, a, L. xlix; of Means and Agent, N. 151, L. xxii, xlii ; with utor, etc., N. 151, a, L. xlii, with Adj. (fretus, etc.), N. 151, &, L. Ixx, — (dignus, etc.) N. 156, L. Ixx ; of Price, N. 151, c, L. Ixx ; of Quality, N. 152, L. Ixx; of Respect, N. 153, 191, b, L. xlix; with Comparatives, N. 154, L. Ixviii ; of Measure of DiflF., N. 155, L. Ixviii ; Ablative Absolute, N.157, L, lix; of Place, N. 158, 159, L. xxxix , Iv ; of Time , N . 160 , L. xlv. Abstract Nouns, page 44 (* at bottom of page). ac (atque), N. 96, a. Accent, 13 (page 21); of Gen. and Voc. in -i (for -ii and -ie), N. 10, fZ, e ; as affected by an Enclitic, 13* (page 21), N. 195, 4. accidit, inflection, A. 47. Accompaniment, howexpr., N. 150, <x, L. xlix. A.ccusative Case, 20 (page 24); in -im, N. 17, c ; in -is (pi.), N. 17, d, 18, 26 ; as Direct Object, N. 102, r., 139, L. iii ; Cognate, N. 140 ; two Ace, N. 141, and c, L. xxxiii ; used Adverbially [54 (page 15)], expr. Time, Distance, Degree, etc., N. 39, a, 94, 1, 142, L. xlv-xlvii; with Prep., N. 95, L. xxxix ; of Place to which, N. 158, 159, 6, L. xxxix, Iv; with Inf., N. 143,166,199, 3, L. xx; with propior and proximus, N. 132, a ; position, N. 193, 3. Active Voice, 14 (page 3). Adjectives, 9 (page 2), N. 24-43; A. 10-20; position, 193, 1. Use (general), 47 (page 13), N. 108 ; Attrib. and Pred., N. 108, 1- 5 ; used as Nouns, N. 109, L. xli ; agreeing with Inf. or Clause, N. 109, b, 126, a, r., L. Ivi; connected by et or -que, N. 195, 6 ; special uses, N. 110. [See also Declen- sions of Adjectives, Comparison, Nume- ral Adj., etc.] Adjective Clause, 42, b (page 12). Adjective Element, 38, a (page 11). Adverbial Accusative, see Accusative. Adverbial Clause, 42, c (page 12). Adverbial Element, 38, c (page 11) ; position, N. 193, 5. Adverbs, 28 (page 9) ; position, N. 193, 5 > formation, N. 38, a, b, 39 (bene, magno- pere, facile), 94 ; Comparison, N. 38, c, d ; Numeral Adverbs, N. 44. Use, N. 94, L. xxix ; Relative Adv. for a Relative Phrase, N. 115, e. Agent, expr. by Abl. , N. 151, Caution, L. xxii ; expr. by Dat., N. 136, L, Ix ; indirect (with per), N. 151, Caution. alienus, alter, alius, N. 195, 7. aliquis, N. 52, and a, c; L. liv ; A. 27. alius, N. 43, b; L. xiii ; A. 11; alius . . . alius, N. 195, 8, 9; L. xlviii ; alius, alter, alienus, diff. in meaning, N. 195, 7. Alphabet (Latin), page 17. alter, N. 43, b ; L. xiii ; A. 11 ; alter . . . alter, N. 195, 8 ; L. xlviii. ambo, how declined, N. 43, b. amo, inflection, A. 28, 29. an, see Double Questions. Analysis of Sentences, 34 (page 9), N. 194. Antecedent, 11, b (page 3) ; omitted, N. 115, a. Antepenult, and its accent, 13, b and r. 3 (page 21). antequam and priusquam, with Indie. and Subj., N. 184, c ; L. Ixxii. INDEX. 303 Aorist, N. 62, 171. Apodosis, N. 174. Appendix, pages 235-258. Apposition, 38, a (page 11), 46 (page 13) ; N. 106, L. V ; in such phrases as the city of Rome, N. 119, Caution ; expr. by Clause of Result, N. 181, e. as, a Rel. Pron., N. 115,/; as possible, how expressed, N. 40, c. Asking (verbs of), constr. with rogO, peto, postulo, quaero, N. 199, 4. Assimilation, N. 1 (6). " Attraction," Subj. of, N. 185. Attributive Adjectives, N. 108, 1, 2. audeo, N. 81 ; A. 38. audio, inflection, A, 35, 36. aut . . . aut, N. 195, 8. Auxiliary Verbs, 25 (page 8). ave, Imperative, N. 91, 2, b. bene, how compared, N. 39. bonus, N. 33, A. 17, a. bos, how declined, A. 7. C and g (with s, forming x), N. 1 (3), 12, a,. Caesar's " Gallic War," — Bk, I., chap. 1-13, pages 136-142 ; Notes on the same, pages 143-148. ca7i, how expressed, N. 197, 3. capio, inflection, A. 34. [See Verbs in -io.] Cardinal Adjectives, 9, b (page 2), N. 41 ; how declined, N. 42, c, 43. [See under unus, duo, tres, mille.] Case, 8 (page 2), 15, a, b (page 22) ; Table of Latin Cases, 20 (page 24) ; Case-endings, N. 6; formation of cases, N. 7. causa, with Genitive, N. 128, 149, a. Cause, expr. by Ablative, N. 149, L. xl ; by Indie, and Subj. Modes, N. 182, L. Ixix. celo, with two Accusatives, N. 141, r. 1. certiorem facio, with Ace. and Inf., N. 199 3. citerior, etc., N. 34, L. xxxiv, A. 17, b. Clauses, 41 (page 12) ; as modifiers, 42 (page 12), N. 104 ; as Subject, 36, d (page 10) : as Object, 42, a (page 12). [See Causal, Con- cessive, and Temporal Clauses.'] coepi, N. 91, 1, L. Ixiii, A. 46. cogo, with Ace. and Inf., N. 197, 8. Collective Nouns, 3, d (page 1) ; with pi. verb, 51, b (page 14), N. 117, c. Commands, Direct, N. 163, 178, Caution 2, L. xi ; Indirect, N. 164, c, 178 ; Negative, N. 178, Caution 2. Comparative Degree, 10 (page 2); how de- clined in Latin, N. 26, d, A. X5; plus, N. 27, A. 15, a ; translated rather, too, qidte^ N. 40, a ; with Abl., N. 154, L. ixviii. Comparison of Adjectives, 10 (page 2), N. 29 ; Regular, N. 30, L. xxviii, A. 16 ; Irregular, N. 31-36, L. xxix, xxxiv [see under Ir- regular Comparisonl ; by magis and maxime, N. 37 ; of Participles, N. 30, a. Comparison of Adverbs, N. 38, 39. Complement, 37, a (page 10), 46, a (page 13), N. 55, 103, L. vi. Complementary Infinitive, N. 165, b, L. xix. Complex Sentence, 40, c (page 12), N. 105. Compound (1) Nouns, N. 23, L. xxxvi ; (2) Words, N. 99 ; (3) Sentences, 40, b (page 12), N. 105. con (com, etc.), as prefix, N. 99, 1. Concession, how expressed, N. 183, L. Ixxi. Conditional Sentences, N. 174, 175, L. xxi, Iviii. Conjugation, 15 a (page 22) ; the Four Con- jugations, general statement, N. 54, 65 [See under First, Second, Third, and Fourth Conjugations; Verbs in -io; Periphrastic Conjugations, Deponent, Semi- Deponent, Irregular, Defective, and Impersonal Verbs]; peculiarities of the Four Conjugations, N. 79. Conjunctions, 30 (page 9), N. 96 ; omitted, N, 96, b. [See et, -que, atque.] Consonants, 3 (page 17) ; Consonant Changes, N. 1, 79, 8 ; Double Consonants, 4, c (page 17) ; Consonant Stems (Third Dec), N. 11, a, 15. constat, inflection, A. 47. consuevi, with Pres. meaning, N. 91, e., A. 46. t Contracted Syllables (length of), 11, e (page 21), N. 7, 20, c. Copula {to be) and Copulative Verbs, 87 (page 10), N. 55, 103, L. VI. Correlatives, N. 195, 8, L. xlviii. cum (prep.), with Abl., N. 150, a, L. xlix; omitted, N. 150, R. ; Enclitic, N. 53, a, 195, 3. cum (quum), with Indie, and Subj., N. 182, b, 183, a, 184, a, 'L. Ixix, Ixxi, Ixxii. d and t, before s, N. 1 (4), 12, 6. Dates, N. 161. Dative Case, 20 (page 24) ; how formed, N. 7 ; plural form in declension, N. 8 (5) ; ending in -i, see -ius in Gen. Sing. ; ending in -abus, N. 9, e, L. viii ; ending in -ubus, N. 20, R. ; of Indirect Object, N. 129, L. ix; when to must be trans, by ad, N. 129, a\ when /or must be trans, by pro, N. 129, b \ r 304 INDEX. with Intrans. Verbs, N. 180, (in the Passive) 131, a, Caution, 134, L. Ixvi ; of Advantage or Disadvantage, N. 131, L. Ixvi ; with Ad- jectives, N. 131, 6, 132, L. xxxiv ; for Abl. of Separation, N. 131, c ; with Compound Verbs containing Prepositions, N. 133, L. Ivii; denoting Possession, N. 135, L. Ixvii ; of Agent, N. 136, L. Ix ; two Datives, N. 137, L. Ixvii ; for Genitive, N. 138 ; position, N. 193, 3. de, as a prefix, N. 99, 1; with Abl., instead of Part. Gen.,N. 123, a dea, N. 6, 9, e, L. viii. Declaratory Sentences, 44, a (page 13), N. 100; in Indirect Discourse, N. 187. Declension, 15, a (page 22); general laws, N. 8 ; Declensions of Nouns (how distin- guished), 21 (page 25). [See ynder the different Declensions of Nouns and Ad- jectives.'] Defective Verbs, 27 (page 8), N. 91, L. Ixiii, A. 46. [See coepi, memini, odi, inquam, salve, ave.] Degree, expr. by Obj. or Ace, 54, 6 (page 15), N. 142, L. xlvii ; Degree of Difference, 54, 7 (page 16), N. 155, L. Ixviii. Demonstrative Pronouns, N. 49 ; as Adj., N. 114, 1; as Pers. Pron., N. 114, 2, L. li, A. 24; position, N. 193,4. Dependent Clauses, 41 (page 12). Deponent Verbs, N. 80; inflection, A. 37; with Abl. , N. 151, a, L. xlii. [See under the different Conjugations of Verbs.] Derived Words, N, 98. [See Endings.] deus, N. 6, 10,/; L. xiii die, due, fae, fer, N. 79, 5 dies, N. 22, b-d, A. 9. [See Fifth Declen- sion.] dignus, with Abl., N. 156, L. Ixx. Diminutives, N. 98, b. Diphthongs, 5 (page 18); quantity. 11, a (page 20). Direct Object, 89, a (page 11), 49 (page 14), N. 102, R., 139. L. iii ; position, N. 193, 3. Direct Questions, see' Questions. dis (di), as a prefix, N. 99, 2. Distributive Adjectives, N. 41, a ; how de- clined, N. 42, b. diu, compared, N. 39, b. dives, compared, N. 86, a ; declined, A. 14, a. domus, N. 21, b; expr. Place, N. 159, L. XXXV, A. 8, a. Double Questions, see Questions. dubito, with Subj. and Inf., N. 181, d, and Cautions, 199, 1. dubius, with Subj., N. 181, d, 199, 1. dum, [ivhile) with Hist. Pres., N. 168, r.,. L, Ixvi ; (until) N. 184, 6, L. Ixxii ; {provided] N. 183, d, L. Ixxii. dummodo, with Subj., N. 183, d. duo, N. 43, c, L. xlv, A. 20, b. e, final, quantity in declension, N. 8 (9); lo7ig b^ore i, N. 6, 22, d:, -e, -al, -ar, with Abl. in -i, N. 16, r., 26, b. e (ex), N. 95, a ; how diflf. from a (ab), N. 95, 6; with Abl. instead of Part. Gen., N. 123, a. ego, N. 46, L. 1, A 21. ejusmodi, meaning and use, N. 121. Enclitics, N. 53, a, 195, 3 ; as affecting accent of a word, N. 195, 4. Endings with special meaning : — Nouns (-or, -ulus), N. 98, a, b ; Adjectives (-ulus, -osus), N. 98, 6, c ; Verbs (-sco, -to), N. 98, rf, e ; -que (as in quisque), N. 53, c ; -vis (as in quivis), N. 52, d. English Grammar Reviewed, pages 1-16. English Method of Pronunciation, 9 (page 19). eo, N. 87, L. Iviii, A. 43; compounds often transitive, N. 87, R. eo . . . quo, N. 195, 8. esse omitted, N. 199, 2. est, sunt (there is, there are), N. 193, 6. et . . . et,N. 195,8. et, -que, atque, N. 96, a j omitted, N. 96, b. etsi in Concessions, N. 183, Caution. Etymology, defined, 1 (page 1). Euphonic Changes, N. 1,2. Exclamatory Sentences, 44, d (page 13), N. 100. Expletives (it, there), 55 (page 15). Extent of Space, 54, 3 (page 15), N. 142, 6, L. xlvi ; of Time, 54, 4 (page 15), N. 142, a, 160, L. xlv. exterus, N. 35, L. xxxiv, A. 17, c. facile, for faciliter, N. 89. facilis, etc., N. 31, b, L. xxix, A. 16, 6. facio and its compounds, N. 88, R. ; Imper. fac, N. 79, 5. [See fio.] Fearing, verbs of, with Subj., N. 179, e. fero, N. 86, L. Ivi, A. 42. fido, N. 81, A. 38. Fifth Declension, N. 22, L. xxxvi, A. 9. filia, N. 9, e, L. viii. filius. how declined, N. 10, d, L. xi. Finite Verbs, 15, e (page 4), 51 (page 14), 56, a (page 16), N. 117. fio, N. 88, L. Ixi, A. 44. INDEX. 3 5 First Conjugation, N. 65-78 ; Synopsis, N. 78, L. vii-xxv, A. 28, 29; Deponent Verbs, L. xxxii, A. 37; First Periphrastic Conj., N. 82, a, L. Ix, A. 39, a. First Declension of Nouns, N. 9, L. i, viii, A. 1. First and Second Declensions of Adjectives, N. 24, a, L. iv, A. 10, 11. for, expr. by Dative, N. 129; by pro, N. 129, b. fore and forem for futurus esse and essem, N. 84, d\ fore ut with Subj. for Fut. Inf. Pass., N. 181, a, R. Fourth Conjugation, N. 65-77, L. xli, A. 35, 36; Deponent Verbs, L. xlii, A. 37. Fourth Declension, N. 20, 21, L. xxxv, A. 8. Frequentative Verbs, N. 98, e. fretus, with Abl., N. 151, h. fruor, with Abl., N. 151, a. fungor, with Abl., N. 151, a. Future Tense, 17, a (page 4) ; Indicative, N. 60, 61, 1, 68, c, 73, c ; trans, by Present form, N. 168, a ; Imperative, N. 70, 75, &, c ; Infinitive, N. 71, c, 76, c, 191, r. ; sub- stitute for Fut. Inf. Pass., N. 76, c, 181, a, R. ; Fut. Inf. Act. without esse, N. 189, e, 199, 2 ; Fut. Inf. in Deponent Verbs, N. 80, a ; Fut. Participle, {active) N. 58, a, 72, h ; {passive) N. 58, 6, 77, b. Future Perfect Tense, 17, a (page 4), N. 60, 61, 1, 68,/, 73, d\ trans, by Present /orwi, N. 168, a. g (with s, forming x), N. 1 (3), 6, 12, a. gaudeo, N. 81, A. 38. Gender, 5 (page 1) ; general rules, (by mean- ing) 18, 19 (page 23), N. 3 ; {by eliding) N. 4. Exceptions {by ending), — First Dec, N. 9, c ; Second Dec, N. 10, g ; Third Dec, N. 19, a, b ; Fourth Dec, N. 20*; Fifth Dec. , N. 22, b. Gender of an Infinitive, Phrase, or Clause, 36 (page 10), 19, c, 2 (page 23) ; of an Indeclinable Noun, 19, c, 1 (page 23) General Facts and Useful Hints, N. 195- 199. Genitive, 20 (page 24) ; endings in the Five Declensions, N. 6; ending in -ii or -i, N. 10, e ; general use, N. 119, L. v ; of Posses- sion, N. 120, L. v; of Quality, N. 121, L. Ixx ; of Value, N. 121, a; Partitive, N. 122, 123; Subjective and Objective, N. 123, b, 124, L. Ixiii ; with Adjectives, N. 124, L. Ixiii ; with Yerhs of remembering arndforgetting, N. 125, L. Ixiii ; after sum, limited noun omitted, N. 126, a, L. Ivi ; expr. by Neuter of Poss. Pron., N. 126, R. ; equivalent to Eng. composed of, N. 126, 6, L. Ivi ; with Impersonal Verbs, N. 127 ; with causa or gratia, N. 128, L. xl ; with pridie and postridie, N. 128, r. ; with potior, N. 151, a, R. ; position, N. 193, 2. genius, how declined, N. 10, d. Gerund, N. 59, a, 72, c, 190 ; L. Ixxiii. Gerundive, N. 58, b, 77, b ; uses, N. 189,/, 190, a, L. Ixxiii ; without esse, N. 199, 2. gratia, with Genitive, N. 128. h, a breathing, 4, b (page 17), 11, b, r., c, r. (page 20), N. 95, a. hie, N. 49 and r. 1, 114, c, L. li, A. 24. Hints on Translation, N. 200. Historical Tenses, N. 171 ; Present, N. 168, b, L. Ixvi ; Perf. , N. 61, b ; Historical Infini- tive, N. 167, L. Ixxi. Hortatory Subjunctive, see Subjunctive. hortor, inflection, A. 37. [See Deponent Verbs.] i final, quantity, N. 8 (7) ; i short in Supine, of eo, N. 87, a ; -i in Abl., N. 17, 6, 26 ; -i or -e in Abl., N. 17, b, 26, c, d, 28. ibi . . . ubi, N. 195, 8. idem, N. 49, L. li, A. 24. Idus, N. 20*, 161, 3. ille, N. 49, and r. 1, 114, b, L. Ii, A. 24. -im in Ace Sing., N. 17, c. Imperative Mode, 15, d (page 4), 20 (page 7), N. 57, c, 163 ; Tenses, N. 63, c, 169 ; forma- tion, N. 70, 75 ; die, due, fac, fer, N. 79, 5 ; Imperative Sentences, 44, c (page 13), N. 100. [See Commands.] Imperfect Tense, N. 60, 61, 2; formation, (Indicative) N. 68, 6, 73, 6, (Subjunctive) 69, b, 74, a. impero, with Dat., N. 131, b, Caution, 197, 1, L. Ixvi; with Subj., N. 179, d; L. Ixvi. Impersonal Verbs and Verbs used Imperson- ally, 26 (page 8), N. 92, 93, L. Ixiv ; exam- ples, N. 198 ; inflection, A. 47 ; used with the Gen., N. 127; used with the Dat., N. 134, L. Ixiv, Ixvi ; with Clause as Subject, N. 188, L. Ixiv, Ixv. [See licet and oportet.] in, as prefix, N. 99, 1, 2; with Ace. and Abl., N. 95, c, L. xxxix. Inceptive Verbs, N. 98, d. incipio, as Pres. of coepi, N. 91, 1. inde . . . unde, N. 195, 8. Indeclinable Adjectives, N. 42, c, 43, e. Indeclinable Nouns, gender of, 19, c, 1 (page 23), N. 3. Indefinite Pronouns, N. 52, 116, L. liv, A. 27- [See under aliquis, siquis, nequis; etc.] 20 306 INDEX. Independent Case, 8, d (page 2), 52 (page 14). Indicative Mode, 15, a (page 3), N. 57, a, 162; Tenses, 17 (page 4), N. 60, 61,63, a; for- mation of tenses, N. 68, 73 ; special force of Fut., Fut. Perf., and Pres. (Historical), N. 168 ; in Conditional Sentences, N. 174, 175 ; in Indirect Discourse, N. 187, R. 2. Indirect Discourse, N. 166, 186, 187, L. Ixxv- Ixxviii ; laws of Modes and Tenses, N. 187, L. Ixxvi ; general practice, L. lxxvii,lxxviii. Indirect Object, 39, b (page 11), N. 129, L. ix, Ixvi ; position, N. 193, 3. Indirect Questions, N. 177, h-d^ L. Ixxv. inferus, N. 35, L. xxxiv, A. 17, c. Infinitive Mode, 15, e (page 4), 56 (page 16), N. 57, rf ; Tenses, N. 68, rf, 71, 76 ; time de- noted^ N. 173, L, xliii ; Fut. Inf. in Depo- nent Verbs, N. 80, a. Use, as Subject or Object, 36, c (page 10), 53 (page 15), N. 57, d, 165, L. Ivi ; modified by Neut. Adj., N. 109, ft, 126, a, R.; Complementary, N. 165, by L. xix; with Objective as Subject, 56, b (page 16); with Accusative as Subject, N. 166, L. XX ; not used after verbs of asking, urging, etc., N. 166, Caution; Historical Inf., N. 167, L. Ixxi; in Indirect Discourse, N. 166, 186, 187, L. xx, Ixxv-lxxviii. Inflection, 15 (page 22). inquam, N. 91, 2, a; position, N. 193, 6- inter nos, se, etc., N. 53, d, 112, b. interest, with Gen., N. 127, b. interior, N. 34, L. xxxiv, A. 17, b. Interjections, 31 (page 9), N. 97. Interrogative Pronouns, 11, c (page 3), N. 51, 116, L. liii ; position, N. 193, 4. Interrogative Sentences, 44, b (page 13), N. 100, 101. [See Questions.'] Intransitive Verbs, 12 (page 3) ; used in the passive, N. 93, 2, 134, L. Ixvi ; becoming trans, in compounds, N. 87, R., 139, a. Introduction to Latin Lessons, pages 17-25. ipse, N. 49 and r. 3, 114, a, L. li, A. 24. Irregular Comparison of Adjectives, L. xxix, xxxiv ; ending in -er, N. 31, a, A. 16, a ; ending in -lis (six), N. 31, b, A. 16, 6; ending in -dicus, -ficus, -volus, N. 32, A. 16, c; bonus, etc., N. 33, A. 17, a; eiterior, etc. , N. 34, A. 17, b ; exterus, etc. , N. 35, A. 17, c ; dives, juvenis, senex, N. 36. Irregular Verbs, N. 83-90, A. 40-45. [See sum, possum, prosum, fero, eo, fio, volo, nolo, malo] -is, in Ace. pi., N. 6, 17, d, 18, 26. is, ea, id, L. li, A. 24 ; as Dem. Pron., N. 49 and R. 2 ; as Pers. Pron., N. 46. iste, N. 49 and r. 1, L. li, A. 24. it, not expressed, 26 (page 8), 65 (page 15), N. 92, L. Ixiv. i'taque and ita'que, N. 196, 5- -ius, in Gen. Sing., N. 43, a, b, 49, L. xiii. li, A. 11,24. j, consonant form of i, 3 (page 17). jubeo and impero, difference in construc- tion, N. 131, b. Caution, 197, 1, 8, L. Ixvi. Jupiter, declined, A. 7. jusjurandum, N. 23, b. juvenis, how compared, N. 36, b. juvo, with Acc; N. 131, 6, Caution. k, rare in Latin , 2 (page 17). Latin Language, 1 (page 17). Latin Lessons, pages 27-148. let, as a sign of a Command, etc., 20 (page 7), N. 164, c. libet, with Dat., N. 134, R. licet, N. 93, 1, c ; with Dat., N. 134, r., 197 2, 3, L, Ixiv; inflection, A. 47. Liquids, 4, a (page 17). Locative Case, 20, R. (page 24), N. 159. m changed to n, N. 1 (5). magis, N. 37, 39 ; in malo, N. 90, A. 45. magnopere, compared, N. 39. major natu, N. 36, b, L. xlix. malo, irr. verb, N. 90, L. Ixii, A. 45. malus, N. 33, A. 17, a. Manner, how expressed, N. 150, L. xlix. maxime, N. 37, 39. may, how expr. in Latin, N. 197, 2, 3, L. Ixiv. memini, N. 91, 2; with Gen., N. 125, L. Ixiii, A. 46. meridies, N. 4, r. 5, 22, b. mens, N. 48, L. xi, A. 23. mille, N. 43, e, 123, c, L. xlvi, A. 20, c. minor natu, N. 36, &, L. xlix. miseret, with Gen., N. 127, a. Mixed Stems (Third Dec), N. 18, L. xvii, A. 6. Mode, defined, 15 (page 3). [See under In- dicative, Subjunctive, etc.] modo, provided, with Subj., N. 183, d, moneo, inflection, A. 30, 31. Months (names of), really Adjectives, N. 161, a. multum, multo, as Adverbs, N. 39, a. multus, N. 33, A. 17, a. must, how expr. in Latin, N. 82, b, 197. 2, 5^, L. Ix, Ixiv. Mutes, 4, d and r. (page 17). INDEX. 807 natu, N. 36, b, L. xlix. ne, in negative Wishes, N. 176, Caution; in neg. Commands, N. 178, 1, 2 ; in neg. Purposes, N. 179, -ne, in Questions (single), N. 101, a, 195, 3, L. liii ; -ne ... an, N. 101, b, 177, d. ne . . . quidem, N. 193, 5, 195,' 2. nego, for dico non, N. 199, 5. neque (nee) . . . neque (nee), N. 195, 8. nequis, N. 52, b, c, L. liv, A. 27. neuter, N. 43, b, L. xiii, A. 11. Neuter Nouns, general law of decl., N. 8 (3); ending in -e, -al, -ar, N. 16, R., 17, b. no, how expr. in Latin, N. 101, R. nocetur, inflection, A. 47. noli, in neg. Commands, N. 178, 2, b. nolo, N. 90, L. Ixii, A.45. Nominative, 8, a (page 2), 45 (page 13), 20 (page 24), N. 102, a, 118 ; how formed in the Five Declensions, N. 7 ; variety in for- mation in Third Dec, N. 12-15, b, 16, a, ft, R. nonne, use, N. 101, a, L. liii. non solum . . . sed etiam, N. 195, 8. nos, for ego C editorV we "), N. Ill, a. no^ter, N. 48, L. 1, A. 23. nostrum, nostri (Gen. pf.), diff. in use, N. 123, b. Notes, on Latin Etym^ iogy, pages 149-187 ; on Latin Syntax^ pages 188-233. novi, with Pres. meaning, N. 91, r., A. 46t. Nouns, 3 (page 1), N. 3 23. [See under First, Second, etc., Declerislovis.} nuUus, N. 43, b, L. xiii, A. 11. num, use, N. 101, a, 177, d, L. liii, Ixxv. Number, of Nouns and Verbs, 7 (page 1), 22 (page 7), 51 (page 14). Numeral Adjectives [see also Cardinal, Oj"- dinal, and Distributive Adjectives, and unus, duo, tres, mille], 9, b (page 2), N. 41, 42, 43, L. xlv, A. 19, 20 ; do not take Part. Gen., N. 123, a. Numeral Adverbs, N. 44, A. 19. O final, quantity in decl., N. 8 (7)' ob, as prefix, N. 99, 1. Object, Direct and Indirect, 39 (page 11). Objective, 8, c (page 2) ; as Adv., 54 (page 15) ; as Subject of Infin., 56, b (page 16); Ob- jective Genitive, N. 124, L. Ixiii. Obliviscor, with Gen., N. 125, L. Ixiii. Odi, N 91, 2, L. Ixiii, A. 46. oportet, N. 92, Caution, 93, 1, c, 197, 2, 3, . L. Ixiv. opus, with Abl., N. 147, a. Oratio Obliqua, see Indirect Discourse, Order of words in a Latin Sentence, N 198, 193. Ordinal Adjectives, 9, b (page 2), N. 41,42, a, L. xlv, A. 19. O si, use, N. 176. ought, how expr. in Latin, N. 82, 6, 197, 3. par, inflection, A. 14, a. Participles, 23 (page 7), 47 (page 13), N. 58, 108, 189, L. xliv ; time denoted, 23, r. (page 8), N. 189, a; formation, N. 72, 77 ; how compared, N. 30, a; of Deponent Verbs, N. 80, 6, L. xliv; how best trans., N. 189, rf; in Abl. Abs., N. 157, L. lix. Partitive Genitive, N. 122, 123, L. xlvi ; how to express all of us, the top of the moun- tain, etc., N. 123, d, e. Parts of Speech, 2 (page 1), 14 (page 22). parvus, N. 33, A. 17, a. Passive Voice, 14 (page 3), 46, c (page 13). Past Tense, 17, a (page 4). paterfamilias, etc., N. 23, c. patior, with Ace. and Inf., N. 197, 8. pelagus, gender, N. 4, R. 3. Penult, and its accent, 13, ct, b, and r. 2 (page 21). per, as prefix, N. 40, d, 99, 1 ; with Ace. of Indirect Agent, N. 151, Caution. Perfect Tense, 17, a (page 4) ; Stem, N. 67, 79 ; Definite and Aorist, N. 61, 3, 62 ; forma- tion, (Indicative) N. 68, d, 73, d, (Sub- junctive) N. 69, c, 74, b, (Infinitive) N. 71, b, 76, 6 ; V dropped, N. 79, 4 ; Redupli- cated, N. 79, 6; of lego, verto, etc., N. 79, 7 ; with Pres. meaning, N. 91, 2 and r. ; Participle, N. 58, 6, 77, a, 80, r. 1, 157, R. 1, (in Deponents) with active meaning, N. 80, R. 1, 157, R. 1, 189, c. Periphrastic Conjugations, N. 82, L. Ix, A. 39. Person, 6 (page 1), 22 (page 7), 51 (page 14), N. 117, d. Personal Endings, N. 54, 2, 64. Personal Pronouns, 11 (page 3), N. 46, L. 1, A. 21 ; usually omitted, N. Ill ; Third Person, how supplied, N. 46, 114, 2; position, N. 193, 8. peto, with a (ab), and Abl.,N. 141, r. 2, 199,4. Phrase, 43 (page 12), N. 104 ; as Subject, 36, e (page 10). Place, N. 158, 159, L. xxxix, Iv. Pluperfect Tense (in Eng., Past Perfect ^ 17, a, page 4), N. 60, 61, 4, 68, e, 69, d, 73, d, 74, b. plus, N. 27, 122. b, L. xlvii, A. 15, a ; plus, minus, etc , with other cases instead of Abl.. N. 154. b. 308 INDEX. poenitet, with Gen., N. 127, a. Positive Degree, defined, 10 (page 2). Possession, how expr. , 48 (page 13), 20 (page 24) ; by Gen., N. 120, L. vj by Dative, N. 136, L. Ixvii. Possessive Pronouns, N. 48, 113, L. 1, A. 23 ; used as Nouns, N. 113, a, 126, a, r. possum, N. 85, 1, L. xix, A. 41. posterus, N. 35, A. 17, c. postquam, posteaquam, with Indie, N. 184, Caution. postridie, with Gen., N. 128, r. postulo, with a (ab) and AbL, N. 141, r. 2, 199, 4. Potential Mode, 15, h (page 3), 18 (page 5). potior, inflected, A. 37 ; with Abl., N. 151, a, L. xlii; with Gen., N. 151, a, R. Predicate, 35, 6, 37 (page 10), N. 102, 6, 103 ; Pred. Noun and Adj., 37, R. and d (page 11), 46, a, 6, (page 13), N. 107 and r., 108, L. vi. Prefixes, N. 40, d, 99. Prepositions, 29 (page 9) ; with Ace. and Abl., N. 95, L xxxix ; as Adverbs, 29, r. (page 9), N. 95 ; cum omitted, N. 150, a, r. ; fre- quent position, N. 193, 7 ; in and sub, N. 95, c, L. xxxix. Present Tense, 17, a (page 4), N. 60, 61, 1; Stem, N. 54, 1, 65, 67; formation of the Present, {Indie.) N. 54, 3, 68, a, 73, a; {Suhj.) N. 69, a, 74, a,{Imper. ) N. 70, 75, a; {inf. ) N. 71, a, 76, a ; time expr. hy Pres. Inf., N. 173; Pres. Participle, N. 58, a, 72, a ; no Pres. Partic. in sum, N. 84, c, 157 ; Historical Present, N. 168, b, L. Ixvi. Preteritive Verbs, A. 46t. Price, how expr., 54, 9 (page 15) ; N. 151, c. Principal Clauses, 41 (page 12). pridie, with Gen., N. 128, r. Primary, or Principal Tenses, N. 171. Principal Parts of Verbs, N. 66 ; of Impersonal Verbs, A. 47. prior, N. 34, L. xxxiv, A. 17, b. priusquam, with Indie, and Subj., N. 184, c, L. Ixxii. pro (or prod), as prefix, see prosum. Prohibitions, how expr., N. 178, Caution 2. Pronominal Adjectives, 9, a (page 2). Pronouns, 11 (page 3), N. 45-53, 111-116, L. 1-Uv ; position, N. 193, 4. [See the various classes of Pronouns, — Personal, Relative, etc.] Pronunciation of Latin, 7-9 (pages 18, 19). propior, N. 34, L. xxxiv, A. 17, b; with Dat. or Ace, N. 132, a. prosum, N. 85, 2, A. 41, a. Protasis, N. 174. pugnatur, inflection, A. 47. Purpose, expr. by Dat , N. 137, L. Ixvii ; by a Phrase, N. 137, a; by the Subj., N. 164, rf, 179, L. xl, xlviii ; expr. injive ways, N. 180, L. Ixxiv. qu = c, N. 1 (1). qua, as an Adverb, N. 94, 2. quaero, with a (ab), de, e (ex), and Abl., N. 141, R. 2, 199, 4. Quality, expr. by Gen.,N. 121, 152, a; by Abl., N. 152 and a, L. Ixx. quam with Superlative, N. 40, c ; omitted (Abl. with Comparatives), N. 154, L. Ixviii. quamquam, with Indie, N. 183, Caution. quamvis, with Subj., N. 183, c. Quantity, 10 (page 20) ; Rules, 11, 12 (pages 20, 21). [See also Vowels, long and short.] -que, Enclitic, N. 195, 3; force in quisque, etc., N. 53, c. Questions {single and double), Direct, N. 101, a, b, L. liii, liv, Ixxv; Indirect, N. 177, d, N. Ixxv ; implying a doubt^ N. 164, 6, 177, a. qui (Relative), N. 50, L. lii, A. 25. qui in clauses of Purpose, Result, Cause, and Concession, N. 179, a, 181, c, 182, c, 183, b, 197, 6, L. lii, Ixv, Ixix, Ixxi. • quia, with Indie, N. 182, a. quicumque, N. 52, d. quidam, N. 52, d. quin, with Subj., N. 181, d, 199, 1, L. Ixv. quis (qui), Interrogative, N. 51, L. liii, A. 26; Indefinite, N. 52, L. liv, A. 27; how diff. from uter, N. 51, Caution, 195, 7- quisque, N. 52, d\ with Superlatives, N.53| b, L. liv. qui vis, N. 52, d. quo for ut, N. 179, b. quo . . . eo, the . . . the, N. 155, b. quod, with Indie , N. 182, a, d ; with Subj., N. 187,/. quod (id quod, quae res), N. 115, b. quominus, N. 179, c, 196. quoniam, with Indie, N. 182, a. quum (cum), with Indie and Subj., (since) N. 182, b, L. Ixix; (althmgh) N. 183, a, L. Ixxi ; {ivhen) N. 184, a, L. Ixxii ; quum . . . tamen, N. 195, 8; quum . . . tum, N. 195, 8. re (red), as prefix, N. 85, 2, 99, 2. Reduplication, N. 79, 6. refert, with Gen., N. 127, 6. Reflexive Pronouns, N. 47, 112, L. 1, A. 22. rego, inflection, A. 32, 83. [See Third Conjugation.] Relative Clauses of Purpose, etc., see qui. INDEX. 309 Relative Pronouns, 11, b (page 3), 50 (page 14), N. 50, 115, L. lii, A. 25 ; not omitted in Latin, N. 115, c ; at the beginning of a sentence, N. 115, d] trans, as, N. 115,/; position, N. 193, 4. Respect, or Specification, see Ablative. respublica, N. 23, a. Result, liow expr., N. 181 ; Result Clauses as Subject, Object, or Appositive, N. 181, a, b, e, L. Ixv. Regular Comparison, see Comparison. rogo, peto, postulo, quaero, used with wliat cases, N. 199, 4. Roman Method of Pronunciation, 8 (page 18). rus, in expressions of Place, N. 159. S changed to r, N. 1 (2), 13, «., 84, b. salve, Imperative, N. 91, 2, b. -SCO, Verb-ending, see Inceptive Verbs. se, as prefix, N. 99, 2. Second Conjugation, N. 65-77, L, xxx, A. 30, 31 ; peculiarities of Perfect and Supine, N. 79, 1; Deponent Verbs, L. xxxii, A. 37; Second Periphrastic Conj., N. 82, 6, A. 39, b. Second Declension of Nouns, N. 10, L. iii, iv, xi, xiii, A. 2. Secondafy Tenses, N. 171. [See Sequence of Tenses.'] Semi-Deponent Verbs, N. 81, L. Ixvii, A. 38. senex, declined, A. 7 ; compared, N. 36, b. Sentences, definition, 33 (page 9) ; Simple, Complex, Compound, 40 (page 11), N. 105; Declaratory, Interrogative, Imperative, 44 (page 13), N. 100 ; Miscellaneous Sentences FOR Translation into Latin, pages 132-135. Separation, see under Ablative and Dative. Sequence of Tenses, N, 172, L. xl, Ixvi. sequor, A. 37. [See Deponent Verbs.'] should, how expr. in Latin, N. 197, 3. si, in Conditions, N. 174, 175 ; for num, N. 177, R. 1. Simple Sentences, 40, a (page 12). Single Questions, see Questio7is. siquis, N. 52, and b, c, L. liv, A. 27. soleo, N. 81, A. 38. solus, N. 43, 6, L. xiii, A. 11. Stem, definition, 16 (page 22) ; Stem-Endings of Nouns, N. 5; Stems of Verbs, N. 54, 1, 67. [See also Present, Perfect, and Su- pine Stems.] sub, with Ace. and Abl., N. 95, c, L. xxxix. Subject, 35, a, 36 (page 10), 45 (page 13), N. 102; its modifiers, 38 (page 11); when omitted, N. Ill ; Subject of an Impersonal Verb, 26 (page 8), N. 92 and Caution, 93; Subject of the Infinitive, 56 (page 16), N. 166. Subjective Genitive, N. 124. Subjunctive, (Eng.) 15, c (page 4), 19 (page 6), (Lat.) N. 57, b, 164 ; Tenses, N. 63, b, 69, 74, 170. Uses, — Expressing : Condition^ N. 164, a, 174, 175, L. xxi, xxiv, Iviii ; Wish, N. 176, L. Ixi ; Question (implying doubt), N. 164, b, 177, a, {Indirect) N. 164, b, 177, b,c,d,h. Ixxv ; Command, Exhortation, etc., N. 164, c, 178, L. xxvii, xlviii, Ixxvi ; Purjwse, N. 164, d, 166, Caution, 179, L. xl, xlviii; liesult, N. 181, L. Ixv; Cause, N. 182, 187,/, L. Ixix ; Concession, N. 183, L. Ixxi ; Time, N. 184, L. Ixxii ; Indirect Uiscourse, N. 186, 187, L. Ixxv-lxxviii ; " Attracti07i,'' N. 185. Substantive Clauses, 42, a (page 12), N. 188, L. Ixv. sui and suus, N. 47, 48 and Caution, 112, a, L. 1, A. 22, 23. sum, inflection, A. 40; as Copula, N. 55, 103, L. vi, xviii ; peculiarities, N. 84 ; with Pred. Gen., N. 126, L. Ivi ; with Dat. of Poss., N. 135, L. Ixvii; Compounds, with Dat., N. 135, a. sunt, there are, N. 193, 6. Superlative Degree, 10 (page 2); trans, by very, N. 40, b, as possible, N. 40, c ; with quisque, N. 53, b. superus, N. 35, L. xxxiv, A. 17, c. Supine, N. 21, a, 59, 6, 72, d ; stem, N. 67, 79, and 1, 2 ; Use, N. 153, r., 191, L. Ixxiv ; in Fut. Inf. Pass., N. 191, B. Syllables, 6 (page 18) ; long and short, 10, 11, 12 (pages 20, 21); contracted, 11, e (page 21), N. 7, 20, c. Synopsis of Verb, N. 78. Syntax, definition, 32 (page 9) ; Latin Syntax, pages 188-232. t before s, N. 1 (4), 12, b ; in possum, N. 85, 1, A. 41. talis . . . qualis, N. 195, 8. tametsi, see Concession; tametsi . tamen, N. 195, 8. tantus . . . quantus, N. 195, 8. Temporal Clauses, see Time. Tense, definition, 16 (page 4); not always accurately indicating time in Eng. Verbs, 17, Note, 18, 19 (pages 5, 6), N. 168, a ; names and uses of the tenses, (Eng.) 17-21 (pages 4-7), (Latin) N. 60-63, 168-173 ; of Participles, 23, R. (page 8), N. 189, a [see also Present, Imperfect, etc.] ; formation, N. 68-76. [See Secondary Tenses, and Sequence of Tenses.] there is, there are, 55 page 15), N. 193, 6. Third Conjugation, N. 65-77, L. xxxvii, 310 INDEX. xxxviii, A. 32, 33 ; variety of forms, N. 79, 2-8 ; Verbs in -io, N. 79, 3, L. xliii, A. 34 ; Deponent Verbs, L. xl, A. 37. Third Declension of Adjectives, N. 24, 6-28 ; L. xxvi-xxviii, A. 12-15. Third Declension of Nouns (three classes of nouns), N. 11, 18 ; L. xiv-xvii. A, 3-7; Nom. how formed, N. 12, 13, 14, 15, b, 16, a, b; Gender, N. 4, 19, ci, b. Time, {how long) 54, 4 (page 15), N. 142, a, 160, L. xlv; (wheri) 54, 5 (page 15), N. 160, L. xlv ; Dates, N. 161 ; Temporal Clauses, N. 184, L. Ixxii. to, omitted with Eng. Inf., 56, R. (page 16) ; when rendered by Dat., N. 129 ; by ad, N. 129, a. -to. Verb-ending, see Frequentative Verbs. tot . . . quot, N. 195, 8. totus, N. 43, b, L. xiii, A 11. transduco, -mitto, etc., with two Ace, N. 141, c. Transitive Verbs, definition, 12 (page 3). Translation, Hints and Rules, N. 200, 201. tres, N. 43, rf, L. xlv, A. 20, b. -trix. Noun-ending, N. 98, a. tu, N. 46, L. 1, A. 21. turn . . . quum, N. 195, 8. tuus, N. 48, L. 1, A. 23. Two Adjectives, connected by et or -que, N. 195, 6. Two Negatives = an Affirmative, N. 195, 1. U final, quantity, N. 8 (7). ubi, with Indicative, N. 184, Caution. -ubus in Dat. and Abl., N. 20, R. ullus, N. 43, b, L. xiii. A. 11. ulterior, N. 34, L, xxxiv, A. 17, b Ultima, 13, R. 1 (page 22). -ulus, as ending, see Diminutives. una, as Adverb, N. 94, 2. unus, N. 43, a, L. xlv, A. 11. usus (Noun), with Abl., N. 147, a. ut, in Purpose clauses, N. 179 ; = that not, N. 179, e ; in Result clauses, N. 181 ; = as, N. 197, 5 ; = how, N. 177, R. 2 ; omitted, N. 179,/. uter, N. 43, 6, L. xiii, A. 11; how difiF. from quis, N. 51, Caxition, 195, 7, L- liii- utinam, use, see Wish. utor, fruor, etc., with Abl., N. 151, a, L. xiii. utrum . . . an, see V, cons, form of u, 3 (page 17) ; dropped in Perf. Stem, N. 79, 4. Value, how expressed, N. 121, a. vel . . . vel, N. 195, 8. Verbal Nouns, 3, c (page 1), 53 (page 15), N. 57, d, 59. [See Infinitive, Gerund, and Supine."] Verbs, see under Transitive ; Intransitive ; Voice ; Mode ; Tense ; Person ; Number ; Principal Parts; Stems; Conjugations (First, Second, Third, Fourth); Synopsis; Participles; Gerund; Supine; Verbs in -io ; Deponent Verbs ; Semi-Deponent Verbs ; Irregular Verbs ; Defective Verbs; Impersonal Verbs. vereor, inflection, A. 37. vescor, with Abl., N. 151, a. vester, N. 48, L. 1, A. 23. vestrum, vestri (Gen. pi.), how diflF. in use, N. 123, b. veto, with Ace. and Inf., N. 197, 8. vetus, N. 26, c, A. 14, a. virus, gender, N. 4, R. 3. vis, inflection, A. 7 ; -vis, as ending, N. 52, d. vivo, with Abl., N. 151, a. Vocabulary, — Latin-English, pages 269-294 ; English-Latin, pages 295-301 ; Special Vo- cabularies and Examples, pages 259-267. Vocative (Eng. Independent Case, 8, d, page 2), 20 (page 24) ; law of form, N. 8 (1) ; Ex- ceptions, N. 10, c, d (filius, etc.), / (deus), A. 23 (mens); use, N. 145, L. xi. Voice, 14 (page 3), N. 56. volo, N. 89, L. Ixii, E. 45. Vowels, pronunciation (Roman and English Methods), 8, 9 (pages 18, 19) ; quantity, 11, 12 (pages 20,21); vowel long before another vowel • (diei, etc.) N. 22, d, (unius, etc.) N. 43, A. 11, (illius, etc.) A. 24 ; vowel changes, N. 2, (Third Dec.) N. 13, 14, (Fourth Dec.) N. 20, d ; vowel stems (Thiid Dec. of Nouns and Adj.), N. 11, b, 16-18. 26, a,b,c. vulgus, gender, N. 10, g. •W, not in Latin, 2 (page 17). Wish, how expr., N. 176, L. Ixi. with, when expr. by cum, N. 150, a, L. xlix yes, how expr. in Latin, N. 101, R. University Press : John Wilson & Son, Cambridee. **™fffi BOOK IS DtnS ON THF, LAST DATE STABIPED BELOW AN INITIAL FINE OP 25 CENTS WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY WILL INCREASE TO SO CENTS ON THE FOURTH DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY OVERDUE. REC'D LD m 6t>^-8PiVl MAY .h" u "tO T^uG^.T^^'^ J\V3u ■•;a. CIR. WB^^*^ " -^r^far'S^--' 6 0ct'55PW ^CT3 2 1955 1^^ 29May'63Mf -..TO ■-*' ■.\,r-' ■ ^^iuveso^ REC'D J JUL 91963 » 20Noy'633'i LD 21-100m-12,'43 (8796s) bm. t '"^S^wm: YB 00293 M29253 -760 THE UNIVERSITY OF gAUFORNIA LIBRARY